JP6512558B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and executes the special game when it is determined that the special game is to be executed by the determination. .

  BACKGROUND Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine which performs an effect of suggesting a degree of expectation of a jackpot, etc., on the condition that an operation of an operation means such as an operation button is performed at a predetermined timing. For example, according to Patent Document 1, when there is an operation input via the operation button when there is an effect for prompting the player to perform a button operation, in the gaming state, such as generation of future big hit or feature effect There is an effect that suggests a change.

JP, 2014-188056, A

  However, if the mere operation of the operation button as described above is used as an opportunity to execute an effect that indicates the expectation of the jackpot, a change in the gaming state, or the like, the effect may be scarce. Therefore, in order to improve the interest of the game, there is a demand for a gaming machine in which the effect serving as a trigger for suggesting the degree of expectation of the jackpot is not limited to mere operation of the operation button.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game in view of the above background.

A game machine according to the present invention is a game when a first operation means operable by a player, a second operation means operable by the player and different from the first operation means, and a start condition are satisfied. Has a special game determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state in which it is determined that the special game is more likely to be executed than the normal gaming state It is possible to execute game state control means for controlling a game state, an operation effect for urging the operation of the first operation means, and an operation effect for urging the operation of the second operation means, and control to the normal game state When being, it decides the fluctuation production from the regular production decision table which includes the 1st fluctuation production, when being controlled to the aforementioned special game state, includes the 2nd fluctuation production which differs from the aforementioned 1st fluctuation production Production decision for specific A presentation control means for determining the variation effect from Le, from the first position and the second movable means movable in position, is movable control in the second position from said first position said movable means And movable control means for changing the second operation means from the first aspect to the second aspect different from the first aspect,
When the effect control means is executing the second variation effect selected by the effect determination table for specific in the specific game state, the effect control means is selected by the effect determination table for normal in the normal game state The execution of the special game is performed when the execution frequency of the operation effect for prompting the operation of the second operation means is higher than when the first change effect is performed, and it is determined that the special game is to be performed. To move the movable means from the first position to the second position before an operation effect that urges the operation of the second operation means is performed to the movable control means than when it is determined not to be performed The probability is high, and the probability of changing the second operation means to the second mode is high.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

It is a front view of a game machine. FIG. 2 is a partial perspective view of the gaming machine. It is a block diagram of a control means. (A) is a figure showing the big hit determination table for 1st special symbols, (b) is a figure showing the big hit determination table for 2nd special symbols. (A) is a figure showing a special symbol determination table for jackpot win, (b) is a diagram showing a special symbol decision table for small hit, and (c) is a special symbol decision table for lost FIG. (A) is a diagram showing a jackpot gaming control table, (b) is a diagram showing a first jackpot gaming large winning opening opening and closing control table, (c) is a second jackpot gaming large winning opening opening and closing control table (D) is a figure showing the 3rd big hit game winning opening / closing control table for the third big hit. (A) is a figure showing a small hit game control table, (b) is a figure showing a large hit opening opening / closing control table for a small hit game. (A) is a figure showing a game condition data determination table, (b) is a figure showing a game condition determination table. It is a figure showing the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table in a low probability gaming state and a non-time-short playing state. It is a figure showing the special symbol variation pattern determination table in the 1st-30th fluctuation in the high probability gaming state and the time saving gaming state. It is a figure showing the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table in the fluctuation 31-74 times in the high probability gaming state and the time saving gaming state. It is a figure showing the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table in the fluctuation 75-84 times in the high probability gaming state and the time saving gaming state. (A) is a diagram showing a hit determination table for ordinary symbols, (b) is a diagram showing an ordinary symbol decision table, (c) is a common figure variation pattern decision table, (d) is an auxiliary game reference data decision table FIG. 7E is a diagram showing an auxiliary game control table, and FIG. 7F is a diagram showing a second starting opening / closing control table. (A) is a diagram showing the configuration of the special symbol hold storage area of the main RAM 101c, (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit of the special symbol hold storage area, (c) is a normal symbol hold storage area of the main RAM 101c A figure showing composition, (d) is a figure showing composition of each storage part of a usual design reservation storage area. It is a flowchart which shows the main process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the input control processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st starting opening detection signal input process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd starting opening detection signal input processing in a main control board. It is a flow chart which shows winning a prize gate detection signal input processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric power control processing in the main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol memory determination processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot determination process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol determination processing in the main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process in a main control board. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing in the main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing in the main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit game processing in the main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the small hitting game processing in the main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot game end processing in the main control board. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing in a production control board. It is a flow chart which shows timer interruption processing in a production control board. It is a flowchart which shows the middle of the command analysis process in a production control board. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the command analysis process of FIG. It is a flow chart which shows change production pattern determination processing in a production control board. It is a flow chart which shows specific production classification determination processing in a production control board. It is a flowchart which shows production mode setting processing in a production control board. It is a flow chart which shows production input control processing in a production control board. It is a figure which shows a presentation mode determination table. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation production pattern determination table matched with production mode A. FIG. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation production pattern determination table matched with production mode B. FIG. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation production pattern determination table matched with production mode C. FIG. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation production pattern determination table matched with production mode D. FIG. It is a figure which shows the special production kind determination table for determining the classification of each special production for every fluctuation production pattern of production mode A. It is a figure which shows the special production information table which memorize | stores the setting content for every classification of each special production which can be performed in the fluctuation production of production mode A. FIG. It is a figure which shows the special production classification determination table for determining the classification of each special production for every fluctuation production pattern of production mode B. FIG. It is a figure which shows the special production information table which memorize | stores the setting content for every classification of each special production which can be performed in the fluctuation production of production mode B. FIG. It is a figure which shows the special production classification determination table for determining the classification of each special production for every fluctuation production pattern of production mode C. FIG. It is a figure which shows the special production information table which memorize | stores the setting content for every classification of each special production which can be performed in the fluctuation production of production mode C. FIG. It is a figure which shows the special production classification determination table for determining the classification of each special production for every fluctuation production pattern of production mode D. FIG. It is a figure which shows the special production information table which memorize | stores the setting content for every classification of each special production which can be performed in the fluctuation production of production mode D. FIG. It is a figure which shows the specific effect determination table for a low probability gaming state and a non-time-short playing state. It is a figure which shows the specific effect determination table for high probability gaming state and time saving gaming state. It is a figure which shows the specific production vibration speed determination table for loss. It is a figure which shows the big hit and the specific production vibration speed determination table for small hits. It is a figure which shows the specific presentation audio | voice output determination table for loss. It is a figure which shows the specific presentation audio | voice output determination table for big hit, small hit. It is a figure which shows the specific effect image output determination table for loss. It is a figure which shows the jackpot and the specific effect image output determination table for small hits. It is a figure which shows the degree of the jackpot expectation degree of specific production. It is a figure for demonstrating the temporal flow of a fluctuation production. It is a figure which shows the example of a presentation image. It is a figure which shows the example of a presentation image. It is a figure which shows the example of a presentation image. It is a figure for demonstrating the temporal flow of a fluctuation production. It is a figure which shows the example of a presentation image. It is a figure which shows the example of a presentation image. It is a figure for demonstrating the temporal flow of a fluctuation production. It is a figure which shows the example of a presentation image. It is a figure for demonstrating the temporal flow of a fluctuation production. It is a figure which shows the example of a presentation image. (A) is a figure for demonstrating the state of a normal presentation button typically, (b) is a figure for demonstrating the state of the presentation button at the time of specific presentation typically, (c) These are figures for demonstrating typically the state to which the image output and the audio | voice output were performed at the time of specific presentation. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the display result stopped and displayed as a result of a fluctuation display. It is a figure which shows the example 1 of a display of the information displayed on a 1st game information display apparatus, a 2nd game information display apparatus, and a 1st image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example 2 of a display of the information displayed on a 1st game information display apparatus, a 2nd game information display apparatus, and a 1st image display apparatus. (A) is a figure which shows the example 3 of a display of the information displayed on a 1st game information display apparatus, a 2nd game information display apparatus, and a 1st image display apparatus, (b) is a 1st game information display apparatus and a 2nd It is a figure which shows the example 4 of a display of the information displayed on a game information display apparatus and a 1st image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the first half of the example 5 of a display of the information displayed on a 1st game information display apparatus, a 2nd game information display apparatus, and a 1st image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the second half of the example 5 of a display of the information displayed on a 1st game information display apparatus, a 2nd game information display apparatus, and a 1st image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example 6 of a display of the information displayed on a 1st game information display apparatus, a 2nd game information display apparatus, and a 1st image display apparatus. It is a front view of a 1st game information display apparatus. It is a rear view of a 1st game information display apparatus. It is a sectional view of the 1st game information display device. It is a sectional view of the state where the 1st game information display device was disassembled. It is a disassembled perspective view of a 1st game information display apparatus. It is a front view of a 1st display substrate. It is a rear view of a 1st display substrate. It is a rear view of a cover member. It is the schematic which shows the control structure which concerns on a 1st game information display apparatus. It is a front view around the 1st game information display device concerning a modification. It is the schematic which shows the relationship between a covering member and an identification means. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the 1st game information display apparatus which concerns on a modification. It is a front view of the 1st game information display device concerning a modification. It is a rear view of the 1st game information display device concerning a modification. It is a sectional view of the 1st game information display device concerning a modification. It is a sectional view of a state where the 1st game information display device concerning a modification was disassembled. It is a disassembled perspective view of the 1st game information display device concerning a modification. It is the schematic which shows the control structure which concerns on the 1st game information display apparatus which concerns on a modification. It is the schematic which shows the control structure which concerns on the 1st game information display apparatus which concerns on a modification. It is a perspective view from the front of a 2nd game information display device. It is a perspective view from the back of the 2nd game information display device. It is a figure which shows the 1st specific example of the distribution of the operation means which concerns on a fluctuation pattern and a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the 2nd specific example of the distribution of the operation means which concerns on a fluctuation pattern and a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the 3rd example of distribution of the operation means which concerns on a fluctuation pattern and a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the 4th example of distribution of the operation means which concerns on a fluctuation pattern and a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the 5th example and timing chart of distribution of the operation means which concerns on a fluctuation pattern and a fluctuation pattern. It is an animation figure showing that a plurality of operation means are operable. FIG. 14A is a view showing a first specific example related to state transition, and is a view showing a sixth specific example of a fluctuation pattern and distribution of operation means according to the fluctuation pattern. FIG. 17 is a view showing a second specific example of state transition, and a seventh specific example of a fluctuation pattern and distribution of operation means according to the fluctuation pattern. FIG. 18A is a view showing a third specific example of state transition, and is a view showing a variation pattern and an eighth example of distribution of operation means according to the variation pattern. It is a figure which shows the 4th example which concerns on state transition, and a figure which shows the 9th example of distribution of the operation means which concerns on a fluctuation pattern and a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the 5th example concerning state transition. It is a figure which shows the 6th example which concerns on state transition. It is a figure which shows the 7th example concerning state transition. It is a figure which shows the 8th example which concerns on state transition.

Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention (also referred to as “the present embodiment”) will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.
As shown in FIG. 1, in the gaming machine Y, a gaming board mounting frame Y1, a glass door Y2 rotatably supported relative to the gaming board mounting frame Y1, and a gaming area 2A in which gaming balls flow down are formed. And the game board 2 that is present.

  The game board attachment frame Y1 is rotatably supported by an outer frame (not shown) fixed to the island facility of the game arcade, and is detachably attached.

  The glass door Y2 is detachably connected to the game board attachment frame Y1 via the hinge mechanism H at one end side in the horizontal direction, and is supported rotatably around the hinge mechanism H. Therefore, by rotating the glass door Y2 like a door with the hinge mechanism H as a fulcrum, the front surface portions of the game area 2A and the game board attachment frame Y1 can be opened and closed. With the game board 2 closed, the glass door Y2 covers the game area 2A in a visible manner.

  Further, on the other end side of the glass door Y2, a lock mechanism R for fixing the glass door Y2 to the game board mounting frame Y1 is provided. Fixation by the lock mechanism R can be released by a dedicated key.

  The glass door Y2 is provided with a tray 50 for storing a plurality of gaming balls and a launch operation device 3 capable of an operation for launching the gaming balls. The launch operation device 3 is connected to a game ball launcher (not shown) which can shoot game balls toward the game area 2A. In addition, the game ball launch device is provided on the front of the game board mounting frame Y1. The game balls stored in the tray 50 are supplied to the game ball launcher.

  The launch operation device 3 has a base 31 fixed to the glass door Y 2 and a launch handle 32 rotatably provided on the base 31. The gaming ball launcher launches the gaming ball with a strength according to the rotation angle of the launch handle 32 (hereinafter referred to as “game ball launch intensity”).

  In the game area 2A of the game board 2, a frame-shaped decorative frame 29A, an inner rail member 29B having a curved shape, an outer rail member 29C, and a jackpot 8 described later are arranged directly below the game ball The second start port 7 is provided with a guiding member 29D having a guiding path formed on the upper surface.

  The decorative frame 29A is fitted in a substantially central portion of the game board 2. Inside the decorative frame 29A, an image display device 14 formed of a liquid crystal display is fitted. Further, at the inner end portion of the decorative frame 29A, a first effect service device 1701, a second effect service device 1702, and a third effect service device 1703 are provided.

  The inner rail member 29B is disposed outside the decorative frame 29A, and the outer rail member 29C is disposed outside the inner rail member 29B. The game balls fired with a predetermined game ball firing strength rise between the inner rail member 29B and the outer rail member 29C and enter the game area 2A. In the game area 2A, a plurality of nails and a windmill are provided. The game ball entering the game area 2A can flow down in various directions by a plurality of nails and a windmill.

  In the game area 2A, a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) general winning openings 11 are provided. Each general winning opening 11 is provided with a general winning opening detection sensor 11a, and when the general winning opening detection sensor 11a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball .

  Further, on the left side of the decorative frame 29A in the game area 2A, a first winning gate 9 through which the game ball can pass is provided. Further, a second winning gate 10 capable of passing the game balls is provided on the lower right side of the decorative frame 29A in the game area 2A. The winning gates 9, 10 are provided with winning gate detection sensors 9a, 10a for detecting the gaming balls. On the condition that the winning gate detection sensors 9a and 10a detect the game balls, the normal symbol lottery is performed. The normal symbol lottery will be described later.

  At the lower part of the game area 2A, below the image display device 14, there is provided a first starting opening 6 which is invariable and can always enter the ball. The first starting opening 6 is provided with a first starting opening detection sensor 6a that detects a game ball. A first special symbol lottery is performed on the condition that the first starting opening detection sensor 6a detects the gaming ball. The first special symbol lottery will be described later. In addition, when the first starting opening detection sensor 6a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball.

  A variable second starting port 7 is provided immediately below the first starting port 6. The second starting opening 7 is controlled by the second starting opening control device 70 either in the basic mode (closed mode) incapable of winning or in the special mode (open mode) in which winning is possible. The second starting opening 7 is also provided with a second starting opening detection sensor 7a that detects a game ball. A second special symbol lottery is performed on condition that the second starting opening detection sensor 7a detects the gaming ball. The second special symbol lottery will be described later. In addition, when the second starting opening detection sensor 7a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball.

  The second starting opening control device 70 includes a rotatable normal movable piece 70A and a second starting opening opening / closing solenoid 70B as a drive unit for rotating the normal movable piece 70A.

  Normally, the movable piece 70A is formed of a rectangular door member, and normally (except for a predetermined condition being met), stops in a state where the surface is flush with the game area 2A, and the second starting opening 7 is It is closed. The closing of the second starting port 7 by the normally movable piece 70A constitutes a basic aspect of the second starting port 7.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the normally movable piece 70A is pivoted forward about the rotation axis formed at the lower end to open the second starting port 7. The second starting port 7 is controlled in a special mode that can enter the ball. The opening of the second starting port 7 by the normally movable piece 70A constitutes a special mode of the second starting port 7. When the movable piece 70A opens the second starting opening 7, the movable piece 70A protrudes from the game area 2A, and can be guided to the second starting opening 7 by receiving the game balls flowing down.

  The predetermined conditions for the second starting opening control device 70 are to be determined as a normal symbol in the above-described normal symbol lottery.

  On the downstream side of the second winning gate 10, a variable big winning opening 8 is provided. The special winning opening 8 is controlled by the special winning opening control device 80 either in a basic mode incapable of winning or in a special mode in which a prize can be won. The special winning opening 8 is provided with a special winning opening detection sensor 8a for detecting a game ball. When the special winning opening detection sensor 8a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as a winning ball.

  The special winning opening control device 80 is equipped with a special movable piece 80A that can turn and a special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 80B as a drive unit that turns the special movable piece 80A.

  Special movable piece 80A is formed of a rectangular door member, and normally (except for a predetermined condition being met), it stops in a state where the surface becomes flush with game area 2A, and closes special winning opening 8 doing. The closing of the special winning opening 8 by the special movable piece 80A constitutes the basic mode of the special winning opening 8.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the special movable piece 80A is pivoted forward about the rotation axis formed at the lower end to open the special winning opening 8. The special winning opening 8 is controlled in a special mode that can enter the ball. Opening of the special winning opening 8 by the special movable piece 80A constitutes a special mode of the special winning opening 8. The special movable piece 80A protrudes from the game area 2A when the special winning opening 8 is opened, and can be guided to the special winning opening 8 by receiving the game balls flowing down.

  In addition, with the predetermined conditions about big winning a prize mouth control device 80, the 1st special symbol lottery or the 2nd special symbol lottery mentioned above (hereinafter, the 1st special symbol lottery and the 2nd special symbol lottery are put together and the "special symbol lottery" In the above, the jackpot special symbol or the small hit special symbol is determined.

  The first special symbol first display 60, the second special symbol first display 61, the normal symbol first display 62, the first special symbol hold first display 63, the second special on the surface of the game board 2 A symbol holding first display 64 and a normal symbol holding first display 65 are provided. In addition, the display apparatus in which these are provided is called 1st game information display apparatus 59. FIG. In addition, on the surface of the game board 2, the first special symbol reserve second indicator 83, the second special symbol reserve second indicator 84, the normal symbol reserve second indicator 85, the right strike second indicator 87, the second 1 special symbol second display 88, second special symbol second display 89, normal symbol second display 90 are provided. In addition, the display apparatus in which these are provided is called 2nd game information display apparatus 79. FIG.

  The first special symbol first display 60 is a variable display device that displays the result of the first special symbol lottery performed under the condition that the game ball enters the first starting opening 6, the second special symbol first display The vessel 61 is a variable display device that displays the result of the second special symbol lottery performed on the condition that the gaming ball enters the second starting opening 7.

  Whether the first special symbol lottery is a random number value for jackpot determination when the game ball enters the first starting opening 6, and the acquired jackpot random number value is a random number value corresponding to "big hit" It means to judge whether or not. Whether the second special symbol lottery is a random number value for jackpot determination when the game ball enters the second starting opening 7, and the acquired jackpot random number value is a random number value corresponding to "big hit" It means to judge whether or not.

  When the first special symbol lottery is performed, the variation display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol first display 60 based on the lottery result, and the first special symbol representing the result of the first special symbol lottery The stop display of the symbol is performed. That is, the stop display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol first display 60 is notification of the lottery result. The same applies to the second special symbol lottery and the second special symbol first display 61.

  For example, the first special symbol first display 60 and the second special symbol first display 61 each have a plurality of LEDs. In the variable display of each special symbol, for example, a predetermined LED of the corresponding first special symbol first display 60 or the second special symbol first display 61 blinks at a predetermined interval. And in the stop display of a special symbol, the specific LED showing the result of each special symbol lottery lights up.

  The normal symbol first display 62 is a variable display device that displays the result of the normal symbol lottery performed under the condition that the gaming ball passes through the winning gates 9 and 10. In the normal symbol lottery, when the game ball passes through the winning gates 9 and 10, a random number value for hitting determination is obtained, and it is determined whether the obtained random number value for hitting determination is a random number value corresponding to "hit". Process of

  When the normal symbol lottery is performed, the variation display of the normal symbol is performed on the normal symbol first display 62 based on the lottery result, and the stop state of the normal symbol representing the result of the normal symbol lottery is performed. That is, the stop display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol first display 62 is a notification of the lottery result.

  For example, the normal symbol first display 62 has a plurality of LEDs. In the variation display of the normal symbol, for example, a predetermined LED of the normal symbol first display 62 blinks at a predetermined interval. Then, in the stop display of the normal symbol, a specific LED representing the result of the normal symbol lottery is turned on.

  By the way, even if the game ball enters the starting openings 6, 7 during the special symbol variation display or during the special game in which the special winning opening control device 80 operates, the special symbol variation display is performed immediately and the special symbol is displayed. The result of the symbol lottery is not notified. That is, the variable display of the special symbol may be suspended under certain conditions. In the present embodiment, as the fixed condition, an upper limit value is provided for the number that can suspend the variation display of the special symbol. In the present embodiment, the upper limit value is set to "4" for each of the starting ports 6, 7. That is, the right to execute the variable display of the special symbol for each starting opening 6, 7 can be reserved up to four.

  The 1st special symbol reservation 1st display 63 is the number of holdings of the change indication of the 1st special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "the 1st special view fluctuation display") (U1: hereinafter referred to as the "1st special drawing reservation number") Display The second special symbol hold first display 64 is the number of pending changes in the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "the second special view variable display") (U2: hereinafter referred to as the "second special view pending number") Display The first special symbol holding first display 63 and the second special symbol holding first display 64 each have, for example, a plurality of LEDs, and light a predetermined LED according to the number of holdings.

  In addition, the upper limit reserve number is set to 4 similarly about the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as "the common view fluctuation display"), and the number of reservations (G: hereinafter, the number of the common drawing suspension) Is displayed on the normal symbol hold first display 65). The normal symbol holding first display 65 includes, for example, a plurality of LEDs, and lights a predetermined LED in accordance with the common drawing holding number.

  In addition, the gaming machine Y is provided with an effect device for performing various effects. In the present embodiment, the rendering device includes the image display device 14, the sound output device 15, the rendering illumination device 16, and the first rendering service device 1701, the second rendering service device 1702, and the third rendering. It is comprised by the character article apparatus 1703. An image display device 14, a first effect character object device 1701, a second effect character object device 1702, and a third effect character object device 1703 are provided on the game board 2, and the sound output device 15 and the effect illumination device 16 and the glass door Y2 are provided.

  The image display device 14 effects by an image by displaying various still images and moving images. In the present embodiment, a liquid crystal display is used as the image display device 14. However, other types of display devices such as a plasma display and an organic EL display can also be used.

  The first effect product device 1701 includes a first decorative member 17A as a movable member. In addition, the second effect product device 1702 includes a second decoration member 17B as a movable member. In addition, the third effect product device 1703 includes the third decoration member 17C as a movable member. Each of the effect role-effect devices operates the decoration member as the movable member provided to perform effects by the operation. The voice output device 15 produces effects by voice by outputting BGM (background music), SE (sound effect) and the like. The effect illumination device 16 performs an effect by illumination by changing the irradiation direction and light emission color of the light of each lamp.

  As described later, the first decorative member 17A is driven by a solenoid, a motor, or the like included in the first effect product device 1701 under the drive control of the lamp CPU 104a based on the control of the sub CPU 102a. As a result, the first decorative member 17A moves from the “standby position 1” (original position) above the image display device 14 to the “operation position 1-1” at the center of the front surface of the image display device 14 (the Move to the position after movement). Further, the first decorative member 17A moves from the "standby position 1" to the "operating position 1-2" which is the lower position of the front surface of the image display device 14 via the "operating position 1-1". Do. The first decorative member 17A moves from “standby position 1” to “operating position 1-1” and then returns to “standby position 1” or “standby position 1” to “operating position 1” After moving to “operating position 1-2” via “−1”, a moving operation of returning to “standby position 1” via “operating position 1-1” is performed.

  Similarly, the second decorative member 17B is driven by a solenoid, a motor, or the like included in the second effect product device 1702 under the drive control of the lamp CPU 104a based on the control of the sub CPU 102a. Thereby, the second decorative member 17B falls to the left from the "standby position 2" (original position) which is the position on the right side of the image display device 14 with the lower side of the second decorative member 17B as a fulcrum. Move to the “operation position 2” (position after movement) which is the position of the front surface of. When the second decorative member 17B is moved from the "standby position 2" to the "operating position 2", thereafter, the second decorative member 17B is erected on the right side with the lower side of the second decorative member 17B as a fulcrum, to the "standby position 2" (original position). Perform a move operation such as back.

Similarly, the third decorative member 17C is driven by a solenoid, a motor, or the like included in the third effect product device 1703 under the drive control of the lamp CPU 104a based on the control of the sub CPU 102a. Thus, the third decorative member 17C falls to the right from "standby position 3" (original position), which is the position on the lower left side of the image display device 14, with the lower part of the third decorative member 17C as a fulcrum It moves to the “operating position 3” (position after movement) which is the position on the front of the device 14. When the third decorative member 17C moves from the "standby position 3" to the "operating position 3", it then stands up on the left side with the lower side of the third decorative member 17Cc as a fulcrum, and becomes the "standby position 3" (original position) An operation such as returning is possible.
Note that none of the first decorative member 17A, the second decorative member 17B, and the third decorative member 17C are limited to the shapes and operation modes mentioned here.

  In addition, the tray 50 is provided with an effect button device 18 which functions as an input device for performing operations relating to various effects described later.

  The effect button device 18 includes an effect button 18A as an operable "first operation means" and an effect button operation detection switch 18a for detecting a pressing operation on the effect button 18A.

The effect button 18A is in the non-projecting state (FIG. 2 (a)) in which the effect button 18A is in the normal operating position, and in the projecting state (FIG. 2 (b)) in which the effect button 18A protrudes up to the operating position above the non-projecting state. As a state at the time of detecting the pressing operation, it is configured to be changeable to a state of retreating downward from the non-projecting state (FIG. 2 (c)).
In the non-projecting state, the effect button 18 </ b> A is in a state where only the tip end protrudes slightly upward from the peripheral surface of the tray 50.
Further, in the projecting state, the effect button 18A protrudes from the surface around the receiving tray 50 by several times (about 7 to 10 times) above the non-projecting state.
Further, the effect button 18A slightly retreats downward from the surface around the tray 50, and is in a pressed state in which the pressing operation is detected. That is, the effect button device 18 has a structure capable of changing the effect button 18A into the non-projecting state, the projecting state, and the pressed state in which the pressing operation is detected. When the effect button 18A in the non-projecting state or the projecting state is pressed to be in the pressed state, the pressing operation is detected, and thereafter, when the pressing operation is released, the pressing state returns to the non-projecting state.

  The direction in which the effect button 18A moves between the position in the non-projecting state, the position in the projecting state, and the position at which the pressing operation is detected (pressed position) is taken as the advancing / retracting direction of the effect button 18A.

  When the effect button 18A is in a state where a pressing operation is detected, the effect button operation detection switch 18a outputs, to the lamp control board 104, an effect button operation detection signal indicating that a complete pressing operation of the effect button 18A has been detected. Do.

  In addition, when the effect button 18A is in the projecting state, the projecting state detection signal indicating that the projecting state detection switch 18a21 is held at the position (position in the projecting state) where the effect button 18A is maximally projected is the lamp control board 104 Output to

  In addition, the effect button 18A uses a transparent member capable of transmitting light as a housing, and incorporates an LED (not shown). When the LED (not shown) emits light, the light passes through the effect button 18A to the outside, and the effect button 18A is illuminated.

  The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 72, but the effect button 18A can be vibrated (reciprocated) in the vertical direction (back and forth) from the non-projecting state, and the vibration speed is low speed vibration and high speed vibration. There are two stages. It is difficult for the player to visually judge whether the effect button 18A is vibrating or not, and the player can confirm the presence or absence of vibration by touching the effect button 18A. When the player touches the effect button 18A while the effect button 18A is vibrating at a low speed, the player transmits a vibration "Poko ... Poko ..." to the player, and when the effect button 18A is vibrating at high speed, the player When the player touches the effect button 18A, "pocopoco poco poco" and vibration are transmitted to the player.

  Further, at the left end portion of the glass door Y2, an effect lever device 19 functioning as an input device for performing operations relating to various effects described later is provided.

  The effect lever device 19 is provided with an effect lever 19A as an operable "second operation means" and an operation detection switch 19a for detecting an operation of the effect lever 19A. The effect lever 19A has an operating rod that can be held by the player, and is mounted so as to be able to be tilted in the vertical direction, and the operation detection switch 19a detects a tilting operation in the downward direction of the effect lever 19A.

  In the present embodiment, a state in which the operation on the effect button 18A as the "first operation means" or the effect lever 19A as the "second operation means" is referred to as "operation effective state". The sub CPU 102a performs control to execute a predetermined effect by operating the operation unit whose operation is valid in the “operation valid state”. Examples of the “operation valid state” include an “operation valid state” when a predetermined condition is satisfied, in addition to the “operation valid period” including a predetermined period set in advance.

  The effect device executes various effects in accordance with the progress (state) of the game. As the effect, for example, there is a special pattern lottery effect to be performed triggered by the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. The special figure lottery effect is performed in the image display device 14. In the special figure lottery effect, the variable indication of the special effect pattern and the stop indication of the special effect pattern are performed.

  The variation display of the special effect pattern is performed corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol, and the special effect pattern changes for a predetermined time in a predetermined mode. The stop display of the special effect symbol is performed corresponding to the stop display of the special symbol (hereinafter, when the variable display of the special effect symbol and the stop display are collectively referred to as "special effect symbol display"). In the stop display of the special effect symbol, the special effect symbol is stopped for a predetermined time in a predetermined mode representing the result of the special symbol lottery.

  The special effect design is, for example, three lines of special decorative symbols Z1 to Z3 (for example, “1” to “9” arranged in the left side, center and right side of the display area 140 of the image display device 14 etc. It consists of a decorative symbol representing numbers. In the variation display of the special effect design, the specially decorated symbols in each row move from the top to the bottom (variation display) as if the reels are rotating. In addition, the aspect of the fluctuation display of a special production pattern is not restricted to this. In addition, during the variable display of the special effect design, various effect images such as a background image and an object image such as a character, a movie and the like are displayed according to the result of the special symbol lottery.

  On the other hand, in the stop display of the special effect design, the above-mentioned three columns of specially decorated symbols stop display in the left, center and right areas of the display area 140 of the image display device 14 or the like. The arrangement of the specially decorated symbol on a predetermined effective line (for example, the central horizontal line in the display area 140) when the stop display of the special effect symbol is performed represents the result of the special symbol lottery.

  In addition to the special figure lottery effect, roulette effect to be performed triggered by the normal symbol lottery described later, special game effect to be performed when the big hit game is executed, and the variation display of the special symbol or the special game for a predetermined period Various effects such as demonstration effects performed in an internal standby state (so-called, customer waiting state) are performed.

  Control means 100 for controlling the progress of the game is provided on the back of the game board 2 and the glass door Y2. The control means is composed of a main control board 101, an effect control board 102, a payout control board 103, a lamp control board 104, an image control board 105, a power supply board 107, a game information output terminal board 108 and the like.

(Internal configuration of control means)
Next, the control means 100 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The power supply substrate 107 is provided with a backup power supply composed of a capacitor, and supplies a power supply voltage to the gaming machine Y, monitors a power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine Y, and when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value, A power failure detection signal is output to the main control board 101. When the power failure detection signal goes high, the main CPU 101a becomes operable, and when the power failure detection signal goes low, the main CPU 101a stops operation. The backup power supply is not limited to the capacitor, and may be, for example, a battery, and the capacitor and the battery may be used in combination.

  The main control board 101 controls the basic operation of the game. The main control board 101 includes a main CPU 101a, a main ROM 101b, and a main RAM 101c. The main CPU 101a reads a program stored in the main ROM 101b based on input signals from various detection sensors, timers (crystal oscillators), etc., and performs arithmetic processing related to gaming, and directly controls various control devices and display devices. Then, a predetermined command or the like based on the result of the arithmetic processing is transmitted to the effect control board 102, the payout control board 103 or the like. The main RAM 101c functions as a work area of data at the time of arithmetic processing of the main CPU 101a.

  On the input side of the main control board 101, the first start opening detection sensor 6a, the second start opening detection sensor 7a, the special winning opening detection sensor 8a, and the first winning gate detection via an input port (not shown). The sensor 9a, the second winning gate detection sensor 10a, and the general winning opening detection sensor 11a are connected. Each detection sensor outputs a detection signal to the main control board 101 when the game ball is detected.

  On the output side of the main control board 101, a second start opening opening / closing solenoid 70B for operating the ordinary movable piece 70A of the second start opening controller 70 via an output port (not shown), and a special winning opening control A special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 80B for operating the special movable piece 80A of the device 80 is connected. The main control board 101 outputs control signals for controlling the respective solenoids to the second start opening / closing solenoid 70B and the special winning opening / closing solenoid 80B.

  In addition, on the output side of the main control board 101, a first special symbol first display 60, a second special symbol first display 61, and a normal symbol first display 62 via an output port (not shown). The first special symbol hold first display 63, the second special symbol hold first display 64 and the normal symbol hold first display 65 are connected. The main control board 101 outputs display control signals for controlling the respective display devices to the respective display devices 60 to 69.

  Furthermore, a game information output terminal board 108 is connected to the output side of the main control board 101 via an output port (not shown). The main control board 101 outputs information on a predetermined game (hereinafter referred to as game information) to the game information output terminal board 108 as an external signal.

  A game information display device is connected to the game information output terminal board 108. The game information output terminal board 108 outputs an external signal to the game information display device and the hall computer. The gaming information display device is provided on the gaming machine Y, and can display predetermined gaming information based on the predetermined gaming information (external signal) described above.

  The effect control board 102 includes a sub CPU 102 a, a sub ROM 102 b, and a sub RAM 102 c. The effect control board 102 is communicably connected to the main control board 101 in one direction from the main control board 101 to the effect control board 102. The main control board 101 transmits a predetermined command to the effect control board 102 based on the processing relating to the game, and the effect control board 102 receives the predetermined command.

  The effect button operation detection switch 18 a and the effect lever operation detection switch 19 a are connected to the input side of the effect control board 102 through the lamp control board 104.

  When the effect button 18A is pressed (pressed) and the operation detection position is reached, the effect button operation detection switch 18a outputs, to the lamp control board 104, a effect button operation detection signal indicating that the effect button 18A has been pressed. Do. The lamp control board 104 outputs the effect button operation detection signal input from the effect button operation detection switch 18 a to the effect control board 102.

  When the effect lever 19A is tilted, the effect lever operation detection switch 19a outputs, to the lamp control board 104, an effect lever operation detection signal indicating that the operation for tilting the effect lever 19A has been performed. When the effect lever operation detection signal is input, the lamp control substrate 104 outputs the effect lever operation detection signal to the effect control substrate 102.

  The sub CPU 102a is configured to output a command output from the main control board 101, a rendering button operation detection signal output from the rendering button device 18, a rendering lever operation detection signal output from the rendering lever device 19, a timer (crystal oscillator). Based on the input signal etc., the program stored in the sub ROM 102b is read out to perform arithmetic processing, and based on this arithmetic processing, a command for controlling the effect is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105. . The sub RAM 102c functions as a work area of data at the time of arithmetic processing of the sub CPU 102a.

  The payout control board 103 performs firing control for firing the gaming ball and payout control for paying the gaming ball to the player. The payout control board 103 includes a payout CPU 103a, a payout ROM 103b, and a payout RAM 103c, and is bidirectionally communicably connected to the main control board 101 and the power supply board 107.

  The touch sensor 32a and the knob 32b of the firing volume are connected to the input side of the payout CPU 103a. The touch sensor 32 a is mounted within the firing handle 32. When a player or a store clerk or the like touches the firing handle 32, the touch sensor 32a detects that a person has touched the firing handle 32, and transmits a firing handle detection signal to the payout control board 103. The firing volume knob 32 b is connected to the firing handle 32. The knob 32b of the firing volume rotates in conjunction with the firing handle 32, and detects the rotation angle.

  In addition, the payout control board 103 is connected to the firing solenoid 41 via the power supply board 107 on the output side. The payout control board 103, when receiving the firing handle detection signal from the touch sensor 32a, permits energization of the firing solenoid 41.

  Then, when the firing handle 32 is operated to change the rotation angle of the firing handle 32, the gear connected to the firing handle 32 is rotated, and the knob 32b of the firing volume connected to the gear is rotated. A voltage corresponding to the rotation angle of the launch handle 32 detected by the knob 32 b of the launch volume is applied to the launch solenoid 41.

  When a voltage is applied to the firing solenoid 41, the firing solenoid 41 operates in response to the applied voltage. As described above, the payout control board 103 controls the energization of the firing solenoid 41 based on the information on the firing handle detection signal from the touch sensor 32a and the input signal from the firing volume knob 32b to fire the gaming ball.

  In the present embodiment, the reciprocating velocity of the emission solenoid 41 is set to about 99.9 (times / minute) from the frequency based on the output period of the crystal oscillator provided in the emission device 4. Since one gaming ball is fired each time the firing solenoid 41 reciprocates, the number of gaming balls fired per minute is about 99.9 (pieces / minute).

  Further, on the output side of the payout control board 103, the payout drive unit 51 of the payout device 5 for paying out a predetermined number of gaming balls from the storage tank (not shown) is connected. The payout CPU 103a reads out a predetermined program from the payout ROM 103b based on the award ball request signal transmitted from the main control board 101 and performs arithmetic processing, and controls the payout device 5 to give the predetermined gaming ball to the player. Pay out. At this time, the payout RAM 103c functions as a work area of data at the time of calculation processing of the payout CPU 103a.

  The lamp control board 104 is provided with a lamp CPU 104a, a lamp ROM 104b, and a lamp RAM 104c, similarly to the above-mentioned boards. On the output side of the lamp control board 104, the effect lighting device 16 and the effect product device 17 are connected.

  The lamp CPU 104 a controls the light emission of the effect illumination device 16 based on a command related to effect control transmitted from the effect control board 102 (hereinafter referred to as “effect control command”) and emits light of the effect illumination device 16. Perform drive control on the motor to change the direction. In addition, the lamp CPU 104a performs drive control on a solenoid or a motor that operates the effect product device 17 based on the effect control command. Furthermore, the lamp CPU 104a causes the LED 1821d of the drive control and effect button device 18 for the electric motor 18b to move the effect button 18A of the effect button device 18 between the normal operation position and the special operation position based on the effect control command. Control the light emission.

  The effect button operation detection switch 18 a and the effect lever operation detection switch 19 a are connected to the input side of the lamp control board 104.

  The lamp control board 104 outputs the input detection signal to the effect control board 102 when the effect button operation detection signal from the effect button operation detection switch 18 a and the effect lever operation detection signal from the effect lever operation detection switch 19 a are input. . That is, the lamp control board 104 relays the effect button operation detection signal and the effect lever operation detection signal between the effect control board 102 and the effect button device 18 and the effect lever device 19.

  The image control board 105 generates an image signal relating to at least an image such as a moving image or a still image to be displayed on the image display device 14, and outputs the image signal to the image display device 14 and an audio output device 15. An audio generation unit 105C that generates an audio signal related to the above and outputs the audio signal to the audio output device 15, and an integration unit 105A that controls the image generation unit 105B and the audio generation unit 105C in an integrated manner.

  The general control unit 105A of the image control board 105 is provided with a general CPU 105Aa, a general ROM 105Ab, and a general RAM 105Ac in order to perform image display control by the image display device 14.

  The central CPU 105Aa is connected to the central ROM 105Ab in which a control program and the like are stored, and a control program necessary for the operation of the central CPU 105Aa is read out. When the overall CPU 105Aa receives a command related to effect control transmitted from the effect control board 102, it instructs the image generation unit 105B to display an image to be displayed on the image display device 14 based on the command, and causes the sound generation unit 105C to A voice instruction to be output from the voice output device 15 is issued.

  The general control RAM 105 Ac functions as a work area of data at the time of arithmetic processing of the general control CPU 105 Aa, and temporarily stores data read from the general control ROM 105 Ab.

  Further, the general control ROM 105Ab is configured by a mask ROM, a program for control processing of the general control ROM 105Ab, a display list generation program for generating a display list, an animation pattern for displaying animation of effect patterns, animation scene information, etc. Is stored.

  This animation pattern is referred to when displaying the animation that constitutes the specific content of the effect by the image, and the animation pattern is associated with the animation scene information, the display order of each animation scene, and the like. The animation scene information includes weight frame (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), parameters for drawing (sprite display position, display magnification, transmittance, etc.), drawing method And various information such as a duty ratio as a parameter of the brightness of the image display device 14.

  The image generation unit 105B includes a VDP (Video Display Processor) 105Ba which is an image processor, a CGROM 105Bb storing image data, and a VRAM 105Bc having a frame buffer for temporarily storing drawing data generated from the image data. Have.

  The VDP 105Ba is connected to the CGROM 105Bb in which image data is stored, and generates drawing data as an origin of a video signal (RGB signal or the like) based on the image data based on an instruction from the general CPU 105Aa. The image data is an image (frame) to be displayed on the image display device 14, for example, a material-like image representing an individual image such as a decorative symbol image or a background image such as a landscape, a character, and a speech constituting a background of the decorative symbol. It is data. On the other hand, drawing data is synthetic data representing an image of an entire frame configured by combining (superposing) individual images.

  The CGROM 105Bb comprises a flash memory, an EEPROM, an EPROM, a mask ROM, etc. and compresses and stores image data (sprite, movie) etc. consisting of a set of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (eg 32 × 32 pixels) ing. The pixel information is composed of color number information for specifying a color number for each pixel and an alpha value indicating transparency of the image.

  Further, the CGROM 105Bb stores, without compressing, palette data in which color number information specifying a color number is associated with display color information for actually displaying a color. Note that the CGROM 105Bb may have a configuration in which only a part of the image data is compressed without being compressed. Also, various known compression methods such as MPEG 4 can be used as the compression method of the movie.

  Further, the image generation unit 105B has a crystal oscillator. The crystal oscillator outputs a pulse signal to VDP 105 Ba. The VDP 105 Ba divides this pulse signal to generate synchronization signals (horizontal synchronization signal, vertical synchronization signal) for synchronization with the image display device 14, and outputs the synchronization signals to the image display device 14.

  Next, details of various tables stored in the main ROM 101b will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIGS. 4A and 4B illustrate an example of the jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination is to constitute a special symbol lottery, and is to determine whether or not to execute a jackpot game advantageous to the player.

  FIG. 4A is a table (jackpot determination table for a first special symbol) to be referred to in jackpot determination performed in response to entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 6. On the other hand, FIG. 4B is a table (big hit determination table for the second special symbol) referred to in the big hit determination performed in response to the ball entering the second starting opening 7 of the gaming ball.

  In each jackpot determination table, a jackpot determination table (hereinafter referred to as a “low probability jackpot determination table”) to be referred to when the jackpot probability described later is relatively low (set to a standard value) And a jackpot determination table (hereinafter referred to as a "high probability jackpot determination table") to be referred to when the state is relatively high (set higher than the standard value).

  In each jackpot determination table, the jackpot determination value and the determination result are uniquely associated and stored. As will be described later, by matching the jackpot determination random number obtained upon the game ball entering the first starting opening 6 or the second starting opening 7 with the jackpot determination table, "big hit", "small Either "hit" or "loss" is determined.

  When the result of the jackpot determination is "big hit", after the stop display of the special symbol indicating the result, the jackpot game with the opening of the big winning opening 8 is executed. If the result of the jackpot determination is "small hit", after the stop display of the special symbol indicating the result, a small hit game with the opening of the big winning opening 8 is executed. When the result of the jackpot determination is "loss", neither the jackpot game nor the small hit game is executed.

  In addition, in the change production as special figure lottery production, reach production in order to raise the sense of expectation to the jackpot winning of the player is done as it mentions later. As the reach effect, for example, the above special figure decorative symbol is pseudo-stopped in two regions among the left region, the central region, and the right region of the display region 140 of the image display device 14 during the variable display of the effect pattern. (A part of the effect pattern performs pseudo stop display), and if the special figure decorative pattern stops on the predetermined effective line in the remaining one area, it becomes an array of special figure decorative patterns representing winning of the big hit There is a reach effect in which a state (so-called "reach state") occurs. If the result of the jackpot determination is "loss", even if the effect specific state of the reach state is reached, there is no change in the result of the jackpot determination being "loss".

  After the reach state occurs in the reach effect, there are cases where a specific effect (so-called “super reach effect”) for enhancing the expectation of the jackpot win is performed or not performed. In addition, in reach production, reach condition does not necessarily occur. That is, there is also a reach effect in which a predetermined effect is performed to increase the player's expectation for the jackpot win without the reach state occurring. In addition, if the result of the big hit judgment is "big hit", reach production is performed basically in almost all cases.

  Fig.5 (a)-FIG.5 (c) are figures which show an example of a special symbol determination table. Special symbol judgment is what constitutes a special symbol lottery, and the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed on the first special symbol first display 60 and the second special symbol first display 61 based on the result of the jackpot judgment It is to determine (the stop display mode of the special symbol).

  The special symbol determination table is roughly divided according to the result of the big hit determination (big hit, small hit and lost). That is, FIG. 5 (a) is a table referred to in the special symbol determination when the result of the big hit determination is "big hit", and FIG. 5 (b) is the case where the result of the big hit determination is "small hit" A table referred to in the special symbol determination, and FIG. 5C is a table referred to in the special symbol determination in the case where the result of the big hit determination is “loss”.

  Each of these tables is further divided by the type of the starting opening (the first starting opening 6 or the second starting opening 7) in which the game ball serving as a trigger for the special symbol determination is entered.

  In each special symbol determination table, the special symbol determination value and the special symbol to be stopped and displayed are uniquely associated and stored. As will be described later, the special symbol determination random number obtained with the game ball entering the first start opening 6 or the second start opening 7 is displayed in a stopped state by checking the special symbol determination table on the special symbol determination table. Special symbols are determined. As the identification information of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed, special figure stop symbol data and a special effect symbol specification command are set.

  The special figure stop symbol data is used in the processing in the main control board 101, and the special effect symbol designating command is transmitted to the effect control board 102 and used in the process in the effect control board 102. The special effect symbol designation command is generated at the start of the variable symbol display of the special symbol (during the special symbol storage determination process of step S310) and transmitted to the effect control board 102.

  The special effect symbol designation command is used to identify the special symbol display device (the first special symbol first display 60 or the second special symbol first display 61) in which the special symbol according to the special symbol determination is stopped and displayed. It consists of 1-byte MODE data and 1-byte DATA data for identifying a special symbol to be stopped and displayed.

  As for the special effect symbol designation command, if the MODE data is "E3H", it indicates that the stop display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol first display 60, and if the MODE data is "E4H", The second special symbol first display 61 indicates that stop display of the special symbol is performed. In addition, the thing of the special production design specification command of MODE data "E3H" is the "1st special production design specification command", the thing of the special production design specification command of MODE data "E4H" is the "2nd special production design specification command. "

  FIG. 6A is a diagram showing an example of the jackpot game control table used when controlling the jackpot game.

  The jackpot game control table stores conditions for controlling the jackpot game. As a condition for controlling the jackpot game, an opening time which is a period from the start of the jackpot game to the first opening of the big winning opening 8, and the opening transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the opening start Designated command, type of table used to control the opening and closing of the big winning opening 8, ending time which is a period from the end of the last opening of the big winning opening 8 to the end of the big hit game, and ending An ending specification command to be transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start time is set. The conditions for controlling these jackpot games are associated with the type of jackpot, that is, the type of special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data). That is, at the time of the jackpot game, which control condition to use is selected based on the type of the special symbol.

  6 (b) to 6 (d) are diagrams showing an example of the big winning opening / closing control table for the big hit game used when controlling the opening and closing of the big winning opening 8. As shown in FIG. FIG. 6 (b) is a table referred to in the first jackpot game constituting the jackpot game, and FIG. 6 (c) is a table referred to in the second jackpot game constituting the jackpot game, FIG. ) Is a table referred to in the third jackpot game constituting the jackpot game.

  The condition for controlling the opening and closing of the big winning opening 8 at the time of the big hit game is stored in the big winning opening and closing control table for the big hit game. As a condition for controlling the opening and closing of the big winning opening 8, the round number (R) which is the number of the round game, the special electric power which is the opening of the big winning opening 8 in each round game (operation of the big winning opening control device 80) The operation number (K), the opening time of the big winning opening 8, and the closing time (operation time, non-operation time) are set.

  FIG. 7A is a view showing an example of the small hitting game control table used when controlling the small hitting game.

  The small hit game control table stores conditions for controlling the small hit game. As a condition for controlling the small hit game, it is transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the opening start time, which is a period from the start of the small hit game until the first opening of the big winning opening 8 is performed. Opening designation command, the type of table used to control the opening and closing of the big winning opening 8, the ending time which is the period from the end of the last opening of the big winning opening 8 to the end of the small hitting game, Also, an ending designation command to be transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start of ending is set. The conditions for controlling these small hitting games are associated with the kind of small hitting, that is, the kind of special symbol (special pattern stop symbol data). That is, at the time of the small hitting game, which control condition is used is selected based on the type of the special symbol.

  FIG. 7B is a view showing an example of a small winning opening / closing control table for small hitting game used when controlling the opening and closing of the large winning opening 8. As shown in FIG. A condition for controlling the opening and closing of the large winning opening 8 at the time of the small hitting game is stored in the small winning game large winning opening opening and closing control table. As conditions for controlling the opening and closing of the special winning opening 8, the round number (R), the special power operation number (K) which is the opening of the large winning opening 8 (operation of the special winning opening control device 80), and the big winning The opening time of the mouth 8 and the closing time (operating time, non-operating time) are set.

  FIG. 8A is a view showing an example of the game condition data determination table to be referred to when determining the game condition data. The game condition data is identification information representing game conditions to be newly set (varied) after the jackpot game when the jackpot is won. The game condition data is associated with the winning probability of the jackpot at the special symbol determination and the result of the special symbol determination (special drawing stop symbol data). That is, the gaming condition data determination table is divided by the winning probability (low probability gaming state / high probability gaming state) of the big hit, and in each of the divided tables, the type of special symbol (special figure stop symbol data) and the gaming Condition data is uniquely associated with and stored.

  The game condition data is composed of 2-byte data. The upper byte of the game condition data represents the winning probability of the jackpot newly set by the jackpot winning. If it is "01H", the winning probability of the big hit is set to the high probability (high probability gaming state) after the big hit game, and if it is "00H", the winning probability of the big hit after the big hit game is low probability (low probability game State). On the other hand, the low-order byte of the game condition data represents the start-up winning ability that is newly set by the jackpot winning. If it is "01H", the starting opening prize easiness is set to be easy (time saving gaming state) after the big hit game, and if it is "00H", the starting opening prize easiness is difficult after the big hitting game (non time short gaming state Set to).

  FIG. 8B shows an example of the game condition determination table. The game condition determination is to determine the game conditions that are newly set (at the time of the big hit game end processing) when the big hit game is finished. As described above, in the present embodiment, the winning probability of the jackpot and the start-up winning ability are set as the game conditions.

  The game condition determination table includes game condition data and each game condition, ie, ON / OFF of a flag (a high probability flag and a time reduction flag) indicating the game condition and the number of times of variation display of the special symbol executable by the game condition. (Xa, Ja: hereinafter referred to as “number of executable times”) are uniquely associated and stored. The number of executable times of the special symbol display means the prescribed number of times of the variable display of the special symbol according to the newly set game condition. In addition, the number of executable times of this special symbol display corresponds to the number of judgments of the jackpot judgment.

Thus, in the gaming machine Y, when the main CPU 101a executes the big hit game, after the big hit game is over, it is advantageous for the player compared to the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state and non-short time playing state). Set a specific gaming state (high probability gaming state and time saving gaming state).
In this specific gaming state (high probability gaming state and time saving gaming state), the main CPU 101a ends the specific gaming state triggered by the determination count of the big hit determination (number of executable times of special symbol display) reaching 84 times. There is. Thus, the gaming machine Y functions as a so-called "ST machine".

(Variation pattern determination table of special symbol)
FIGS. 9-12 is a figure which shows the example of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table referred when determining the aspect (henceforth "a special figure fluctuation pattern") of the fluctuation display of a special symbol.

FIG. 9 is a view showing an example of a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table to be referred to when determining the special figure fluctuation pattern in the low probability gaming state and the non-time-short gaming state.
In FIG. 10, when the special pattern fluctuation pattern is determined when the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol in the high probability gaming state and the time saving gaming state when the first jackpot or the second jackpot is won is the first time to the 30th. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table referred.
FIG. 11 is when determining the special figure fluctuation pattern when the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol in the high probability gaming state and the short time gaming state when the first jackpot or the second jackpot is won is 31st to 74th. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table referred.
FIG. 12 is the case of determining the special figure fluctuation pattern when the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol in the high probability gaming state and the short time gaming state when the first jackpot or the second jackpot is won is 75th to 84th. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table referred.
In addition, it is referred when winning in the special figure fluctuation pattern decision table or the small hitting which is referred when deciding the special fluctuation pattern in high probability game state and non time saving game state when winning in the 3rd big hit The description of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table is omitted.

  As described later with reference to FIG. 25, the main CPU 101a refers to the game condition determination table (FIG. 8B) of the main ROM 101b, and confirms the current gaming state determined by the high probability flag and the time saving flag ON / OFF. And if the current gaming state is a high probability gaming state and a time saving gaming state, check the number of times of fluctuation display of the special symbol, and according to the gaming state or the gaming state and the number of times of fluctuation, the special figure fluctuation Select a pattern determination table.

  When the main CPU 101a determines that the current gaming state is the low probability gaming state and the non-short time gaming state (normal state), the main CPU 101a refers to (selects) the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table of FIG.

  Further, when the main CPU 101a is currently in the high probability gaming state and the time saving gaming state, and determines that the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is 1 to 31 times, it refers to the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table of FIG. Do.

  Further, when the main CPU 101a is currently in the high probability gaming state and the time saving gaming state, and determines that the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is 31 to 74 times, refer to the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table of FIG. Do.

  Further, when the main CPU 101a is currently in the high probability gaming state and the time saving gaming state, and determines that the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is 75 times to 84 times, refer to the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table of FIG. Do.

  Further, when the main CPU 101a is currently in the high probability gaming state and the non-time-short playing state, or when the player wins a small hit, the main CPU 101a refers to a predetermined special figure fluctuation pattern determination table not shown.

  The special figure fluctuation pattern determination table is the special figure stop symbol data that reflects the result of the special symbol judgment and the type of the special symbol display device (starting port related to the special symbol display) that operates in the special symbol display, and The number of reservations (U1 or U2), the reach determination value for determining the presence or absence of the reach, and the special figure fluctuation pattern judgment value for determining the special figure fluctuation pattern are stored.

  In the case where the main CPU 101a has special figure stop symbol data “10H” to “17H”, or “20H”, “21H” (big hit, small hit), the gaming ball is the first starting opening 6 or the second starting opening Match the special figure fluctuation pattern determination random number acquired with the opportunity to enter 7 and the special figure fluctuation pattern judgment value (0 to 255) distributed according to the special figure stop data, and compare the special figure fluctuation pattern Decide.

  Alternatively, when the special figure stop symbol data is "18H" or "28H" (loss), the main CPU 101a confirms the number of special figure reservations (U1 or U2) according to the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process. . The main CPU 101a acquires a random number for reach determination, compares it with the reach determination value (0 to 99) according to the number of reserved special views (U1 or U2) and checks the special pattern fluctuation pattern of “no reach” or Or, it is determined whether it is a special figure fluctuation pattern of "loss with reach".

  Although the maximum number of “4” may be stored as the number of special map reservations, when determining whether it is a special pattern fluctuation pattern of “no reach” or a special pattern fluctuation pattern of “reach with loss”. Does not refer to "4" as the number of balls held.

  When the main CPU 101 a determines “no reach”, the acquired random number for the special view change pattern determination is compared with the special view change pattern determination value (0 to 255) distributed according to the “no reach loss”. And determine the special pattern fluctuation pattern.

  When the main CPU 101a determines “reach with loss”, the acquired random number for determining the special pattern fluctuation pattern is compared with the special pattern fluctuation pattern determination value (0 to 255) distributed according to the “reach with loss”. And determine the special pattern fluctuation pattern.

  The main CPU 101a determines the special figure fluctuation pattern by the special figure fluctuation pattern determination (step S313-3) at the time of the start of the fluctuation display of the special symbol (during the special symbol storage determination process of step S300).

  The special figure variation pattern is associated with the determination result of the jackpot determination and the time required for the variation display of the special symbol (hereinafter, referred to as "special figure variation time"). In addition, the special figure fluctuation pattern is a first special figure fluctuation pattern which is an aspect of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol displayed in the first special symbol first display 60, and the second special symbol first display 61 It is distinguished by the 2nd special figure change pattern which is an aspect of the change display of the 2nd special symbol displayed.

  The main CPU 101a generates a variation pattern specification command of the special symbol based on the determined variation pattern of the special symbol, and transmits the variation pattern specification command to the effect control board 102.

  Since the special figure fluctuation pattern is allocated at a predetermined ratio set in advance in each special figure fluctuation pattern determination table, the special figure fluctuation pattern is an expectation (reliability) of a big hit and a specific big hit (for example, The expectation (reliability) of winning to the first jackpot, the second jackpot) is associated.

  The sub CPU 102a of the effect control board 102 determines the contents of the effect based on the special view fluctuation pattern designation command received from the main control board 101, as described later. In the rightmost column of the variation pattern determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 9 to FIG. 12, the effect type of the variation effect determined by the sub CPU 102a is described in association with the special figure variation pattern specification command as a reference ing.

  Here, as the contents of the effect, “pattern fluctuation” means that a plurality of special effect patterns are variably displayed in the image display device 14.

  In addition, “reach” is a variation mode that gives a player a sense of expectation of a jackpot such that a part of the combination of special effect symbols for reporting a jackpot is temporarily stopped, and the other special effect symbols are changed. Means For example, when a combination of 3-digit special effect designs of "777" is set as a combination of special effect symbols notifying a big hit, the two special effect designs are temporarily stopped at "7", and the remaining special effects are displayed. It means the aspect that the effect pattern is changing. Note that “temporary stop” refers to a mode in which the special effect pattern is swayed or deformed small to show the player that the special effect pattern is changing.

  In the effect classification of the fluctuation effect shown in FIG. 9, “symbol fluctuation 1” to “symbol fluctuation 3” are “losing” as the judgment result of the big hit judgment without reaching the reach mode after the plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed. It is the fluctuation production which reports. The "symbol fluctuation 1" is a "shortened fluctuation" performed in a very short time of 4 seconds. The "symbol variation 2" and "symbol variation 3" are variation effects performed in the special pattern variation time of 8 seconds and 12 seconds, respectively.

  In addition, “normal reach” shown in FIG. 9 stops and displays two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) of the special effect pattern with the same numerical value (for example, 7) after changing the symbol displaying the plurality of special effect symbols. It is the fluctuation production which does reach production.

  In addition, “normal reach → story reach” illustrated in FIG. 9 is a fluctuation effect that is executed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is the third jackpot or the small jackpot. This “normal reach → story reach” is a normal reach where two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) of special effect symbols are stopped and displayed with the same numerical value (for example, 7) after changing the symbols that variably display a plurality of special effect symbols. Do, then, do a story reach as a reach effect with a higher expectation to the jackpot than the normal reach. This story reach makes a trip on a journey to find a dog whose character has appeared in Challenge Reach below and finds a dog at the end, suggesting that the jackpot judgment result is a third jackpot or a small jackpot. It is a reach production consisting of a story of content.

  Further, “symbol variation 2 → challenge reach” shown in FIG. 9 is a variation effect to be executed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is the third jackpot or the small jackpot. In this "symbol variation 2 → challenge reach", after "symbol variation 2", the two symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) of the special effect symbol are stopped and displayed with the same numerical value (for example, 7). Challenge the treasure-hunting game in which the appearing character finds the target item from multiple treasure boxes, and by acquiring the item, the character suggests that the determination result of the jackpot determination is the third jackpot or the small jackpot. The content is challenge reach.

  In addition, “symbol variation 3 → challenge reach” illustrated in FIG. 9 is a variation effect that performs the above-described challenge reach after “symbol variation 3”.

  In addition, “normal reach → super reach” shown in FIG. 9 changes two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) of the special effect pattern with the same numerical value (for example, 7) after changing the symbol displaying the plurality of special effect symbols. It is a fluctuation effect that performs normal reach to stop display, and then performs super reach with a higher expectation for jackpot than normal reach.

  In addition, “normal reach → special reach” shown in FIG. 9 changes two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) of the special effect pattern with the same numerical value (for example, 7) after changing the symbol displaying the plurality of special effect symbols. It is a fluctuation effect that performs normal reach to stop display, and then performs special reach with a higher expectation for jackpot than the above-mentioned super reach.

  In addition, “normal reach → super reach → special reach” shown in FIG. 9 is a change effect that performs super reach after performing normal reach after a symbol change displaying a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable display, and then performs special reach. is there.

As shown in FIG. 9, the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command determined in the case of the first jackpot where the stop symbol data is "10H" is "E6H0AH", "E6H0BH", as can be seen from the special figure fluctuation pattern judgment value. The selection ratio becomes higher as it becomes “E6H0CH”. Similarly, the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command determined in the case of the second jackpot where the stop symbol data is "11H" is "E6H0DH", "E6H0EH", "E6H0FH", as can be seen from the special figure fluctuation pattern judgment value. The selection ratio becomes higher as
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9, the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command determined when the stop symbol data is “18H” is “E6H09H”, “E6H08H” as seen from the special figure fluctuation pattern determination value. The selection ratio becomes lower as “E6H07H”.

  As shown in FIG. 9, when the sub CPU 102a receives "E6H0AH" from the main control board 101 as a variation pattern designation command, "normal reach → super reach" of "variation effect pattern A 034" to "variation effect pattern A 037". Is determined to be executed, and “E6H0BH” is received from the main control board 101 as a variation pattern designation command, “normal reach → special reach” of “variation effect pattern A038” to “variation effect pattern A041” is selected. If it is decided to execute and "E6H0CH" is received from the main control board 101 as a variation pattern designation command, "normal reach → super reach → special reach" of "variation effect pattern A042" to "variation effect pattern A045" Decided to carry out To.

Later, as the variation effects of the effect mode A set in the low probability gaming state and the non-time-short gaming state, the variation effects of “variation effect pattern A 034”, “variation effect pattern A 038”, and “variation effect pattern A 042” will be described.
As you can see from the selection ratio of "E6H0AH", "E6H0BH", and "E6H0CH" described above, the expectation for jackpot of "variation effect pattern A034", "variation effect pattern A038", and "variation effect pattern A042" is described. "Change indication of" Normal reach-Special reach "to be executed when" Substituent effect pattern A034 "of" Normal reach → Super reach "executed by sub CPU 102a and" E6H0BH "received by sub CPU 102a It can be said that the expectation for the jackpot becomes higher as “pattern A038” and “change effect pattern A042” of “normal reach → super reach” executed when the sub CPU 102a receives “E6H0CH”.

  In addition, “design variation 1” to “design variation 3” shown in the variation pattern determination table of FIG. 10 selected in the high probability gaming state and the time saving gaming state have special figure fluctuation time of 2 seconds, 6 seconds, 10 seconds, respectively. These special pattern fluctuation times are “pattern fluctuation 1” to “symbol fluctuation 3” shown in the fluctuation pattern determination table of FIG. 9 selected in the low probability gaming state and the non-time-short gaming state. The special map fluctuation time at the time of execution is shorter than 4 seconds, 8 seconds, and 12 seconds. In addition, the selection ratio of "Special figure fluctuation pattern 30" for executing "symbol fluctuation 1" whose special figure fluctuation time is as short as 2 seconds has the special figure fluctuation time shown in the fluctuation pattern determination table of FIG. It is set higher than the selection ratio of the “special figure fluctuation pattern 00” for executing the “symbol fluctuation 1” of the second.

  In addition, “design variation → special character reach 1” to “design variation → special character reach 6” shown in FIG. 10 are special characters that appear only in mode B described later, after symbol variation in which a plurality of special effect designs are variably displayed. It is the fluctuation production which does the special character reach due to. The details of the special character reach will be described later with reference to FIGS. 65 to 67.

  Further, in the effect type of the change effect shown in FIG. 11, “symbol change 1” to “symbol change 3” is a change effect in which a plurality of special effect symbols are changed and displayed, and a change effect corresponding to the special pattern change time The presentation time of is different.

  In addition, “symbol change → attack reach 1” to “symbol change → attack reach 6” shown in FIG. 11 is an attack reach in which different characters attack each other after symbol change in which a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner. It is a fluctuating effect that The details of the attack reach will be described later with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69.

  Further, the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 does not have a special drawing fluctuation pattern for executing a fluctuation effect with a very short time such as a special drawing fluctuation time of 2 seconds or 6 seconds. As shown in FIG. 12, "Janken directed (Loss 1)" to "Janken directed (Losing 6)", "Janken directed (Win 1)" to "Janken directed (Win 3)", "Janken directed (Aiko 1) "~" "Janken effect (Aiko 3)" is a stop display of two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) of the special effect design with the same numerical value (eg, 7) after changing the symbol which displays a plurality of special effect patterns. It is a variation effect that “Janken effect” of the content that two characters (friend character, opponent character) perform Janken.

"Junken effect (Losing 1)" to "Janken effect (Loving 6)" are fluctuation effects executed when there is a loss as a determination result of the big hit determination. Also, “Junken effect (win 1)” to “Janken effect (win 3)” are fluctuation effects executed when the first jackpot or the second jackpot is determined as the judgment result of the jackpot determination. Also, "Junken effect (Aiko 1)" to "Janken effect (Aiko 3)" are fluctuation effects executed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is "third jackpot" or "small hit".
The details of the "Junken effect" will be described later with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71.

  In addition, the starting opening winning combination designation command and the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command are set corresponding to each special figure fluctuation pattern. The starting opening winning combination designation command corresponds to the special view fluctuation pattern determined by the first prior determination or the second prior determination, and is transmitted to the effect control board 102 after the first prior determination or the second prior determination. The special figure fluctuation pattern designation command corresponds to the special figure fluctuation pattern determined by the special figure fluctuation pattern determination, and is transmitted to the effect control board 102 after the special figure fluctuation pattern determination.

  The special figure fluctuation pattern specification command identifies the special symbol display device (the first special symbol first display 60 or the second special symbol first display 61) on which the fluctuation display of the special symbol according to the special symbol determination is performed. 1 byte of MODE data, and 1 byte of DATA data for identifying a special pattern fluctuation pattern. As for the special figure variation pattern specification command, if the MODE data is "E6H", it indicates that the special symbol variation display is performed on the first special symbol first display 60, and if the MODE data is "E7H" The second special symbol first display 61 indicates that the variation display of the special symbol is performed.

  The special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command whose MODE data is "E6H" is called "first special drawing fluctuation pattern specification command" and the special data fluctuation pattern specification command whose MODE data is "E7H" is called "second It is called "special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command".

  The starting opening winning combination designation command is configured of 1 byte MODE data for identifying the type of starting opening, and 1 byte DATA data for identifying a special figure fluctuation pattern. As for the start opening winning combination designation command, if the MODE data is "E1H", it indicates that the gaming ball has entered the first start opening 6, and if the MODE data is "E2H", the second start opening 7 is displayed. Indicates that the game ball has entered. In addition, the thing of the start opening winning combination designation command whose MODE data is "E1H" is the "1st start opening winning combination designation command", the thing of the start opening winning combination designation command whose MODE data is "E2H" is "2nd start opening winning combination designation command" "

  13 (a) to 13 (f) show an example of a table used when controlling an ordinary symbol-based game based on winning on the first winning gate 9 or the second winning gate 10. FIG.

  FIG. 13A shows an example of the hit determination table. The hit determination is to determine whether or not to execute an auxiliary game with the opening of the second starting opening 7. The hit determination is performed based on the hit determination random number acquired based on the passage of the winning gates 9 and 10 of the gaming balls, as described later.

  The hit determination table is divided by the starting hole winning ease. Specifically, the hit determination table is divided into a hit determination table referred to in the non-time minor game state and a hit determination table referred to in the time minor game state.

  In each hit determination table, a hit determination value and a determination result are uniquely associated and stored. By collating the acquired hit determination random number with the hit determination table, either “hit” or “loss” is determined. When the player wins the "hit", an auxiliary game with the opening of the second starting opening 7 is executed.

  FIG.13 (b) is a figure which shows an example of a normal symbol determination table. The normal symbol determination is to determine the normal symbol to be stopped and displayed on the normal symbol first display 62. The normal symbol determination table is divided according to the result of the hit determination (hit and loss).

  In each of the ordinary symbol determination tables, the ordinary symbol determination value and the ordinary symbol to be stopped and displayed are uniquely associated and stored. As will be described later, by comparing the random number for normal symbol determination acquired when the game ball passes through the winning gates 9 and 10 with the normal symbol determination table, the normal symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined. As identification information of a normal symbol to be stopped and displayed, a common figure stop symbol data and a normal effect symbol specification command are set.

  The normal stop symbol data is used in the processing in the main control substrate 101, and the normal effect symbol designating command is transmitted to the effect control substrate 102 and used in the processing in the effect control substrate 102.

  FIG. 13 (c) determines the variation pattern of the normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as "common variation pattern") associated with the time required for the variable display of the normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as "general variation period"). It is a figure which shows the common drawing fluctuation pattern determination table for. The common drawing fluctuation pattern determination table is composed of a common drawing fluctuation pattern determination table referred to in the non-time minor gaming state and a common drawing fluctuation pattern determination table referred to in the time minor gaming state.

  In each table, the common drawing fluctuation pattern determination value and one or more common drawing fluctuation patterns are uniquely associated and stored. As described later, the common drawing fluctuation pattern is determined by checking the common drawing fluctuation pattern determination random number acquired at the timing when the game ball passes through the winning gates 9 and 10 in the common drawing fluctuation pattern determination table. Ru.

  A common drawing fluctuation pattern designation command is set corresponding to the common drawing fluctuation pattern. It is transmitted to the effect control board 102 after the common drawing fluctuation pattern determination. When the effect control board 102 receives the common drawing fluctuation pattern designation command, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is started from now on, and the judgment result of the normal symbol judgment concerning the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is recognized it can.

  The common drawing fluctuation pattern specification command is composed of 1 byte MODE data for identifying the game state concerning the current starting opening winning a prize ease, and 1 byte DATA data for identifying the common drawing fluctuation pattern. There is. As for the common drawing fluctuation pattern designation command, if the MODE data is "D6H", it indicates that it is in the non-time saving game state, and if the MODE data is "D7H", it indicates that it is in the time saving game state.

  FIG. 13D shows an example of the auxiliary game reference data determination table. In this table, data (auxiliary game reference data) to be referred to when performing the auxiliary game is stored. As shown in FIG. 13D, in the auxiliary game reference data determination table, a combination of the current starting opening winning a prize ease and the common drawing stop symbol data is associated with the auxiliary game reference data. That is, the auxiliary game reference data has information on the starting opening winning possibility state when the normal symbol determination is performed and the result of the normal symbol determination.

  FIG. 13E is a view showing an example of the auxiliary game control table used when controlling the auxiliary game.

  The auxiliary game control table stores conditions for controlling the auxiliary game. As a condition for controlling the auxiliary game, it is transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the opening start time which is a period from the start of the auxiliary game to the first opening of the second starting port 7 and the opening start Opening designation command, type of table used to control the opening and closing of the second start opening 7, ending time which is a period from the end of the last opening of the second opening 7 to the end of the auxiliary game, Also, an ending designation command to be transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start of ending is set. The conditions for controlling these auxiliary games are associated with the auxiliary game reference data.

  FIG. 13F is a view showing an example of a second start opening / closing control table for an auxiliary game, which is used when controlling the opening / closing of the second start opening 7. Conditions for controlling the opening and closing of the second starting opening 7 in the auxiliary game are stored in the second starting opening and closing control table for the auxiliary game. As conditions for controlling the opening and closing of the second start opening 7, the general power operating number (D) which is the opening (the operation of the second start opening control device 70) number of the second start opening 7 in the auxiliary game, and (2) The opening time and closing time (operation time, non-operation time) of the start port 7 are set.

(Description of the type of special game)
Here, the special game will be described. In the present embodiment, the special game with the opening of the big winning opening 8 (activation of the big winning opening control device 80) is a "big hit game" which is executed when the "big hit" is won, and a "small hit". It is comprised by the "small hit game" performed when it is elected. The jackpot game is divided into “first jackpot game”, “second jackpot game”, and “third jackpot game” mainly by the difference in opening / closing mode of the big winning opening 8.

  In the jackpot game, a round game with one or more opening of the big winning opening 8 is executed a predetermined number of times. In each round game, the number of times the big winning opening 8 can be opened (hereinafter referred to as the maximum opening number) and the total of the openable time (hereinafter referred to as the maximum opening time) are set in advance. "Can be opened" is because the number of game balls that can enter the large winning opening 8 during one round game is limited (for example, nine). Therefore, even if the special winning opening 8 is not opened the maximum number of times open, the special winning opening 8 may be closed, and the round game may be ended. In addition, even if the maximum opening time has not passed, the special winning opening 8 is closed, and the round game may end. In addition, the maximum opening frequency and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 8 in each round game may or may not be unified in each jackpot game.

(Description of gaming conditions)
Next, the game conditions which become the conditions when the game proceeds will be described. In the present embodiment, the jackpot winning probability and the starting opening winning possibility are set as the game conditions. The game proceeds under the low probability gaming state or the high probability gaming state for the winning probability of the jackpot, and the game progresses under the short time gaming state or the non-short time gaming state for the starting opening ability of the game ball Do. The initial (when the power is turned on) gaming conditions are set to the low probability gaming state and the non time saving gaming state, and are referred to as the normal gaming state based on the low probability gaming state and the non time saving gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, the low probability gaming state with respect to the jackpot winning probability means that the jackpot winning probability in the jackpot determination is set relatively disadvantageously to the player as 1/350. On the other hand, the high probability gaming state means that the jackpot winning probability is set to be higher than the low probability gaming state, that is, 1/80 which is relatively advantageous to the player. Therefore, when the jackpot winning probability is a high probability gaming state, winning of the jackpot is easier than in the low probability gaming state, and the number of jackpot wins per unit time is relatively large, which is advantageous for the player It can be said that

  The non-time-short game state is a state in which the start-up winning ability is normal. Specifically, in the non-time-saving game state, the time required for the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as a spread map fluctuation time) is set to 15 seconds, and it operates when the player wins a "hit" in the hit determination The total of the activation time of the 2 starting opening control device 70 (the opening time of the 2nd starting opening 7) is set to 0.2 seconds or 5.1 seconds, the probability of winning a hit in the hit judgment for a normal symbol is 1 / It says that it is set to 50. It should be noted that the "total opening time" means that the second starting opening 7 may be opened several times for one hit, and a game ball can be won for one hit. This is because the number is limited, and when the gaming ball wins the number, it closes without waiting for the opening time to elapse.

  On the other hand, with the time saving game state, the opening time of the second start port 7 per unit time (the operation time of the second start port control device 70) is longer than the non-time short playing state. Refers to the gaming state where it is easy to become an open mode. Due to the relatively high starting opening winning a prize ease, the number of executable times of the second special symbol determination per unit time increases. Under the same jackpot winning probability, as the number of executions of the second special symbol determination per unit time increases, the number of jackpot wins per unit time inevitably increases, so the time saving game status is non-short It can be said that the player is more advantageous than the gaming state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the time-saving game state, the spread map fluctuation time is set to 3.0 seconds, and the total maximum opening time of the second starting opening 7 is set to 5.2 seconds. The probability of winning is set to 1/5. That is, all the components of the starting opening winning a prize ease are set to the player more advantageously than the non-time saving game state. In the time-saving game state, the second starting opening 7 is opened twice through the 1.0 second closing (interval), but there is no such closing, and may be opened only once. Also, closure may be provided multiple times.

  In the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the starting openings 6 and 7, three balls can be obtained, but the player discharges the game ball by operating the appropriate release handle 32. However, the number of game balls possessed by the player is likely to decrease. However, when in the time saving game state, entering the second start opening 7 is easier than in the non-time saving game state, so it is possible to suppress a decrease in the number of game balls possessed by the player. That is, also from the viewpoint of the number of gaming balls possessed by the player, the time saving game state is advantageously set for the player as compared with the non-time saving game state.

  In this manner, the type of jackpot game (first to third jackpot game) by the jackpot win, and the game condition (low probability gaming state or high probability gaming state, and non-short play state) newly set after the jackpot game Or combination with time saving game state is determined. In view of this, the type of the substantial jackpot (the type of jackpot based on the degree of profit enjoyed by the player) is the type of jackpot game to be executed and the game condition (newly set after the jackpot game is over) It can be said that the combination with the gaming state). Therefore, based on the combination of the type of jackpot game led by the jackpot and the gaming conditions after the jackpot game separately from the type of jackpot based on the special figure stop symbol data, that is, based on the type of profit enjoyed by the player Type of jackpot can be classified.

  The jackpot to play the jackpot game (the first jackpot game) of 16R (round) round number by winning the jackpot, and then to set the high probability gaming state and time saving gaming state as "first jackpot", called the jackpot The jackpot is called the "second jackpot" to make the jackpot to run the jackpot game ("second jackpot game") of the number of rounds 4R (round) by winning, and then set the high probability gaming state and time saving gaming state A jackpot that causes the jackpot to execute a jackpot game ("3rd jackpot game") with 2R (round) number of rounds and is then set to a high probability gaming state and a time saving gaming state is referred to as a "third jackpot".

  When the jackpot is won, the normal gaming state is set when the jackpot game starts regardless of the state before the jackpot game. That is, during the jackpot game, the low probability gaming state and the non time saving gaming state will be. On the other hand, even if the player wins a small hit, the game conditions do not change. That is, the gaming state at the time of the small hitting is continued as it is during the small hitting game and after the small hitting game.

(Main processing of main control board)
The main processing of the main control board 101 will be described with reference to FIG.

  When power is supplied from the power supply substrate 107 to the main CPU 101a, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 101a, and the main CPU 101a performs the following main processing.

  First, in step S10, the main CPU 101a performs an initialization process. In this process, the main CPU 101a reads an activation program from the main ROM 101b in response to power-on, and initializes each storage area of the main RAM 101c. The main CPU 101a transmits an initialization designation command to the effect that the initialization processing has been performed to the effect control board 102 in step S700 described later.

  In step S20, the main CPU 101a updates the special figure fluctuation random number for determining the special figure fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display of the special symbol composed of the random number for reach determination and the special pattern fluctuation random number. .

  In step S30, the main CPU 101a updates an initial value random number including a jackpot determination initial value random number, a special symbol determination initial value random number, and a collision determination initial value random number. Thereafter, the processes of step S20 and step S30 are repeated until predetermined interrupt processing is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of main control board)
The timer interrupt process of the main control board 101 will be described with reference to FIG. The clock pulse generation circuit provided on the main control board 101 generates clock pulses at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds), whereby the following timer interrupt processing is executed.

  First, in step S100, the main CPU 101a saves information stored in the register of the main CPU 101a in the stack area.

  In step S110, the main CPU 101a performs a special symbol change time update process, a special symbol stop time update process, an opening time update process, an opening / closing time update process for the special winning opening 8, etc. And, time control processing is performed to update the auxiliary gaming timer counter that performs update processing of fluctuation time of normal symbol, update processing of stop time of normal symbol, and update processing of open / close time of second starting port 7 and the like.

  In step S120, the main CPU 101a updates the specific random number constituted by the jackpot determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, and the hit determination random number.

  In step S130, the main CPU 101a performs an initial value random number update process of updating the jackpot determination initial value random number, the special symbol initial value random number, and the collision determination initial value random number.

  In addition, about update of various random numbers, a random number is updated by adding "1" to the random number counter provided for every classification of random numbers. Various random numbers have random number ranges. The random number range is from “0” to the maximum value defined for the random number. Then, when updating the random number, if the random number indicated by the random number counter is the maximum value of the random number range, the random number counter is returned to "0" without adding "1" and the respective random number values are newly calculated from the initial value random number at that time. Update to

  At step S200, the main CPU 101a performs an input control process. In this process, the main CPU 101a performs an input control process to determine whether or not a new valid signal has been transmitted from a predetermined detection sensor. The details will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In step S300, the main CPU 101a displays the first special symbol first display 60, the second special symbol first display 61, the first special symbol hold first indicator 63, the second special symbol hold first indicator 64, And, special figure electric power control processing (special symbol system processing) for controlling the special winning opening control device 80 (control of the special symbol system device) is performed. The details will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In step S400, the main CPU 101a controls the normal symbol first display 62, the normal symbol retention first display 65, and the second starting opening control device 70 (controls the normal symbol system device). Perform control processing (normal symbol processing).

  The main CPU 101a loads the value of the data processing routine data in the processing routine control processing (normal symbol system processing), and refers to the branch address from the data processing routine data processing data, and If the processing data = 0, the normal symbol determination whether or not to execute the auxiliary game (the second starting opening 7 is open) based on the common drawing determination information obtained based on the winning on the winning gates 9, 10 Perform normal symbol storage judgment processing including etc., and if the common pattern general processing data = 1, perform normal symbol fluctuation processing when the normal symbol first display 62 is fluctuating based on the normal symbol judgment, If the common drawing common processing data = 2, the normal symbol stop processing is performed when the normal symbol first display 62 is stopped, and if the common drawing common processing data = 3, the second starting opening 7 is Auxiliary to open / close control (operation of second starting port control device 70) Perform the technique processing.

  In step S500, the main CPU 101a performs payout control processing. In this process, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the winning ball counter corresponding to the starting opening (first starting opening 6, second starting opening 7), the special winning opening 8, and the general winning opening 11 exceeds "0". If it exceeds "0", a winning ball request signal indicating the number of winning balls corresponding to each winning opening is transmitted to the payout control board 103. Then, when transmitting a winning ball signal, an updating process is performed in which the winning ball counter relating to the signal is decremented by "1".

  In step S600, the main CPU 101a controls external signal output control data for outputting information about a game as an external signal to an external device such as the gaming information display device 700, a second start opening opening / closing solenoid 70B, and a special winning opening opening / closing solenoid Drive control data for driving the 80B (starting opening opening and closing solenoid driving data and large winning opening opening and closing solenoid driving data), and the first special symbol first display 60 and the second special symbol first display 61 or the first Display control data (special symbol display data, ordinary symbol display data, special symbol suspension display data, ordinary symbols) for displaying a predetermined symbol on the special symbol storage first display 63 or the second special symbol storage first display 64 Perform processing for creating pending display data).

  In step S700, the main CPU 101a performs output control processing. In this processing, first, port output processing for outputting a signal based on the external signal output control data and drive control data created in S600 is performed. Then, in order to light each LED of the first special symbol first display 60, the second special symbol first display 61, the first special symbol hold first indicator 63, and the second special symbol hold second indicator 64. At the same time, a display device output process is performed to output a signal based on the display control data created at step S600. Finally, command transmission processing for transmitting the command set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 101c to another board is also performed.

  In step S800, the main CPU 101a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 101a.

  The input control process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S210, the main CPU 101a determines whether a detection signal has been input from the general winning opening detection sensor 11a, that is, whether or not the gaming ball has entered the general winning opening 11. When the main CPU 101a does not receive a detection signal from the general winning opening detection sensor 11a, the process proceeds to step S220. When the main CPU 101a receives a detection signal from the general winning opening detection sensor 11a, the main CPU 101a adds predetermined data to a general winning opening winning ball counter used for a winning ball and updates the same.

  In step S220, the main CPU 101a determines whether a detection signal from the special winning opening detection sensor 8a has been input, that is, whether the gaming ball has entered the special winning opening 8 or not. When the main CPU 101a does not input a detection signal from the special winning opening detection sensor 8a, the process proceeds to step S230. When the main CPU 101a receives a detection signal from the special winning opening detection sensor 8a, the main CPU 101a adds predetermined data to the special winning opening prize ball counter used for the winning ball and updates the winning combination. The counter value of the round winning counter (C) for counting the number of played balls is added and updated.

  In step S230, the main CPU 101a determines whether the detection signal from the first starting opening detection sensor 6a is input, that is, whether the gaming ball has entered the first starting opening 6 or not. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S240, the main CPU 101a determines whether the detection signal from the second starting opening detection sensor 7a has been input, that is, whether the gaming ball has entered the second starting opening 7 or not. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S250, the main CPU 101a determines whether a detection signal from the winning gate detection sensor 9a or 10a is input, that is, whether the gaming ball has passed through the winning gate 10. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the first starting opening detection signal input process will be described with reference to FIG. In step S231, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not there is a valid detection signal from the first starting opening detection sensor 6a. If there is no valid detection signal, the process is ended, and if there is a valid detection signal, the starting mouth prize ball counter is incremented by one and updated in step S232, and the first starting mouth ball of the main RAM 101c is entered. The first starting opening winning flag is turned ON in the flag storage area.

  In step S233, main CPU 101a determines whether the counter value of the first special figure hold number counter that counts the first special figure hold number (U1) is smaller than 4 (upper limit value). If the main CPU 101a determines that the counter value (U1) is not smaller than 4, the processing ends, and if it is determined that the first special map reservation number (U1) is smaller than 4, the first special image is suspended at step S234. The count value of the number counter is updated by adding "1". Further, in step S234, the main CPU 101a displays the special symbol holding display data indicating the number of holdings in order to update the first special drawing holding number (U1) displayed on the first special symbol holding first display 63. It is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c.

  In step S235, the main CPU 101a selects the special determination information consisting of the random number values indicated by the large hit determination random number counter, the special symbol determination random number counter, the reach determination random number counter, and the special pattern variation pattern determination random number counter. Store in the symbol storage area.

  The first special symbol hold storage area is divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit (see FIG. 14 (a)), and various random numbers are numbers of storage units in which no random number is stored. It stores in order from a small memory | storage part. In each storage unit, an area is divided for each stored random number (see FIG. 14B).

  In step S236, the main CPU 101a performs a first advance determination based on the ball entry into the first starting opening 6 of the gaming ball. Here, the first prior determination will be described.

  Specifically, in the first prior determination, based on the jackpot determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, the reach determination random number, and the special view variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol hold storage area, The first special figure fluctuation pattern is determined. That is, the main CPU 101a determines the first special figure fluctuation pattern as the first prior determination before performing the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process (S313).

  Then, in step S237, main CPU 101a sets a first start opening winning a prize designation command corresponding to the first special view fluctuation pattern determined in the first prior determination in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of main RAM 101c. .

  Next, the second starting opening detection signal input process will be described with reference to FIG. In step S241, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not there is a valid detection signal from the second starting opening detection sensor 7a. If the main CPU 101a determines that there is no valid detection signal, the process ends, and if it determines that there is a valid detection signal, the process proceeds to step S242.

  In step S 242, the main CPU 101 a adds “1” to the start opening prize ball counter to update it, and updates the second start opening entrance ball provision counter by “1” to update it, and the second start opening of the main RAM 101 c. The second starting opening flag is turned on in the winning flag storage area. The second start entrance ball definition counter counts the number of winnings on the second start port 7 in one auxiliary game. This is because, in the present embodiment, the number of balls entered into the second starting opening 7 of the gaming ball for one auxiliary game is limited.

  At step S243, main CPU 101a determines whether or not the counter value of the second special symbol hold number counter that counts the second special view hold number (U2) is smaller than 4 (upper limit value). If the main CPU 101a determines that the counter value (U2) is not smaller than 4, the processing ends, and if it is determined that the second special drawing reservation number (U2) is smaller than 4, the processing moves to step S244.

  In step S244, the main CPU 101a adds “1” to the counter value (U2) of the second special view hold number counter to update it. In addition, main CPU101a, in order to renew the 2nd special figure reservation number (U2) which is indicated in 2nd special symbol reservation 1 indicator 64 in step S244, in order to update the special symbol reservation indication data which shows the reservation number It is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c.

  In step S245, the main CPU 101a selects the special determination information consisting of the random number values indicated by the jackpot determination random number counter, the special symbol determination random number counter, the reach determination random number counter, and the special pattern variation pattern determination random number counter. Store in the symbol storage area.

  In addition, the second special symbol hold storage area is divided into the first storage to the fourth storage (see FIG. 14 (a)), and various random numbers are numbers in the storage where no random number is stored. It stores in order from a small memory | storage part. In each storage unit, an area is divided for each stored random number (see FIG. 14B).

  And main CPU101a performs the 2nd prior determination based on the ball entering to the 2nd starting opening 7 in Step S246. Here, the second prior determination will be described.

  Specifically, based on the jackpot determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, the reach determination random number, and the special view variation pattern determination random number stored in the second special symbol hold storage area in the second prior determination, The second special figure fluctuation pattern is determined. That is, the main CPU 101a determines the second special figure fluctuation pattern as the second prior determination before performing the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process (step S313).

  Then, in step S247, main CPU 101a sets a second start opening prize winning designation command corresponding to the second special view fluctuation pattern determined in the second prior determination in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of main RAM 101c. .

  Next, winning gate detection signal input processing will be described using FIG. In step S251, it is determined whether or not there is a valid detection signal from the winning gate detection sensors 9a and 10a. If the main CPU 101a determines that there is no valid detection signal, the process ends, and if it determines that there is a valid detection signal, the process proceeds to step S252.

  In step S252, main CPU 101a determines whether the counter value of the normal symbol holding number counter that counts the common drawing holding number (G) is smaller than 4 (upper limit value). If the main CPU 101a determines that the counter value (G) is not smaller than 4, the process ends, and if it is determined that the counter value (G) is smaller than 4, the process moves to step S253.

  In step S253, the main CPU 101a adds “1” to the counter value (G) of the common drawing reserve number counter to update it. In addition, main CPU101a, in order to renew the common figure reservation number (G) which is indicated in normal symbol reservation 1st indicator 65 in step S253, the normal symbol reservation indication data which shows the reservation number is designated as main RAM101c Set in the area.

  The main CPU 101a stores the random numbers indicated by the random number counter for hit determination, the random number counter for normal symbol determination, and the random number counter for common pattern variation pattern determination in the normal symbol hold storage area in step S254, and the winning gate detection signal input processing Finish.

  The normal symbol storage area is divided into the first storage to the fourth storage (see FIG. 14 (c)), and various random numbers are stored in the storage having the smallest number among the storages in which the random numbers are not stored. Are stored in order from. In each storage unit, an area is divided for each stored random number (see FIG. 14D).

  Next, special drawing special power control processing will be described using FIG. In step S301, the value of the special figure special power processing data is loaded, and the branch address is referred to from the special figure special power processing data loaded in step S302. The process is transferred to the special symbol special power process data = 1. The process is transferred to the special symbol variation process (step S320). The special pattern special power process data = 2 is transferred to the special symbol stop process (step S330). If the special figure special power process data = 3, the process is transferred to the jackpot gaming process (step S340), if the special figure special power process data = 4, the process is transferred to the small hit gaming process (step S350), the special figure special power process If data = 5, the processing is shifted to jackpot game end processing (step S360). The details will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, special symbol storage determination processing will be described using FIG. First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the variation display of the special symbol is in progress. If the main CPU 101a determines that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, it ends the process, and if it is determined that the special symbol is not being displayed, the process proceeds to step S310-2.

  At step S310-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the second special view reservation number (U2) is one or more. If it is determined that the second special drawing reservation number (U2) is not one or more, the process proceeds to step S310-4, and if it is determined that the second special drawing reservation number (U2) is one or more, the processing proceeds to step S310-3. Transfer the process.

  In step S310-3, main CPU 101a subtracts “1” from the counter value of the second special symbol holding number counter and updates it, and shifts the data stored in the second special symbol holding storage area in step S310-6. A process is performed to shift each data stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit to the previous storage unit.

  For example, the data stored in the fourth storage unit of the second special symbol hold storage area is shifted to the third storage unit of the second special symbol hold storage area. In addition, the data stored in the first storage unit of the second special symbol storage area is shifted to the special symbol common storage area (0th storage unit) common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, The data stored in the 0 storage unit is erased. As a result, the jackpot determination random number value, the special symbol determination random number value, the reach determination random number, and the special image variation pattern determination random number value used in the previous game are erased. Furthermore, the stop symbol data and the game condition data used in the previous game are also deleted from the corresponding storage areas.

  On the other hand, in step S310-4, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the first special map reservation number (U1) is 1 or more. When the main CPU 101a determines in step S310-4 that the first special view reservation number (U1) is 1 or more, the main CPU 101a shifts the process to step S310-5.

  Main CPU 101a subtracts “1” from the counter value of the first special symbol hold number counter in step S310-5 to update it, and in step S310-6, shifts the data stored in the first special symbol hold storage area I do.

  For example, the data stored in the fourth storage unit of the first special symbol storage area is shifted to the third storage unit of the first special symbol storage area. Moreover, the data stored in the first storage unit of the first special symbol storage area is shifted to the special symbol storage area (0th storage unit), and the data stored in the 0th storage unit is deleted. Be done. Thereby, the jackpot determination random number value used in the previous game, the special symbol determination random number value, the reach determination random number, and the special figure fluctuation pattern determination random number value are erased. Furthermore, the stop symbol data and the game condition data used in the previous game are also deleted from the corresponding storage areas.

  In addition, in order to update the number of first special view reservations (U1) or the number of second special view reservations (U2) along with the data shift process (the process of digesting the suspension) in step S310-6, specifically, Sets the first and second special symbol hold display data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c in order to change the display contents of the special symbol hold display devices 23, 24 corresponding to the type of starting opening according to the data. The hold display data includes information on the type of special symbol hold display device and information on the number of special symbol hold (U1 or U2).

  In the present embodiment, the second special symbol holding storage area is shifted in preference to the first special symbol holding storage area in steps S310-2 to S310-6, but the gaming ball is used as the starting opening The first special symbol hold storage area or the second special symbol hold storage area may be shifted in the order of entering the ball, or the first special symbol hold storage area may be shifted prior to the second special symbol hold storage area. You may

  If it is determined in step S310-4 that the first special symbol holding number (U1) is not one or more, the process proceeds to the customer waiting state setting process of steps S319-1 to S319-3. First, in step S319-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the demonstration determination flag “01H” is set in the demonstration determination flag storage area. If the demonstration determination flag "01H" is set in the demonstration determination flag storage area, the special symbol storage determination process is ended, and if the demonstration determination flag "01H" is not set in the demonstration determination flag storage area, The process moves to step S319-2.

  In step S319-2, the main CPU 101a sets a demonstration determination flag "01H" in the demonstration determination flag storage area so that the demonstration designation command is not set many times in step S319-3 described later.

  In step S319-3, the main CPU 101a sets a demonstration designation command in the effect transmission data storage area, and ends the special symbol storage determination process.

  In step S311, the main CPU 101a executes the jackpot determination process based on the data shifted in step S310-6 and newly stored in the zeroth storage unit.

  Here, the jackpot determination process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S311-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether the jackpot determination process is to be performed based on entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 6.

  When the main CPU 101a determines in step S311-1 that it is the first starting opening 6, in step S311-2, the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol is selected. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101a determines in step S311-1 that it is not the first starting opening 6 (is the second starting opening 7), the second special symbol jackpot determination table is selected in step S311-3.

  Next, in step S311-4, the main CPU 101a determines whether a flag is turned on in the high probability flag storage area. Here, that the flag is turned on in the high probability flag storage area means that it is a high probability gaming state with respect to the current jackpot winning probability.

  If the main CPU 101a determines in step S311-4 that the flag is turned on in the high probability flag storage area, then in step S311-5, the main CPU 101a further selects one of the tables selected in step S311-2 or step S311-3. The first high probability jackpot determination table or the second high probability jackpot determination table is selected.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101a determines that the flag is not turned on in the high probability flag storage area, in step S311-6, the first low probability is selected from the tables selected in step S311-2 or step S311-3. Select the jackpot determination table for jackpot or the second jackpot determination table for low probability.

  In step S311-7, the main CPU 101a selects the jackpot determination random number shifted in step S310-6 and stored in the 0th storage unit, as the “high probability big hit selected in step S311-5 or step S311-6. The determination table "" or the "low probability jackpot determination table" is collated to determine which one of "big hit", "small hit", or "loss", and ends the big hit determination process.

  When the big hit determination process ends, the main CPU 101a returns to the special symbol storage determination process shown in FIG. 22, and performs the special symbol determination process in step S312. In the special symbol determination process, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed in the first special symbol first display 60 and the second special symbol first display 61 is determined based on the result of the jackpot determination process.

Here, the special symbol determination process will be described with reference to FIG.
First, in step S312-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the result of the jackpot determination is “big hit”. Here, when it is determined that "big hit", the main CPU 101a selects the special symbol determination table for the big hit in step S312-3, and when it is not determined as "big hit", the step S312- Transfer the process to 2.

  In step S312-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether the result of the jackpot determination is "small hit". Here, if it is determined that "small hit", the main CPU 101a shifts the processing to step S312-4, and if it is not determined to be "small hit", it shifts the processing to step S312-5.

  In step S312-3, the main CPU 101a confirms the starting opening related to the processing based on the flag turned on in the starting opening winning flag storage area (the first starting opening 6 or the second starting opening 7), and the above steps By matching the random number for special symbol determination shifted in S310-6 and stored in the 0th storage unit with the special symbol determination value of the special symbol determination table (FIG. 5 (a)) for jackpot winning, the big hit special symbol is Perform special symbol determination to determine.

  In step S312-4, the main CPU 101a confirms the starting opening related to the processing based on the flag turned on in the starting opening winning flag storage area (first starting opening 6), and is shifted in step S310-6. Special symbol which determines small hit special symbol by collating the random number value for special symbol judgment in the 0th memory part with the special symbol judgment value of the special symbol decision table (Fig. 5 (b)) for small hit. Make a decision.

  In step S312-5, the main CPU 101a confirms the starting opening related to the processing based on the flag turned on in the starting opening winning flag storage area (the first starting opening 6 or the second starting opening 7), and the above steps The special symbol determination value is determined by comparing the random number value for special symbol determination shifted in S310-6 and stored in the 0th storage unit with the special symbol determination value of the special symbol determination table (FIG. 5 (b)) for lost Perform special symbol determination.

  And in step S312-6, based on the result of the special symbol determination in step S312-3, step S312-4, and step S312-5, a special effect symbol specification command is determined, and the determined special effect symbol specification command is effective. Set in the transmission data storage area for

  Next, the main CPU 101a stops the symbol data related to the special symbol based on the result of the special symbol determination in step S312-3, step S312-4, and step S312-5 in step S312-7 (hereinafter, “special figure stop The symbol data is referred to as "design data", that is, the type of special symbol is determined, and the determined special figure stop symbol data is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c.

  The special figure stop symbol data thus determined is the "big hit special symbol" or "small hit" in the special symbol stop process of FIG. 27 when the special pattern change pattern is determined in the special pattern change pattern determination process of FIG. It is also used when determining the opening / closing mode of the big winning opening 8 in the big hit game processing of FIG. 28 or the small hit game processing of FIG.

  In step S312-8, the main CPU 101a collates the special figure stop symbol data in the gaming condition data determination table to set the gaming condition data, and ends the special symbol determination process. Specifically, the main CPU 101a confirms the high probability flag storage area, and selects a gaming condition data determination table according to the current state of the jackpot winning probability. Next, the special pattern stop symbol data is collated with the selected gaming condition data determination table to determine gaming condition data, which is stored in the gaming condition data storage area of the main RAM 101c.

  As described above, when the special symbol determination process is completed, the main CPU 101a returns to the special symbol storage determination process shown in FIG. 22, and performs the special figure variation pattern determination process in step S313. In the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process, based on the result of the big hit judgment, the result of the special symbol judgment and the result of the reach judgment, the time required for the fluctuation display of the special symbol (to be performed from now on) A special figure fluctuation pattern including information on the effect type and the like of the fluctuation effect to be described later is determined.

Next, the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process will be described with reference to FIG.
First, in step S313-1, the main CPU 101a refers to the high probability flag ON or OFF and the time saving flag ON or OFF in the gaming condition determination table of FIG. Check the gaming state or low probability gaming state, time saving gaming state or non time saving gaming state).

  In step S313-2, if the gaming state confirmed in step S313-1 is the high probability gaming state and the short time gaming state, the main CPU 101a shifts the processing to step S313-3, other than the high probability gaming state and the short time gaming state If it is a gaming state, the process proceeds to step S313-4.

  In step S313-3, in the high probability gaming state and the time saving gaming state, the main CPU 101a changes the number of times of variation display of the special symbol to be started from now (1 to 30 times, 31 times to 74 times, 75 times to 84 times Check the times).

  In step S313-4, when the main CPU 101a determines the gaming state confirmed in step S313-1 or the gaming state confirmed in step S313-1 is the high probability gaming state and the time saving gaming state (in step S313-2) YES), the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table is selected according to the number of times of fluctuation display of the special symbol confirmed in step S313-3.

  In step S313-5, the main CPU 101a confirms the special view stop symbol data stored in the main RAM 101c.

  In the case where the special figure stop symbol data is "18H" or "28H", that is, when the result of the special symbol lottery is "loss", the main CPU 101a further performs the special figure related to the special figure variation pattern determination process. Check the number of reservations (U1 or U2). Then, the main CPU 101a acquires a random number for reach determination, compares it with the random number for reach determination (0 to 99) according to the number of reserved special views (U1 or U2), and checks the special view of "no reach". It is determined whether it is a fluctuation pattern or a special pattern fluctuation pattern of "reach with loss".

  At step S313-6, the main CPU 101a determines a special figure fluctuation pattern. Specifically, main CPU 101a acquires a random number for determining a special pattern fluctuation pattern, and acquires the acquired random number for special pattern fluctuation pattern determination and a determination value (0 to 255) to be stored in the special image fluctuation pattern determination table. Match and determine the special figure fluctuation pattern.

When the main CPU 101a determines the special figure fluctuation pattern, the process returns to the special symbol storage determination process shown in FIG. 22. In step S310-7, the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the special figure fluctuation pattern is transmitted to the main RAM 101c for presentation. Set in the data storage area.
The special figure fluctuation pattern specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 102, and the effect control board 102 recognizes that the special symbol variation display starts by receiving this command, and finally the special figure fluctuation pattern specification Based on the command, the variation presentation pattern associated with the content of the variation presentation is determined.

  In step S310-8, the main CPU 101a confirms the state of the gaming conditions at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and sets the gaming state designating command reflecting the state in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 101c. .

  Then, in step S310-9, the main CPU 101a sets a special game fluctuation time (see FIGS. 9 to 12) associated with the special drawing fluctuation pattern in the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subjected to subtraction processing every 4 ms in step S110.

  In step S310-10, the main CPU 101a sets special symbol variation display data to perform variation display of the special symbol on the first special symbol first display 60 or the second special symbol first display 61. The special symbol variation display data includes information such as the type of special symbol display device to be operated, the mode of variation display, and the variation time.

  In step S310-11, main CPU 101a sets flag "00H" in the demonstration determination flag storage area, that is, clears the demonstration determination flag storage area, and in step S310-12, sets special figure special power process data = 1. The special symbol storage determination process ends.

Next, special symbol variation processing will be described using FIG.
In step S320-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the variation display of the special symbol in step S310-9 ends, in other words, whether or not the set special figure variation time has elapsed (special game timer counter Determine if it is 0? As a result, when it is determined that the variation display of the special symbol is not finished, the special symbol variation process is finished, and the next subroutine is executed.

  When the main CPU 101a determines that the variation display of the special symbol is finished, in step S320-2, in order to convey to the effect control board 102 that the variation display of the special symbol is terminated, the special production symbol stop designation command is produced Set in the transmission data storage area for

  In step S320-3, the main CPU 101a sets the special symbol set in step S312-13 to stop displaying the special symbol on the first special symbol first display 60 and the second special symbol first display 61. Set data for special view stop display based on stop symbol data. As a result, the player is notified of the result of the special symbol lottery.

  In step S320-4, the main CPU 101a sets the time required for the stop display of the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special figure stop time", for example, 0.8 seconds) in the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subjected to subtraction processing every 4 ms in step S110.

  At step S320-5, the main CPU 101a sets 2 to the special figure special power process data.

  In step S320-6, the main CPU 101a turns off the first starting opening winning flag or the second starting opening winning flag, and ends the special symbol variation process.

Next, special symbol stop processing will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S330-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the stop display of the special symbol is ended, in other words, whether or not the special view stop time set in the special game timer counter in step S320-4 has elapsed ( Determine the special game timer counter = 0?). As a result, when the main CPU 101a determines that the stop display of the special symbol is not ended, the special symbol stop process is ended, and when it is judged that the stop display of the special symbol is ended, the process proceeds to step S330-2. Transfer the process.

  In step S330-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether a flag is turned on in the time saving flag storage area. That the flag is turned on in the time saving flag storage area means that the time saving game state is currently in progress. If the flag is ON in the time saving flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S330-3. If the flag is OFF in the time saving flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S330-6.

  In step S330-3, main CPU 101a indicates the remaining count of the time saving gaming state remaining count counter indicating the remaining count of variation display of special symbols due to the time saving gaming state (J: hereinafter referred to as "time saving gaming state remaining count") The calculated value (J-1) obtained by subtracting "" is stored as the number of remaining time-saving gaming states (J).

  At step S330-4, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the number of remaining time-saving gaming state (J) = 0. If the time saving gaming state remaining number of times (J) = 0, the processing is shifted to step S330-5, and if the time saving gaming state remaining number of times (J) is not 0, the processing is shifted to step S330-6.

  In step S330-5, the main CPU 101a turns off the flag stored in the time saving flag storage area. In addition, that the time saving game state remaining number of times (J) becomes “0” means that the variation display of the special symbol is possible number of times (Ja) in the time reduction gaming state, and the variation display of the special symbol by the “time saving” state Means to end.

  In step S330-6, the main CPU 101a determines whether a flag is turned on in the high probability flag storage area. That the flag is turned on in the high probability flag storage area means that it is currently in the high probability gaming state. If the flag is turned on in the high probability flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S330-7. If the flag is turned off in the high probability flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S330-10.

  In step S330-7, the main CPU 101a is a counter value of the high probability gaming state remaining number counter indicating the remaining number (X: hereinafter referred to as "high probability gaming state remaining number") of the variation display of the special symbol by the high probability gaming state. The calculated value (X−1) obtained by subtracting “1” from is stored as a new high probability game state remaining number (X).

  At step S330-8, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the high probability gaming state remaining number (X) = 0. If the high probability gaming state remaining number (X) = 0, the processing moves to step S330-9, and if the high probability gaming state remaining number (X) = 0, the processing moves to step S330-10.

  In step S330-9, the main CPU 101a turns off the flag stored in the high probability flag storage area. It should be noted that that the high probability gaming state remaining number (X) becomes "0" means that the variable display of the special symbol in the high probability gaming state can be executed number of times (Xa), the special symbol by the "high probability" state Means the end of the variable display of.

  In step S330-10, the main CPU 101a confirms the state of the current gaming conditions, and sets a gaming state designation command indicating the gaming state in the effect transmission data storage area.

  In step S330-11, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the determination result of the jackpot determination according to the special symbol stop process is "jackpot". Specifically, it is determined whether the special symbol stop symbol data stored in the special symbol stop symbol data storage area relates to the big hit special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data = 10 to 12, 20 to 21). Do. Here, if it is determined that the jackpot special symbol is determined, the process proceeds to step S330-14, and if it is not determined that the jackpot special symbol is determined, the process proceeds to step S330-12.

  In step S330-12, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the determination result of the big hit determination related to the special symbol stop process is "small hit". Specifically, it is determined whether the special figure stop symbol data stored in the special view stop symbol data storage area relates to the small hit special symbol (special figure stop symbol data = 16 to 17). Here, when it is determined that the small hit special symbol, the process proceeds to step S330-17, and when it is not determined that the small hit special symbol, the process proceeds to step S330-13.

  In step S330-13, the main CPU 101a sets 0 to the special figure special power process data, and shifts the process to the special symbol storage determination process shown in FIG.

  At step S330-14, the main CPU 101a sets 3 to the special figure special power process data.

  In step S330-15, the main CPU 101a resets the gaming condition flag storage area (time saving flag storage area and high probability flag storage area), the remaining variation count counter of the high probability gaming state, and the remaining variation count counter of the time saving gaming state Do.

  In step S330-16, the main CPU 101a sets an opening designation command corresponding to the special figure stop symbol data in the effect transmission data storage area. Next, the main CPU 101a sets the opening time according to the special view stop symbol data to the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

  At step S330-17, the main CPU 101a sets 4 to the special figure special power process data, and shifts the process to step S330-16.

Next, the jackpot game processing will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S340-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether an opening is currently in progress. The opening referred to here is a period from the start of the jackpot game to the start of the first round game (first opening of the big winning opening 8). If it is determined that the opening is currently in progress, the process proceeds to step S340-2, and if it is determined that the opening is not currently in progress, the process proceeds to S340-6.

  In step S340-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether a preset opening time has elapsed. That is, it is determined whether the special game timer counter = 0 or not, and when the special game timer counter = 0, it is determined that the opening time has elapsed. As a result, if the set opening time has not passed, the jackpot game processing is ended, the next subroutine is executed, and if the opening time has passed, the processing is shifted to step S340-3. .

  At step S340-3, the main CPU 101a performs jackpot game start processing. Specifically, according to the special view stop symbol data, it is confirmed which jackpot it is, and while selecting the big winning a prize opening opening and closing control table according to the kind of jackpot, it sets to the specified territory of main RAM101c. Specifically, in accordance with the special view stop symbol data, the long winning game winning opening opening / closing control table or the short hitting gaming high winning opening opening / closing control table is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c. Next, the main CPU 101a adds “1” to a value (round number (R)) stored in the number-of-round-games storage area and stores it. In addition, since the round game has not been executed even once at the time of step S340-3, the main CPU 101a stores “1” in the number-of-round-games storage area.

  In step S340-4, the main CPU 101a performs a special winning opening open process. Specifically, “1” is added to the value (special power operating number (K)) stored in the special power operating number storage area and stored. Then, the main CPU 101a sets the special winning opening / closing solenoid energization start data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c in order to energize the special winning opening / closing solenoid 80B and open the special winning opening 8. Here, main CPU 101a refers to the special winning opening / closing control table determined in step S340-3, and based on the round number (R) and the special power operating number (K), the opening time of special winning opening 8 ( The operation time of the special winning opening controller 80 is set to the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

  In step S340-5, the main CPU 101a performs round designation command transmission determination processing. Specifically, it is determined whether or not K = 1. If K = 1, the round designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area. This is for transmitting information to the effect that the round game starts to the effect control board 102. For example, at the first opening of the first round game of the long per game, “1” is set in the number-of-round game count storage area and “1” is set in the special power operation number storage area. A round designation command indicating one round game is set in the effect transmission data storage area. On the other hand, when "1" is not set in the special power operation number storage area, the jackpot game processing is ended without setting the round designation command in the effect transmission data storage area. That is, since the case of K = 1 means the start of the round game, the main CPU 101a transmits a round designation command only at the start of the round. When the effect control board 102 receives the round designation command, for example, “ROUND 1” is displayed on the image display device 14 for effect.

  At step S340-6, the main CPU 101a determines whether it is currently in the process of ending. The term "ending" as used herein refers to a period from the end of all preset round games (when the last opening of the big winning opening 8 is ended) to the end of the jackpot game. Therefore, if it is determined that the current ending is in progress, the process proceeds to step S340-17, and it is determined whether the ending time has elapsed, and if it is determined that the current ending is not in progress, step S340-7. Transfer the process to

  In step S340-7, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the special winning opening 8 is open, that is, whether or not the special winning opening control device 80 is in operation. When the main CPU 101a determines that the special winning opening 8 is open, in step S340-8, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the "opening completion condition" for ending the opening of the special winning opening 8 is satisfied. Do. As this "opening completion condition", that the counter value of the round winning counter has reached the specified number (for example, nine) in the round game, or that the maximum opening time has elapsed (the special gaming timer counter = 0) ) Has been adopted. Then, when it is determined that the "opening end condition" is established, the process proceeds to step S340-9, and when it is determined that the "opening end condition" is not established, the jackpot gaming process is ended.

  In step S340-9, the main CPU 101a performs a special winning opening closing process. In the special winning opening closing process, in order to close the special winning opening 8, energization stop data of the special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 80B is set in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 102c and the special winning opening opening / closing determined in step S340-3. Referring to the control table, based on the current round number (R) and the special electric power operating number (K), the closing time of the special winning opening 8 is set to the special game timer counter. As a result, the special winning opening 8 is closed.

  At step S340-10, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not one round game has ended. Specifically, in one round game, the special power operating number (K) is the number of times of opening set in the round game, or the counter value (C) of the round winning counter is a prescribed number (for example, 9) Since the process ends on condition that the condition is reached, it is determined whether such a condition is satisfied. If it is determined that one round game has ended, the process moves to step S340-12, and if it is determined that one round has not ended, the jackpot gaming process ends.

  If the main CPU 101a determines in step S340-7 that the special winning openings 8 and 9 are not open, the main CPU 101a determines in step S340-11 whether or not a preset closing time has elapsed. As a result, if the closing time has not elapsed, the jackpot gaming process is ended, and if the closing time has elapsed, the process moves to step S340-4.

  At step S340-12, the main CPU 101a performs a reset process. Specifically, the special power operating number storage area is cleared, and the counter value of the round winning counter is cleared.

  In step S340-13, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the value (round number (R)) stored in the number-of-round-games storage area is the number of round games executed in the jackpot game. If the main CPU 101a determines “Yes”, the process proceeds to step S340-15. If the main CPU 101a determines “No”, the process proceeds to step S340-14.

  In step S340-14, the main CPU 101a adds “1” to the current round number (R) stored in the number-of-round-games storage area and stores it.

  In step S340-15, the main CPU 101a performs jackpot game end processing. Specifically, the round number (R) stored in the round game number storage area is reset.

  At step S340-16, the main CPU 101a performs an ending process. Specifically, according to the special view stop symbol data, the type of jackpot is confirmed, and the ending specification command associated with the type of jackpot transmitted to the effect control board 102 is set in the transmission data storage area for effect. Next, the main CPU 101a sets an ending time according to the type of jackpot to the special game timer counter.

  In step S340-17, the main CPU 101a determines whether the set ending time has elapsed. If it is determined that the ending time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S340-18, and the ending time has elapsed. If it is determined that the jackpot is not determined, the jackpot game processing is ended.

  In step S340-18, the main CPU 101a sets 5 to the special view special power process data, and shifts the process to the jackpot game end process shown in FIG.

  Next, small hit game processing will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S350-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether the opening is currently in progress. If it is determined that the opening is currently in progress, the process proceeds to step S350-2. If it is determined that the opening is not currently in progress, the process proceeds to S350-5.

  In step S350-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether a preset opening time has elapsed. That is, it is determined whether the special game timer counter = 0 or not, and when the special game timer counter = 0, it is determined that the opening time has elapsed. As a result, when the opening time has not passed, the small hitting game processing is ended, and when the opening time has passed, the processing is shifted to step S350-3.

  In step S350-3, the main CPU 101a performs small hitting game start processing. Specifically, the main CPU 101a selects a large winning opening opening / closing control table according to the type of small hitting based on the special drawing stop symbol data, and determines a small hitting gaming large winning opening opening / closing control table.

  In step S350-4, the main CPU 101a performs a special winning opening opening process. In the special winning opening opening process, first, “1” is added to the value (special power operating number (K)) stored in the special power operating number storage area and stored. Then, the energization start data of the special winning opening / closing solenoid 80B is set to open the special winning opening 8, and the current special power operation is performed with reference to the special winning opening / closing control table determined in step S350-3. The opening time of the special winning opening 8 based on the number (K) is set in the special game timer counter, and the small hit game is ended.

  At step S350-5, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not it is in the process of ending. The term "ending" as used herein refers to a period from the end of the opening of the last big winning opening 8 to the end of the small hitting game. Therefore, when the main CPU 101a determines that the process is currently being performed, the process proceeds to step S350-13. When the main CPU 101a determines that the process is not currently being performed, the process proceeds to step S350-6.

  At step S350-6, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the special winning opening 8 is open. If the main CPU 101a determines that the special winning opening 8 is not open, the process proceeds to step S350-10, and if the main winning opening 8 is determined to be open, the main CPU 101a proceeds to step S350-7. Then, it is determined whether or not the "opening end condition" for ending the opening of the special winning opening 8 is satisfied. As this "opening end condition", that the counter value (C) of the round winning counter has reached the specified number (for example, 9), or that one opening time of the special winning opening 8 has elapsed (special game timer counter ) Is adopted. Then, when the main CPU 101a determines that the "opening completion condition" is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S350-8, and when the main CPU 101a determines that the "opening completion condition" is not satisfied, the small hitting game processing is ended. Do.

  In step S350-8, the main CPU 101a performs a special winning opening closing process. In the special winning opening closing process, in order to close the special winning opening 8, the energization stop data of the special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 80B is set, and with reference to the special winning opening opening / closing control table determined in step S350-3. The closing time of the special winning opening 8 is set to the special game timer counter based on the current special power operating number (K). As a result, the special winning opening 8 is closed.

  In step S350-9, the main CPU 101a determines whether a small hitting game ending condition is satisfied. The small hit game ending condition is that the special power operating number (K) is the number of times the special winning opening 8 has been opened in advance, or the counter value (C) of the round winning counter is a prescribed number (for example, nine). It has been reached. Then, when the main CPU 101a determines that the small hitting game ending condition is satisfied, it shifts the process to step S350-11, and when it is determined that the small hitting game ending condition is not satisfied, the small hitting game processing Finish.

  In step S350-11, the main CPU 101a sets “0” in the special power operating number storage area and sets “0” in the counter value (C) of the round winning counter as small hitting game end processing. That is, the special power operating number storage area and the round winning counter are cleared.

  In step S350-12, the main CPU 101a sets an ending designation command according to the type of small hit in the transmission data storage area for effect based on the special figure stop symbol data, and an ending time according to the type of small hit Is set to the special game timer counter.

  In step S350-10, the main CPU 101a determines whether the closing time set in step S350-8 has elapsed. The closing time is also determined based on whether or not the special game timer counter = 0, as in the opening time. As a result, when the main CPU 101a determines that the closing time has not elapsed, it ends the small hitting game processing, and when it is determined that the closing time has elapsed, the processing is shifted to step S350-4. .

  In step S350-13, the main CPU 101a determines whether the set ending time has elapsed, and if it is determined that the ending time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S350-14, and the ending time has elapsed. If it is determined that the game is not being performed, the small hitting game process is ended.

  At step S350-14, the main CPU 101a sets “0” to the special figure special power process data.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the jackpot game end processing will be described.
First, at step S360-1, the main CPU 101a loads game condition data.

  In step S360-2, the main CPU 101a checks the loaded gaming condition data against the gaming condition determination table, and determines whether to turn on the high probability flag in the high probability flag storage area. If the main CPU 101a determines that the high probability flag is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S360-4, and if it is determined that the high probability flag is turned on, the high probability flag is stored in the high probability flag storage area of the main RAM 101c in step S360-3. (01H) is turned on, and the number of executable times (Ja) (100 times in this embodiment) is set in the high probability gaming state remaining number counter.

  In step S360-4, the main CPU 101a collates the loaded game condition data with the game condition determination table, and determines whether or not the time short flag is turned on in the time short flag storage area. If the main CPU 101a determines that the time saving flag is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S360-6, and if it is determined that the time saving flag is turned on, the time saving flag (01H) is set in the time saving flag storage area of the main RAM 101c in step S360-5. At the same time as it is turned ON, the number of executable times (Ja) (100 times in this embodiment) is set in the time saving gaming state remaining number counter.

  In step S360-6, the main CPU 101a confirms the state of the current gaming conditions, sets a gaming state designating command indicating the current state of gaming conditions in the effect transmission data storage area, and in step S360-7, in particular, 0 is set to the figure special power process data, and the process shifts to the special symbol storage determination process shown in FIG.

(Main processing by effect control board)
Next, processing executed by the sub CPU 102 a in the effect control board 102 will be described.

  First, main processing of the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG. When power is supplied from the power supply substrate 107 to the sub CPU 102a, a system reset occurs in the sub CPU 102a, and the sub CPU 102a performs the following main processing.

  In step S1001, the sub CPU 102a performs an initialization process. In this process, the sub CPU 102a reads the main processing program from the sub ROM 102b, and initializes the sub RAM 102c in which a flag, a command, and the like are stored.

  In step S1002, the sub CPU 102a performs processing for updating the effect random number used to control the effect including the random number for special effect determination, the random number for variation effect pattern determination, the random number for effect mode determination, and the like.

  A random number counter is provided in the sub RAM 102c for each of the various random numbers that make up the effect random number. In the process of updating the effect random number, “1” is added to the random number counter provided for each type of random number. A random number range is provided for various random numbers constituting the effect random number. The random number range is from “0” to the maximum value defined for the random number. Then, when updating the random number, when the random number value indicated by the random number counter is the maximum value of the random number range, the random number counter is returned to “0” without adding “1”.

  Further, the maximum value of the random number range is set to be different depending on the type of random number. This is to prevent the random number counters related to the effect random number from being completely synchronized and always having the same random number value. Since it is only necessary to prevent the random number counters related to the effect random numbers from being completely synchronized, the maximum values of the various random number ranges are not made different, and different initial value random numbers are provided for the various effect random numbers. When updating the random number, if the random number value indicated by the random number counter is the maximum value of the random number range, the respective random number values may be newly updated from the initial value random number at that time.

(Timer interrupt processing by effect control board)
The clock pulse generation circuit provided on the effect control board 102 generates a clock pulse every predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds), whereby the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 32 is executed.

  In this timer interrupt process, in step S1100, sub CPU 102a saves the information stored in the register of sub CPU 102a in the stack area.

  In step S1200, the sub CPU 102a performs time control processing of updating each timer counter for performing time management related to various effects.

  In step S1300, the sub CPU 102a performs command analysis processing to analyze the command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c. Details of this command analysis processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34.

  When the sub CPU 102 a receives a command transmitted from the main control board 101 in the effect control board 102, the sub CPU 102 a performs reception interrupt processing of the effect control board 102 (not shown), and stores the received command in the reception buffer. Thereafter, a process of analyzing the command received in step S1300 is performed.

  In step S1400, the sub CPU 102a performs effect input control processing. The details of the effect input control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1500, the sub CPU 102a performs data output processing for transmitting various effect control commands set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105.

  In step S1600, sub CPU 102a restores the information saved in step S1100 to the register of sub CPU 102a.

(Command analysis process by effect control board)
The command analysis process by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34.

  In step S1301, the sub CPU 102a newly receives a command, and determines whether a command is stored in the reception buffer. If the sub CPU 102a determines that a command has not been received, the sub CPU 102a ends the command analysis process, and if it determines that a command has been received, the process proceeds to step S1302.

  In step S1302, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a demonstration specifying command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a demo designation command, the process proceeds to step S1303, and if it is determined not to be a demo designation command, the process proceeds to step S1304.

  In step S1303, the sub CPU 102a turns on the demonstration effect waiting flag in the demonstration effect waiting flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c as pre-processing for executing the demonstration effect, and also determines the time until the demonstration effect starts (Demo effect waiting Time) is set in the demonstration effect timer counter, and the command analysis process is ended.

  In step S1304, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a start opening winning combination designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is the starting opening prize designation command, the process proceeds to step S1305, and if it is determined that the command is not the starting opening prize designation command, the process proceeds to step S1306.

  In step S1305, the sub CPU 102a performs a starting opening winning combination designation command storing process. The sub CPU 102a stores the starting opening winning combination designation command in the effect information storage area (not shown) of the sub RAM 102c in the starting opening winning combination designation command storing process.

  The effect information storage area is provided for each type of starting opening (a first effect information storage area and a second effect information storage area). The sub CPU 102a analyzes the received start opening winning combination designation command, confirms the type (first start opening 6 or second start opening 7) of the start opening according to the start opening winning combination designation command, and selects the type of start opening. It stores in the effect information storage area according to.

  Each effect information storage area has the same configuration as the special symbol storage area of the main RAM 101c, and is divided into first to fourth storage sections for each type of starting openings 6, 7. The starting opening winning combination designation command is sequentially stored from the storage unit with the smallest number among the storage units in which the starting opening winning combination designation command is not stored.

  In addition, each storage unit stores a starting opening winning combination designation command portion storing a starting opening winning combination designation command, and effect data of an effect to be performed based on the starting opening winning combination designation command stored in the starting opening winning combination designation command portion And an effect data storage unit.

  In step S1306, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a gaming state designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a gaming state designation command, the process proceeds to step S1307. If it is determined that there is no gaming state designation command, the process proceeds to step S1308.

  In step S1307, the sub CPU 102a sets data indicating the gaming state indicated by the received gaming state designation command in the gaming state storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the command analysis processing.

  In step S1308, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a special effect symbol designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a special effect design designation command, the process proceeds to step S1309. If it is determined that there is no special effect design designation command, the process proceeds to step S1310.

  In step S1309, the sub CPU 102a configures a special figure lottery effect, is performed when the special symbol stop display is being performed, and is for performing the stop display of the special effect pattern that suggests the result of the special symbol lottery. A special effect symbol pattern determination process is performed, and the command analysis process is ended. In the special effect symbol pattern determination process, the sub CPU 102a analyzes the special effect symbol designation command, and causes the display area 140 of the image display device 14 to stop and display the special effect based on the information included in the received special effect symbol designation command. The arrangement (combination) of the decorative symbols arranged on the predetermined effective line in the stop display of the symbol, that is, the special effect symbol is determined.

  In step S1310, sub CPU 102a determines whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a special figure fluctuation pattern designation command. If sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a special figure fluctuation pattern designation command, the process proceeds to step S1311. If it is determined that the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command is not present, the process proceeds to step S1312. .

  In step S1311, the sub CPU 102a configures a special figure lottery effect, and is performed when the variation display of the special symbol is being performed, and indicates the result of the special symbol lottery (a variation display of the special effect symbol To perform the fluctuation effect pattern determination process of determining the fluctuation effect pattern of (including) the command analysis process. The details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1312, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a special effect symbol stop designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is the special effect symbol stop specification command, the process proceeds to step S1313 and step S1314, and if it is determined that the special effect symbol stop specification command is not present, the process proceeds to step S1315. Transfer the process.

  In step S1313, the sub CPU 102a sets a special effect symbol stop control command indicating that the special effect symbol is to be stopped and displayed in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. The special effect pattern stop control command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1500. The lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the special effect symbol stop control command to recognize that the change effect is finished, and end the change effect and perform stop display of the special effect pattern. . In addition, the finish time of this production is not restricted to this, It can also be set as the specific timing related to the event on the preset production in the said fluctuation production.

  Further, in S1313, the sub CPU 102a clears data for effect stored in the sub RAM 102c described later.

  In step S1314, the sub CPU 102a performs effect mode setting processing for setting the effect mode triggered by the end of the variation display of the special symbol, and ends the command analysis processing. The details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, the effect mode is a classification aspect (category) of the change effect performed by the effect device such as the image display device 14 corresponding to the special symbol lottery (or the change display of the special symbol). , Is associated with the state of the game conditions and the like.

  In step S1315, the sub CPU 102a confirms whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an opening designation command related to a special game. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is the special game opening designation command, the process proceeds to step S1316, and if it is determined that the special game opening designation command is not present, the process proceeds to step S1317.

  In step S1316, the sub CPU 102a performs a special game effect pattern determination process of determining a special game effect pattern which is an aspect of a special game effect that is an effect related to a special game, and ends the command analysis process.

  In step S1317, the sub CPU 102a confirms whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a round designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a round designation command, the process proceeds to step S1318, and if it is determined that there is no round designation command, the process proceeds to step S1319.

  In step S1318, the sub CPU 102a performs a round effect pattern determination process of determining a round effect pattern that is an aspect of a round effect, and ends the command analysis process. Specifically, the sub CPU 102a determines a round effect pattern based on the round designation command, sets round effect data indicating the determined round effect pattern in the round effect pattern storage area, and indicates the determined round effect pattern. A round effect control command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1319, the sub CPU 102a confirms whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an ending specification command (special game ending specification command) related to the special game. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a special game ending designation command, the process proceeds to step S1320. If it is determined that the command is not a special game ending designation command, the sub CPU 102a ends the command analysis processing.

  In step S1320, the sub CPU 102a performs ending effect pattern determination processing for determining an ending effect pattern that is an aspect of ending effect, and ends the command analysis processing.

  Here, a variation presentation pattern determination table used in the below-mentioned variation presentation pattern determination process (FIG. 35) will be described. As described later with reference to FIG. 35, when the sub CPU 102a receives the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command from the main control board 101, the sub CPU 102a enters the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command and the effect mode set in the current gaming state. A process of determining a variation presentation pattern is performed from the associated variation presentation pattern determination table.

FIG. 40 shows a change effect pattern determination table stored in the sub ROM 102b and associated with the effect mode A set in the low probability gaming state and the non-time-short playing state described later.
FIG. 41 is a variation effect pattern determination table stored in the sub ROM 102b, which is associated with the effect mode B set to 1 to 30 times of special pattern variation times of high probability gaming state and time saving gaming state described later. It shows.
FIG. 42 is a variation effect pattern determination table stored in the sub ROM 102b and associated with the effect mode C set to 31 to 74 times of special pattern variation times of the high probability gaming state and time saving gaming state described later It shows.
FIG. 43 is a variation effect pattern determination table stored in the sub ROM 102b, which is associated with the effect mode D set in the 75 times to 84 times of special pattern variation state of high probability gaming state and time saving gaming state described later. It shows.

  In the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 40 to 43, the special symbol determination result (the determination result of the big hit determination), the special figure variation pattern designation command from the main control board 101, and the variation corresponding to the special figure variation time Based on the effect time (s) of the effect, the change effect pattern determination value (0 to 99) for determining the change effect pattern, the change effect pattern determined according to the change effect pattern determination value, and the change effect pattern The content of the effect of the change effect and the presence or absence (execution (o), non-execution (x)) of each special effect in the change effect based on the change effect pattern are associated with each other and stored.

(Variation effect pattern determination table associated with effect mode A)
The variable presentation pattern determination table associated with the presentation mode A set in the low probability gaming state and the non-time-short gaming state of FIG. 40 is a player having a sense of expectation such as whether to win the first jackpot or the second jackpot. In order to give to the 1st jackpot or the 2nd jackpot as a fluctuation production pattern with different degree of expectation winning, a fluctuation production pattern for executing super reach after execution of normal reach, and a fluctuation production pattern for executing special reach after execution of normal reach And, after the execution of the normal reach, there is a movement effect that executes the super reach and then executes the special reach.
In addition, in order to give the player a sense of anticipation as to whether or not to win the third jackpot or small hit, a variation effect pattern for executing story reach after execution of normal reach, and a variation effect pattern for executing challenge reach after execution of normal reach. And.

  As shown in the change effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode A in FIG. 40, when the special symbol determination result is a loss, "E6H00H" or "E7H00H" is determined as a special figure change pattern specification command. In the above, any one of the "variation effect pattern A001" to the "variation effect pattern A003" is determined.

  The fluctuation effects of "variation effect pattern A001" to "variation effect pattern A003" are variably displayed with a plurality of special effect symbols in a short fluctuation effect time of 4 seconds ("symbol fluctuation A1-1" to "symbol fluctuation A1- 3 "), it is a fluctuation effect informing that the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is a loss.

  In addition, when “E6H01H” or “E7H01H” is determined as the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is a loss, among the “variation effect pattern A004” to “variation effect pattern A006” One is determined.

  Fluctuation effects of "fluctuation effect pattern A004" to "fluctuation effect pattern A006" display a plurality of special effect symbols in a fluctuating effect time of 8 seconds ("symbol fluctuation A2-1" to "symbol fluctuation A2-3 It is the fluctuation production which reports that the judgment result of the big hit judgment is a loss.

  In addition, when “E6H02H” or “E7H02H” is determined as a special figure fluctuation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is a loss, among “variation effect pattern A 007” to “variation effect pattern A 009” One is determined.

  "Variation effect pattern A 007" to "Variation effect pattern A 009" fluctuation display is a display of a plurality of special effect symbols during fluctuation effect time of 12 seconds ("symbol fluctuation A3-1" to "symbol fluctuation A3-3" ), It is a fluctuation effect that notifies that the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is a loss.

  When "E6H03H" or "E7H03H" is determined as the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is a loss, any of "variation effect pattern A010" to "variation effect pattern A012" Is determined.

  The fluctuation effects of "variation effect pattern A010" to "variation effect pattern A012" display a plurality of special effect symbols in a fluctuating manner ("symbol fluctuation A1-1" to "symbol fluctuation A1-3"), and 2 of special effect symbols A normal reach (“Normal reach A1-1” to “Normal reach A1-3”) in which one symbol (left symbol and right symbol) is stopped and displayed with the same numerical value, and variation reporting that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss It is an effect.

  When "E6H07H" or "E7H07H" is determined as the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is a loss, any of "variation effect pattern A022" to "variation effect pattern A025" Is determined.

  The fluctuation effects of "variation effect pattern A022" to "variation effect pattern A025" display a plurality of special effect symbols in a fluctuating manner ("symbol fluctuation A1-1" to "symbol fluctuation A1-4"), 2 of special effect symbols Perform a normal reach (“Normal reach A1-1” to “Normal reach A1-4”) to stop and display one symbol (left symbol and right symbol) with the same numerical value, and then super reach (high expectation for jackpot than normal reach) "Super reach A1-1" to "super reach A1-4") is a fluctuation effect that notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

  When "E6H08H" or "E7H08H" is determined as the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is a loss, any of "variation effect pattern A026" to "variation effect pattern A029" Is determined.

  The fluctuation effects of "variation effect pattern A026" to "variation effect pattern A029" display a plurality of special effect symbols in a fluctuating manner ("symbol fluctuation A1-1" to "symbol fluctuation A1-4"), and 2 of the special effect symbols Perform normal reach (“Normal reach A1-1” to “Normal reach A1-4”) to stop and display one symbol (left symbol and right symbol) with the same numerical value, and then the expectation for jackpot is higher than normal reach and super reach The special reach (“special reach A1-1” to “special reach A1-4”) is performed, and it is a fluctuation effect informing that the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is a jackpot.

  When "E6H09H" or "E7H09H" is determined as the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is a loss, any of "variation effect pattern A030" to "variation effect pattern A033" Is determined.

  The fluctuation effects of "variation effect pattern A030" to "variation effect pattern A 033" display a plurality of special effect symbols in a fluctuating manner ("symbol fluctuation A1-1" to "symbol fluctuation A1-4"), and 2 of the special effect symbols Perform a normal reach (“Normal reach A1-1” to “Normal reach A1-4”) to stop and display one symbol (left symbol and right symbol) with the same numerical value, and then super reach (high expectation for jackpot than normal reach) Special reach (“Special reach A1-1” to “Special reach A1-4”), which has high expectations for jackpots than super reach after performing “Super reach A1-1” to “Super reach A1-4”) It is the fluctuation production which reports that the judgment result of the big hit judgment is a loss.

  When "E6H0AH" or "E7H0AH" is determined as the special figure variation pattern specification command when the special symbol determination result is the first jackpot, of the "variation effect pattern A034" to "variation effect pattern A037" One is determined.

  The fluctuation effects of "variation effect pattern A034" to "variation effect pattern A037" display a plurality of special effect symbols in a fluctuating manner ("symbol fluctuation A1-1" to "symbol fluctuation A1-4"), and 2 of the special effect symbols Perform a normal reach (“Normal reach A1-1” to “Normal reach A1-4”) to stop and display one symbol (left symbol and right symbol) with the same numerical value, and then super reach (high expectation for jackpot than normal reach) "Super reach A1-1" to "super reach A1-4") is a fluctuation effect for notifying that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot.

  When "E6H0BH" or "E7H0BH" is determined as the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is the first jackpot, of the "variation effect pattern A038" to "variation effect pattern A041" One is determined.

  The fluctuation effects of "variation effect pattern A038" to "variation effect pattern A041" display a plurality of special effect symbols in a fluctuating manner ("symbol fluctuation A1-1" to "symbol fluctuation A1-4"), and 2 of the special effect symbols Perform normal reach (“Normal reach A1-1” to “Normal reach A1-4”) to stop and display one symbol (left symbol and right symbol) with the same numerical value, and then the expectation for jackpot is higher than normal reach and super reach The special reach (“special reach A1-1” to “special reach A1-4”) is performed, and it is a fluctuation effect informing that the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is a jackpot.

  When "E6H0CH" or "E7H0CH" is determined as the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is the first jackpot, of the "variation effect pattern A042" to "variation effect pattern A045" One is determined.

  The fluctuation effects of "variation effect pattern A042" to "variation effect pattern A045" changely display a plurality of special effect symbols ("symbol variation A1-1" to "symbol variation A1-4"), and 2 of the special effect symbols Perform a normal reach (“Normal reach A1-1” to “Normal reach A1-4”) to stop and display one symbol (left symbol and right symbol) with the same numerical value, and then super reach (high expectation for jackpot than normal reach) Special reach (“Special reach A1-1” to “Special reach A1-4”), which has high expectations for jackpots than super reach after performing “Super reach A1-1” to “Super reach A1-4”) It is a fluctuation production which reports that the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is the jackpot.

  When the special symbol determination result is the second jackpot, the same variation effect as that performed when the special symbol determination result is the first jackpot is executed except that the numerical value of the special effect symbol to be stopped and displayed is different.

  When "E6H10H" or "E7H10H" is determined as the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is the third jackpot, of the "variation effect pattern A058" to "variation effect pattern A060" One is determined.

  The fluctuation effects of "variation effect pattern A 058" to "variation effect pattern A 060" change and display a plurality of special effect symbols ("symbol variation A1-1" to "symbol variation A1-3"), and 2 of the special effect symbols Normal reach (“Normal reach A1-1” to “Normal reach A1-3”) in which one symbol (left symbol and right symbol) is stopped and displayed with the same numerical value is performed, and then characters that also appear in the challenge reach as described above Go out on a journey to find a domestic dog that has disappeared, and finally find a domestic dog. Story reach consisting of a story of content that suggests that the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is the third jackpot or small hit ("Story Reach A1-1 "-" Story Reach A1-3 "), and it is a fluctuation effect to notify that the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is the jackpot .

  As described above, the fluctuation effect of “variation effect pattern A061” to “variation effect pattern A063” is a challenge for a treasure hunt game in which the character searches for a sword of a desired item from a plurality of treasure boxes as described above. And the character's acquisition of the item indicates that the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is the 3rd jackpot or the small jack, "Challenge reach A1-1" to "Challenge reach A1-3" It is the fluctuation production which reports that the judgment result of jackpot judgment is the 3rd jackpot or the small jackpot.

  The variation effects of "variation effect pattern A064" to "variation effect pattern A066" are challenged by a treasure hunt game in which the character searches for a cloak of a desired item from a plurality of treasure boxes after "symbol variation 3", and the character is acquired Challenge reach ("Challenge reach A2-1"-"Challenge reach A2-3") of contents that suggests that the judgment result of the big hit judgment is the 3rd big hit or the small hit depending on the item, and the big hit judgment It is the fluctuation production which reports that a decision result is the 3rd big hit or the small hitting.

  In the case where the special symbol determination result is a small hit, the same variation effect as in the case where the special symbol determination result is a third jackpot is executed.

  In the variation production pattern determination table of the production mode A, the "serif notice A", the "character announcement B", the "development notice A", and the "production variation A pattern" to the "variation production pattern A 075" The information of the effect (O) of performance A ", and the non-execution (x) is matched.

  Here, the “serif advance notice” refers to a jackpot game by displaying on the image display device 14 an effect image of how a character described later speaks any of a plurality of serifs having different degrees of expectation for a jackpot, as described later. It is an advance notice that gives notification of the possibility of performing and the expectation that the judgment result of the jackpot is the jackpot. In the effect mode A, as will be described later, any one of the “serif notice A1” to the “serif notice A5” of the “serif notice A” is executed as the “serif notice”.

  Further, as described later, the “character advance notice” notifies the possibility of performing a jackpot game by displaying on the image display device 14 any image of a plurality of characters having different degrees of expectation for a jackpot, as described later. It is a notice effect giving a feeling of expectation that the judgment result of the jackpot is a jackpot. In the effect mode A, as described later, any one of the "character preview A1" to the "character preview A5" of the "character preview A" is executed as the "character preview."

  Also, “advance notice on development” refers to the state (non-projected state or projected state) of the effect button 18A, or the type of effect image displayed based on the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A, as described later. In addition to informing the possibility of developing to the next effect that is higher from the current effect to the higher expectation with respect to the big hit, it reports the possibility of executing the big hit game, and the expectation that the judgment result of the big hit is the big hit It is a notice effect given. In the effect mode A, as described later, “development notice A1” or “development notice A2” of “development notice A” is executed as “development notice”.

  In addition, “decision effect” is an effect of informing the determination of the big hit as described later, and when the first big hit or the second big hit is won, the movement operation of moving the first decorative member 17A In the case of a loss, it is an effect that the first decorative member 17A is not operated. In the effect mode A, as described below, the "determination effect A1" or the "determination effect A2" of the "determination effect A" is executed as the "determination effect".

As shown in FIG. 40, for example, when the special symbol determination result is “variation effect pattern A 034”, “serif notice A”, “character notice A”, and “development notice A” execution (○), “determination effect” The information of the non-execution (x) of A "is matched.
If the sub CPU 102 a determines “variation effect pattern A 034” in step S 1311-4 of the below-mentioned fluctuation effect pattern determination process, “serif notice A” or “character announcement A” as a special effect in step S 1311-6 , Confirm that "development advance notice A" is to be executed.

The fluctuation effect performed in the high probability gaming state and the time saving gaming state, in which the low probability gaming state and the non time saving gaming state are more likely to win a jackpot, is a simple effect that is not overturned in the notice effect.
In addition, up to 84 fluctuation effects performed in this high probability gaming state and time saving game state are effect mode B performed in 1 to 30 times of special figure fluctuation times and 31 times of special figure fluctuation times so as not to be redundant. Different effects are performed in the effect mode C performed in 74 times and the effect mode D performed in 75 times to 84 times of special figure fluctuation times.

(Variation effect pattern determination table associated with effect mode B)
The variation effect pattern included in the variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode B in FIG. 41 has a high probability gaming state and a time saving gaming state in which the winning probability of the big hit is higher than the above-mentioned low probability gaming state and non time saving gaming state. It is the fluctuation production pattern of the fluctuation production which is executed with 1-30 times of special figure fluctuation frequency of.

  In such a high probability gaming state and a short time gaming state, usually, the player has an expectation that it will be easy to win a jackpot. Therefore, in the effect mode B, in order to give the player a sense of anticipation that the jackpot will be won in the early period where the number of times of special figure variation is small, the variation of effect mode A in 1 to 30 times of special figure variation The effect contents are simpler than the effect, so that the effect is executed.

  In the effect mode B, when the judgment result of the big hit judgment is a loss, the special figure fluctuation time is higher than that of the effect mode A so that the fluctuation effect of the next special figure fluctuation number is executed at a high rate. There are 2 seconds and a high rate of the fluctuation production pattern of the fluctuation production. In addition, after the change of the special effect design, when developing to reach, only the "special character reach" in which the characters appearing only in the effect mode B fight is executed.

  As shown in the change effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode B in FIG. 41, when the special symbol determination result is a loss, the case where “E6H30H” or “E7H30H” is determined as the special figure change pattern specification command In this case, the "variation effect pattern B001" or the "variation effect pattern B002" is determined.

  The fluctuation effects of "Change effect pattern B001" and "Change effect pattern B002" change and display a plurality of special effect symbols in a short change effect time of 2 seconds ("symbol change B1-1", "symbol change B1- 2 "), it is a fluctuation effect informing that the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is a loss.

  In addition, when “E6H31H” or “E7H31H” is determined as the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is a loss, “the fluctuation effect pattern B003” or the “variation effect pattern B004” is determined. Ru. In addition, when "E6H32H" or "E7H32H" is determined as a special figure fluctuation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is a loss, "variation effect pattern B005" or "variation effect pattern B006" is determined. Ru.

  Fluctuation effects of "fluctuation effect pattern B003" to "fluctuation effect pattern B006" display a plurality of special effect symbols in a fluctuating manner ("symbol fluctuation B2-1", "symbol fluctuation B2-2", "symbol fluctuation B3-1" "," Symbol variation B3-2 ", is a variation effect that notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

  When "E6H33H" or "E7H33H" is determined as the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is a loss, "variation effect pattern B007" or "variation effect pattern B008" is determined. Similarly, when the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command "E6H34H" or "E7H34H" is determined, the "variation effect pattern B009" or the "variation effect pattern B010" is the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command "E6H35H" or "E7H35H" is determined, "variation effect pattern B011" or "variation effect pattern B012", when the special figure fluctuation pattern specification command "E6H36H" or "E7H36H" is determined, "variation effect pattern When B013 "or" variation effect pattern B014 "is determined to be special figure fluctuation pattern designation command" E6H37H "or" E7H37H "," variation effect pattern B015 "or" variation effect pattern B016 "is special figure fluctuation Pattern specification command "E6H38H Or when "E7H38H" is determined, "variation demonstration pattern B017" or "variations demonstration pattern B018" is determined, respectively.

  Fluctuation effects of "fluctuation effect pattern B 007" to "fluctuation effect pattern B 018" display a plurality of special effect symbols in a fluctuating manner ("symbol fluctuation B3-1", "symbol fluctuation B3-2", "symbol fluctuation B2-1 "," Symbol variation B2-2 ", then, special character reach (" special character reach B4-1 "," special character reach B4-2 "," special character reach B5-1 "), where the special character appears Special character reach B5-2 "," special character reach B6-1 "," special character reach B6-2 "," special character reach B1-1 "," special character reach B1-2 "," special character reach B2- " 1 "," special character reach B2-2 "," special character reach B3-1 "," special character reach B3-2 "), and a variation performance that notifies that the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is a loss It is.

  When "E6H39H" or "E7H39H" is determined as the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is the first jackpot, "variation effect pattern B019" or "variation effect pattern B020" is determined. Ru. Similarly, when the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command "E6H3AH" or "E7H3AH" is determined, the "variation effect pattern B021" or the "variation effect pattern B022" is the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command "E6H3BH" or "E7H3BH". If "is determined," "variation effect pattern B023" or "variation effect pattern B024" is determined.

  The variation effects of "variation effect pattern B019" to "variation effect pattern B024" changely display a plurality of special effect symbols ("symbol variation B3-1", "symbol variation B3-2"), and then the special character Special character reach which appears ("special character reach B1-1", "special character reach B1-2", "special character reach B2-1", "special character reach B2-2", "special character reach B3-1" , "Special character reach B3-2"), it is a fluctuation effect that notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot.

  When the special symbol determination result is the second jackpot, the same variation effect as that performed when the special symbol determination result is the first jackpot is executed except that the numerical value of the special effect symbol to be stopped and displayed is different.

  When "E6H3FH" or "E7H3FH" is determined as the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is the third jackpot, "variation effect pattern B031" or "variation effect pattern B032" is determined. Ru. Similarly, when the special figure variation pattern designation command "E6H40H" or "E7H40H" is determined, the "variation presentation pattern B033" or the "variation presentation pattern B034" is the special figure variation pattern designation command "E6H41H" or "E7H41H". If "is determined," "variation effect pattern B035" or "variation effect pattern B036" is determined.

  The fluctuation effects of “variation effect pattern B031” to “variation effect pattern B036” display a plurality of special effect symbols as fluctuation (“symbol fluctuation B2-1”, “symbol fluctuation B2-2”), and then the special character Special character reach to appear ("special character reach B4-1", "special character reach B4-2", "special character reach B5-1", "special character reach B5-2", "special character reach B6-1" , "Special character reach B6-2"), and it is a fluctuation effect informing that the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is the third jackpot or the small jackpot.

  In the case where the special symbol determination result is a small hit, the same variation effect as in the case where the special symbol determination result is a third jackpot is executed.

  In the change effect pattern determination table of the effect mode B, the "advance notice B" and "decision effect B" execution (○) and "do not execute" as special effects for "change effect pattern B001" to "change effect pattern B042" Information to the effect of ×) is associated.

For example, information indicating that the special symbol determination result is "variation effect pattern B019" is associated with execution of "development notice B" (o) and non-execution of "decision effect B" (x).
If the sub CPU 102a determines "variation effect pattern B019" in step S1311-4 of the below-mentioned fluctuation effect pattern determination process, in step S1311-6, confirms that "development notice B" is to be executed as a special effect Do.

(Variation effect pattern determination table associated with effect mode C)
The variation effect pattern possessed by the variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode C of FIG. It is a pattern.

  In this effect mode C, there is a change effect pattern of the change effect which is executed when the jackpot is not won even in the high probability gaming state and the special figure fluctuation number of 1 to 30 times of the time saving gaming state. Therefore, a character that appears only in the effect mode C as a change effect pattern having a reach effect different from the "special character reach" of the effect mode B in the high probability gaming state and the special pattern fluctuation times 31 to 74 times of the short time gaming state. Has a variation presentation pattern of "attack reach" of the content that it attacks.

  As shown in the change effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode C in FIG. 42, when “E6H50H” or “E7H50H” is determined as a special figure change pattern specification command when the special symbol determination result is a loss In this case, the "variation effect pattern C001" or the "variation effect pattern C002" is determined.

  The fluctuation effects of "Change effect pattern C001" and "Change effect pattern C002" change and display a plurality of special effect designs in a short change effect time of 2 seconds ("Design change C1-1", "Design change C1- 2 "), it is a fluctuation effect informing that the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is a loss.

  In addition, when "E6H51H" or "E7H51H" is determined as the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is a loss, "the fluctuation effect pattern C003" or the "variation effect pattern C004" is determined. Ru. In addition, when “E6H52H” or “E7H52H” is determined as a special figure fluctuation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is a loss, “variation effect pattern C005” or “variation effect pattern C006” is determined. Ru.

  Fluctuation effects of "fluctuation effect pattern C003" to "fluctuation effect pattern C006" display a plurality of special effect symbols in a fluctuating manner ("symbol fluctuation C2-1", "symbol fluctuation C2-2", "symbol fluctuation C3-1" "," Symbol variation C3-2 ", is a variation effect that notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

  When "E6H53H" or "E7H53H" is determined as the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is a loss, the "variation effect pattern C007" or the "variation effect pattern C008" is determined. Similarly, when the special figure variation pattern designation command "E6H54H" or "E7H54H" is determined, the "variation effect pattern C009" or the "variation effect pattern C010" is the special figure variation pattern specification command "E6H55H" or "E7H55H" is determined, "variation effect pattern C011" or "variation effect pattern C012", when the special figure variation pattern designation command "E6H56H" or "E7H56H" is determined, "variation effect pattern When the special pattern variation pattern designation command “E6H57H” or “E7H57H” is determined as “C013” or “variation effect pattern C014”, “variation effect pattern C015” or “variation effect pattern C016” is special pattern fluctuation Pattern specification command "E6H58H Or when "E7H58H" is determined, "variation demonstration pattern C017" or "variations demonstration pattern C018" is determined, respectively.

  Fluctuation effects of "fluctuation effect pattern C 007" to "fluctuation effect pattern C 018" display a plurality of special effect symbols in a fluctuating manner ("symbol fluctuation C2-1", "symbol fluctuation C2-2", "symbol fluctuation C3-1" "," Symbol variation C3-2 ", and then an attack reach consisting of effects in which a predetermined character attacks (" attack reach C4-1 "," attack reach C4-2 "," attack reach C5-1 ", "Attack reach C5-2", "Attack reach C6-1", "Attack reach C6-2", "Attack reach C1-1", "Attack reach C1-2", "Attack reach C2-1", "Attack Reach C2-2 "," attack reach C3-1 "," attack reach C3-2 "), it is a fluctuation effect that notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

  When "E6H59H" or "E7H59H" is determined as the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is the first jackpot, "variation effect pattern C019" or "variation effect pattern C020" is determined. Ru. Similarly, when the special figure variation pattern designation command "E6H5AH" or "E7H5AH" is determined, the "variation presentation pattern C021" or the "variation presentation pattern C022" is the special figure variation pattern designation command "E6H5BH" or "E7H5BH". If "is determined," "variation effect pattern C023" or "variation effect pattern C024" is determined.

  The fluctuation effects of "variation effect pattern C019" to "variation effect pattern C024" display a plurality of special effect symbols in a fluctuating manner ("symbol fluctuation C3-1", "symbol fluctuation C3-2"), and then a predetermined character Attack reach (“Attack reach C1-1”, “Attack reach C1-2”, “Attack reach C2-1”, “Attack reach C2-2”, “Attack reach C3-1”, "Attack reach C3-2" is a fluctuation effect informing that the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is a jackpot.

  When the special symbol determination result is the second jackpot, the same variation effect as that performed when the special symbol determination result is the first jackpot is executed except that the numerical value of the special effect symbol to be stopped and displayed is different.

  When "E6H5FH" or "E7H5FH" is determined as the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is the third jackpot, "variation effect pattern C031" or "variation effect pattern C032" is determined. Ru. Similarly, when the special figure variation pattern designation command "E6H60H" or "E7H60H" is determined, the "variation effect pattern C033" or the "variation effect pattern C034" is the special figure variation pattern designation command "E6H61H" or "E7H61H". If "is determined," "variation effect pattern C035" or "variation effect pattern C036" is determined.

  The fluctuation effects of "variation effect pattern C031" to "variation effect pattern C036" display a plurality of special effect symbols in a fluctuating manner ("symbol variation C2-1", "symbol variation C2-2"), and then a predetermined character Attack reach ("Attack reach C4-1", "Attack C4-2", "Attack reach C5-1", "Attack reach C5-2", "Attack reach C6-1," Attack reach C6-2 ′ ′) is a fluctuation effect informing that the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is the third jackpot or the small jackpot.

  When the special symbol determination result is a small hit, the same variation effect as in the case where the special symbol determination result is a third jackpot is executed except that the numerical value of the special effect symbol to be stopped and displayed is different.

In the variation effect pattern determination table of the effect mode C, the "advancement notice C" and the "decision effect C" and the "decision effect C" are executed (o) or not executed as "special effects" for "variation effect pattern C001" to "variation effect pattern C042" Information to the effect of (x) is associated.
For example, the special symbol determination result is associated with the "variation presentation pattern C019" with information indicating that "development notice C" and "decision presentation C" are executed (o).
If the sub CPU 102a determines "variation effect pattern C019" in step S1311-4 of the below-mentioned variation effect pattern determination process, "development advance notice C" and "decided effect C" as special effects in step S1311-6. Confirm that you want to execute

(Variation effect pattern determination table associated with effect mode D)
The change effect pattern included in the change effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode D of FIG. 43 is a change effect of the change effect performed after 75 times to 84 times of the special figure change times of the high probability gaming state and the short time gaming state. It is a pattern.

  In this effect mode D, there is a change effect pattern of the change effect which is executed when the big hit is not won even in the high probability gaming state and the special figure changing number of times 31 to 74 of the short time gaming state. Therefore, it appears only in the effect mode D as a change effect pattern having a reach effect different from the “attack reach” of the effect mode C in the high probability gaming state and 31 to 74 times of the special figure fluctuation in the short time gaming state. The character which performs the Janken has the character which becomes the opponent of the Janken, and the variation presentation pattern of the "Janken effect" of the content that the Janken is performed predetermined times. By such a variation presentation of the Janken effect, the player is expected to have a sense of expectation that he wants the jackpot to be won in the state of having a small number of remaining special figures in the high probability gaming state and the short time gaming state.

  When "E6H70H" or "E7H70H" is determined as the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command as shown in the fluctuation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode D of FIG. If any of the “variation effect pattern D001” to “variation effect pattern D003” is determined and “E6H71H” or “E7H71H” is determined, “variation effect pattern D004” to “variation effect When any of the patterns D006 ′ ′ is determined and “E6H72H” or “E7H72H” is determined, any one of “variation effect pattern D007” to “variation effect pattern D009” is determined.

  Fluctuation effects of "fluctuation effect pattern D001" to "fluctuation effect pattern D009" are "symbol fluctuation" ("symbol fluctuation D1-1" to "symbol fluctuation D1-3", "symbol fluctuation"), which displays a plurality of special effect symbols in a fluctuating manner. During variation D2-1-"symbol variation D2-3" and "symbol variation D3-1"-"symbol variation D3-3", "Janken wins once!" (A character of the ally, a character of the opponent) performs a single junk, the effect of the contents that the character of the ally loses is performed, and it is a variation effect of notifying that the judgment result of the big hit judgment is a loss.

  When "E6H73H" or "E7H73H" is determined as a special figure fluctuation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is a loss, any of "variation effect pattern D010" to "variation effect pattern D012" Is determined, and the special figure variation pattern designation command "E6H74H" or "E7H74H" is determined, any one of "variation effect pattern D013" to "variation effect pattern D015" is determined, and the special figure variation When the pattern designation command “E6H75H” or “E7H75H” is determined, any one of “variation effect pattern D016” to “variation effect pattern D018” is determined.

  The fluctuation effects of the "variation effect pattern D010" to the "variation effect pattern D018" are the fluctuation effects that execute "Junken reach" after "symbol fluctuation" and notify that the judgment result of the big hit judgment is a loss.

  Fluctuation effects of "fluctuation effect pattern D010" to "fluctuation effect pattern D012" are displayed during the fluctuation of "special symbol fluctuation" ("symbol fluctuation D1-1" to "symbol fluctuation D1-3") in which a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed. , "Janken wins twice!" And two characters (friend character, opponent character) perform the first battle Janken, and the ally character wins, and then "Janken reach" ( A variation that reports that the character of the ally loses in the second game of "Janken Reach D1-1" to "Janken Reach D1-3") and loses the judgment result of the jackpot judgment It is an effect.

  The fluctuation effects of the "variation effect pattern D013" to the "variation effect pattern D015" are displayed during fluctuation of a plurality of special effect symbols during "symbol fluctuation" ("symbol fluctuation D2-1" to "symbol fluctuation D2-3") , "Janken won three times!" And two characters (friend character, opponent character) perform the first battle Janken, and the ally character wins, and then "Janken reach" ( The character of the ally wins in the second round of Janken in "Janken Reach D2-1-" "Janken Reach D2-3", and the ally character loses in the third round of Janken, and the jackpot judgment is made. It is the fluctuation production which reports that the decision result of is a loss.

  Fluctuation effects of "fluctuation effect pattern D016" to "fluctuation effect pattern D018" are displayed while fluctuating a plurality of special effect symbols "symbol fluctuation" ("symbol fluctuation D3-1" to "symbol fluctuation D3-3") , "Janken wins 4 times!" And two characters (friend character and opponent character) perform the first battle Janken, and the ally character wins, and then "Janken reach" ( In the "Janken Reach D3-1" to "Janken Reach D3-3"), the character of the ally wins in the 2nd and 3rd round of Janken and the ally character loses in the 4th of Janken. It is the fluctuation production which reports that the judgment result of the big hit judgment is a loss.

  Fluctuation effects of "fluctuation effect pattern D019" to "fluctuation effect pattern D021" are displayed during the "symbol fluctuation" ("symbol fluctuation D1-1" to "symbol fluctuation D1-3") in which a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed. , "Janken wins twice!" And two characters (friend character, opponent character) perform the first battle Janken, and the ally character wins, and then "Janken reach" ( A variation that reports that the ally character wins even in the second-round Janken in "Janken Reach D1-1" to "Janken Reach D1-3", and reports that the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is a jackpot It is an effect.

  The variation effects of "variation effect pattern D022" to "variation effect pattern D024" are displayed during variation of a plurality of special effect symbols during "symbol variation" ("symbol variation D2-1" to "symbol variation D2-3") , "Janken won three times!" And two characters (friend character, opponent character) perform the first battle Janken, and the ally character wins, and then "Janken reach" ( In the second and third in the "Junken Reach D2-1" ~ "Junken Reach D2-3"), the character of the teammate wins continuously in the third battle Janken, and the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is the jackpot It is a fluctuation effect which notifies that there is a certain.

  Fluctuation effects of "fluctuation effect pattern D025" to "fluctuation effect pattern D027" are displayed during the fluctuation of a plurality of special effect symbols "symbol fluctuation" ("symbol fluctuation D3-1" to "symbol fluctuation D3-3") , "Janken wins 4 times!" And two characters (friend character and opponent character) perform the first battle Janken, and the ally character wins, and then "Janken reach" ( Perform the effect that the character of the ally wins continuously in the second to fourth battle Janken in "Jankenreach D3-1" to "Jankenreach D3-3", and the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is a big hit It is the fluctuation production which reports that it is.

  When the special symbol determination result is the second jackpot, the same variation effect as that performed when the special symbol determination result is the first jackpot is executed except that the numerical value of the special effect symbol to be stopped and displayed is different.

  When "E6H7CH" or "E7H7CH" is determined as the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is the third big hit, of the "variation effect pattern D037" to "variation effect pattern D039" When one of them is determined and the special figure variation pattern designation command "E6H7DH" or "E7H7DH" is determined, any one of "variation effect pattern D040" to "variation effect pattern D042" is determined, and the special figure is determined. When the variation pattern designation command “E6H7EH” or “E7H7EH” is determined, any one of “variation effect pattern D043” to “variation effect pattern D045” is determined.

  Fluctuation effects of "fluctuation effect pattern D037" to "fluctuation effect pattern D039" are displayed during fluctuation of a plurality of special effect symbols during "symbol fluctuation" ("symbol fluctuation D1-1" to "symbol fluctuation D1-3") , "Janken wins twice!" And two characters (friend character, opponent character) perform the first battle Janken, and the ally character wins, and then "Janken reach" ( In the second game of “Janken Reach D1-1” to “Janken Reach D1-3”, the character of the ally character and the opponent's character become “Aiko” in the second game of Janken, and the judgment of the jackpot judgment is made. It is the fluctuation production which reports that the result is the 3rd jackpot or the small jackpot.

  Fluctuation effects of "fluctuation effect pattern D040" to "fluctuation effect pattern D042" are displayed while fluctuating a plurality of special effect symbols "symbol fluctuation" ("symbol fluctuation D2-1" to "symbol fluctuation D2-3") , "Janken won three times!" And two characters (friend character, opponent character) perform the first battle Janken, and the ally character wins, and then "Janken reach" ( The ally character wins in the second round of Janken in “Janken Reach D2-1” to “Janken Reach D2-3”, and the ally character and opponent character are “Aiko” in the third round of Janken It is the fluctuation production which performs the production of the contents of becoming, and reports that the judgment result of the big hit judgment is the 3rd big hit or the small hit.

  Fluctuation effects of "fluctuation effect pattern D043" to "fluctuation effect pattern D045" are displayed while fluctuating a plurality of special effect symbols "symbol fluctuation" ("symbol fluctuation D3-1" to "symbol fluctuation D3-3") , "Janken wins 4 times!" And two characters (friend character and opponent character) perform the first battle Janken, and the ally character wins, and then "Janken reach" ( Allied characters in the "Junken Reach D3-1" ~ "Junken Reach D3-3" series win the quest in the second and third round of the Janken, and the ally character and opponent character in the fourth round of the Janken It is the fluctuation production which performs the production of the contents that “Aiko” becomes “Aiko” and reports that the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is the third jackpot or the small jackpot.

  In the case where the special symbol determination result is a small hit, the same variation effect as in the case where the special symbol determination result is a third jackpot is executed.

The information of the effect of execution (O) of "development notice D", "character notice D", and "determination effect D" as special effects is associated with "variation effect pattern D001" to "variation effect pattern D054". There is.
For example, the special symbol determination result is "variation effect pattern D019" is associated with information indicating the execution of "development notice D" (o) and the execution of "decision effect D" (o).
When the sub CPU 102a determines "variation effect pattern D019" in step S1311-4 of the below-mentioned fluctuation effect pattern determination process, in step S1311-6, "development announcement D" and "character announcement D" as special effects. , Confirm that "decision effect D" is to be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 42 to FIG. 43, in the special gaming state (high probability gaming state and short time gaming state) after the end of the jackpot game, in the effect mode B, the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is executed once to 30 times The change effect of the effect mode C in which the number of changes is performed 31 to 74 times is higher than that of the change effect, and the execution ratio of the special effect is higher, and the number of changes is 35 times to 84 than the change effect in the effect mode C. The variation effect of the effect mode D executed in a turn has a higher execution ratio of the special effect.

(Type of each special effect)
FIGS. 44 and 45 are tables to be referred to when the sub CPU 102a determines a change effect pattern according to the change effect pattern determination table of FIG. 40, and are stored in the sub ROM 102b.
FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each of the variation effect patterns of the “effect mode A”. FIG. 44A is a diagram showing a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each of the variation effect patterns of the effect mode A when the determination result of the big hit determination is “loss”. In FIG. 44 (b), each special effect pattern of effect mode A when the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is "first jackpot", "second jackpot", "third jackpot" or "small hit". It is a figure which shows the special production type determination table for determining the classification of production.

  In the tables shown in FIGS. 44 (a) and 44 (b), the execution ratio (%) of “serif notice A1” to “serif notice A5” as “serif notice A” is set, and as “character notice A”. The execution proportion (%) of "character notice A1" to "character notice A5" is set, and the execution proportion (%) of "development notice A1" to "development notice A6" as "development notice A" is set. The execution ratio (%) of "decision effect A1" and "decision effect A2" as "decision effect A" is set.

  FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a special effect information table storing setting contents for each type of special effect which can be executed in the fluctuation effect of the effect mode A. FIG. 45A is a diagram showing a “serif notice A information table” storing setting contents for each type of “serif notice A” in the effect mode A. FIG. 45 (b) is a diagram showing “character preview A information table” storing setting contents for each type of “character preview A” in the effect mode A. FIG. 45C is a diagram showing a “development notice A information table” storing setting contents for each type of “development notice A” in the effect mode A. FIG. 45D is a diagram showing a “decision effect A information table” storing setting contents for each type of “decision effect A” in the effect mode A.

  When the sub CPU 102a determines the change effect pattern according to the change effect pattern determination table of FIG. 40, which one of the types of special effects set in the table of FIG. 45 is to be executed is shown in FIGS. It determines by lottery based on the execution ratio shown to the table of.

  The “serif advance notice A1” is for displaying the effect image of “serif a1” of “one thousand bucks!” On the image display device 14. In this "serif advance notice A1", the effect lever 19A is selected as the operation means whose operation becomes effective in the operation effective period, and in the operation effective period (for example, the operation effective period X11 described later), the operation of the effect lever 19A An operation prompting for prompting is performed. Then, based on the fact that the tilt operation is performed on the effect lever 19A in the operation valid period, the effect image of the content that “Chara a1” described later says “One letter !! 62 (see (a-1-4)) is displayed on the image display device 14, and the third decoration member 17C as a movable member is moved from the "standby position 3" to the "operation position 3". Execute the corresponding presentation.

  The “serif advance notice A2” is for displaying an effect image of “serif a2” on the image display device 14 as “whether one hundred cars have been acquired?”. In this "serif notice A2", the effect button 18A is selected as the operation means whose operation becomes effective in the operation effective period, and in the operation effective period (for example, the operation effective period X11 described later), the operation of the effect button 18A An operation prompting prompting the user is executed, and the state of the effect button 18A is kept in the non-projecting state. Then, based on the fact that the character a1 to be described later says "Have a hundred cars acquired as a speech a1" based on the fact that one pressing operation is performed on the effect button 18A in the operation valid period. The effect corresponding to the content, such as displaying the image (see (b-1-4) in FIG. 63) on the image display device 14, is executed.

  The “serif notice A3” is the same as the “serif notice A2” except that the effect image of “serif a3” is displayed on the image display device 14 “is ten cars acquired?”

  The "serif notice A4" does not set the operation effective period, and displays a "serif a 4" effect image "whether one car is acquired?" On the image display 14 at a predetermined timing, except for the "serif notice A2". The contents of the presentation are the same.

  The “serif notice A5” does not set the operation effective period, and displays a “serif a 5” effect image “whether the coin is earned?” At the predetermined timing, “serif notice A1”. The contents of the presentation are the same.

  In the tables of FIGS. 44 (a) and (b), in the case of “serif notice A”, the execution ratio of “serif notice A1” is the lowest in the case of a loss, and in the case of a loss in the case of a big hit etc. “serif notice A1”. Execution rate of the highest. That is, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of “serif notice A1” to “serif notice A5” is highest as “serif notice A1” is highest and becomes lower as “serif notice A2” to “serif notice A5”. In "serif notice A", the execution ratio of "serif notice A1" to "serif notice A5" is set.

  The "serif notice A" is a "serif notice A1" in which the operation prompting prompting operation of the effect lever 19A is executed, and the operation prompting prompting informing the operation of the effect button 18A is executed "serif notice A2"-"serif It consists of a notice A5. Then, in the effect mode A where the jackpot probability is 1/350, the ratio of the loss is considerably higher than the ratio of the jackpot etc., and in the case of this loss, the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is executed The execution ratio of “serif notice A2” to “serif notice A5” to be performed is higher than the execution rate of “serif notice A1” at which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is performed. Therefore, in the "serif announcement" effect of effect mode A, which is the low probability gaming state and the non-time-short playing state, the proportion at which the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the effect button 18A is the operation for urging the operation of the effect lever 19A. It is higher than the rate at which the promotion notification is performed. Also, on the other hand, in the case of a jackpot or the like in the fluctuation mode of the production mode A, the rate at which the “character advance notice A1” is executed in which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the production lever 19A is performed is high. The jackpot expectation (reliability) is higher for the effect for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A than for the effect for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A.

  The “character advance notice A1” is for displaying the effect image of “character a 2-1” on the image display device 14. In this "character advance notice A1", the effect lever 19A is selected as the operation means whose operation becomes effective in the operation effective period, and the operation promotion notification is executed in the operation effective period (for example, the operation effective period Y11 described later). I will not. Then, based on the fact that a tilting operation is performed on the effect lever 19A in the operation valid period, an effect image (see (a-2-4) in FIG. 62) of the after-mentioned “character a 2-1” is displayed on the image display device Execute the corresponding presentation of the contents, such as displaying at 14.

  The "character advance notice A2" is for displaying the effect image of "character a2-2" on the image display device 14. In this "character advance notice A2", the effect button 18A is selected as the operation means whose operation becomes effective in the operation effective period, and the operation promotion notification is performed in the operation effective period (for example, the operation effective period Y11 described later). Then, the state of the effect button 18A is kept in the non-projecting state. Then, based on the fact that the pressing operation is performed once on the effect button 18A in the operation valid period, the effect image of “character a2-2” (see (b-2-4) in FIG. 63) described later is displayed. The corresponding effect of the content to be displayed on the image display device 14 is executed.

  The "character advance notice A3" is "a character a2-2" in place of "chara a2-3" (see (c-2-4 in FIG. 64)) for displaying the effect image on the image display device 14 The contents of the presentation are the same as the character preview A2 ".

  "Chara advance notice A4" does not set the operation effective period, and instead of "Chara a2-2" at a predetermined timing, the effect image of "character notice a2-4" (not shown) is displayed on the image display device 14 The contents of the effect are the same as those of the "character advance notice A2" except for the display.

  "Chara advance notice A5" does not set the operation effective period, and instead of "Chara a2-2" at a predetermined timing, the effect image of "character notice a2-5" (not shown) is displayed on the image display device 14 The contents of the effect are the same as those of the "character advance notice A2" except for the display.

  In the table of FIGS. 44 (a) and (b), in the case of loss in the case of “character notice A”, the execution ratio of “character notice A1” is the lowest, and in the case of loss in the case of big hit etc., “character notice A1” Execution rate of the highest. That is, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of "Chara notice A1" to "Chara notice A5" is highest as "Chara notice A1" becomes highest and becomes lower as they become "Chara notice A2" to "Chara notice A5". The execution ratio of "character preview A1" to "character preview A5" is set.

  "Chara notice A" is based on "Chara notice A1" which displays the effect image of "Chara a 2-1" on the image display device 14 based on the tilting operation of the production lever 19A, and based on the pressing operation of the production button 18A. It is comprised from "character notice A2"-"character notice A5" which displays the effect image of "character a2-2"-"character a2-5" on the image display apparatus 14. And when it is a loss whose ratio is higher than the jackpot etc., the ratio at which "character preview A2" to "character preview A5" in which the character image is displayed based on the pressing operation of the effect button 18A is the production lever This is higher than the rate at which “character advance notice A1” in which a character image is displayed based on the tilting operation of 19A is executed. Therefore, in the "character advance notice A" effect of the effect mode A which is the low probability gaming state and the non-short time playing state, the proportion at which the effect that the character image is displayed based on the operation of the effect button 18A is executed is the effect lever It is higher than the rate at which the effect that the character image is displayed is performed based on the operation of 19A. On the other hand, when it is a jackpot, the rate at which "character preview A1" in which the character image is displayed based on the tilting operation of the rendering lever 19A is increased, and based on the operation of the rendering button 18A. The jackpot expectation (reliability) is higher in the effect in which the character image is displayed based on the operation of the effect lever 19A than in the effect in which the character image is displayed.

  The “development advance notice A1” is for displaying the effect image of the “effect a1” on the image display device 14. In this "development advance notice A1", the effect lever 19A is selected as the operation means whose operation becomes effective in the operation effective period, and in the operation effective period (for example, the operation effective period X12 described later), the operation of the effect lever 19A An operation prompting for prompting is performed. Then, the effect image of “effect a1” (see (a-3-4 in FIG. 62)) is displayed on the image display device 14 based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19A in the operation valid period. At the same time, the corresponding effect of the content of moving the second decorative member 17B as the movable member from the "standby position 2" to the "operating position 2" is executed.

  The "development advance notice A2" is for displaying the effect image of the "effect a2" on the image display device 14. In this "development advance notice A2", the effect button 18A is selected as the operation means whose operation becomes effective in the operation effective period, and in the operation effective period (for example, the operation effective period X12 described later), the operation of the effect button 18A The operation promotion notification for prompting the user is executed, and the state of the effect button 18A is in the projecting state. Then, based on the fact that the effect button 18A is pressed once in the operation effective period, the effect image of “effect a2” is displayed on the image display device 14 and the second decorative member 17B as a movable member The corresponding effect of moving the “standby position 2” to the “operation position 2” is executed.

  "Development notice A3" is displayed as "Development notice A1" except that the effect image of "effect a3" (not shown) is displayed on the image display device 14 instead of "effect a1" and the movable member is not operated. The contents are similar.

  The "development notice A4" is the same as the "development notice A2" except that the production button 18A is in the non-projecting state in the operation effective period.

  The “advance notice A5” is displayed as “advance notice A1” except that the effect image of “effect a2” (not shown) is displayed on the image display device 14 instead of “effect a1” and the movable member is not operated. The contents are similar.

  In "advance notice A6", the effect button 18A is in a non-projecting state in the operation effective period, and a effect image of "effect a3" (not shown) is displayed on the image display device 14 instead of "effect a2" The contents of the presentation are the same as those of "development advance notice A2" except that the player does not operate the game.

  In the tables of FIGS. 44 (a) and 44 (b), in “advance notice A”, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of “advance notice A1” to “advance notice A6” is highest for “advance notice A1”, The execution ratio of "development notice A1" to "development notice A6" is set to be lower as "development notice A2" to "development notice A6".

  The "progress notice A" is executed "Operation advance notice A1" "Development notice A3" "Development notice A5" in which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the production lever 19A is executed, and the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the production button 18A is executed. It consists of "development notice A2", "development notice A4", and "development notice A6". Then, in the effect mode A where the jackpot probability is 1/350, the ratio of the loss is considerably higher than the ratio of the jackpot etc., and in the case of this loss, the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is executed "Promotion notice A1" "Promotion notice A3" "Promotion notice A3" "Promotion notice A5" in which the operation promotion informing the operation of the production lever 19A is executed Higher than the execution rate of Therefore, in the "development advance notice" effect of effect mode A which is the low probability gaming state and the non-time-short playing state, the proportion at which the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of effect button 18A is the operation for urging the operation of production lever 19A. It is higher than the rate at which the promotion notification is performed. In addition, on the other hand, in the case of a big hit or the like in the fluctuation mode of the production mode A, the rate at which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the production lever 19A is high is higher than the effect for prompting the operation of the production button 18A. Also, the jackpot expectation degree (reliability) is higher in the direction for prompting the operation of the direction lever 19A.

  Further, in the tables in FIGS. 44 (a) and (b), in the variation effect developing from “super reach” to “special reach”, the effect button 18A is in a projecting state at a high rate during the operation effective period, “super reach” In the case of the fluctuation effect that does not develop from “special reach”, the execution ratio of “development notice A1” to “development notice A6” is set so that the production button 18A becomes non-protrusion state at a high rate during the operation effective period. ing.

  “Decision effect A1” is to move the first decorative member 17A as a movable member and to display an effect image of “flash a1” on the image display device 14 (see (b-3-3) in FIG. 63). ). In this "decision effect A1", the effect lever 19A is selected as the operating means for which the operation becomes effective in the operation effective period, and in the operation effective period (for example, the operation effective period X22 described later), the operation of the effect lever 19A An operation prompting for prompting is performed. Then, based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19A in the operation effective period, the effect image of "flash light a1" is displayed on the image display device 14, and the first decorative member 17A is "standby position 1". The corresponding effect of the content of moving to “operation position 1-2” is executed.

  "Decision effect A2" is to move the first decorative member 17A as a movable member and to display an effect image of "flash a2" on the image display device 14 (see (b-3-3) in Fig. 63). ). In this "decision effect A2", the effect button 18A is selected as the operation means for which the operation becomes effective in the operation effective period, and in the operation effective period (for example, the operation effective period X22 described later), the operation of the effect button 18A The operation promotion notification for prompting the user is executed, and the state of the effect button 18A is in the projecting state. Then, based on a single pressing operation performed on the effect button 18A in the operation effective period, the effect image of “flash a 2” is displayed on the image display device 14, and the first decorative member 17A is “standby”. The corresponding effect of the content of moving from the position 1 "to the" operation position 1-2 "is executed.

  In the table of FIGS. 44 (a) and (b), in the “decision effect A”, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of “decision effect A1” and “decision effect A2” is “decided” than “decision effect A2” The execution ratio of “decision effect A1” and “decision effect A2” is set so that the effect “A1” is higher. That is, in the case where the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is successful (the first to third jackpots and small hits), the “decision effect A1” is determined at a higher rate than in the case where the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is loss. Ru.

  The “decision effect A” is configured of “decision effect A1” in which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed, and “decision effect A2” in which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is executed. Be done. Then, in the effect mode A where the jackpot probability is 1/350, the ratio of the loss is considerably higher than the ratio of the jackpot etc., and in the case of this loss, the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is executed The execution ratio of the “decided effect A2” to be performed is higher than the execution ratio of the “decided effect A1” in which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed. Therefore, in the “decided effect” of effect mode A, which is the low probability gaming state and the non-time-short playing state, the proportion at which the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of effect button 18A is the operation promotion for urging the operation of production lever 19A It is higher than the rate at which notification is performed. Also, on the other hand, in the "decision effect" of the effect mode A, when it is a big hit etc., the rate at which the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the effect lever 19A is high is high, and the operation of the effect button 18A is urged The jackpot expectation degree (reliability) is higher in the direction in which the operation of the direction lever 19A is urged than in the direction.

FIGS. 46 and 47 are tables to be referred to when the sub CPU 102a determines a change effect pattern according to the change effect pattern determination table of FIG. 40, and are stored in the sub ROM 102b.
FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each of the variation effect patterns in the “effect mode B”. FIG. 46A is a diagram showing a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each of the variation effect patterns in the effect mode B when the determination result of the big hit determination is “loss”. In (b) of FIG. 46, each special variation pattern of effect mode B when the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is "first jackpot", "second jackpot", "third jackpot" or "small hit". It is a figure which shows the special production type determination table for determining the classification of production.

  In the tables shown in FIGS. 46 (a) and 46 (b), execution ratios (%) of "development notice B1" and "development notice B2" as "development notice B" are set, and "decision effect B" is set. The execution ratio (%) of "determination effect B1" and "determination effect B2" is set.

  FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a special effect information table for storing setting contents for each type of special effect which can be executed in the fluctuation effect of the effect mode B, which is stored in the sub ROM 102b. FIG. 47A is a diagram showing a “development notice B information table” storing setting contents for each type of “development notice B” in the effect mode B. FIG. 47B is a diagram showing a “decision effect B information table” storing setting contents for each type of “decision effect B” in the effect mode B.

  When the sub CPU 102a determines the change effect pattern according to the change effect pattern determination table of FIG. 41, which of the types of special effects set in the table of FIG. 47 is to be executed is shown in FIGS. It determines by lottery based on the execution ratio shown to the table of.

  The “development advance notice B1” is for displaying the effect image of the “effect b1” on the image display device 14. In this "development advance notice B1", an operation effective period (for example, an operation effective period X41 described later) in which the operation to the effect button 18A is effective is set, and in the operation effective period, the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the effect button 18A is It is executed (see (d-2-1) in FIG. 66). Then, the effect image of “effect b1” (see (d-2-3) in FIG. 66) is displayed on the image display device 14 based on one pressing operation performed on the effect button 18A in the operation valid period. Perform the corresponding presentation of the contents, such as displaying on.

  The "development advance notice B2" is for displaying the effect image of the "effect b2" on the image display device 14. In this "development advance notice B2," an operation effective period (for example, an operation effective period X41 described later) in which the operation on the production lever 19A is effective is set, and in the operation effective period, the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the production lever 19A It is executed (see (d-2-2) in FIG. 66). Then, the effect image of “effect b2” (see (d-2-3) in FIG. 66) is displayed on the image display device 14 based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19A in the operation valid period. Execute the corresponding presentation of the contents.

  In the tables of FIGS. 46 (a) and 46 (b), in the “advance notice B”, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of “advance notice B1” and “advance notice B2” is “advance notice B2” is “advance notice The execution ratio of "development notice B1" and "development notice B2" is set to be higher than B1.

  The "development notice B" is composed of "development notice B1" in which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is executed, and "development notice B2" in which the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed. Be done. And, in the production mode B which is a high probability gaming state and a short time gaming state where the loss probability is 1 / 1.02, if the loss ratio is considerably higher than the ratio of the big hit etc., the loss is the effect lever The execution ratio of "development effect B2" at which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of 19A is executed is higher than the execution ratio of "development effect B1" at which the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the effect button 18A is performed. Therefore, in "development effect" of effect mode B, which is the high probability gaming state and the short time game state, the proportion at which the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of production lever 19A is the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of production button 18A Is higher than the rate at which it runs. Also, on the other hand, in the "development advance notice" of the production mode B, when it is a big hit etc., the rate at which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the presentation button 18A is high, and urges the operation of the production lever 19A. The jackpot expectation (reliability) is higher for the effect that urges the operation of the effect button 18A than for the effect.

  “Decision effect B1” is to move the first decorative member 17A as a movable member and to display an effect image of “flash b1” on the image display device 14 (see (e-3-4) in FIG. 67). ). In this “decided effect B1”, the effect button 18A is selected as the operation means for which the operation becomes effective in the operation effective period, and in the operation effective period (for example, the operation effective period X52 described later), the operation of the effect button 18A An operation promotion notification for prompting the user is executed (see (e- 3-2) in FIG. 63). Then, based on a single pressing operation on the effect button 18A in the operation effective period, the effect image of “flash b1” is displayed on the image display device 14, and the first decorative member 17A is displayed on the “standby position 1 The corresponding effect of the content such as moving to “operating position 1-2” is executed.

  "Decision effect B2" is to move the first decorative member 17A as a movable member and to display an effect image of "flash b2" on the image display device 14 (see (e-3-4) in Fig. 67). ). In this "decision effect B2", the effect lever 19A is selected as the operating means for which the operation is effective in the operation effective period, and in the operation effective period (for example, the operation effective period X52 described later), the operation of the effect lever 19A An operation promotion notification for prompting the user is executed (see (e-3-3) in FIG. 67). Then, based on the tilting operation on the rendering lever 19A being performed in the operation valid period, a rendering image of "flash b2" is displayed on the image display device 14, and the first decorative member 17A is displayed from "standby position 1" The corresponding effect of the content of moving to the operation position 1-2 "is executed.

  In the table of FIGS. 46 (a) and 46 (b), in the "decision effect B", the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of "decision effect B1" and "decision effect B2" is "decided" than "decision effect B1" The execution proportions of “decision effect B1” and “decision effect B2” are set such that the effect “B2” is higher. That is, the "decision effect B1" is determined at a higher rate in the case where the determination result of the big hit determination is hit (first to third big hit, small hit) than when the determination result of the big hit determination is a loss. Ru.

  The "decision effect B" includes "decision effect B1" in which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is executed, and "decision effect B2" in which the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed. Be done. And, in production mode B which is high probability game state and time saving game state, the execution ratio of “decision effect B2” where operation promotion notification which urges operation of production lever 19A is executed, operation which urges operation of production button 18A It is higher than the execution ratio of “decision effect B1” in which the promotion notification is executed. Therefore, in "determination effect" of effect mode B, which is the high probability gaming state and the short time gaming state, the proportion at which the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of production lever 19A is the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of production button 18A Is higher than the rate at which it runs. On the other hand, when it is a big hit etc., in the "decided effect" of the effect mode B, the rate at which the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the effect button 18A is high is high, and the operation of the effect lever 19A is urged The jackpot expectation (reliability) is higher for the effect that urges the operation of the effect button 18A than for the effect.

FIGS. 48 and 49 are tables to be referred to when the sub CPU 102a determines a change effect pattern according to the change effect pattern determination table of FIG. 42, and are stored in the sub ROM 102 b.
FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each of the variation effect patterns of the “effect mode C”. FIG. 48A is a diagram showing a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each of the variation effect patterns of the effect mode C when the determination result of the big hit determination is “loss”. In FIG. 48 (b), each special effect pattern of the effect mode C when the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is "first jackpot", "second jackpot", "third jackpot" or "small hit". It is a figure which shows the special production type determination table for determining the classification of production.

  In the tables shown in FIGS. 48 (a) and 48 (b), the execution proportions (%) of “development notice C1” and “development notice C2” as “development notice C” are set, and “decision effect C” is set. The execution ratio (%) of "determination effect C1" and "determination effect C2" is set.

  FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a special effect information table for storing setting contents for each type of special effects which can be executed in the fluctuation effect of the effect mode C, which is stored in the sub ROM 102b. FIG. 49A is a view showing a “development notice C information table” storing setting contents for each type of “development notice C” in the effect mode C. FIG. 49B is a diagram showing a “decision effect C information table” storing setting contents for each type of “decision effect C” in the effect mode C.

  When the sub CPU 102a determines the change effect pattern according to the change effect pattern determination table of FIG. 42, which one of the types of special effects set in the table of FIG. 49 is to be executed is shown in FIGS. It determines by lottery based on the execution ratio shown to the table of.

  The “development advance notice C1” is for displaying the effect image of “effect c1” (see (g-2-3) in FIG. 69) on the image display device 14. The “development advance notice C1” is to display the effect image of the “effect c1” on the image display device 14. In this "development notice C1," an operation valid period (for example, an operation valid period X71 described later) in which the operation on the effect button 18A is valid is set, and in the operation valid period, an operation promotion notification for prompting operation of the effect button 18A is It is executed (see (g-2-1) in FIG. 69). Then, the effect image of “effect c1” (see (g-2-3 in FIG. 69)) is displayed on the image display device 14 based on the fact that the effect button 18A is pressed once in the operation valid period. Perform the corresponding presentation of the contents, such as displaying on.

  The “development advance notice C2” is to display the effect image of “effect c2” on the image display device 14. In this "development advance notice C2," an operation valid period (for example, an operation valid period X71 described later) in which the operation on the production lever 19A is valid is set, and in the operation valid period, operation promotion notification for prompting operation of the production lever 19A is It is executed (see (g-2-2) in FIG. 68). Then, the effect image of "effect c2" (see (g-2-3 in FIG. 69)) is displayed on the image display device 14 based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19A in the operation valid period. Execute the corresponding presentation of the contents.

  In the table of FIGS. 48 (a) and 48 (b), in the "advance notice C", the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of "advance notice C1" and "advance notice C2" is "advance notice C2" is "advance notice" The execution ratio of "development notice C1" and "development notice C2" is set to be higher than C1.

  "Development notice C" is composed of "Development notice C1" in which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is executed, and "Evolution notice C2" in which the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed. Be done. And, in the production mode C which is a high probability gaming state and a short time gaming state where the loss probability is 1 / 1.02, if the loss ratio is considerably higher than the ratio of the big hit etc., the loss is the effect lever The execution ratio of "development effect C2" at which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of 19A is executed is higher than the execution ratio of "development effect C1" at which the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the effect button 18A is performed. Therefore, in the "development effect" of the production mode C which is the high probability gaming state and the short time gaming state, the proportion at which the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the production lever 19A is the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the presentation button 18A. Is higher than the rate at which it runs. On the other hand, in the "prediction of development" of the production mode C, when it is a big hit etc., the rate at which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the presentation button 18A is high, and urges the operation of the production lever 19A. The jackpot expectation (reliability) is higher for the effect that urges the operation of the effect button 18A than for the effect.

  “Decision effect C1” is to move the first decorative member 17A as a movable member and to display an effect image of “flash c1” on the image display device 14 (see (g-3-4) in FIG. 69). ). In this “decided effect C1”, the effect button 18A is selected as the operation means for which the operation becomes effective in the operation effective period, and in the operation effective period (for example, the operation effective period X72 described later), the operation of the effect button 18A An operation prompting for prompting the user is executed (see (g-3-2) in FIG. 69). Then, based on a single pressing operation on the effect button 18A in the operation effective period, the effect image of “flash c1” is displayed on the image display device 14, and the first decorative member 17A is displayed on the “standby position 1 The corresponding effect of the content such as moving to “operating position 1-2” is executed.

  "Decision effect C2" is to move the first decorative member 17A as a movable member and to display an effect image of "flash c2" on the image display device 14 (see (g-3-4) in FIG. 69). ). In this "decided effect C2", the effect lever 19A is selected as the operating means for which the operation becomes effective in the operation effective period, and in the operation effective period (for example, the operation effective period X52 described later), the operation of the effect lever 19A An operation prompting for prompting the user is executed (see (g-3-3) in FIG. 69). Then, based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19A in the operation effective period, the effect image of "flash c2" is displayed on the image display device 14, and the first decorative member 17A is displayed from "standby position 1" The corresponding effect of the content of moving to the operation position 1-2 "is executed.

  In the table of FIGS. 48 (a) and 48 (b), in the "decision effect C", the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of the "decision effect C1" and the "decision effect C2" is "decided" than the "decision effect C1". The execution ratio of "decision effect C1" and "decision effect C2" is set so that the effect C2 is higher. That is, the "decision effect B1" is determined at a higher rate in the case where the determination result of the big hit determination is hit (first to third big hit, small hit) than when the determination result of the big hit determination is a loss. Ru.

  The "decision effect C" is composed of the "decision effect C1" in which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is executed and the "decision effect C2" in which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed. Be done. And, in production mode C which is high probability game state and time saving game state, when it is a loss, the execution ratio of "decision effect C2" for which the operation promotion notification which urges the operation of production lever 19A is executed is the production button 18A It is higher than the execution ratio of the “decision effect C1” in which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of is performed. Therefore, in "determination effect" of effect mode C, which is a high probability gaming state and a short time gaming state, the proportion at which the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of production lever 19A is the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of production button 18A Is higher than the rate at which it runs. On the other hand, when it is a big hit etc., in the "decided effect" of the effect mode C, the rate at which the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the effect button 18A is high is high, and the operation of the effect lever 19A is urged The jackpot expectation (reliability) is higher for the effect that urges the operation of the effect button 18A than for the effect.

FIGS. 50 and 51 are tables to be referred to when the sub CPU 102a determines a change effect pattern according to the change effect pattern determination table of FIG. 43, and are stored in the sub ROM 102b.
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each of the variation effect patterns of the “effect mode D”. FIG. 50A is a diagram showing a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each of the variation effect patterns in the effect mode D when the determination result of the big hit determination is “loss”. In FIG. 50 (b), each special effect pattern of the effect mode D when the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is "first jackpot", "second jackpot", "third jackpot" or "small hit". It is a figure which shows the special production type determination table for determining the classification of production.

  In the tables shown in FIGS. 50 (a) and 50 (b), execution ratios (%) of "development notice D1" as "development notice D" and "development notice D2" are set, and "decision effect D" is set. The execution ratio (%) of "determination effect D1" and "determination effect D2" is set.

  FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a special effect information table for storing setting contents for each type of special effect which can be executed in the fluctuation effect of the effect mode D, which is stored in the sub ROM 102b. 51 (a) is a diagram showing a "development notice D information table" storing setting contents for each type of "development notice D" in the effect mode D. FIG. FIG. 51 (b) is a view showing a “decision effect D information table” storing setting contents for each type of “decision effect D” in the effect mode D.

  When the sub CPU 102a determines the change effect pattern according to the change effect pattern determination table of FIG. 43, which one of the types of special effects set in the table of FIG. 51 is to be executed is shown in FIGS. It determines by lottery based on the execution ratio shown to the table of.

  The "development advance notice D1" is to display the effect image of "effect d1" (see (j-3-3) in FIG. 71) on the image display device 14. In this "development notice D1", an operation effective period (for example, an operation effective period X101 described later) in which the operation to the effect button 18A is effective is set, and in the operation effective period, the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is To be executed. Then, based on the fact that the effect button 18A is pressed once in the operation valid period, the corresponding effect of displaying the effect image of “effect d1” on the image display device 14 is executed.

  The "development advance notice D2" is for displaying the effect image of "effect d1" (see (j-3-3) in FIG. 71) on the image display device 14. In this "development notice D2," an operation effective period (for example, an operation effective period X101 described later) in which the operation on the production lever 19A is effective is set, and in the operation effective period, the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the production lever 19A is To be executed. Then, based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19A in the operation valid period, the corresponding effect of displaying the effect image of “effect d2” on the image display device 14 is executed.

  In the tables of FIGS. 50 (a) and 50 (b), in the "advance notice D", the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of "advance notice D1" and "advance notice D2" is "advance notice D2" is "advance notice The execution ratio of "development notice D1" and "development notice D2" is set to be higher than D1.

  "Development notice D" is composed of "Development notice D1" in which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is executed, and "Development notice D2 in which the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed. Be done. And, in the production mode D, which is a high probability gaming state and a short time gaming state where the loss probability is 1 / 1.02, the ratio of the loss is considerably higher than the ratio of the big hit etc. In this case, the rate at which the “promotional effect D2” is executed at which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is performed is greater than the rate at which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is performed high. Therefore, in "development effect" of effect mode D, which is a high probability gaming state and a short time game state, the proportion at which the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of production lever 19A is the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of production button 18A Is higher than the rate at which it runs. Also, on the other hand, in the "development advance notice" of the effect mode D, when it is a big hit etc. whose rate is lower than the loss, the rate at which the operation promotion notification for prompting operation of the effect button 18A is executed is high. The jackpot expectation (reliability) is higher in the effect of urging the operation of the effect button 18A than the effect of urging the operation of the lever 19A.

  The “character advance notice D1” is for displaying the effect image of “character d1” on the image display device 14. In this "character advance notice D1", the effect button 18A is selected as the operation means which makes the operation effective during the operation effective period, and the operation promotion notification is executed in the operation effective period (for example, the operation effective period Y101 described later). (See (j-4-1) in FIG. 71). Then, based on the fact that one pressing operation is performed on the effect button 18A in the operation valid period, an image display (see (j-4-3) in FIG. 71) of the effect image of “character d1” described later is displayed. The corresponding effect of the content to be displayed on the device 14 is executed.

  The contents of the "character preview D2" are the same as those of the "character preview D1" except that the effect display image of the "character d2" (not shown) is displayed on the image display device 14 instead of the "character d1".

  The “character advance notice D3” is for displaying the effect image of “character d3” on the image display device 14. In this "character advance notice D3", the effect lever 19A is selected as the operation means which becomes effective during the operation valid period, and the operation promotion notification is executed in the operation valid period (for example, the operation valid period Y101 described later). (See (j-4-1) in FIG. 71). Then, based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19A in the operation valid period, the corresponding effect of displaying the effect image of “Chara d3” on the image display device 14 is executed.

  In the tables of FIGS. 50 (a) and 50 (b), the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot from "character notice D1" to "character notice D3" is the highest for "character notice D1" in "development notice D". The execution ratio of "character notice D1" to "character notice D3" is set to be lower as "character notice D2" and "character notice D3".

  "Chara advance notice D" is executed "Operation advance notice to prompt operation of effect button 18A" "Chara notice D1" "Chara advance notice D2", and operation promotion notice to prompt operation of production lever 19A is executed "Chara notice And “D3”. And in production mode D which is high probability game state and time saving game state, the execution ratio of "development effect D3" where operation promotion information which urges operation of production lever 19A is executed, operation which urges operation of production button 18A It is higher than the execution ratio of "character notice D1" and "character notice D2" in which the promotion notification is executed. Therefore, in "development effect" of effect mode D, which is a high probability gaming state and a short time game state, the proportion at which the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of production lever 19A is the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of production button 18A Is higher than the rate at which it runs. Also, on the other hand, when the player is in the jackpot or the like in the "development advance notice" of the effect mode D, the rate at which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is high, and urges the operation of the effect lever 19A. The jackpot expectation (reliability) is higher for the effect that urges the operation of the effect button 18A than for the effect.

  “Decision effect D1” is to move the first decorative member 17A as a movable member and to display an effect image of “flash light d1” on the image display device 14 (see (j-4-6) in FIG. 71) ). In this “decided effect D1”, the effect button 18A is selected as the operation means whose operation becomes effective in the operation effective period, and in the operation effective period (for example, the operation effective period X102 described later), the operation of the effect button 18A The operation promotion notification for prompting the user is executed, and the state of the effect button 18A is in the projecting state. Then, based on a single pressing operation performed on the effect button 18A in the operation effective period, the effect image of “flash d1” is displayed on the image display device 14, and the first decorative member 17A is “standby”. The corresponding effect of the content of moving from the position 1 "to the" operation position 1-2 "is executed.

  "Decision effect D2" is to move the first decorative member 17A as a movable member and to display an effect image of "flash light d2" on the image display device 14 (see (j-4-6) in FIG. 71) ). In this "decided effect D2", the effect lever 19A is selected as the operation means for which the operation becomes effective in the operation effective period, and in the operation effective period (for example, the operation effective period X102 described later), the operation of the effect lever 19A An operation prompting for prompting is performed. Then, based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19A in the operation effective period, the effect image of "flash light d2" is displayed on the image display device 14, and the first decorative member 17A is "standby position 1". The corresponding effect of the content of moving to “operation position 1-2” is executed.

  In the tables of FIGS. 50 (a) and 50 (b), in the "decision effect D", the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of the "decision effect D1" and the "decision effect D2" is "decided" than the "decision effect D2". The execution ratio of "decision effect D1" and "decision effect D2" is set so that the effect D1 is higher. That is, the "decision effect D1" is determined at a higher rate in the case where the determination result of the big hit determination is hit (first to third big hit, small hit) than when the determination result of the big hit determination is loss. Ru.

  In the tables of FIGS. 50 (a) and 50 (b), in the case of the “decision effect D”, in the case of a loss, the “big hit or small hit” is performed such that the “decision effect D2” is executed at a higher rate than the “decision effect D1”. In the case of, each execution ratio is set such that “decision effect D1” is executed at a higher rate than “decision effect D2”.

  The "decision effect D" is composed of a "decision effect D1" in which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is executed and a "decision effect D2" in which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed. Be done. And in production mode D which is high probability game state and time saving game state, the execution ratio of "decision effect D2" where operation promotion information which urges operation of production lever 19A is executed, operation which urges operation of production button 18A It is higher than the execution ratio of the “decision effect D1” in which the promotion notification is performed. Therefore, in the "decided effect" of the effect mode D, which is the high probability gaming state and the short time gaming state, the proportion at which the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the production lever 19A is the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the production button 18A. Is higher than the rate at which it runs. On the other hand, when it is a big hit etc., in the "decided effect" of the effect mode C, the rate at which the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the effect button 18A is high is high, and the operation of the effect lever 19A is urged The jackpot expectation (reliability) is higher for the effect that urges the operation of the effect button 18A than for the effect.

  In addition, with regard to the “development advance notice” and the “decided effect” in the effect mode B, the effect mode C, and the effect mode D, the jackpot expectation degrees are different. That is, of the “development notice B1” executed in the production mode B, the “development notice C1” executed in the production mode C, and the “development notice D1” executed in the production mode D, “development notice D1”. The jackpot expectation (reliability) is the highest, and the jackpot expectation is lower as “development notice C1” and “development notice B1”. Further, among the “decision effect B1” executed in the effect mode B, the “decision effect C1” executed in the effect mode C, and the “decision effect D1” executed in the effect mode D, the “decision effect D1” The jackpot expectation (reliability) is the highest, and the jackpot expectation is lower as “decision effect C1” and “decision effect B1”. Therefore, in the high probability gaming state and the short time gaming state, it can be said that the jackpot expectation degree by the effect using the effect button 18A becomes higher as the effect mode B, the effect mode C, and the effect mode D progress.

  The sub CPU 102a operates the operation means (effect button 18A or effect lever 19A) during the operation effective period in which the operation to the operation means (effect button 18A or effect lever 19A) is effective as a special effect in the figure variation effect Perform the corresponding effect based on.

  The sub CPU 102a has a higher rate than the earlier period (first period) in the specific gaming state (high probability gaming state and short time gaming state) after the end of the jackpot game, and the later period in the specific gaming state (first time) In the second period after the period of (1), the operation effective period is set during the fluctuation effect.

  That is, the operation effective period is set during the fluctuation effect at a higher rate of the fluctuation effect (the fluctuation 31st to the 74th) of the effect mode C than the fluctuation effect of the effect mode B (the first to 30th fluctuation). In addition, the operation effective period is set during the fluctuation effect at a higher rate in the fluctuation effect (the fluctuation 75th to the 84th time) of the effect mode D than the fluctuation effect of the effect mode C.

  In addition, the sub CPU 102a has a higher rate than the earlier period (first period) in the specific gaming state (high probability gaming state and short time gaming state) after the end of the big hit game, and the later period in the specific gaming state ( In the second period after the first period), the operation effective period is set such that the effect button 18A as the operation means for making the operation effective is in the projecting state which is the second state.

  In addition, when the sub CPU 102a is in the low probability gaming state and the non-time-short playing state, the sub CPU 102a executes the special effect using the operation of the effect button 18A at a high ratio than the special effect using the operation of the effect lever 19A. On the other hand, in the low probability gaming state and the non-short play state, the special effect using the operation of the effect lever 19A is made to have a higher jackpot expectation than the special effect using the operation of the effect button 18A. . On the other hand, on the other hand, in the specific gaming state (high probability gaming state and short time gaming state), the percentage of special effects using the operation of the effect lever 19A is higher than the special effects using the operation of the effect button 18A. Run with On the other hand, in the specific gaming state, the jackpot expectation level is higher for the special effect using the operation of the effect button 18A than the special effect using the operation of the effect lever 19A.

(Variation effect pattern determination process by effect control board)
The fluctuation effect pattern determination process by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S1311-1, the sub CPU 102a refers to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c to set the current effect mode setting process (see FIG. 36) described later. The effect mode is confirmed, and a variation effect pattern determination table associated with the current effect mode is selected.

  In this step S1311-1, the sub CPU 102a refers to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and confirms that the current effect mode is "effect mode A". The fluctuation presentation pattern determination table associated with the presentation mode A shown in FIG. 40 is selected.

  Alternatively, in step S1311-1, the sub CPU 102a refers to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and confirms that the current effect mode is "effect mode B". In order to select the variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode B shown in FIG.

  Alternatively, in step S1311-1, the sub CPU 102a refers to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c and confirms that the current effect mode is "effect mode C". In order to select the variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode C shown in FIG.

  Alternatively, in step S1311-1, the sub CPU 102a refers to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and confirms that the current effect mode is "effect mode D". In order to select the variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode D shown in FIG.

  Alternatively, in step S1311-1, the sub CPU 102a refers to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c and confirms that the current effect mode is "effect mode E". In order to select the variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode E (not shown).

  In step S1311-2, the sub CPU 102a confirms the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

  In the present embodiment, one or more change effect patterns are stored in association with the change effect pattern determination value for each special pattern change pattern specification command in each effect mode. The fluctuation presentation pattern is identification information representing the contents of the presentation of the fluctuation presentation, and specific presentation modes of the fluctuation presentation are associated with each other.

  The fluctuation production pattern is associated with the time of the fluctuation production, the mode of the fluctuation display of the production design, the presence or absence of the reach production, the content of the reach production, and the component of the fluctuation production such as the presentation development configuration. In addition, in the variation production pattern of the variation production in the image display device 14, the display mode of the variation display of the production design, and the display mode concerning the object image and the background image constituted by the character etc. are also elements of the variation production. It is associated.

  In step S1311-3, the sub CPU 102a acquires a random number for variation effect pattern determination. Specifically, the sub CPU 102a stores the random number value indicated by the random number counter related to the random number for fluctuation effect pattern determination in the random number storage area for fluctuation effect pattern judgment of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S 1311-4, the sub CPU 102 a collates the random number for variation presentation pattern determination stored in the random number storage area for variation performance pattern determination in step S 1313-4 against the selected variation performance pattern determination table, Process to determine

  In step S1311-5, the sub CPU 102a executes (〇) and non-execution (×) information of the special effect associated with the fluctuation effect of the fluctuation effect pattern determined in step S1313 (FIG. By confirming (see FIG. 43), it is determined whether or not special presentation is to be performed in the fluctuation presentation of the determined fluctuation presentation pattern. The sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1311-6 if the special rendering is to be executed, and shifts the processing to the step S1311-9 if it is determined that the special rendering is not to be executed.

  In step S1311-6, the sub CPU 102a confirms the special effect associated with the fluctuation effect pattern determined in step S1311-4. For example, when the sub CPU 102a determines "variation effect pattern A034" in step S1311-4, it executes "serif notice A", "character notice A", and "development notice A" as special effects in step S1311-6. And confirm that the "decision effect A" is not executed (see FIG. 40).

In step S1311-7, the sub CPU 102a performs a process of determining the type of the special effect confirmed in step S1311-6 by lottery.
In step S1311-8, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the process of determining the type of special effect in step S1311-7 has been completed for all of the special effects confirmed in step S1311-6, and determines that the process is completed. If it is determined that the process has not been completed, the process returns to step S1311-7.

  For example, when the sub CPU 102a determines "variation effect pattern A 034" in step S1311-4, in step S1311-7, the execution ratio according to the special effect type determination table in effect mode A in FIG. Decide any of "Serif notice A1" to "Serif notice A5" as the type of "serif notice A", and determine any of "chara notice A1" to "chara notice A5" as the type of "character notice A" Then, one of “development notice A1” to “development notice A6” is determined as the type of “development notice A”.

  In step S1311-9, the sub CPU 102a performs processing to determine whether or not to execute a specific effect. The specific effect is an effect that suggests the jackpot expectation using the vibration of the effect button 18A or the like. Specifically, the sub CPU 102a refers to the specific effect determination table shown in FIG. 52 and FIG. 53, and based on the received special figure fluctuation pattern specification command or the specific effect determination random number value, determines whether or not the specific effect is executed. judge. In the present embodiment, when the reach effect is not performed and when the reach effect is the normal effect, the specific effect is not performed.

  For example, when the special figure variation pattern specification command is “E6H04H”, it is determined that the specific effect is to be executed at a rate of 50% (o), and it is determined that the specific effect is not to be executed at a rate of 50% (x). Further, when the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command is “E6H0CH”, it is determined that the specific effect is to be executed at a rate of 80% (○), and it is determined that the specific effect is not performed at a rate of 20% (×).

  In step S1311-10, the sub CPU 102a confirms whether or not it is determined that the specific effect is to be executed (o) in step S1311-9. Then, if it is determined that the specific effect is to be executed (○), the process proceeds to step S1311-11, and if it is determined that the specific effect is not to be executed (×), the process proceeds to step S1311-12.

  In step S1311-11, the sub CPU 102a executes a specific effect type determination process for determining the type of the specific effect. The specific effect is performed by any one or a combination of the vibration of the effect button 18A, the output of the pseudo sound of the sound that the effect button 18A vibrates, and the display of the image in which the effect button 18A vibrates. Also, the vibration of the effect button 18A is one of two types, low speed vibration and high speed vibration.

  The specific effect type determination process is specifically described with reference to FIG. First, in step S1311-11-1, the sub CPU 102a executes a vibration speed determination process for determining the vibration speed of the effect button 18A in the specific effect.

  Specifically, sub CPU 102a refers to the specific effect vibration speed determination table shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, and uses the received special figure fluctuation pattern designation command and the random value for vibration speed determination to set the vibration speed to “low speed”. And either "fast". As shown in FIGS. 72 (a) and 72 (b), the effect button 18A can be vibrated. The “high speed” is a vibration speed at which “pocopopo poco poco” and vibration are transmitted to the player when the player touches the effect button 18A while the effect button 18A is vibrating. On the other hand, "low speed" means, as described above, that when the player touches the effect button 18A while the effect button 18A is vibrating, the vibration is transmitted to the player as "poco ... poko ..." It is a vibration speed.

  For example, when the special figure variation pattern designation command is "E6H05H", "fast" is determined at a rate of 50%, and "slow" is determined at a rate of 50%. In addition, when the special figure fluctuation pattern specification command is “E7H5BH”, “high speed” is determined at a rate of 90%, and “low speed” is determined at a rate of 10%. In the present embodiment, when the determination result is a big hit, the rate at which the vibration speed of the effect button 18A is determined to be “faster” than “slow” is higher than in the case of losing. In addition, as the effect content (reach effect) associated with the special figure fluctuation pattern specification command is a effect with a high hit probability, the vibration speed of the effect button 18A is determined to be "higher than" "slow speed" Rate has become high. Therefore, when the specific effect is performed, the jackpot expectation degree is higher when the vibration speed of the effect button 18A is "high speed" than when the vibration speed is "low speed". When "high speed" is determined in this step, the effect button 18A is vibrated at high speed when executing the specific effect, and when "low speed" is determined, the effect button 18A is vibrated at low speed when the specific effect is performed. .

  In step S1311-11-2, the sub CPU 102a executes sound output determination processing for determining whether to output a pseudo sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 18A in the specific effect.

  Specifically, sub CPU 102a refers to the specific effect sound output determination table shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, and uses the received special figure variation pattern specification command and the sound output determination random value to determine presence / absence of sound output. decide. The sound output is to output from the sound output device 15 a sound such as “Poko Poko Poko Poko” or “Poko ... Poko ...” which is the vibration sound of the presentation button 18A during execution of the specific effect.

  For example, when the special figure fluctuation pattern specification command is “E6H05H”, it is decided to execute the voice output at a rate of 50% (○) and not to execute the voice output at a rate of 50% (×) Do. Also, when the special figure fluctuation pattern specification command is “E7H5BH”, it is decided to execute the voice output at a rate of 90% (○) and not to execute the voice output at a rate of 10% (×) Do. In the present embodiment, when the determination result is a big hit, the rate at which the voice output is performed (高 く) is higher than in the case of the loss. In addition, as the effect content (reach effect) associated with the special image variation pattern specification command is an effect with a high hit probability, the rate at which voice output is executed (○) is higher. Therefore, when the specific effect is performed, the effect of outputting the pseudo sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 18A is a effect having a higher jackpot expectation degree than the effect of not outputting the sound.

  In step S1311-11-3, the sub CPU 102a executes an image output determination process for determining whether or not to output data of a simulated image of the effect button 18A that vibrates in the specific effect.

  Specifically, sub CPU 102a refers to the specific effect image output determination table shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, and determines the presence / absence of image output using the received special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command and the image output determination random value. Do. The output of an image is to display on the image display device 14 an image that schematically represents a state in which the effect button 18A vibrates during execution of a specific effect.

  For example, when the special figure fluctuation pattern specification command is “E6H05H”, it is decided to execute the image output at a rate of 50% (○) and not to execute the image output at a rate of 50% (×) Do. Also, when the special figure fluctuation pattern specification command is “E7H5BH”, it is decided to execute the image output at a rate of 90% (○) and not to execute the image output at a rate of 10% (×) Do. In the present embodiment, when the determination result is a big hit, the ratio of executing the image output (○) is higher than in the case of the loss. In addition, as the effect content (reach effect) associated with the special image variation pattern specification command is a effect with high jackpot expectation, the ratio of executing the image output (○) is higher. Therefore, when the specific effect is performed, the effect of outputting a pseudo image of the vibrating effect button 18A is a effect having a higher jackpot expectation degree than the effect of not outputting the image.

  As described above, the sub CPU 102a determines the effect mode in the specific effect by executing the processes of step S1311-1-1 to step S1311-11-3. The vibration speed of the effect button 18A, the simulated sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 18A, and the display of the image of the effect button 18A that vibrates are determined according to the jackpot expectation. That is, in the specific effect, whether the effect button 18A vibrates at "high speed" or "low speed", or the simulated vibration sound of the effect button 18A is output from the audio output device 15, or the effect is displayed on the image display device 14. Whether the image representing the button 18A is displayed indicates the jackpot expectation. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 60, by the combination of the vibration speed of the effect button 18A, the output of the vibration sound of the simulated effect button 18A, and the display of the image of the effect button 18A, the jackpot expectation degree is stepwise It is supposed to be different.

  Specifically, as shown in the jackpot expectation degree of the specific effect shown in FIG. 60, the effect button 18A vibrates at "high speed" in the specific effect, and a simulated vibration sound of the effect button 18A is output, and further, When the image of the effect button 18A is displayed, the effect indicates the highest expected jackpot probability. On the other hand, when the effect button 18A vibrates only at "low speed" and the output of the simulated vibration sound of the effect button 18A or the image of the effect button 18A is not performed, the specific effect of the lowest jackpot expectation is obtained.

  In the present embodiment, when the specific effect is executed, as shown in the specific effect type determination process of FIG. 36, the vibration speed of the effect button 18A, the presence or absence of the output of the simulated vibration sound of the effect button 18A, and Although the presence or absence of the output of the image of the effect button 18A which vibrates is respectively determined, it is not restricted to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 60, the combination of the vibration speed of the effect button 18A, the presence or absence of the output of the simulated vibration sound of the effect button 18A, and the presence or absence of the output of the image of the effect button 18A which vibrates is set in advance. The combination of specific effects may be determined according to the jackpot expectation. In addition, combinations of specific effects may be set in association with each variation effect pattern.

  When the specific effect type determination process ends, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1311-12.

  In step S1311-12, the sub CPU 102a determines, in step S1311-11, the change effect control command corresponding to the change effect pattern determined in step S1311-4, and the information of the special effect of the type determined in step S1311-7. Information on the type of the specified special effect is included, and the variation effect control command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1311-13, the sub CPU 102a stores the fluctuation effect data corresponding to the determined fluctuation effect pattern in the fluctuation effect data storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and sets the effect time of the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation effect timer counter. . The fluctuation effect timer counter is subjected to “4” addition processing in step S1200. The sub CPU 102a can grasp the elapsed time of the fluctuation effect at the present time by the fluctuation effect timer counter.

  The variation effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1500. Then, when the image control board 105 receives the change effect control command, the image control board 105 controls the image display device 14 to display the effect image of the change effect based on the change effect pattern indicated by the command, and outputs the sound of the change effect to the voice output device Perform control to output from 15. In addition, when the lamp control board 104 receives the fluctuation effect control command, the lamp control board 104 performs operation control of the effect product device 17 in the fluctuation effect based on the fluctuation effect pattern indicated by the command and illumination control of the effect illumination device 16.

  In addition, the image control board 105 causes the image display device 14 to display the effect image of the special effect at the execution timing of the special effect associated with the fluctuation effect pattern indicated by the fluctuation effect control command received from the effect control substrate 102. The control and control of outputting the sound of the special effect from the sound output device 15 are performed. In addition, when the lamp control board 104 receives the variation production control command, the lamp control board 104 performs operation control of the rendering use object apparatus 17 and illumination control of the production illumination apparatus 16 in the special production associated with the fluctuation production pattern indicated by the command. Do.

(Processing for setting effect mode by effect control board)
Next, the rendering mode setting process will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S1314-1, the sub CPU 102a confirms the special effect design designating command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1314-2, confirms whether or not the result of the jackpot determination is lost. . The sub CPU 102a moves the process to step S1314-3 when confirming that there is a loss, and moves the process to step S1314-7 when confirming that it is not a loss.

In step S1314-7, the sub CPU 102a confirms the result of the special symbol determination based on the information possessed by the special rendering symbol designation command confirmed in step S1314-1. Then, the sub CPU 102a refers to the effect mode determination table (FIG. 39) stored in the sub ROM 102b, and collates the result of the special symbol determination that has been confirmed with the effect mode determination table to determine the effect mode.
If the result of the special symbol determination confirmed in step S1314-1 is the first jackpot or the second jackpot, as shown in FIG. 39, the "effect mode B" is determined. As a result, after the end of the first jackpot game or after the end of the second jackpot game, "effect mode B" is set.
Further, when the result of the special symbol determination confirmed in this step S1314-1 is the third jackpot or the small jackpot, as shown in FIG. 39, the "effect mode E" is determined. As a result, after the end of the third jackpot game or after the end of the small hit game, "effect mode E" is set.

  In step S1314-8, the sub CPU 102a stores the effect mode flag corresponding to the effect mode determined in step S1314-7 in the effect mode flag storage area, and the number of times of effect mode execution that is associated with the effect mode (Ma) is stored in the effect mode remaining number counter provided in the sub RAM 102c, and the effect mode setting process is ended.

  The effect mode executable number of times is the number of fluctuation effects that can be executed by the effect mode. The effect mode remaining number counter indicates the remaining number (M: effect mode remaining number) of fluctuation effects that can be executed in a specific effect mode in which the effect mode executable number (Ma) is set.

If “effect mode B” is determined in step S 1314-7 described above, “effect mode B” is set after the end of the first jackpot game or after the end of the second jackpot game, and the number of effect mode execution possible ( 30 times are memorized as Ma).
In addition, when “effect mode E” is determined in the above-mentioned step S1314-7, “effect mode E” is set after the end of the third jackpot game or after the end of the small hit game, and the effect mode execution frequency 84 times are stored as (Ma).

  On the other hand, in step S1314-3, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the effect mode A is currently set, that is, whether the effect mode flag "00H" is set in the effect mode flag storage area.

  When the sub CPU 102a receives the initialization designation command transmitted from the main control board 101 in the initialization process of step S10 in the main process of the main control board described above, the effect mode flag "00H" is transferred to the effect mode of the sub RAM 102c. The effect mode A is set by storing in the flag area.

  If the sub CPU 102a determines in step S1314-3 that the effect mode A is set, the effect mode setting process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the sub CPU 102a is not in the rendering mode A, then in step S1314-4, the sub CPU 102a subtracts “1” from the counter value of the rendering mode remaining number counter to update the remaining number (M) of the rendering mode; At -5, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the effect mode remaining number counter is "0".

  In step S1314-5, when the sub CPU 102a determines that the counter value of the effect mode remaining number counter of the effect mode remaining number of times (M) is not "0", the effect mode setting process is ended, and the counter value is " If it is determined that it is 0, in step S1314-6, the effect mode flag of "transfer destination effect mode" shown in FIG. 39 is stored in the effect mode flag storage area (setting of transfer destination effect mode), and the effect mode is set End the process.

  For example, in the high probability gaming state and the time saving gaming state after the first jackpot game or the second jackpot game, the sub CPU 102 a sets M = 0 in step S 1314-5 in a state where the effect mode is set to the effect mode B. If it is determined that there is (YES in S1314-5), in step S1314-6, the rendering mode C is set as the rendering mode after the rendering mode B (transition destination rendering mode).

  When sub CPU 102 a determines that M = 0 in step S 1314-5 in a state where effect mode C is set (YES in S 1314-5), effect mode C in step S 1314-6. The rendering mode D is set as the subsequent rendering mode (transition destination rendering mode).

  When sub CPU 102a determines that M = 0 in step S1314-5 in a state where effect mode D is set (YES in S1314-5), effect mode D in step S1314-6. The rendering mode A is set as the subsequent rendering mode (transition destination rendering mode).

In the present embodiment, as shown in the effect mode determination table of FIG. 39, effect mode A is set in the low probability gaming state and the non-time-short playing state.
In addition, in the high probability gaming state and the time saving gaming state after the first jackpot game or the second jackpot game when the first jackpot or the second jackpot is won, if the special figure fluctuation number is 1 to 30 times The effect mode B is set, and the effect mode C is set if the number of times of special figure fluctuation is 31 to 74 times, and the mode of effect D is set if the number of times of special figure fluctuation is 75 to 84 times.
Further, if the number of times of special figure fluctuation after the third jackpot game or the small jackpot game when winning in the third jackpot or small hit is 1 to 84 times, the effect mode E is set.

  The sub CPU 102a determines a variation effect pattern based on the variation effect pattern determination table according to the effect mode set in this manner.

  The sub CPU 102a executes the special effects ("Serif notice", "character notice", "development notice", "decisive effect") among the change effect patterns shown in the above-described change effect pattern determination tables of FIG. 40 to FIG. 43. A change effect pattern associated with the information of (O) and the presence or absence of execution of the specific effect based on the specific effect determination table shown in FIGS. 52 to 53 is determined, and the special associated with the determined change effect pattern 45, FIG. 47, FIG. 49, FIG. 51 show the types of special effects associated with the effective period of operation shown in FIG. 45, FIG. When the type of is determined, the operation effective period is set in the fluctuation effect.

  As can be seen from the execution ratio (ratio of 図) of the special effects in FIGS. 40 to 43 and FIGS. 44, 46, 48, and 50, the sub CPU 102a is in the “provision mode in the low probability gaming state and the non-short time gaming state Execute in "effect mode B" to "effect mode D" in the high probability gaming state and the time saving gaming state at a rate higher than the rate of determining the type of the special effect associated with the operation effective period to be executed in A ". The type of special effect associated with the operation effective period is determined. That is, the sub CPU 102a is higher in proportion than the operation effective period in the fluctuation effect of the “effect mode A” in the low probability gaming state and the non-short time gaming state, and the “effect mode in the high probability gaming state and the time saving game state In the variable effects of “B” to “rendering mode D”, the operation effective period is set.

  Then, as can be seen from the execution ratio of the special effects in FIG. 41 to FIG. 43 (ratio of ○) and FIG. 46, FIG. 48 and FIG. 50, the sub CPU 102a is after the end of the first jackpot game, and the second jackpot game Of the "probability mode B" to "provision mode D" in the high probability gaming state and the time saving gaming state set in the high probability gaming state and the short time gaming state after the end of the "production mode B", "production mode C" As the type of the special effect to be executed in that mode, the type of the special effect associated with the operation effective period is determined at a higher rate as the “effect mode D” is reached. That is, the sub CPU 102a is a production mode in which the number of times of special feature fluctuation is larger at a higher rate than the effect mode (the first period) in which the number of times of special pattern fluctuation is smaller among "effect mode B" to "effect mode D". In (the second period), the operation effective period is set during the fluctuation effect. Here, among the "effect mode B" to "effect mode D", the "effect mode B", the "effect mode C" and the "effect mode D" become higher proportions as the special effect is executed in that mode As a type, the type of the special effect associated with the operation effective period in which the operation means is in the projecting state (second state) is determined. That is, the sub CPU 102a is a production mode in which the number of times of special feature fluctuation is larger at a higher rate than the effect mode (the first period) in which the number of times of special pattern fluctuation is smaller among "effect mode B" to "effect mode D". In (the second period), the operation effective period in which the operation means is in the projecting state (the second state) is set during the fluctuation effect.

(Effect input control process by effect control board)
The effect input control processing by the effect control board 102 in step S1400 described above will be described using FIG.
In step S1401, the sub CPU 102a detects the effect button operation detection signal from the effect button operation detection switch 18a based on the depression operation of the effect button 18A, and the effect lever operation detection signal from the effect lever operation detection switch 19a based on the operation of the effect lever 19A. It is determined whether or not any of these operation means has been operated by judging whether or not any of the above has been input.

  If it is determined in step S1401 that the sub CPU 102a determines that any operation means has been operated, the process proceeds to step S1402, and if it is determined that no operation means has been operated, The effect input control process ends.

  In step S1402, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the variation display of the special symbol is currently displayed, and when it is determined that the variation display of the special symbol is being performed, the processing is shifted to step S1403 and the variation of the special symbol If it is determined that the display is not in progress, the effect input control process is ended.

  In step S1403, the sub CPU 102a confirms the fluctuation effect pattern of the fluctuation effect being executed according to the fluctuation display of the current special symbol stored in the fluctuation effect data storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1404, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not it is in the operation valid period in the fluctuation production by the fluctuation production pattern confirmed in step S1403, and when it is determined that it is in the operation valid period, the processing is performed in step S1405. If it is determined that the operation effective period is not in progress, the effect input control process ends.

  In step S1405, sub CPU 102a refers to FIG. 45, FIG. 47, FIG. 49, and FIG. 51 during the operation valid period determined in step S1404, and the operation means activated in this operation valid period produces effects It is confirmed whether the button 18A or the effect lever 19A. Then, whether there is an input of the effect button operation detection signal from the effect button operation detection switch 18a or the effect lever operation detection signal from the effect lever operation detection switch 19a whether or not the operation to the activated operation means is performed. Judge based on.

That is, when the operation means activated in the operation effective period is the effect button 18A, the presence or absence of the input of the effect button operation detection signal from the effect button operation detection switch 18a is determined, and activated in the operation effective period. When the operation means being operated is the effect lever 19A, it is determined whether or not the effect lever operation detection signal from the effect lever operation detection switch 19a is input.
In this step S1405, in step S1405, the sub CPU 102a inputs the detection signal of the operating means activated from the effect button operation detection switch 18a or the effect lever operation detection switch 19a in the operation effective period, whereby the operation is If it is determined that the designating operation to the activated operating means has been performed, the process proceeds to step S1406, and the detection signal of the operating means activated from the effect button operation detection switch 18a or the effect lever operation detection switch 19a. When it is determined that the designating operation to the operation means activated in the operation effective period is not performed by not having input the effect input control process.

  In step S1406, the sub CPU 102a sets, in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, the corresponding rendering control command for controlling the corresponding rendering based on the designated operation to the operating means whose operation is validated, during the operation valid period. The corresponding effect control command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1500. Then, when the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the corresponding effect control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 perform effect control for executing the corresponding effect based on the control content indicated by the corresponding effect control command.

  For example, in the case where the sub CPU 102 a confirms “variation effect pattern A 034” as the variation effect pattern in step S 1403 and executes “serif announcement A 1”, the sub effect control command is transmitted to the image control board 105 and Transmit to the lamp control board 104. Thereby, the image control board 105 performs control to display the effect image of "serif a1" as the corresponding effect. In addition, the lamp control board 104 performs drive control to the third effect character object device 1703 based on the corresponding effect control command, whereby the third decorative member 17C operates from the "standby position 3" as the corresponding effect. The movement operation to move to position 3 "is performed.

  In the present embodiment, an operation promotion notification is performed to urge the player to operate the effect button 18A during the execution of the game effect relating to the game using the game ball, such as the change effect performed during the variable display of the special symbol. In the operation effective state, the effect button 18A is in the non-projecting state (first state) or in the projecting state (second state).

Here, a specific example of the fluctuation effect will be described.
(A concrete example of the fluctuation effect of the effect mode A)
First, a specific example of the fluctuation effect of the fluctuation effect pattern in the effect mode A will be described.

  In FIG. 61A, the sub CPU 102a receives the fluctuation pattern designation command "E6H0AH" or "E7H0AH" from the main control board 101, determines the "variation effect pattern A034", and executes the specific effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the general flow. 61B is executed when the sub CPU 102a receives the fluctuation pattern designation command "E6H0BH" or "E7H0BH" from the main control board 101 and determines "variation effect pattern A038", and the specific effect is performed. It is a figure for demonstrating the temporal flow of the fluctuation production performed. Also, in FIG. 61C, the sub CPU 102a receives the fluctuation pattern designation command "E6H0CH" or "E7H0CH" from the main control board 101, determines the "variation effect pattern A042", and executes the specific effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the time flow of.

(Variation effect according to fluctuation effect pattern A 034 (the first jackpot))
In the low probability gaming state and the non-short time gaming state, when the judgment result of the jackpot is "first jackpot" and "variation effect pattern A034" is selected, the sub CPU 102a starts from timing T11 shown in FIG. The effect control for executing the fluctuation effect up to the timing T14 is performed. FIG. 62 shows an effect image to be displayed on the image display device 14 in the variable effect shown in FIG. 51A, an effect button 18A, an effect lever 19A, a second decorative member 17B, and a third decorative member 17C.

  The sub CPU 102a executes "symbol variation A1-1" in a period (a-1) from timing T11 to timing T12, and "normal reach A1-1" in a period (a-2) from timing T12 to timing T13. Then, in period (a-3) and period (a-4) from timing T13 to timing T14, effect control for executing "super reach A1-1" is performed.

  The sub CPU 102a performs effect control for causing the image display device 14 to display an effect image in which a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed in "symbol variation A1-1" in the period (a-1).

  In "symbol variation A1-1" in this period (a-1), the sub CPU 102a first changes the plurality of special effect symbols and a predetermined character "character a1 (Kunichi)" appears in FIG. The effect control for displaying the effect image shown in (a-1-1) on the image display device 14 is performed.

  The sub CPU 102a executes "serif notice A" as a special effect in the "symbol variation A1-1". The “serif notice A” is a notice effect that reports the possibility of executing a jackpot game and gives an expectation that the judgment result of the jackpot is a jackpot.

  The sub CPU 102 a sets “serif notice A” as “serif notice A” according to the execution ratio of “serif notice A” in “variation effect pattern A 034” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 44 (b). An effect control is performed to execute any one of "serif notice A1" to "serif notice A5" shown in the special effect information table.

  When the sub CPU 102a executes any of "serif notice A1" to "serif notice A3" in "symbol variation A1-1", as shown in FIG. 61A, the operation of the effect button 18A is performed. The operation effective period X11 to be effective is set (see FIG. 45A).

  In the case of "serif announcement A2" or "serif announcement A3" in the operation valid period X11, the sub CPU 102a includes the image of the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A (a-1-2). An effect that causes the image display device 14 to display the effect image shown in FIG. The image of the operation promotion notification is composed of the characters "Press the button!" Along with the images of the effect button 18A and the timer gauge. Further, in the case of "serif notice A1," an effect to display the effect image shown in (a-1-3) of FIG. 62 including the image of the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is performed on the image display device 14 Do. The image of this operation promotion notification is composed of the characters "Take the lever!" Along with the images of the effect lever 19A and the timer gauge.

  The sub CPU 102a sets "serif notice A1" as indicated by the execution ratio of "serif notice A1" to "serif notice A3" in the "variation effect pattern A 034" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 44 (b). In the operation effective period X11 of “serif notice A3”, the state of the effect button 18A is kept from being in the non-projecting state (first state) and in the projecting state (second state). In addition, when the effect image of the operation promotion notification is displayed, the corresponding sound may be output from the sound output device 15.

  When the sub CPU 102 a executes “serif announcement A 1”, “character a 1” is “serif a 1” (“serif a 1” based on one pressing operation performed on the effect button 18 A during the operation valid period X 11. While displaying the effect image shown in (a-1-4) of FIG. 62 showing how to speak one at a time! On the image display device 14, the third decoration member 17C as a movable member "standby position 3" To the "operation position 3" is executed, the corresponding effect (previous notice effect) of the content is executed. The sub CPU 102 a may execute an effect of causing the voice output device 15 to output the voice of “serif a 1”.

  When the sub CPU 102a executes the "serif notice A2", as shown in FIG. 45A, as shown in FIG. 45A, the sub CPU 102a performs a drawing based on one pressing operation performed on the effect button 18A during the operation valid period X11. Unlike the effect image shown in (a-1-4) of 62, a response image is displayed on the image display device 14 in which the "character a1" speaks "serif a2" ("is it 100 sets acquired?") Performs presentation control for executing a presentation (preliminary presentation effect).

  When the sub CPU 102 a executes “serif notice A 3”, as shown in FIG. 45A, the sub CPU 102 a performs a drawing based on one pressing operation performed on the effect button 18 A during the operation valid period X 11. Unlike the effect image shown in (a-1-4) of 62, a corresponding effect in which an effect image in which the “character a1” speaks “serif a 3” (“is it ten?”) Is displayed on the image display device 14 Perform presentation control to execute the preliminary presentation effect).

  On the other hand, the sub CPU 102a does not set the operation valid period X11 when executing "serif notice A4" and "serif notice A5". That is, in "serif notice A4" and "serif notice A5", the image of the operation promotion notification such as the effect image shown in (a-1-2) of FIG. A preview effect is performed in which an effect image of a1 ′ ′ speaking speech is displayed on the image display device 14. The notice effects of the "serif notice A4" and the "serif notice A5" are effects corresponding to the above-mentioned corresponding effects.

  When the sub CPU 102a executes "serif notice A4," as shown in FIG. 45 (a), at a predetermined timing, unlike the effect image shown in (a-1-4) in FIG. Performs presentation control for executing a notice effect (corresponding to a corresponding effect) of displaying on the image display device 14 an effect image of a state in which “Speaks a4” (“Are you getting one?”?).

  When the sub CPU 102a executes the "serif notice A5", as shown in FIG. 45 (a), unlike the effect image shown in (a-1-4) of FIG. Performs presentation control for executing an advance notice effect (corresponding to a corresponding effect) in which an effect image of a state in which "Speaks a5" ("Are you getting money?") Is displayed on the image display device 14.

  In “normal reach A1-1” in the period (a-2), the sub CPU 102a causes the image display device 14 to stop and display the two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) of the special effect symbol with the same numerical value (for example, 7) The effect control for executing the effect of displaying on the image display device 14 the effect image of the reach effect of (a-2-1) in FIG.

  The sub CPU 102 a executes “character preview A” as a special effect in the “normal reach A1-1”. "Chara notice A", like "serif notice A", is a notice effect notifying of the possibility of executing a jackpot game and giving an expectation that the judgment result of the jackpot is a jackpot.

  The sub CPU 102 a sets “Chara notice A” to “Chara notice A 1” to “Chara notice A” according to the execution ratio of “Chara notice A” in the “variation effect pattern A 034” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. The effect control for executing any of the character previews A5 is performed.

  When the sub CPU 102a executes any of "character preview A1" to "character preview A3" as a special effect, as shown in FIG. 61A, the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A is effective. The operation effective period Y11 to be set is set (see FIG. 45 (b)).

  The sub CPU 102a does not execute the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the effect button 18A in the operation valid period Y11. That is, the sub CPU 102a causes the image display device 14 to display the effect image shown in (a-2-2) (a-2-3) of FIG. 62 not including the image of the operation promotion notification in the operation valid period Y11. Take control.

  The sub CPU 102a sets "Chara notice A1" as shown in the execution ratio of "Chara notice A1" to "Chara notice A3" in the "fluctuation effect pattern A034" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 44 (b). In the operation valid period Y11 of “character advance notice A3”, the state of the effect button 18A is kept in the non-protruding state (first state), and is not in the projecting state.

  As shown in (a-2-4) in FIG. 62, when the sub CPU 102a executes the "character advance notice A1", the sub lever 102A performs a tilting operation on the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period Y11. , An effect for executing a corresponding effect (prediction effect) of the content of additionally displaying “Chara a 2-1” which is a new character in addition to “Chara a 1” already displayed in the image display device 14 Take control.

  When executing the "character advance notice A2", as shown in FIG. 45 (b), the sub CPU 102a displays an image based on the fact that the effect button 18A is pressed once during the operation valid period Y11. In the apparatus 14, effect control is performed to execute a corresponding effect (prediction effect) of the content that “Chara a 2-2” different from “Chara a 2-1” is additionally displayed.

  When executing the "character advance notice A3", as shown in FIG. 45 (b), the sub CPU 102a displays an image based on the fact that the effect button 18A is pressed once during the operation valid period Y11. In the apparatus 14, effect control is performed to execute an advance notice effect (correspondence effect) of the content that “Chara a 2-3” different from “Chara a 2-1” and “Chara a 2-2” is additionally displayed.

  On the other hand, the sub CPU 102a does not set the operation valid period Y11 when executing the "character advance notice A4" and the "character advance notice A5". That is, in the "character advance notice A4" and the "character advance notice A5", the image of the operation promotion notification such as (a-2-2) or (a-2-3) in FIG. At timing, effect control is performed to execute an advance effect in which a new character is additionally displayed. In addition, the notice effects of the "character notice A4" and the "character notice A5" are effects corresponding to the above-mentioned corresponding effects.

  When the sub CPU 102 a executes “character advance notice A 4”, as shown in FIG. 45 (b), the sub CPU 102 a displays an effect image to which “character a 2-4” (not shown) is added at a predetermined timing. The effect control for executing the advance effect (corresponding effect) is performed.

  When the sub CPU 102a executes "character advance notice A5", as shown in FIG. 45 (b), the sub CPU 102a displays an effect image to which "character a2-5" (not shown) is added at a predetermined timing. The effect control for executing the advance effect (corresponding effect) is performed.

  The sub CPU 102a stops and displays the special effect design (left symbol and right symbol) of the same two values in the period (a-3) of "Super Reach A1-1" and "Chara a3 (A child)" Effect control is performed to execute an effect of displaying on the image display device 14 an effect image of reach effect that appears.

  In "symbol variation A1-1" in this period (a-3), first, the sub CPU 102a stops the special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) of two same numerical values and "Chara a3 (A child) Control is performed to display the effect image shown in (a-3-1) of FIG.

  When executing the specific effect, the sub CPU 102a sets a specific effect execution period W11 for executing the specific effect in the “super reach A1-1”. In the specific effect execution period W11, the sub CPU 102a executes the specific effect of the type determined in the specific effect type determination process of step S1311-11. When performing the specific effect, the state of FIG. 72 (a) is changed to the state of FIG. 72 (b) to vibrate the effect button 18A, and the effect button 18A is vibrated at high speed or low speed. Further, when outputting an image, as shown in FIG. 72C, the effect image of the effect button 18A that vibrates is displayed on the image display device 14. Further, in the case of voice output, as shown in FIG. 72C, the voice output device 15 outputs pseudo sound of vibration sound of the effect button 18A.

  In the present embodiment, the specific effect is performed in the period (a-3), but not limited to this, for example, in the period (a-1), the period (a-2), and the period (a-4) The specific effect execution period W11 may be set.

  In addition, the sub CPU 102a in the "Super Reach A1-1", as a special effect, to the development to "Special Reach A1-1" which is an effect that is higher reliability for the jackpot than "Super Reach A1-1" Execute Development Advance Notice A. "Development notice A", like "Serif notice A" and "Chara notice A", notifies of the possibility of executing a big hit game, and gives a feeling of expectation that the judgment result of big hit is a big hit is there.

  The sub CPU 102a sets "Development notice A" to "Development notice A1" to "Development notice A" according to the execution ratio of "Development notice A" in "Variation effect pattern A034" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Effect control is performed to execute any one of the development notices A6.

  Even when the sub CPU 102a executes any of "development notice A1" to "development notice A6" in "super reach A1-1", the operation valid period X12 in which the operation of the production button 18A or the production lever 19A is valid. Are set (see FIG. 45C).

  The sub CPU 102a includes an image of an operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A as shown in FIG. 62 in the operation effective period X12 (a-3-2) or (a-3-3). Is performed on the image display device 14. The image of this operation promotion notification is composed of the characters "Press the button !!" together with the images of the effect button 18A and the timer gauge, or the characters "Shrink the lever !!" together with the images of the effect lever 19A and the timer gauge. It consists of

  However, the effect image (a-3-2) is displayed when the effect button 18A is in the projecting state in the operation effective period X12, and the operation promoting notification for prompting the operation to the effect button 18A in the projecting state is It contains an image.

  On the other hand, the effect image of (a-3-3) includes the image of the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A in the operation effective period X12.

  As shown in (a-3-4) of FIG. 62, when the sub CPU 102a executes the “advance notice of development A1”, the sub lever 102A performs a tilting operation on the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period X12. The second decorative member 17B as a movable member is moved from the "standby position 2" to the "operating position 2", and an effect image (effect a1) for emphasizing the second decorative member 17B in the image display device 14. Effect display control to execute the corresponding effect (development advance notice).

  When the sub CPU 102a executes "advance notice of development A2," as shown in FIG. 45 (c), it is based on one pressing operation on the effect button 18A in the projecting state during the operation valid period X12. While moving the second decorative member 17B from the "standby position 2" to the "operating position 2", the image display device 14 displays an effect image (effect a2) for emphasizing the second decorative member 17B. Perform presentation control to execute such a response presentation (development notice).

  When the sub CPU 102 a executes “development advance notice A3”, as shown in FIG. 45 (c), the image display device 14 is operated based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19 A during the operation valid period X 12. In order to execute the corresponding effect (development advance notice) such as displaying the effect image (effect a3) in, the effect control is performed.

  When the sub CPU 102 a executes “advance notice of A4”, as shown in FIG. 45 (c), one pressing operation is performed on the effect button 18 A in the non-projecting state during the operation valid period X 12. Based on this, the second decorative member 17B is moved from the "standby position 2" to the "operating position 2", and the image display device 14 displays an effect image (effect a1) for emphasizing the second decorative member 17B. , Etc., to perform response control (development advance notice).

  When the sub CPU 102 a executes the “advance notice A 5,” as shown in FIG. 45C, the image display device 14 is operated based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19 A during the operation valid period X 12. In order to execute a corresponding effect (development advance notice) such as displaying an effect image (effect a2) in, an effect control is performed.

  When the sub CPU 102 a executes “advance preview A 6”, as shown in FIG. 45 (c), one pressing operation is performed on the non-projecting effect button 18 A during the operation valid period X 12. Based on the image display device 14, effect control is performed to execute a corresponding effect (development advance notice) such as displaying an effect image (effect a3).

The sub CPU 102a, in the period (a-4) of "Super reach A1-1", with two special effect designs (left pattern and right pattern) in which the special effect pattern (inside pattern) during the change is stopped and displayed first. By setting the same numerical value, control is performed to cause the image display device 14 to display the effect image shown in (a-4) of FIG. 62 in which the three special effect designs are stopped in the same numerical value.
Thereby, the player is informed that the first jackpot in which the jackpot game (first jackpot game) of which the number of rounds is 16R (round) is executed is won.

(Variation effect according to fluctuation effect pattern A022 (loss))
In the low probability gaming state and the non-short time gaming state, when the determination result of the jackpot is "loss" and the "variation effect pattern A022" is selected, the sub CPU 102a is basically shown in Fig. 61 (a). The same variation effect as that of the variation effect pattern A034 "is executed. That is, the sub CPU 102a executes "symbol variation A1-1" in the period (a-1) from timing T11 to timing T12, and "normal reach A1-1" in the period (a-2) from timing T12 to the timing T13. Is performed, and effect control for performing the effect of period (a-3) of “super reach A1-1” from timing T13 is performed.

  However, in the variation effect of “variation effect pattern A022”, the sub CPU 102a stops the middle symbol among the three special effect symbols in the period (a-4) without becoming the same numerical value as the left symbol and the right symbol. Perform effect control to display the effect image of (A-1) in FIG. As a result, the player is informed that the determination result of the jackpot determination is "loss".

(Variation effect according to fluctuation effect pattern A038 (first jackpot))
In the low probability gaming state and the non time saving gaming state, when the determination result of the jackpot is "first jackpot" and "variation effect pattern A038" is selected, the sub CPU 102a starts from timing T21 shown in FIG. 61 (b). The effect control for executing the fluctuation effect up to the timing T24 is performed.

  FIG. 63 shows the effect image displayed on the image display device 14 in the variable effect shown in FIG. 61 (b), the effect button 18A, the effect lever 19A, the first decorative member 17A, and the second decorative member 17B.

  The sub CPU 102a executes "symbol fluctuation A1-1" in a period (b-1) from timing T21 to timing T22 in the fluctuation representation of "variation effect pattern A038", and a period from timing T22 to timing T23 (b -2) to execute "normal reach A1-1" and then execute "special reach A1-1" in a period (b-3) and a period (b-4) from timing T23 to timing T24. Perform effect control of.

  The sub CPU 102a displays the effect image of (b-1-1) corresponding to the effect image of the above (a-1-1) in the “symbol variation A1-1” in the period (b-1), The effect image of (b-1-2) corresponding to the effect image of a-1-2) or the effect image of (b-1-3) corresponding to the effect image of (a-1-3) is displayed .

  The effect image of (b-1-4) in FIG. 63 shows an image of a corresponding effect in the “serif announcement A2”. When the sub CPU 102 a executes “serif notice A 2”, “character a 1” is “serif a 2” (“serif a 2” based on one pressing operation performed on the effect button 18 A during the operation valid period X 11. (B-1-4) of FIG. 63 showing how to speak one hundred cars) effect control for executing a corresponding effect (notice effect effect) of displaying on the image display device 14 is performed.

  The sub CPU 102a displays the effect image of (b-2-1) of FIG. 54 corresponding to the effect image of (a-2-1) of FIG. 62 in “Normal reach A1-1” in the period (b-2) To display the effect image of (b-2-2) corresponding to the effect image of (a-2-2) or (b-2-3) corresponding to the effect image of (a-2-3) Do.

  The effect image shown in (b-2-4) of FIG. 63 is an image of a corresponding effect in the “character advance notice A2”. When executing the “character advance notice A2”, the sub CPU 102a adds “character a2-2” based on one pressing operation performed on the effect button 18A during the operation valid period Y21 (b A corresponding effect (notice effect effect) of displaying the effect image of -2-4) on the image display device 14 is executed.

  In the period (b-3) of the “special reach A1-1”, the sub CPU 102a first causes the image display device 14 to display the character b1 (侍 with the special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) of the same numerical value. ) Is controlled to display an effect image ((b-3-1) in FIG. 63) of the reach effect in which the player tries to capture the “character c1 (the thief)”.

  In the case of executing the specific effect, the sub CPU 102a sets a specific effect execution period W21 for executing the specific effect in the “special reach A1-1”. In the specific effect execution period W11, the sub CPU 102a executes the specific effect of the type determined in the specific effect type determination process of step S1311-11. When performing the specific effect, the state of FIG. 72 (a) is changed to the state of FIG. 72 (b) to vibrate the effect button 18A, and the effect button 18A is vibrated at high speed or low speed. Further, when outputting an image, as shown in FIG. 72C, the effect image of the effect button 18A that vibrates is displayed on the image display device 14. Further, in the case of voice output, as shown in FIG. 72C, the voice output device 15 outputs pseudo sound of vibration sound of the effect button 18A.

  In the case of executing the "decided effect A1" in the "special reach A1-1", the sub CPU 102a sets an operation effective period X22 in which the operation of the effect button 18A is activated, as shown in FIG. 61 (b). (See FIG. 45 (d)).

  In the operation effective period X22, as shown in FIG. 63, the sub CPU 102a displays the effect image shown in (b-3-3) including the image of the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A on the image display device 14 Execute the effect to make it. As shown in the effect image (b-3-3), the image of the operation promotion notification is composed of the characters "Dear!" Along with the images of the effect lever 19A and the timer gauge.

As shown in (b-3-4) of FIG. 63, the sub CPU 102a performs “decision effect A1” based on the fact that the operation lever 19A is tilted during the operation valid period X22. The first decorative member 17A as a movable member is moved from the "standby position 1" to the "operating position 1-1" via the "operating position 1-1", which is the lower position of the front surface of the image display device 14, "the operating position 1-2" In the image display device 14, effect control is performed to execute a corresponding effect (determination effect) such as displaying an effect image (flash light d1) of a flash.
The moved first decorative member 17A returns to the original "standby position 1".

  On the other hand, when executing "decision effect A2", as shown in FIG. 61 (b), the sub CPU 102a sets an operation effective period X22 in which the operation of the effect button 18A is effective (see FIG. 45 (d)). .

  In the operation effective period X22, as shown in FIG. 63, the sub CPU 102a displays the effect image shown in (b-3-2) including the image of the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A on the image display device 14 Execute the effect to make it. As shown in the effect image (b-3-2), the image of the operation promotion notification is composed of the characters “press it!” Together with the image of the effect button 18A in the projecting state and the timer gauge.

  The image of the effect button 18A in the image display device 14 may not indicate the state of the effect button 18A in the operation valid period. For example, when the effect button 18A is in the projecting state (second state) in the operation valid period, the image of the effect button 18A in the image display device 14 may indicate the non-projecting state (first state), The image of the effect button 18A in the image display device 14 may indicate a projecting state (second state) when the effect button 18A is in the non-projecting state (first state) in the operation effective period.

  The sub CPU 102a performs the first decorative member 17A from the "standby position 1" to the other position (the operation position in the "decision effect" in the variation effect to be executed when the determination result of the big hit determination is "loss". ) Not to work.

Further, in the variation effect to be executed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is the "second jackpot", in the "decision effect" from the "standby position 1" to the "operating position 1-1" the first decorative member 17A Only let them move.
As described above, in the "decision effect" of the fluctuation effect selected when the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is the "first jackpot", the first decorative member 17A is lower than the "operating position 1-1". Since it is moved to the “operation position 1-2”, the determination result of the jackpot is the first jackpot of 16R (round) which is more advantageous for the player than the “second jackpot” of playing the second jackpot game of 4R (round). It reports that it has won the "first jackpot" to play the game.

The sub CPU 102a, in the period (b-4) of "special reach A1-1", with two special effect designs (left pattern and right pattern) in which the special effect pattern (inside pattern) during the change is first stopped and displayed. As it becomes the same numerical value, while stopping three special production design in a state where it is equal to the same numerical value, in the state where “character b1” is catching “character c1” in FIG. 63 (b-4) The effect control to display the effect image to be displayed on the image display device 14 is performed.
Thereby, the player is informed that the first jackpot in which the jackpot game (first jackpot game) of which the number of rounds is 16R (round) is executed is won.

(Variation effect according to fluctuation effect pattern A 026 (loss))
In the low probability gaming state and the non-short time gaming state, when the determination result of the jackpot is "loss" and "variation effect pattern A 026" is selected, the sub CPU 102a is basically shown in Fig. 61 (b). The same variation presentation as the variation presentation pattern A038 "is executed. That is, the sub CPU 102a executes "symbol variation A1-1" in the period (b-1) from the timing T21 to the timing T22, and "a normal reach A1-1" in the period (b-2) from the timing T22 to the timing T23. Is performed, and effect control for performing the effect of period (b-3) of “special reach A1-1” from timing T23 is performed.

  The sub CPU 102a selects "determination effect A1" as "determination effect A" according to the execution ratio of "determination effect A" in the "variation effect pattern A 026" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Effect control is performed to execute any one of the "decided effect A2".

  However, the sub CPU 102a performs the first decorative member 17A in the case of executing either “decision effect A1” or “decision effect A2” of “special reach A1-1” in the fluctuation effect of “variation effect pattern A026”. Is not moved from the "standby position 1" to another position (operating position). Then, the sub CPU 102a stops the middle symbol of the three special effect symbols without becoming the same numerical value as the left symbol and the right symbol, and the "character c1" escapes from the "character b1". By displaying the effect image of (B-1) of 63, it is informed that the determination result of the big hit determination is "loss".

(Variation effect according to fluctuation effect pattern A042 (first big hit))
In the low probability gaming state and the non-short time gaming state, when the judgment result of the jackpot is "first jackpot" and "variation effect pattern A042" is selected, the sub CPU 102a starts from timing T31 shown in FIG. 61 (c). The effect control for executing the fluctuation effect up to the timing T35 is performed. FIG. 61 shows the effect image displayed on the image display device 14 in the variable effect shown in FIG. 61C, the effect button 18A, the effect lever 19A, the second decorative member 17B, and the third decorative member 17C.

  The sub CPU 102a executes "symbol fluctuation A1-1" in a period (c-1) from timing T31 to timing T32 in the fluctuation representation of "variation effect pattern A042", and a period from timing T32 to timing T33 (c 2) execute "Normal reach A1-1", and then execute "Super reach A1-1" in a period (c-3) from timing T33 to timing T34, and a period from timing T34 to timing T35 (C-4) The effect control is performed to execute "special reach A1-1" in the period (c-5).

  The sub CPU 102 a is (c-1-1) in FIG. 64 corresponding to the effect image in (a-1-1) in FIG. 62 in “symbol variation A1-1” in the period (c-1). The effect of displaying the effect image on the image display device 14 is executed.

  The sub CPU 102a executes "serif notice A" as a special effect in the "symbol variation A1-1".

  The sub CPU 102 a sets “serif notice A” as “serif notice A” according to the execution ratio of “serif notice A” in “variation effect pattern A 042” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 44 (b). One of “serif notice A1” to “serif notice A5” shown in the special effect information table is executed.

  When the sub CPU 102a executes any of "serif notice A1" to "serif notice A3" in the "symbol variation A1-1", as shown in FIG. 61 (c), the effect button 18A or the effect lever An operation effective period X31 for making the operation of 19A effective is set (see FIG. 45A).

  In the operation effective period X31, the sub CPU 102a executes an effect that causes the image display device 14 to display the effect image of (c-1-2) or (c-1-3) in FIG. 64 including the image of the operation promotion notification. Do.

  The effect image of (c-1-4) in FIG. 64 shows an image of a corresponding effect in the “serif announcement A3”. When the sub CPU 102 a executes “serif announcement A 3”, “character a 1” is “serif a 3” (“serif a 3” based on one pressing operation performed on the effect button 18 A during the operation valid period X 31. 64) “(c-1-4) of the effect image in FIG. 64” is displayed on the image display device 14 to perform a corresponding effect (notice effect).

  In the “normal reach A1-1” in the period (c-2), the sub CPU 102a first produces the effect image (c-2-1) in FIG. 64 corresponding to the effect image in (a-2-1) in FIG. Are displayed on the image display device 14.

  The sub CPU 102 a executes “character preview A” as a special effect in the “normal reach A1-1”.

  The sub CPU 102 a sets “Chara notice A” as “Chara notice A” to “Chara notice A” according to the execution ratio of “Chara notice A” in the “Change effect pattern A042” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Any one of the character previews A5 is executed.

  When the sub CPU 102a executes any of "character trailer A1" to "character trailer A3" as a special effect, as shown in FIG. 61 (c), the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A is effective. The operation effective period Y31 to be set is set (see FIG. 45 (b)).

  The sub CPU 102a does not execute the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the effect button 18A in the operation valid period Y31. That is, sub CPU 102a displays the effect image shown in (c-2-2) or (c-2-3) in FIG. 64 not including the image of the operation promotion notification on image display device 14 in operation valid period Y31. To perform the effect.

  The effect image shown in (c-2-4) of FIG. 64 shows an image of a corresponding effect in the “character advance notice A3”. When the sub CPU 102 a executes “character advance notice A 3”, “character a 2-3” is added based on one pressing operation performed on the effect button 18 A during the operation valid period Y 31 ( A corresponding effect (notice effect effect) of displaying the effect image of c-2-4) on the image display device 14 is executed.

  The sub CPU 102 a performs effect control for executing “advance notice of development A” which is for the development to “special reach A1-1” in the “super reach A1-1”.

  The sub CPU 102a selects "advance notice A1" as "advance notice A" according to the execution ratio of "advance notice A" in "fluctuation effect pattern A042" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 44 (b). Effect control is performed to execute any one of the development notices A6.

  The sub CPU 102a sets an operation effective period X32 in which the operation of the effect button 18A is effective in executing any of "development notice A1" to "development notice A6" in "super reach A1-1" ((1) See FIG. 45 (c)).

  In the operation effective period X32, as shown in FIG. 64, the sub CPU 102a includes an image of an operation prompting prompting prompting the operation of the effect button 18A (c-3-2) or an operation prompting prompting prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A. An effect of causing the image display device 14 to display the effect image of (c-3-3) including the image of is performed. The image of the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is composed of the characters "Press the button !!" along with the image of the effect button 18A and the timer gauge. Further, the image of the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is composed of the characters "Take the lever!" Along with the images of the effect lever 19A and the timer gauge.

  (C-3-4) of FIG. 64 shows an example of “development advance notice A1”. As shown in (c-3-4) in FIG. 64, when the sub CPU 102a executes the "advance notice of development A1", based on the fact that the operation lever 19A is tilted during the operation valid period X32. The second decorative member 17B as a movable member is moved from the "standby position 2" to the "operating position 2", and an effect image (effect a1) for emphasizing the second decorative member 17B in the image display device 14. Effect display control to execute the corresponding effect (development advance notice).

  In the period (c-4) of the “special reach A1-1”, the sub CPU 102a first causes the image display device 14 to display the character b1 (侍 with the special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) of the same numerical value. ) Performs effect control for displaying an effect image ((c-4-1) in FIG. 64) of the reach effect in which the character “c1 (thief)” is to be captured.

  In the case of executing the specific effect, the sub CPU 102a sets a specific effect execution period W31 for executing the specific effect in the “special reach A1-1”. Then, in order to vibrate the effect button 18A, the state of FIG. 72 (a) is changed to the state of FIG. 72 (b), and the effect button 18A is vibrated at high speed or low speed. Further, when outputting an image, as shown in FIG. 72C, the effect image of the effect button 18A that vibrates is displayed on the image display device 14. Further, in the case of voice output, as shown in FIG. 72C, the voice output device 15 outputs pseudo sound of vibration sound of the effect button 18A.

  In the case of executing the "decided effect A" in the "special reach A1-1", the sub CPU 102a sets an operation effective period X33 in which the operation of the effect button 18A is activated as shown in FIG. 61 (c). (See FIG. 45 (d)).

  In the operation effective period X33, as shown in FIG. 64, the sub CPU 102a performs the effect image shown in (c-4-2) including the image of the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A, or the operation of the effect lever 19A. The effect control for executing an effect that causes the image display device 14 to display the effect image shown in (c-4-3) including the image of the operation promotion notification for prompting the user to perform is performed. The image of the operation promotion notification is composed of the characters “Press it!” Together with the image of the effect button 18A in the projecting state and the timer gauge (c-4-2), or the image of the effect lever 19A and the timer gauge It is something which consists of the letter "!" (C-4-2).

As shown in (c-4-4) in FIG. 64, the sub CPU 102a performs “decision effect A1” based on the fact that the operation lever 19A is tilted during the operation valid period X33. The first decorative member 17A as a movable member is moved from the "standby position 1" to the "operating position 1-1" via the "operating position 1-1", which is the lower position of the front surface of the image display apparatus In the image display device 14, effect control is performed to execute a corresponding effect (determination effect) such as displaying an effect image (flash light a1) of a flash.
The moved first decorative member 17A returns to the original "standby position 1".

  Further, when executing the “decided effect A2”, the sub CPU 102 a performs the operation shown in FIG. 64 (c-4-4) based on the pressing operation performed on the effect button 18A during the operation valid period X33. As shown, the first decorative member 17A as the movable member is moved from the "standby position 1" to the "active position 1-1" and the lower position of the front surface of the image display device 14 is the "operating position 1- In the image display device 14, effect control is performed to execute a corresponding effect (decision effect) such as displaying an effect image (flash light a2) of the flash in the image display device 14.

  The sub CPU 102a performs the first decorative member 17A from the "standby position 1" to the other position (the operation position in the "decision effect" in the variation effect to be executed when the determination result of the big hit determination is "loss". ) Not to work.

Further, in the variation effect to be executed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is the "second jackpot", in the "decision effect" from the "standby position 1" to the "operating position 1-1" the first decorative member 17A Only let them move.
As described above, in the "decision effect" of the fluctuation effect selected when the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is the "first jackpot", the first decorative member 17A is lower than the "operating position 1-1". Since it is moved to the “operation position 1-2”, the determination result of the jackpot is the first jackpot of 16R (round) which is more advantageous for the player than the “second jackpot” of playing the second jackpot game of 4R (round). It reports that it has won the "first jackpot" to play the game.

The sub CPU102a, in the period (c-5) of "special reach A1-1", with two special effect designs (left pattern and right pattern) in which the special effect pattern (inside pattern) during the change is stopped and displayed first By being the same numerical value, while stopping three special production design in a state where it is equal to the same numerical value, it is shown in (c-5) in Figure 64 that "Chara b1" captures "Chara c1". The effect control to display the effect image to be displayed on the image display device 14 is performed.
Thereby, the player is informed that the first jackpot in which the jackpot game (first jackpot game) of which the number of rounds is 16R (round) is executed is won.

(Variation production pertaining to fluctuation production pattern A030 (loss))
In the low probability gaming state and the non-short time gaming state, when the determination result of the jackpot is "loss" and "variation effect pattern A 030" is selected, the sub CPU 102a basically shows "c" in FIG. The same fluctuation effect as that of the fluctuation effect pattern A042 "is executed. That is, the sub CPU 102a executes "symbol variation A1-1" in a period (c-1) from timing T31 to timing T32, and "normal reach A1-1 in a period (c-2) from timing T32 to timing T33. , “Super reach A1-1” from timing T33 to timing T34, and effect control for executing the effect of period (c-4) of “special reach A1-1” from timing T34 I do.

The sub CPU 102a selects "determination effect A1" as "determination effect A" according to the execution ratio of "determination effect A" in "variation effect pattern A 030" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Effect control is performed to execute any one of the "decided effect A2".
However, in the case of the variation representation of the “variation representation pattern A 030”, the sub CPU 102a performs the first decoration member 17A from the “standby position 1” to the other even when executing either “decision representation A1” or “decision representation A2”. Do not move to the position (operating position) of. Then, the sub CPU 102a stops the middle symbol of the three special effect symbols without becoming the same numerical value as the left symbol and the right symbol, and the "character c1" escapes from the "character b1". Effect control is performed to display the 64 (C-1) effect images. As a result, the player is informed that the determination result of the big hit determination is "loss".

(A concrete example of the fluctuation effect of the effect mode B)
Next, a specific example of the fluctuation effect of the fluctuation effect pattern in the effect mode B set in the high probability gaming state and the time-short game state fluctuation 1 to 30 will be described.
In FIG. 65 (a), the sub CPU 102a receives the fluctuation pattern designation command "E6H39H" or "E7H39H" from the main control board 101, and determines the "variation effect pattern B019". It is a figure for demonstrating. In FIG. 65 (b), the sub CPU 102a receives the fluctuation pattern designation command "E6H3AH" or "E7H3AH" from the main control board 101, and determines the time of the fluctuation effect executed when the "variation effect pattern B021" is determined. It is a figure for demonstrating this flow. In FIG. 65C, the sub CPU 102a receives the fluctuation pattern designation command "E6H3BH" or "E7H3BH" from the main control board 101, and determines the time of the fluctuation effect to be executed when the "variation effect pattern B023" is determined. It is a figure for demonstrating this flow.

(Variation effect according to fluctuation effect pattern B019 (first big hit))
When the determination result of the big hit in the high probability short game state and the high probability short game state is the “first big hit” and the “variation effect pattern B019” is selected, the sub CPU 102 a is shown in FIG. Effect control for performing the fluctuation effect from timing T401 to timing T403 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 66 shows an effect image to be displayed on the image display device 14 in the fluctuation effect shown in FIG. 65 (a) and an effect button 18A.

  The sub CPU 102a executes "symbol variation B3-1" in a period (d-1) and a period (d-2) from timing T401 to timing T402, and a period (d-3) from timing T402 to timing T403 and In period (d-4), effect control for executing "special character reach B1-1" is performed.

  In the period (d-1) of "symbol variation B3-1", the sub CPU 102a controls an effect of displaying, on the image display device 14, effect images in which a plurality of special effect symbols are varied.

  In the period (d-1) of the "symbol variation B3-1", the sub CPU 102a first causes the image display device 14 to display the effect image (d-1) of Fig. 66 in which a plurality of special effect symbols change. Control.

  Then, in the period (d-2) of "symbol variation B3-1", the sub CPU 102a has the same numerical value as the special effect symbol (left symbol) for which the special effect symbol (right symbol) which is about to stop is stopped first. The effect images of reach reach (d-2-1) or (d-2-2) and (d-2-3) of FIG. The effect control to be displayed on the device 14 is performed.

  The sub CPU 102a performs effect control for executing "development notice B" which is for the development to "special character reach B1-1" as a special effect in the "symbol variation B3-1". The sub CPU 102 a sets “development notice B 1” as “development notice B” according to the execution ratio of “development notice B” in “variation effect pattern B 0 19” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Effect control is performed to execute any one of the development notices B2.

  The sub CPU 102a makes the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A which is the operation means effective in the "symbol variation B3-1" when executing either "development notice B1" or "development notice B2". The operation effective period X41 is set. Reach production effect such as whether the special effect design (right design) which is about to stop from now on stops with the same numerical value as the special effect design (left design) which stopped earlier from now, and reach condition occurs. Set during the execution of

  In the operation effective period X41, as shown in FIG. 66, the sub CPU 102a operates the effect image (d-2-1) including the image of the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the effect button 18A or the operation for urging the operation of the effect lever 19A. An effect that causes the image display device 14 to display the effect image (d-2-2) including the image of the prompt notification is executed. The image of the operation promotion notification of “development notice B1” is the image (d-2-1) consisting of the characters “press the button !!” together with the image of the effect button 18A and the timer gauge, and “development notice B2” The image of the operation promotion notification is the one (d-2-2) consisting of the characters "Take the lever!" Along with the images of the effect lever 19A and the timer gauge.

  The effect image (d-2-1) is displayed when the effect button 18A is in the projecting state in the operation effective period X41 of the "development notice B2", and the operation to the effect button 18A in the projecting state is performed. Contains an image of an operation prompting prompting the user.

  When the sub CPU 102 a executes “advance notice B 1”, the special effect design symbol of the reach tilt effect is performed based on one pressing operation on the effect button 18 A in the projecting state during the operation valid period X 41. Effect for displaying the effect image ((d-2-3) in FIG. 66) having the effect image (effect b1 (light blue)) on the image display 14 Take control.

  When the sub CPU 102 a executes “advance notice B 2”, the sub CPU 102 a superimposes a special effect pattern of reach on stage effect on the basis of the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19 A during the operation valid period X 41 to display the effect image ( The effect control for executing the corresponding effect (advance notice of development) of displaying the effect image ((d-2-3) in FIG. 66) having the effect b2 (orange) on the image display device 14 is performed.

  (D-2-3) in FIG. 66 shows an example of the "development notice B1." When the sub CPU 102a executes "advance notice B1," (d-2 in FIG. 66) is performed based on one pressing operation performed on the effect button 18A in the projecting state during the operation valid period X41. As shown in -3), a corresponding effect (advance notice of development) is displayed such that the effect image (effect b1) is displayed on the image display device 14 by overlapping on the special effect design of reach around effect.

  Further, sub CPU 102a, in "development notice B2", a reach different from (d-2-3) in Fig. 70 based on the fact that the operation lever 19A is tilted during the operation valid period X41. Effect control is performed to execute a development notice (corresponding effect) such as displaying an effect image (effect b2) superimposed on the special effect design of the turning effect.

  In the period (d-3) of the "special character reach B1-1", the sub CPU 102a stops and displays the special effect design (left symbol and right symbol) of two identical numerical values and also the special character "character s1 (warrior)". The effect image of (d-3-1), (d-3-2), and (d-4) in FIG. 66 is displayed on the image display device 14 in which the character fights the special character “character p1 (enemy warrior)”. Perform effect control to be displayed.

  When executing the specific effect, the sub CPU 102a sets a specific effect execution period W41 for executing the specific effect in the “special character reach B1-1”. Then, in order to vibrate the effect button 18A, the state of FIG. 72 (a) is changed to the state of FIG. 72 (b), and the effect button 18A is vibrated at high speed or low speed. Further, when outputting an image, as shown in FIG. 72C, the effect image of the effect button 18A that vibrates is displayed on the image display device 14. Further, in the case of voice output, as shown in FIG. 72C, the voice output device 15 outputs pseudo sound of vibration sound of the effect button 18A.

And sub CPU102a, in the period (d-4) of "special character reach B1-1", two special effect design (the left pattern and the right) where the special effect design (the middle design) which is changing is stopped first (D-4) of Fig. 66 showing that "character s1" defeats "chara p1" while stopping the three special effect symbols in the same numerical value by becoming the same numerical value as the symbol). Effect control to display the effect image shown in FIG.
Thereby, the player is informed that the first jackpot in which the jackpot game (first jackpot game) of which the number of rounds is 16R (round) is executed is won.

(Variation production pertaining to fluctuation production pattern B013 (loss))
If the determination result of the big hit is “loss” in the high probability gaming state and the high time short gaming state in the fluctuation 1 to 30 times, and the “variation effect pattern B013” is selected, the sub CPU 102 a basically performs FIG. The same variable presentation is executed as the “variable presentation pattern B019” shown in (a). That is, the sub CPU 102a executes "symbol variation B3-1" in the period (d-1) and the period (d-2) from the timing T401 to the timing T402, and the period (d-3) from the timing T402 to the timing T403. ) And period (d-4), "special character reach B1-1" is executed. Moreover, when performing a specific effect, a specific effect is performed during execution of "special character reach B1-1."

  However, in the variation effect of "variation effect pattern B019", in "special character reach B1-1", the sub CPU 102a does not have the same number as the left symbol and the right symbol in the middle symbol of the three special effect symbols. At the same time, the effect control (D-1) is performed to display the effect image (D-1) in which the "character s1" is dropped by the "character p1". As a result, the player is informed that the determination result of the big hit determination is "loss".

(Variation effect according to fluctuation effect pattern B021 (first big hit))
When the determination result of the big hit in the high probability short game state and the high probability short game state is the “first big hit” and the “variation effect pattern B 021” is selected, the sub CPU 102 a is shown in FIG. The effect control for executing the fluctuation effect from timing T501 to timing T503 shown in FIG.

  The sub CPU 102a executes "symbol fluctuation B3-1" in a period (e-1) and a period (e-2) from timing T501 to timing T502 in the fluctuation representation of "variation effect pattern B021", and from timing T502 In the period (e-2) and the period (e-3) up to the timing T503, effect control for executing "special character reach B2-1" is performed.

  The sub CPU 102a performs effect control for causing the image display device 14 to display effect images in which a plurality of special effect symbols are varied in a period (e-1) of "symbol variation B3-1".

  In the period (e-1) of this "symbol variation B3-1", the sub CPU 102a first causes the image display device 14 to display the effect image (e-1) of Fig. 67 in which a plurality of special effect symbols change. Perform effect control of.

  Then, in the period (e-2) of “symbol variation B3-1”, the sub CPU 102a has the same numerical value as the special effect symbol (left symbol) for which the special effect symbol (right symbol) which is about to stop is stopped first. Image display of effect images of reach around (e-2-1) or (e-2-2) and (e-2-3) in FIG. The effect control for displaying on the device 14 is performed.

  In this "symbol variation B3-1", the sub CPU 102a performs control so as to execute "development notice B", which gives rise to "special character reach B2-1" as a special effect. The sub CPU 102 a sets “development notice B 1” as “development notice B” according to the execution ratio of “development notice B” in “variation effect pattern B 021” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. It is controlled to execute any one of the development notices B2.

  The sub CPU 102a makes the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A which is the operation means effective in the "symbol variation B3-1" when executing either "development notice B1" or "development notice B2". The operation effective period X51 is set. Reach production effect such as whether the special effect design (right design) which is about to stop from now on stops with the same numerical value as the special effect design (left design) which stopped earlier from now, and reach condition occurs. Set during the execution of

  In the operation effective period X51, as shown in FIG. 67, the sub CPU 102a performs an operation for urging the operation of the effect image (e-2-1) including the image of the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the effect button 18A or the operation of the operation lever 19A. An effect that causes the image display device 14 to display the effect image of the effect image (e-2-2) including the image of the promotion notification is executed. The image of the operation promotion notification of “development notice B1” is the one (e-2-1) consisting of the characters “press the button !!” together with the images of the effect button 18A and the timer gauge, and “evolution notice B2” The image of the operation promotion notification is the one (e-2-2) consisting of the characters "Take the lever!" Along with the images of the effect lever 19A and the timer gauge.

  However, the effect image of (e-2-1) is displayed when the effect button 18A is in the projecting state in the operation effective period X51 of the "development advance notice B1", and the operation to the effect button 18A in the projecting state is Contains an image of an operation prompting prompting the user.

  (E-2-3) of FIG. 67 illustrates an example of the “development advance notice B1”. When the sub CPU 102 a executes “advance notice B 1”, the sub CPU 102 a performs (e-2 in FIG. 67) based on one pressing operation performed on the effect button 18A in the projecting state during the operation valid period X51. As shown in -3), control is performed so as to execute a corresponding effect (development advance notice) in which an effect image (effect b1) is displayed on the image display device 14 superimposed on a special effect pattern of reach directing effect.

  Further, as shown in (e-2-3) in FIG. 67, the sub CPU 102a is based on the fact that in the development advance notice B2 the tilting operation is performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period X51. Control is performed to execute a corresponding effect (development advance notice) in which an effect image (effect b2) is displayed on the image display device 14 by overlapping on a special effect pattern of reach effect.

  In the period (e-3) of "special character reach B2-1", the sub CPU 102a stops and displays the special effect design (left symbol and right symbol) of the two same numerical values and also the special character "character s2 (warrior)". 67 performs effect control for causing the image display device 14 to display an effect image such as (e-3-1) in FIG. 67 whose content is to fight the special character “character p2 (enemy warrior)”.

  When executing the specific effect, the sub CPU 102a sets a specific effect execution period W51 for executing the specific effect in the “special character reach B2-1”. Then, in order to vibrate the effect button 18A, the state of FIG. 72 (a) is changed to the state of FIG. 72 (b), and the effect button 18A is vibrated at high speed or low speed. Further, when outputting an image, as shown in FIG. 72C, the effect image of the effect button 18A that vibrates is displayed on the image display device 14. Further, in the case of voice output, as shown in FIG. 72C, the voice output device 15 outputs pseudo sound of vibration sound of the effect button 18A.

  Then, the sub CPU 102a performs control to execute "decision effect B" in "special character reach B2-1". The sub CPU 102a controls to execute "decision effect B" as a special effect in "special character reach B2-1". The sub CPU 102a selects "determination effect B1" as "determination effect B" according to the execution ratio of "determination effect B" in "variation effect pattern B021" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 46 (b), Control is performed to execute any of the "decided effects B2".

  (E- 3-2) of FIG. 67 shows an example of “decision effect B 1”. When executing the “decided effect B1”, the sub CPU 102a sets an operation effective period X52 in which the operation of the effect button 18A which is the operation means is activated in the “special character reach B2-1”. The sub CPU 102a performs an effect of displaying an effect image ((e-3-2) in FIG. 67) including an image of the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A in the projecting state in the operation effective period X52.

  As shown in (e-3-4) of FIG. 67, the sub CPU 102a determines that the depression of the effect button 18A is performed once during the operation valid period X52 in the “decided effect B1”. The effect image of “flash b1” is displayed on the image display device 14, and the first decorative member 17A is moved from the “standby position 1” to the “operation position 1-1” to display the front surface of the image display device 14. The "decision effect" (corresponding effect) of the content of moving to the lower position "operation position 1-2" is executed.

  (E-3-3) of FIG. 67 shows an example of “decision effect B2”. In the case of executing the "decided effect B2", the sub CPU 102a sets an operation effective period X52 in which the operation of the effect lever 19A which is the operation means is activated in the "special character reach B2-1". The sub CPU 102a performs an effect of displaying an effect image ((e-3-3) in FIG. 67) including the image of the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation to the effect lever 19A in the operation effective period X52.

  The sub CPU 102a displays an effect image of "flash b2" on the image display device 14 based on the fact that in this "decision effect B2" the tilting operation is performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period X52. Move the first decorative member 17A from the "standby position 1" to the "operating position 1-2" which is the lower position on the front surface of the image display device 14 via the "operating position 1-1" Execute the "decided effect" (correspondence effect) of the content.

Sub CPU102a, in the period (e-4) of "special character reach B2-1", two special effect design (the left pattern and the right pattern) in which the special effect pattern (the middle pattern) during the change is stopped and displayed first While being made to stop in the state which arranged three special production design in the same numerical value by becoming the same numerical value as, “e character s2” in FIG. The effect control for displaying the effect image to be displayed on the image display device 14 is performed.
Thereby, the player is informed that the first jackpot in which the jackpot game (first jackpot game) of which the number of rounds is 16R (round) is executed is won.

  The sub CPU 102a performs the first decorative member 17A in the "decision effect B" from the "standby position 1" to the other position (action in the "decision effect B" in the fluctuation effect executed when the judgment result of the big hit judgment is "loss". Position) does not operate.

Further, in the variation effect to be executed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is the "second jackpot", in the "decision effect B", the first decorative member 17A from the "standby position 1" to the "operating position 1-1" Make it move only to the end.
As described above, in the "decision effect B" of the fluctuation effect selected when the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is the "first jackpot", the first decorative member 17A is lower than the "operating position 1-1" Because it is moved to "Operation position 1-2", the judgment result of the jackpot is the first of 16R (round) which is more advantageous for the player than the "second jackpot" of playing the second jackpot of 4R (round). We are reporting that we were elected to "the first jackpot" to play a jackpot game.

And sub CPU102a, in the period (e-3) of "special character reach B2-1", two special effect designs (the left pattern and the right) in which the special effect pattern (the middle pattern) in change is stopped first (E-4 in FIG. 67) in which the "character s2" defeats the "character p2" while stopping the three special effect symbols in the same numerical value by becoming the same numerical value as the design). ) Is displayed on the image display device 14.
Thereby, the player is informed that the first jackpot in which the jackpot game (first jackpot game) of which the number of rounds is 16R (round) is executed is won.

(Variation production pertaining to fluctuation production pattern B015 (loss))
If the determination result of the big hit is “loss” in the high probability gaming state and the high time short gaming state in the fluctuation 1 to 30 times, and the “variation effect pattern B015” is selected, the sub CPU 102 a The same variation effect as "variation effect pattern B021" shown in (b) is controlled. That is, the sub CPU 102a executes "symbol variation B3-1" in the period (e-1) and the period (e-2) from timing T501 to timing T502, and the period (e-3) from timing T502 to timing T503 The effect control is performed so as to execute “special character reach B2-1” in the period (e-4) and the period (e-4). Moreover, when performing a specific effect, a specific effect is performed during execution of "special character reach B2-1."

  The sub CPU 102a selects "determination effect B1" as "determination effect B" according to the execution ratio of "determination effect B" in "variation effect pattern B015" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Control is performed to execute one of the "decision effects B2".

  However, the sub CPU 102a is the first decorative member in the case of executing either “decision effect B1” or “decision effect B2” of “special character reach B2-1” in the fluctuation effect of “variation effect pattern B015”. 17A is not moved from the "standby position 1" to another position (operating position). Then, the sub CPU 102a stops the middle symbol of the three special effect symbols without becoming the same numerical value as the left symbol and the right symbol, and the "character s2" is in a state of being defeated by the "character p2". Effect control is performed to display the effect image of (E-1) in FIG. As a result, the player is informed that the determination result of the jackpot determination is "loss".

(Change effect according to change effect pattern B 023 (first big hit))
When the determination result of the big hit in the high probability short game state and the high probability short game state is the “first big hit” and the “variation effect pattern B 023” is selected, the sub CPU 102 a is shown in FIG. Control is performed to execute the fluctuation effect from timing T601 to timing T603 shown in FIG.

  The sub CPU 102a executes "symbol fluctuation B3-1" in a period (f-1) and a period (f-2) from timing T601 to timing T602 in the fluctuation representation of "variation effect pattern B023", and from timing T602 In the period (f-3) and the period (f-4) up to the timing T603, effect control is performed so as to execute "special character reach B3-1".

  In the variation production of the “variation production pattern B023”, the contents of the “pattern variation B3-1” in the period (f-1) and the period (f-2) from the timing T601 to the timing T602 are “variation production pattern B019” It is the same as the effect contents of "symbol variation B3-1".

  In the sub CPU 102a, the operation valid period X61 shown in FIG. 65 (c) corresponds to the operation valid period X41 shown in FIG. 65 (a).

  In the period (f-3) of the "special character reach B3-1", the sub CPU 102a stops and displays the special effect design (left symbol and right symbol) of the two same numerical values and the special character "character s3 (warrior)". The effect control is performed so as to display on the image display device 14 an effect image whose content ('not shown) fights the special character' character p3 (enemy warrior) '(not shown)'.

  The sub CPU 102a performs control to execute "decision effect B" as a special effect in "special character reach B3-1". The sub CPU 102a selects "determination effect B1" as "determination effect B" according to the execution ratio of "determination effect B" in "variation effect pattern B023" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 46 (b), One of the "decision effects B2" is executed. The sub CPU 102a sets the operation valid period X62 as shown in FIG. 65 (c) in the "decision effect B1" and the "decision effect B2". Moreover, the specific effect execution period W61 shown in FIG. 65 (c) corresponds to the specific effect execution period W41 shown in FIG. 65 (a).

Sub CPU102a, in the period (f-4) of "special character reach B3-1", two special effect design (the left pattern and the right pattern) in which the special effect pattern (the middle pattern) during the change is stopped and displayed first The same numerical value as the above, while stopping the three special effects in a state of being aligned to the same numerical value, the effect image to notify that "character s3" defeated "character p3" image display device 14 Control to display on
Thereby, the player is informed that the first jackpot in which the jackpot game (first jackpot game) of which the number of rounds is 16R (round) is executed is won.

(Variation production pertaining to fluctuation production pattern B017 (loss))
In the high probability gaming state and high time short gaming state, when the judgment result of the big hit is "loss" and "fluctuation effect pattern B017" is selected in the first to 30th fluctuations, the sub CPU 102a basically "fluctuates" The effect control is performed to execute the same variation effect as the effect pattern B 023 ”. That is, the sub CPU 102a executes "symbol variation B3-1" in period (f-1) and period (f-2) from timing T601 to timing T602, and period (f-3) from timing T602 to timing T603. The effect control is performed to execute “special character reach B 3-1” in the period (f-4) and the period (f-4). In the case of executing the specific effect, the specific effect execution period W61 is set to execute the specific effect when the “special character reach B3-1” is performed. Then, in the specific effect execution period W61, in order to vibrate the effect button 18A, the state of FIG. 72 (a) is changed to the state of FIG. 72 (b) to vibrate the effect button 18A at high speed or low speed. Further, when outputting an image, as shown in FIG. 72C, the effect image of the effect button 18A that vibrates is displayed on the image display device 14. Further, in the case of voice output, as shown in FIG. 72C, the voice output device 15 outputs pseudo sound of vibration sound of the effect button 18A.

  The sub CPU 102a selects "determination effect B1" as "determination effect B" according to the execution ratio of "determination effect B" in "variation effect pattern B017" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 46 (a), One of the "decision effects B2" is executed.

  However, the sub CPU 102a is the first decorative member in the case of executing either “decision effect B1” or “decision effect B2” of “special character reach B3-1” in the fluctuation effect of “variation effect pattern B017”. 17A is not moved from the "standby position 1" to another position (operating position). Then, the sub CPU 102a stops the middle symbol out of the three special effect symbols without becoming the same numerical value as the left symbol and the right symbol, and the "character s3" is fallen to the "character p3" By displaying the effect image (not shown), it is informed that the determination result of the big hit determination is "loss".

(A concrete example of the fluctuation effect of the effect mode C)
Next, with reference to FIG. 68, a specific example of the fluctuation effect of the fluctuation effect pattern in the effect mode C, which is set in the high probability gaming state and the time-short game state, is set at the 31st to the 47th time.
In FIG. 68A, the sub CPU 102a receives the fluctuation pattern designation command "E6H59H" or "E7H59H" from the main control board 101, and determines the "variation effect pattern C019". It is a figure for demonstrating. Also, in FIG. 68 (b), the sub CPU 102 a receives the fluctuation pattern designation command “E6H5AH” or “E7H5AH” from the main control board 101 and temporally executes the fluctuation effect to be executed when “the fluctuation effect pattern C021” is determined. It is a figure for demonstrating this flow. In FIG. 68C, the sub CPU 102a receives the fluctuation pattern designation command "E6H5BH" or "E7H5BH" from the main control board 101, and determines the time of the fluctuation effect executed when the "variation effect pattern C023" is determined. It is a figure for demonstrating this flow.

(Variation effect according to fluctuation effect pattern C019 (first big hit))
When the determination result of the big hit in the high probability short game state and the high probability short game state is “first big hit” at the 31st to 74th changes and the “variation effect pattern C019” is selected, the sub CPU 102a is shown in FIG. Control is performed to execute the fluctuation effect from timing T701 to timing T703 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 69 shows an effect image to be displayed on the image display device 14 in the variable effect shown in FIG. 68A, the effect button 18A, and the first decorative member 17A.

  The sub CPU 102a executes "symbol variation C3-1" in the period (g-1) and the period (g-2) from the timing T701 to the timing T702, and the period (g-3) from the timing T702 to the timing T703 In the period (g-4), the "attack reach C1-1" is executed.

  In the period (g-1) of "symbol variation C3-1", the sub CPU 102a executes an effect of displaying, on the image display device 14, effect images in which a plurality of special effect symbols are varied.

  In the period (g-1) of the "symbol variation C3-1", the sub CPU 102a first causes the image display device 14 to display the effect image (g-1) of Fig. 69 in which a plurality of special effect symbols change. Run.

  Then, in the period (g-2) of "symbol variation C3-1", the sub CPU 102a has the same numerical value as the special effect symbol (left symbol) for which the special effect symbol (right symbol) which is about to stop is stopped first. Image display of effect images of reach around (g-2-1) or (g-2-2) and (g-2-3) as shown in FIG. Control to be displayed on the device 14 is performed.

  In this "symbol variation C3-1", the sub CPU 102a executes a "development notice C" which gives the development to the "attack reach C1-1" as a special effect. The sub CPU 102 a sets “development notice C 1” as “development notice C” according to the execution ratio of “development notice C” in “variation effect pattern C 019” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 48 (b). Execute one of the development notices C2 ".

  Even when the sub CPU 102a executes either "development notice C1" or "development notice C2", the operation valid period X71 in which the operation of the effect button 18A which is the operation means is made effective in "symbol variation C3-1". Set Reach production effect such as whether the special effect design (right design) which is about to stop from now on stops with the same numerical value as the special effect design (left design) which stopped earlier from now, and reach condition occurs. Set during the execution of

  In the operation effective period X71, as shown in FIG. 69, the sub CPU 102a performs an operation for urging the operation of the effect image (g-2-1) including the image of the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the effect button 18A or the operation of the effect lever 19A. An effect that causes the image display device 14 to display the effect image of the effect image (g-2-2) including the image of the promotion notification is executed. The image of the operation promotion notification of “development notice B1” is the one (g-2-1) consisting of the characters “press the button !!” together with the image of the effect button 18A and the timer gauge, and “development notice B2” The image of the operation promotion notification is the one (g-2-2) consisting of the characters "Take the lever!" Along with the images of the effect lever 19A and the timer gauge.

  When the sub CPU 102 a executes “advance notice C 1”, the special effect design symbol of the reach tilt effect is performed based on one pressing operation on the effect button 18 A in the projecting state during the operation valid period X 71. On the image display device 14, a corresponding effect (development advance notice) is executed such that an effect image ((g-2-3) in FIG. 69) having an effect image (effect c1 (green)) is superimposed on the image.

  When the sub CPU 102 a executes “advance notice C 2”, the sub CPU 102 a superimposes a special effect design of reach on stage effect on the basis of the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19 A during the operation valid period X 71 to display the effect image ( A corresponding effect (advance notice of development) of displaying an effect image ((g-2-3) in FIG. 69) having the effect c2 (red) on the image display device 14 is executed.

  The sub CPU 102a stops and displays the special effect design (left symbol and right symbol) of the same two values in the period (g-3) of the "attack reach C1-1" and the character "character b1 (侍)" Control is performed to display on the image display device 14 an effect image such as (g-3-1) or the like of FIG. In the case of executing the specific effect, the specific effect execution period W71 is set to execute the specific effect when the “attack reach C1-1” is performed. Then, in the specific effect execution period W71, in order to vibrate the effect button 18A, the state of FIG. 72 (a) is changed to the state of FIG. 72 (b) to vibrate the effect button 18A at high speed or low speed. Further, when outputting an image, as shown in FIG. 72C, the effect image of the effect button 18A that vibrates is displayed on the image display device 14. Further, in the case of voice output, as shown in FIG. 72C, the voice output device 15 outputs pseudo sound of vibration sound of the effect button 18A.

  The sub CPU 102a executes "decision effect C" as a special effect in "attack reach C1-1". The sub CPU 102a selects "determination effect C1" as "determination effect C" according to the execution ratio of "determination effect C" in "variation effect pattern C019" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 48 (b). One of "decision effect C2" is executed.

  (G-3-2) and (g-3-4) of FIG. 69 show an example of the “decision effect C1”. When executing the “decided effect C1”, the sub CPU 102a sets, in the “attack reach C1-1”, an operation effective period X72 in which the operation of the effect button 18A which is the operation means is activated. In the operation effective period X72, an operation promotion notification (a notification promotion image consisting of the characters "Push!" Along with the effect button 18A in the projecting state and the image of the timer gauge) is executed to urge the player to operate the production button 18A.

  In the “determined effect C1”, the sub CPU 102a produces an effect image of “flash c1” in the image display device 14 based on one pressing operation performed on the effect button 18A during the operation valid period X72. Is displayed, and the first decorative member 17A as a movable member is moved from the "standby position 1" to the "operating position 1-1" via the "operating position 1-2", which is the lower position of the front surface of the image display device 14. And execute the “decisive effect” (corresponding effect) of the content of “move to”.

  (G-3-3) of FIG. 69 shows an example of the “decision effect C2”. When executing the “decided effect C2”, the sub CPU 102a sets, in the “attack reach C1-1”, an operation effective period X72 in which the operation of the effect lever 19A which is the operation means is activated. In the operation valid period X72, an operation promotion notification (a notification promotion image formed of characters of "draw!" Together with images of the production lever 19A and the timer gauge) is executed to urge the player to operate the production lever 19A.

  In this "decision effect C2", the sub CPU 102a produces an effect image of "flash c2" in the image display device 14 based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period X72 (shown in FIG. To display the first decorative member 17A as a movable member from the "standby position 1" to the "operating position 1-1" via the "operating position 1", which is the lower position of the front surface of the image display device 14. Execute the "decisive effect" (corresponding effect) of the content of moving to "-2".

  The sub CPU 102a performs the first decoration member 17A in the "decision effect C" from the "standby position 1" to the other position (action in the "decision effect C" in the variation effect executed when the determination result of the big hit determination is "loss". Position) does not operate.

Further, in the variation effect to be executed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is the "second jackpot", in the "decision effect C", the first decorative member 17A from the "standby position 1" to the "operating position 1-1" Make it move only to the end.
As described above, in the "decision effect C" of the fluctuation effect selected when the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is the "first jackpot", the first decorative member 17A is lower than the "operation position 1-1" Because it is moved to "Operation position 1-2", the judgment result of the jackpot is the first of 16R (round) which is more advantageous for the player than the "second jackpot" of playing the second jackpot of 4R (round). We are reporting that we were elected to "the first jackpot" to play a jackpot game.

And sub CPU102a, in the period (g-4) of "attack reach C1-1", two special effect designs (the left pattern and the right pattern) in which the special effect pattern (the middle pattern) in change was stopped first (G-4 in FIG. 62), which causes the three special effect symbols to stop in the same numerical value by stopping at the same numerical value as), and informing that "Chara b1" has defeated the enemy. ) Is displayed on the image display device 14.
Thereby, the player is informed that the first jackpot in which the jackpot game (first jackpot game) of which the number of rounds is 16R (round) is executed is won.

(Variation effects pertaining to fluctuation effect pattern C013 (loss))
If the judgment result of the big hit in the high probability short game state and the high probability short game state is “lost” in the variation 31 to 74, and the “variation effect pattern C013” is selected, the sub CPU 102 a The same variation effect as the variation effect of the "variation effect pattern C019" shown in (a) is executed. That is, the sub CPU 102a executes "symbol variation C3-1" in the period (g-1) and the period (g-2) from the timing T701 to the timing T702, and in the period (g-3) from the timing T702. Execute attack reach C1-1. In the case of executing the specific effect, the specific effect execution period W71 is set to execute the specific effect when the “attack reach C1-1” is performed.

  The sub CPU 102a selects "determination effect C1" as "determination effect C" according to the execution ratio of "determination effect C" in "variation effect pattern C013" set in the special effect type determination table of Fig. 48A. One of "decision effect C2" is executed.

  However, the sub CPU 102a performs the first decorative member 17A in the case of executing either “decision effect C1” or “decision effect C2” of “attack reach C1-1” in the fluctuation effect of “variation effect pattern C019”. Is not moved from the "standby position 1" to another position (operating position). Then, the sub CPU 102a is an effect of notifying that the middle symbol of the three special effect symbols is not the same numerical value as the left symbol and the right symbol and notifying that "the character b1" has failed in the attack " By displaying the image (G-1), it is informed that the determination result of the big hit determination is "loss".

(Variation effect according to fluctuation effect pattern C021 (first big hit))
When the determination result of the big hit in the high probability short game state and the high probability short game state is “first big hit” at the 31st to 74th changes and the “variation effect pattern C021” is selected, the sub CPU 102 a The variation effects from timing T801 to timing T803 shown in FIG.

  The sub CPU 102a executes "symbol variation C3-1" in a period (h-1) and a period (h-2) from the timing T801 to the timing T802 in the fluctuation representation of the "variation rendering pattern C021", and from the timing T802 "Attack reach C2-1" is executed in a period (h-3) and a period (h-4) up to the timing T803.

  In the variation presentation of the "variation presentation pattern C021", the presentation contents of "symbol variation C3-1" in the period (h-1) and the period (h-2) from the timing T801 to the timing T802 are "variation presentation pattern C019" It is the same as the effect contents of "symbol variation C3-1". The operation valid period X81 shown in FIG. 68 (b) corresponds to the operation valid period X71 shown in FIG. 68 (a).

  The sub CPU 102a stops and displays the special effect design (the left symbol and the right symbol) of the two same numerical values in the period (h-3) of the "attack reach C2-1" and the "character q2 (samurai)" runs fast Control is performed to display on the image display device 14 an effect image (not shown) whose content is to attack the player. The specific effect execution period W81 shown in FIG. 68 (b) corresponds to the specific effect execution period W71 shown in FIG. 68 (a).

  The sub CPU 102a executes "decision effect C" as a special effect in the period (h-3) of "attack reach C2-1". The sub CPU 102a selects "determination effect C1" as "determination effect C" according to the execution ratio of "determination effect C" in "variation effect pattern C021" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 48 (b), One of "decision effect C2" is executed. The sub CPU 102a sets an operation effective period X82 as shown in FIG. 68 (b) in the fluctuation representation of the “variation rendering pattern C021”.

And sub CPU102a, in the period (h-4) of "attack reach C2-1", two special effect designs (the left pattern and the right pattern) in which the special effect pattern (the middle pattern) in change is stopped first By having the same numerical value as), it stops the three special effect symbols in the same numerical value, and an effect image (not shown) notifying that "Chara q2" has defeated the enemy. Is controlled to be displayed on the image display device 14.
Thereby, the player is informed that the first jackpot in which the jackpot game (first jackpot game) of which the number of rounds is 16R (round) is executed is won.

(Variation production pertaining to fluctuation production pattern C015 (loss))
If the judgment result of the big hit in the high probability short game state and the high probability short game state is “lost” in the variation 31 to 74, and the “variation effect pattern C015” is selected, the sub CPU 102a basically performs as shown in FIG. The same variation effect as "variation effect pattern C021" shown in (b) is executed. That is, the sub CPU 102a executes "symbol variation C3-1" in the period (h-1) and the period (h-2) from the timing T801 to the timing T802, and in the period (h-3) from the timing T802. Execute attack reach C2-1. In the case of executing the specific effect, the specific effect execution period W81 is set to execute the specific effect when the “attack reach C2-1” is performed.

  The sub CPU 102a selects "determination effect C1" as "determination effect C" according to the execution ratio of "determination effect C" in the "variation effect pattern C015" set in the special effect type determination table of Fig. 48A. One of "decision effect C2" is executed.

  However, the sub CPU 102a performs the first decorative member 17A in the case of executing either “decision effect C1” or “decision effect C2” of “attack reach C1-1” in the fluctuation effect of “variation effect pattern C015”. Is not moved from the "standby position 1" to another position (operating position). Then, the sub CPU 102a stops the middle symbol of the three special effect symbols without becoming the same numerical value as the left symbol and the right symbol, and informs that the "character q2" has "failed" in the attack. By displaying the image, it is informed that the determination result of the big hit determination is "loss".

(Variation effect according to fluctuation effect pattern C023 (first big hit))
When the determination result of the big hit in the high probability short game state and the high probability short game state is “first big hit” in the 31st to 74th variations and the “variation effect pattern C 023” is selected, the sub CPU 102 a The fluctuation representation from timing T901 to timing T903 shown in FIG.

  The sub CPU 102a executes "symbol variation C3-1" in a period (i-1) and a period (i-2) from the timing T901 to the timing T902 in the fluctuation representation of the "variation effect pattern C023", and from the timing T902 "Attack reach C3-1" is executed in a period (i-3) and a period (i-4) up to the timing T903.

In the variation presentation of the "variation presentation pattern C023", the presentation contents of the "symbol variation C3-1" in the period (i-1) and the period (i-2) from the timing T901 to the timing T902 are "variation presentation pattern C019" It is the same as the effect contents of "symbol variation C3-1".
That is, the sub CPU 102a performs effect image (i-1) and effect image (i-2) of FIG. 68 (c) in "symbol variation C3-1" in period (i-1) and period (i-2). Display
The operation valid period X91 shown in FIG. 68 (c) corresponds to the operation valid period X71 shown in FIG. 68 (a).

  The sub CPU 102a stops and displays the two special numerical design symbols (left symbol and right symbol) during period (i-3) of "attack reach C3-1" and "Chara q3 (Nyan)" runs fast Control is performed to display on the image display device 14 an effect image (not shown) whose content is to attack the player. The specific effect execution period W91 shown in FIG. 68 (c) corresponds to the specific effect execution period W71 shown in FIG. 68 (a).

The sub CPU 102a executes "decision effect C" as a special effect in "attack reach C3-1". The sub CPU 102a selects "determination effect C1" as "determination effect C" according to the execution ratio of "determination effect C" in "variation effect pattern C023" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of "decision effect C2" is executed.
The sub CPU 102a sets the operation valid period X92 as shown in FIG. 68C when executing the "decision effect C1" in the fluctuation effect of the "variation effect pattern C023".

And sub CPU102a, in period (i-4) of "attack reach C3-1", two special effect designs (the left pattern and the right pattern) in which the special effect pattern (the middle pattern) in change is stopped and displayed first By having the same numerical value as), while stopping the three special effect designs in the same numerical value state effect image (not shown) notifying that "character q3" has defeated the enemy "(not shown) Is controlled to be displayed on the image display device 14.
Thereby, the player is informed that the first jackpot in which the jackpot game (first jackpot game) of which the number of rounds is 16R (round) is executed is won.
(Variation effect according to fluctuation effect pattern C017 (loss))
If the judgment result of the big hit in the high probability short game state and the high probability short game state is “lost” in the variation 31 to 74, and the “variation effect pattern C017” is selected, the sub CPU 102a is basically as shown in FIG. The same variation effect as the "variation effect pattern C023" shown in (c) is executed. That is, the sub CPU 102a executes "symbol variation C3-1" in the period (i-1) and the period (i-2) from the timing T901 to the timing T902, and "in the period (i-3) from the timing T902 Execute attack reach C3-1.

  The sub CPU 102a selects "determination effect C1" as "determination effect C" according to the execution ratio of "determination effect C" in "variation effect pattern C017" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of "decision effect C2" is executed.

  However, the sub CPU 102a performs the first decorative member 17A in the case of executing either “decision effect C1” or “decision effect C2” of “attack reach C3-1” in the fluctuation effect of “variation effect pattern C017”. Is not moved from the "standby position 1" to another position (operating position). Then, the sub CPU 102a stops the middle symbol of the three special effect symbols without becoming the same numerical value as the left symbol and the right symbol, and informs that the "character q3" has failed in the attack. By displaying the image, it is informed that the determination result of the big hit determination is "loss".

Next, a specific example of the fluctuation effect of the fluctuation effect pattern in the effect mode D set in the high probability game state and the short time game state in the variable 75 to 84 will be described.
The sub CPU 102 a performs effect control so as to perform a fluctuation effect having a Janken effect of the content that two characters perform “Janken” as a fluctuation effect in the effect mode D.

  FIG. 70 (a) is a diagram for describing the temporal flow of the fluctuation production of the “variation production pattern D019”. Further, FIG. 70 (b) is a diagram for explaining the temporal flow of the fluctuation effect of the “variation effect pattern D022”. Further, FIG. 70 (c) is a diagram for explaining the temporal flow of the fluctuation representation of the “variation presentation pattern D25”.

(Variation effect according to fluctuation effect pattern D019 (first big hit))
When the determination result of the big hit in the high probability short game state and the high probability short game state is the “first big hit” at the 75th to 84th changes, and the “variation effect pattern D019” is selected, the sub CPU 102 a The effect control for performing the fluctuation effect from timing T1001 to timing T1003 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 71 shows the effect image to be displayed on the image display device 14 in the variable effect shown in FIG. 70 (a), the effect button 18A, the effect lever 19A, and the first decorative member 17A.

  The sub CPU 102a performs “symbol variation D1-1” in a period (j-1) to a period (j-3) from timing T1001 to timing T1002, and a period (j-4) from timing T1002 to timing T1003. The effect control is performed so as to execute "Junken reach D1-1 (win)" in the period (j-5).

  In the period (j-1) of the "symbol variation D1-1", the sub CPU 102a changes the plurality of special effect designs in the period (j-1), and in the period (j-2), the effect image of (j-1) in FIG. The effect control is performed to display on the image display device 14 the effect image of (j-2) in FIG. 71 in which the character display of “Janken 2 wins!” Is superimposed on the variable display of the special effect design.

  In period (j-3) of "symbol variation D1-1", the sub CPU 102a stops at the same numerical value as the special effect symbol (left symbol) for which the special effect symbol (right symbol) which is about to stop is stopped first 71 of FIG. 71 (J-3-3), in which the character “friend r1”, which is an ally character, and the character “character u1”, which is an opponent character, perform the first round of battle, along with the reach of the character. Effect control is performed to display the effect images of 1) or (j-3-2) and (j-3-3) on the image display device 14.

  As shown in the effect images of (j-3-1), (j-3-2) and (j-3-3) of FIG. Execute “Development notice D” to develop into 1 (win). The sub CPU 102a sets “Development notice D1” as “Development notice D” according to the execution ratio of “Development notice D” in “Change effect pattern D019” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 50 (b). Control is performed to execute one of the development notices D2.

  The sub CPU 102a operates the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A, which is the operating means, in the period (j-3), when executing either "development notice D1" or "development notice D2" as a special effect. An operation effective period X101 to be effective is set.

  The sub CPU 102a performs control so as to execute an operation promotion notification that prompts the player to operate the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A in the operation effective period X101. The sub CPU 102a sets the effect button 18A in the protruding state (second state) as the protruding state (second state) as shown in (j-3-1) in FIG. An operation promotion notification for performing an operation promotion notification for prompting an operation to 18A and performing an operation for a production lever 19A as shown in (j-3-2) of FIG. Control to execute.

  In the case where the sub CPU 102a executes the "advance notice of development D1", the effect button 18A is in the projecting state (second state) in the operation valid period X101, and is shown in (j-3-1) in FIG. As such, from the image of the effect button 18A in the projecting state and the timer gauge and the character "Press!" Along with the effect image of "Chara r1" and "Chara u1" saying "Janken" in the introductory part of Janken An effect of displaying on the image display device 14 an effect image of an operation promotion notification for prompting operation of the effect button 18A.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 a executes the “advance notice D 2,” “character r 1” and “character u 1” are “active” as shown in (j- 3-2) of FIG. The effect image of the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A, which is composed of the image of the effect lever 19A and the timer gauge and the characters "Close!" An effect to be displayed on the display device 14 is executed.
In addition, when the effect image of the operation promotion notification is displayed, the corresponding sound may be output from the sound output device 15.

  When the sub CPU 102 a executes “development notice D 1”, the special effect design symbol of the reach tilt effect is performed based on one pressing operation on the effect button 18 A in the projecting state during the operation valid period X 101. And, in the Janken 1st Round, the effect image (effect d1 (blue)) is superimposed on the effect image of the content that “Chara r1” wins over “Chara u1” ((j-3-3 in FIG. 65) ) Is displayed on the image display device 14, and a corresponding effect (development advance notice) is executed.

  When the sub CPU 102 a executes “advance notice of development D 2,” the special effect design of the reach bending effect and the Janken first round based on the tilting operation being performed on the effect lever 19 A during the operation valid period X 101. The effect image ((j-3-3) in FIG. 71) having the effect image (effect d2 (yellow)) superimposed on the effect image of the content that “Chara r1” wins “Chara u1” in the image display device Execute response presentation (development notice) such as displaying on 14.

  When executing the specific effect, the sub CPU 102a sets the specific effect execution period W101 to the period (j-4) of the “Junken reach D1-1” and executes the specific effect. Then, in the specific effect execution period W101, in order to vibrate the effect button 18A, the state of FIG. 72 (a) is changed to the state of FIG. 72 (b) to vibrate the effect button 18A at high speed or low speed. Further, when outputting an image, as shown in FIG. 72C, the effect image of the effect button 18A that vibrates is displayed on the image display device 14. Further, in the case of voice output, as shown in FIG. 72C, the voice output device 15 outputs pseudo sound of vibration sound of the effect button 18A.

  As shown in (j-4-1) of FIG. 71, the sub CPU 102a selects two identical items in the “Junken reach D1-1 (win)” in the period (j-4) of the “Junken reach D1-1”. When the special effect design (left and right) of the numerical value is stopped and displayed, "character preview D" is executed. The sub CPU 102a sets "Chara notice D" as "Chara notice D" according to the execution ratio of "Chara notice D" in the "variation effect pattern D019" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 50 (b). Any one of the character previews D3 "is executed.

  The sub CPU 102a makes the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A effective in the period (j-4) even when any of the "character preview D1" to the "character preview D3" is executed as the special effect. The effective period Y101 is set. In the operation effective period X101, as shown in (j-4-1) (j-4-2) in FIG. 71, the sub CPU 102a performs an operation promotion notification to urge the player to operate the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A. Do not run

  In "character advance notice D1", as shown in (j-4-3) in FIG. 71, the sub CPU 102a determines that the depression of the effect button 18A is performed once during the operation valid period X101. Control is performed to execute a notice effect (corresponding effect) of contents such as displaying "Chara d1", which is a support character of "Chara r1", on the image display device 14.

  In "Chara notice D2", the sub CPU 102a selects "Chara d2" which is a cheering character of "Chara r1" based on one pressing operation performed on the effect button 18A during the operation valid period X101. Control is performed to execute a notice effect (correspondence effect) of contents to be displayed on the image display device 14.

  In "Chara notice D3", the sub CPU 102a displays "Chara d3", which is a cheering character of "Chara r1", based on the fact that the directing lever 19A is tilted during the operation effective period X101. Control is performed to execute an advance notice effect (correspondence effect) of contents to be displayed at 14.

  Then, after the sub CPU 102a executes the "character preview D", as shown in (j-4-4), (j-4-5), and (j-4-6) in FIG. Effect control is performed to cause the image display device 14 to display an effect image whose content is that the r 1 ′ ′ and the “character u 1” perform the second battle of the Janken.

  The sub CPU 102a executes "decision effect D" as a special effect as shown in (j-4-4) (j-4-5) of FIG.

  The sub CPU 102a selects "determination effect D1" as "determination effect D" according to the execution ratio of "determination effect D" in "variation effect pattern D019" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 50 (b), One of the "decision effects D2" is executed.

  When the sub CPU 102a executes "decision effect D1" as a special effect, an operation effective period in which the operation of the effect button 18A is effective in the period (j-4) of the "Junken reach D1-1 (win)" Set X102. Then, in this operation effective period X102, as shown in (j-4-4) of FIG. 71, the sub CPU 102a causes "Chara r1" and "Chara u1" to be "Goo", "Choki", "Par". In the effect image of the state before taking out any of, the operation promotion which urges the operation to the effect button 18A in the projecting state which consists of the effect button 18A in the projecting state, the timer gauge, and the character display of “press !!” Effect control is performed to display an image of notification.

  The sub CPU 102a, in "decided effect D1," wins a jackpot in the image display device 14 based on the pressing operation of the effect button 18A once during the operation effective period X102. The effect image of d1 is displayed, and the first decorative member 17A is moved from the "standby position 1" to the "active position 1-1" from the "standby position 1" as the movable member, which is the lower position of the front of the image display The "decisive effect" (corresponding effect) of the content of moving to the operation position 1-2 "is executed.

  Further, when the sub CPU 102a executes "decision effect D2" as a special effect, the sub CPU 102a performs an operation to make the operation of the effect lever 19A effective in the period (j-4) of the "Junken reach D1-1 (win)". The effective period X102 is set. Then, in this operation effective period X102, as shown in (j-4-5) of FIG. 71, the sub CPU 102a causes the "character r1" and the "character u1" to be "goo", "choki", "par". In the effect image of the state before taking out any of the above, an image of the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation to the effect lever 19A is displayed which is composed of the effect lever 19A, the timer gauge, and the character display of "close !!" Perform effect control.

  The sub CPU 102a, in the "decided effect D2", of the "flash light d2" which wins a jackpot in the image display device 14 based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period X102. The effect image is displayed, and the first decorative member 17A as the movable member is moved from the "standby position 1" to the "operating position 1-1" via the "operating position 1-1", which is the lower position of the front of the image display device Execute the "decisive effect" (corresponding effect) of the content of moving to "-2".

In addition, in the variation effect executed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is the "second jackpot", in the "decision effect D", the first decorative member 17A from the "standby position 1" to the "operating position 1-1" Make it move only to the end.
As described above, in the "decided effect D" of the fluctuation effect selected when the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is the "first jackpot", the first decorative member 17A is lower than the "operation position 1-1" Because it is moved to "Operation position 1-2", the judgment result of the jackpot is the first of 16R (round) which is more advantageous for the player than the "second jackpot" of playing the second jackpot of 4R (round). We are reporting that we were elected to "the first jackpot" to play a jackpot game.

As shown in the effect image (j-4-7) of FIG. 71, the sub CPU 102a displays “Janken 2” after execution of the “decided effect D” in the period (j-4) of the “Janken reach D1-1 (win)”. The period (j after the character r1 wins over the character u1 by displaying the character r1 over the character u1 by displaying the character r1 and the character u1 for the character and the par respectively. In -5), as shown in the effect image (j-5) of FIG. 71, the same special effect pattern (middle pattern) during variation is the same as the two special effect patterns (left and right) on which the stop display was made earlier By performing the numerical value of, effect control is performed to display the effect image of (j-5) in FIG. 71 on the image display device 14 in which the three special effect symbols are stopped in the same numerical value and stopped.
Thereby, the player is informed that the first jackpot in which the jackpot game (first jackpot game) of which the number of rounds is 16R (round) is executed is won.

(Variation effect according to fluctuation effect pattern D010 (loss))
When the determination result of the big hit in the high probability short game state and the high probability short game state is “losing” in the 75 to 84th change and the “variation effect pattern D010” is selected, the sub CPU 102 a is shown in FIG. The fluctuation presentation substantially similar to the fluctuation presentation of the “variation presentation pattern D019” shown is executed. That is, the sub CPU 102a performs the "symbol variation D1-1" in the period (j-1) to the period (j-3) from timing T1001 to timing T1002, that is, "character r1" is the first battle for "character u1". Control is performed so as to execute "Junken reach D1-1 (loss)" after executing the variation effect of the special effect pattern including the effect of winning with Janken. In this "Junken reach D1-1 (loss)", "Chara r1" is "Chara u1" as in the case of the variation presentation of the period (j-4) from the timing T1002 of "Junken reach D1-1 (win)". And perform the reach production including the production to perform the 2nd battle of Janken.

  The sub CPU 102a also executes "decision effect D" as a special effect in the period (j-4) as in the "variation effect pattern D019" even in the fluctuation effect of the "variation effect pattern D010".

  The sub CPU 102a selects "determination effect D1" as "determination effect D" according to the execution ratio of "determination effect D" in "variation effect pattern D010" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 50 (a), One of the "decision effects D2" is executed. However, the sub CPU 102a does not operate the first decorative member 17A in the "determination effect D1" and the "determination effect D2" of the "variation effect pattern D010".

  However, in the variation effect of the “variation effect pattern D010”, the sub CPU 102a performs “decision effect D1” in “Junken reach D1-1 (loss)” as shown in (J-1) of FIG. After displaying the stage image of "Chara r1" losing to "Chara u1" by "Chara r1" issuing "Choki" and "Chara u1" issuing "Goo" in the second game of Janken. As shown in the effect image (J-2) of FIG. 71, the special effect symbol (middle symbol) during change does not have the same numerical value as the two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) that are displayed first before stopping In this way, effect control is performed to display on the image display device 14 an effect image that is to be stopped in a state in which the three special effect symbols are not aligned with the same numerical value. As a result, it is informed that the determination result of the jackpot determination is "loss".

(Variation effect according to fluctuation effect pattern D022 (first big hit))
When the determination result of the big hit in the high probability short game state and the high probability short game state is "first big hit" at the 75th to 84th variation, and the "variation effect pattern D022" is selected, the sub CPU 102a displays The fluctuation representation from timing T1101 to timing T1103 shown in FIG.

  The sub CPU 102a executes "symbol variation D2-1" in a period (k-1) to a period (k-3) from timing T1101 to timing T1102, and a period (k-4) from timing T1102 to timing T1103 and "Junken reach D2-1 (win)" is performed in a period (k-5).

  The sub CPU 102a executes the same effect as "the symbol variation D1-1" in "the symbol variation D2-1". That is, sub CPU102a performs the production which displays the production image which makes a plurality of special production designs fluctuate in period (k-1) on image display device 14. Then, in the period (k-2) of "symbol variation D2-1", an image (not shown) of the effect image (not shown) in which the character display of "Janken wins three times!" The effect control is performed so as to be displayed on the display device 14.

  The sub CPU 102a stops at the same numerical value as the special effect design (left pattern) in which the special effect design (right pattern) which is about to stop is stopped earlier in the period (k-3) of "pattern change D2-1" Along with reach reach of whether or not to play, the image (not shown) of the effect image (not shown) that the character "char r1" and the opponent character "character u1" perform the first battle Janken The effect control to be displayed on the display device 14 is performed.

  The sub CPU 102 a executes “advance development notice D” for the development of “Junken reach D2-1 (win)” in the production of the reach. The sub CPU 102a sets “Development notice D1” as “Development notice D” according to the execution ratio of “Development notice D” in “Change effect pattern D022” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 50 (b). Control is performed to execute one of the development notices D2.

  Even when the sub CPU 102a executes either "development notice D1" or "development notice D2" as a special effect, an operation to validate the operation of the effect button 18A, which is the operation means, in period (k-3). The effective period X111 is set.

  The sub CPU 102a stops displaying the special effect design (left symbol and right symbol) of the same two numbers in "Junken reach D2-1 (win)" in the period (k-4) of "Junken reach D2-1". Then, the "character preview D" is executed. The sub CPU 102a sets "Chara notice D" as "Chara notice D" according to the execution ratio of "Chara notice D" in the "variation effect pattern D022" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 50 (b). Any one of the character previews D3 "is executed.

  When executing the specific effect, the sub CPU 102a sets a specific effect execution period W111 for performing the specific effect in the period (k-4). Then, in the specific effect execution period W111, in order to vibrate the effect button 18A, the state of FIG. 72 (a) is changed to the state of FIG. 72 (b) to vibrate the effect button 18A at high speed or low speed. Further, when outputting an image, as shown in FIG. 72C, the effect image of the effect button 18A that vibrates is displayed on the image display device 14. Further, in the case of voice output, as shown in FIG. 72C, the voice output device 15 outputs pseudo sound of vibration sound of the effect button 18A.

  Even if sub CPU 102a executes any of "character notice D1" to "character notice D3" as a special effect, sub CPU 102a performs operation valid period Y111 which makes operation of effect button 18A effective in period (k-4). Set

  The sub CPU 102a executes the "character preview D" in the "Junken reach D2-1 (win)", and then the "char r1" and the "char u1" perform the second and third rounds of the Janken battle, and the "character An effect control is performed to cause the image display device 14 to display an effect image whose content is that r1 ′ ′ continuously wins over “character u1”.

  Then, the sub CPU 102 a executes “decision effect D” in the effect of the third game of Janken in the second half of the period (k−4). The sub CPU 102a selects "determination effect D1" as "determination effect D" according to the execution ratio of "determination effect D" in "variation effect pattern D022" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 50 (b), One of the "decision effects D2" is executed.

  The sub CPU 102a performs an operation effective period X112 in which the operation of the effect button 18A is effective in the period in which the second stage Janken third game of the second half of the period (k-4) of the "Janken reach D2-1 (win)" is performed. Set In sub CPU102a, in operation effective period X112 of “decision effect D1”, “Chara r1” and “Chara u1” do not show any one of “Koo”, “Choki” or “Par” of the third Janken war. In the effect image of the state of the image of the operation promotion notification prompting the operation to the effect button 18A of the projecting state, which is composed of the character display of the effect button 18A of the projecting state and the timer gauge, and "press it!" Perform effect control. In addition, the sub CPU102a, in the operation effective period X112 of "decision effect D2", "Chara r1" and "Chara u1" are any of "Koo", "Choki", and "Par" in the third Janken war. In the effect image of the state before taking out, the image is controlled so as to display the image of the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation to the effect lever 19A consisting of the character indication of the effect lever 19A and the timer gauge and "let's try!" I do.

The sub CPU 102a performs the appearance that "Chara r1" wins the "Chara u1" in the third round of the Janken after the execution of the "decided effect D" of the period (k-4) of the "Junken reach D2-1 (win)" After the image is displayed, the special effect symbol (middle symbol) in motion during the period (k-5) becomes the same numerical value as the two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) that are displayed first before stopping Then, effect control is performed to display on the image display device 14 an effect image to be stopped in a state (777) in which the three special effect symbols are aligned to the same numerical value.
Thereby, the player is informed that the first jackpot in which the jackpot game (first jackpot game) of which the number of rounds is 16R (round) is executed is won.

(Variation effect according to fluctuation effect pattern D013 (loss))
When the determination result of the big hit in the high probability short game state and the high probability short game state is “losing” in the 75 to 84th change and the “variation effect pattern D013” is selected, the sub CPU 102 a is shown in FIG. A fluctuation effect substantially the same as the fluctuation effect of the “variation effect pattern D022” shown is executed. That is, the sub CPU 102a performs the "symbol change D2-1" in the period (k-1) to the period (k-3) from the timing T1101 to the timing T1102, that is, the "character r1" is the first to the "character u1". Control is performed so as to execute "Junken reach D2-1 (loss)" after executing the variation effect of the special effect pattern including the effect of winning with Janken. In this "Junken reach D2-1 (loss)", "Chara r1" is "Chara u1" as in the case of the fluctuation presentation of the period (k-4) from the timing T1102 of "Junken reach D2-1 (win)". And the Janken second round, the third round will be performed, but in the second round of the Janken second round, "Chara r1" wins the "Kara u1" and in the third round of the Janken "Kara r1" loses the "Kara u1" Execute reach production.

  The sub CPU 102a executes the specific effect in the case of executing the specific effect in the period (k-4) as in the "change effect pattern D022" even in the change effect of the "change effect pattern D013", and also performs the special effect Execute “Decide Effect D” as

  The sub CPU 102a selects "determination effect D1" as "determination effect D" according to the execution ratio of "determination effect D" in "variation effect pattern D013" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 50 (a), One of the "decision effects D2" is executed. However, the sub CPU 102a does not operate the first decorative member 17A in the "determination effect D1" and the "determination effect D2" of the "variation effect pattern D013".

  However, in the variation presentation of the “variation presentation pattern D013”, the sub CPU 102a executes the “decision presentation D1” in the “Junken reach D2-1 (loss)”, and then “Chara r1” is “in the third game of Janken”. After displaying the effect image of losing the character u1 ', the special effect pattern (inside pattern) during the change does not have the same numerical value as the two special effect patterns (left pattern and right pattern) displayed first. Then, effect control is performed to display on the image display device 14 an effect image that is to be stopped in a state in which the three special effect designs are not aligned with the same numerical value. As a result, it is informed that the determination result of the jackpot determination is "loss".

(Variation effect according to fluctuation effect pattern D025 (first big hit))
When the determination result of the big hit in the high probability short game state and the high probability short game state is "first big hit" at the 75th to 84th variation, and the "variation effect pattern D025" is selected, the sub CPU 102a is shown in FIG. The fluctuation representation from timing T1201 to timing T1203 shown in FIG.

  The sub CPU 102a executes "symbol variation D3-1" in a period (l-1) to a period (l-3) from timing T1201 to timing T1202, and a period (l-4) from timing T1202 to timing T1203 and "Junken reach D3-1 (win)" is performed in a period (1-5).

  The sub CPU 102a performs the same effect as the "symbol variation D1-1" in the "symbol variation D3-1". That is, sub CPU102a performs the production which displays the production image which fluctuates a plurality of special production designs in period (l-1) on image display device 14. Then, in the period (l-2) of "symbol variation D3-1", an image (not shown) of the effect image (not shown) in which the character display of "Janken wins 4 times!" The effect control is performed so as to be displayed on the display device 14.

  The sub CPU 102a stops at the same numerical value as the special effect design (left pattern) in which the special effect design (right pattern) to be stopped first stops in the period (l-3) of "symbol change D3-1" Along with reach reach of whether or not to play, the image (not shown) of the effect image (not shown) that the character "char r1" and the opponent character "character u1" perform the first battle Janken The effect control to be displayed on the display device 14 is performed.

  The sub CPU 102 a executes “advance development notice D” for the development of “Junken reach D 3-1 (win)” in the production of the reach. The sub CPU 102a sets “Development notice D1” as “Development notice D” according to the execution ratio of “Development notice D” in “Change effect pattern D025” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 50 (b). Control is performed to execute one of the development notices D2.

  Even when sub CPU 102a executes either "development notice D1" or "development notice D2" as a special effect, an operation to validate the operation of effect button 18A, which is the operation means, in period (l-3). The effective period X121 is set.

  In the “Junken reach D3-1 (win)” in the period (l-4) of the “Junken reach D3-1”, the sub CPU 102a sets the specified effect execution period W121 to execute the specified effect in FIG. The special effect determined with reference to FIG. 59 is executed.

  The sub CPU 102a stops displaying the special effect design (left symbol and right symbol) of the same two numbers in "Junken reach D3-1 (win)" in the period (l-4) of "Junken reach D3-1". Then, the "character preview D" is executed. The sub CPU 102a sets "Chara notice D" as "Chara notice D" according to the execution ratio of "Chara notice D" in the "variation effect pattern D025" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 50 (b). Any one of the character previews D3 "is executed.

  Even if sub CPU 102a executes any of "character notice D1" to "character notice D3" as a special effect, sub CPU 102a performs operation valid period Y121 for validating operation of effect button 18A in period (l-4). Set

  The sub CPU 102a executes the "character preview D" in the "Junken reach D3-1 (win)", and then the "character r1" and the "character u1" perform the Janken second to fourth battles, and the "character An effect control is performed to cause the image display device 14 to display an effect image whose content is that r1 ′ ′ continuously wins over “character u1”.

  Then, the sub CPU 102 a executes “decision effect D” in the staging of the 4th battle of Janken in the second half of the period (1-4). The sub CPU 102a selects "determination effect D1" as "determination effect D" according to the execution ratio of "determination effect D" in the "variation effect pattern D025" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 50 (b), One of the "decision effects D2" is executed.

  When the sub CPU 102 a executes “decision effect D 1” as a special effect, the sub CPU 102 a performs an effect of the fourth Janken war of the second half of the “Janken reach D 3-1 (win)” period (I-4), An operation effective period X122 for making the operation of the effect button 18A effective is set. In sub CPU102a, in operation effective period X122 of “decision effect D1”, “Chara r1” and “Chara u1” do not show any one of “Koo”, “Joki” or “Par” of the 4th Janken war. In the effect image of the state of the image of the operation promotion notification prompting the operation to the effect button 18A of the projecting state, which is composed of the character display of the effect button 18A of the projecting state and the timer gauge, and "press it!" Perform effect control.

  In addition, the sub CPU102a, in the "decision effect D2", in the operation effective period X122, "Chara r1" and "Chara u1" are any of "Koo", "Joki", and "Par" of the 4th Janken war. In the effect image of the state before taking out the image, the image of the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation to the effect lever 19A is displayed, which is composed of the effect lever 19A, the timer gauge, and the character display of “let's try!” Perform effect control.

The sub CPU 102a performs the appearance that "Chara r1" wins the "Chara u1" in the fourth round of the Janken after the execution of the "decided effect D" during the "Junken reach D3-1 (win)" period (l-4) After the image is displayed, the special effect design (middle design) in motion during the period (1-5) becomes the same numerical value as the two special effect designs (left design and right design) that are displayed first before stopping Then, effect control is performed to display on the image display device 14 an effect image that is to be stopped in a state (777) in which the three special effect symbols are aligned to the same numerical value.
Thereby, the player is informed that the first jackpot in which the jackpot game (first jackpot game) of which the number of rounds is 16R (round) is executed is won.

(Variation effect according to fluctuation effect pattern D016 (loss))
When the judgment result of the big hit in the high probability short game state and the high probability short game state is “losing” in the 75 to 84th change, and the “change effect pattern D016” is selected, the sub CPU 102a “the change effect pattern D025”. Substantially the same fluctuation presentation as that of. That is, the sub CPU 102a performs the "symbol change D3-1" in the period (l-1) to the period (l-3) from timing T1201 to timing T1202, that is, "character r1" is the first battle in "character u1". Control is performed so as to execute "Junken reach D3-1 (loss)" after executing the variation effect of the special effect pattern including the effect of winning with Janken. In this "Junken reach D3-1 (loss)", "Chara r1" is "Chara u1" in the same manner as the fluctuation presentation of the period (I-4) from the timing T1202 of "Junken reach D3-1 (win)". And perform the reach production including the production to perform the Janken 2nd game ~ 4th game.

  The sub CPU 102a also sets the specific effect execution period W121 in the period (l-4) in the same manner as the “variable effect pattern D025” when executing the specific effect even in the variable effect of the “change effect pattern D016”. The specific effect determined with reference to FIGS. 54 to 59 is executed.

  The sub CPU 102a also executes "decision effect D" as a special effect in the period (l-4) as in the "variation effect pattern D025" even in the fluctuation effect of the "variation effect pattern D016".

  The sub CPU 102a selects "determination effect D1" as "determination effect D" according to the execution ratio of "determination effect D" in the "variation effect pattern D016" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 50A. One of the "decision effects D2" is executed.

  However, in the variation presentation of the “variation presentation pattern D016”, the sub CPU 102a executes the “decision presentation D1” in the “Junken reach D3-1 (loss)”, and then “Chara r1” is “in the 4th game of the Janken”. After displaying the effect image of losing the character u1 ', the special effect pattern (inside pattern) during the change does not have the same numerical value as the two special effect patterns (left pattern and right pattern) displayed first. Then, effect control is performed to display on the image display device 14 an effect image that is to be stopped in a state in which the three special effect designs are not aligned with the same numerical value. As a result, it is informed that the determination result of the jackpot determination is "loss".

As described above, in the variation effects of the presentation modes A to D, the sub CPU 102a does not project the presentation button 18A in the non-projecting state during the operation valid period in which the operation promotion notification for prompting the player to operate the presentation button 18A State) or protruding state (second state).
On the other hand, the sub CPU 102a sets the effect button 18A in the non-projecting state (first state) while in the operation effective period in which the operation promotion notification for prompting the player to operate the effect button 18A is not performed (first state). ) And not to.

  In addition, as described above, in the specific gaming state (high probability gaming state and short time gaming state) after the end of the jackpot game, the gaming machine Y is executing the variation effect of the effect mode B to D, effect mode B The operation effective period is set during the fluctuation effect at a higher rate in the fluctuation effect (the fluctuation 31st to the 74th) of the effect mode C than the fluctuation effect of the (1st to 30th fluctuation), and the fluctuation of the production mode C is set. The operation effective period is set during the fluctuation effect at a higher rate in the fluctuation effect (the fluctuation 75th to the 84th time) of the effect mode D than the effect.

(Specific example of display result of each display)
Here, using FIG. 73, the first special symbol first display 60, the second special symbol first display 61, the first special symbol second display 88, the second special symbol second display 89, the second A specific example of the display result which is stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display on the one image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 will be described.

  First, the details of the variable display of various symbols performed before the display result is derived by each display will be described.

  In the first special symbol first display 60 and the second special symbol first display 61, the right end of the six LEDs aligned in the left and right direction that will be the special symbol display area when the power is turned on (RAM clear) lights up (the special symbol is lost) It is in the state of displaying the initial special symbol in the same manner as in the above, and the variable symbol of the special symbol is displayed based on the establishment of the starting condition. Specifically, the lighting position is repeatedly moved one by one at a predetermined cycle (for example, 0.25 seconds) from the LED at the left end toward the LED at the right end, and one or more LEDs are finally turned on. Missing special symbol or big hit special symbol is displayed stopped.

  And the lost special symbol or the big hit special symbol stopped and displayed by the first special symbol first display 60 is changed until the next first special symbol first display 60 is started (the second special symbol first) During the variable display on the display 61 and during the execution of the big hit game) keep the state that it is stopped and displayed, the lost special symbol or the big hit special symbol that is stopped and displayed by the second special symbol first display 61 Then, until the variable display is started on the second special symbol first display 61 (while the variable display on the first special symbol first display 60 is being executed or the jackpot game is being executed), the stop display remains displayed. It is supposed to maintain the state of

  In the first special symbol second display 88 and the second special symbol second display 89, when the power is turned on (RAM clear), one LED that becomes the fourth symbol display area is turned off (in the same manner as the fourth symbol) The initial fourth symbol is displayed), and the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed so as to be synchronized (synchronized) with the variation display of the special symbol. Specifically, turning off and lighting of one LED is repeated at a predetermined cycle (for example, 0.5 seconds), and finally the LED is turned off or on, and the lost fourth symbol or the big hit fourth symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, about the lighting cycle of LED, you may make it earlier than the lighting cycle (0.25 second) of LED of a special symbol 1st display.

  Then, the lost fourth symbol or the big hit fourth symbol stopped and displayed on the first special symbol second display 88 until the fluctuation display is started next on the first special symbol second display 88 (second special symbol During the variable display on the second display 89 and during the execution of the big hit game) keep the state that is stopped display, lost the fourth symbol or the big hit displayed stopped in the second special symbol second display 89 The fourth symbol is then stopped until the variable display is started on the second special symbol second display 89 (during the variable display on the first special symbol second display 88 or during the jackpot game) It is designed to maintain the status as it is displayed.

  In the image display device, at the time of power-on (RAM clear), an initial rendering symbol different from the three rendering symbols (the lost rendering symbol and the big hit rendering symbol) predetermined in the rendering symbol display region (left region, central region, right region) ) Is displayed, and the variation display of the production symbol is performed so as to be synchronized (synchronized) with the variation display of the special symbol. Specifically, the three effect symbols are scrolled up and down, and finally the lost effect symbols or the big hit effect symbols are stopped and displayed.

  Then, the lost effect design or the big hit effect design that has been stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display area is until the customer waiting effect is executed until the variable display starts next, or until the big hit game is executed. In the state of being stopped and displayed, the state is not displayed in the effect symbol display area when the customer waiting effect is performed or when the big hit game is performed. In addition, about an initial stage production pattern, it is good also as a thing of the same aspect as a lost production pattern.

  Further, in the image display device, one special symbol (initial special symbol in the same form as the lost special symbol) is displayed in advance in the special symbol display area when the power is turned on (RAM clear) The variation display of the special symbol is performed so as to be synchronized (synchronized) with the variation display of the symbol. Specifically, the display mode of one special symbol is changed, and finally the lost special symbol or the big hit special symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Then, the lost special symbol or the big hit special symbol which is stopped and displayed in the special symbol display area is until the customer waiting effect is executed until the variable display is started, or until the big hit game is executed. Is kept stopped and displayed, and is not displayed in the special symbol display area when the customer waiting effect is executed or the big hit game is executed.

  As described above, the size of the area of the fourth symbol display area disposed inside the game area 2A is smaller than that of the special symbol display area (the special symbol second display than the special symbol first display) Since the number of LEDs is smaller), the area inside the game area 2A will not be extremely narrowed. In addition, the size of the special symbol display area is larger than that of the fourth symbol display area (the number of LEDs of the special symbol first display is larger than that of the special symbol second display). On the other hand, it becomes easy to inform the result of the game accurately.

  Next, a specific example of the display result which is stopped and displayed on each display as a result of the variable display will be described.

In the special symbol first display 60, 61, one of a display result indicating one kind of lost special symbol and a display result indicating 22 kinds of jackpot special symbols are derived and displayed.
Specifically, in the display result showing the special design for losing, one LED at the right end lights up and the remaining LEDs go out as in the case of power on (RAM clear). That is, the display result indicating the lost special symbol of the first special symbol first display 60 and the display result indicating the lost special symbol of the second special symbol first display 61 are the same display result.
On the other hand, in the display result which shows a jackpot special symbol, while 2 to 5 LED lights, the remaining LEDs turn off.

  In addition, as a result of the special symbol determination, it is different from the big hit game (The big winning opening 8 is opened for a predetermined time or intermittently, but the degree of advantage for the player is lower than the big hit game, and the gaming state is changed. When it is possible to play small hit game), the display result showing the small hit special symbol in the special symbol first display 60, 61, the display result showing the lost special symbol and the display result showing the big hit special symbol It is good to make display result different from. In addition, when there is one kind of small hitting game, the display result which shows the small hitting special symbol is also one kind, but when there are multiple kinds of small hitting games, the display result which shows the small hitting special symbol is also small It is good to make it correspond to the kind of game and to make it into multiple types.

In the special symbol second display, one of the display result indicating one type of the fourth lost symbol and the display result indicating the one type of big hit fourth symbol are derived and displayed.
Specifically, in the display result indicating the lost fourth symbol, one LED is turned off as in the case of power on (RAM clear).
On the other hand, in the display result showing the jackpot fourth symbol, one LED is in the lighted state.

  In addition, when it is possible to execute the small hitting game described above, the display result indicating the small hitting fourth symbol in the special symbol second display indicates the display result indicating the lost fourth symbol or the large hitting fourth symbol It is preferable that the display result is different from the display result. In addition, in the case of one type of small hitting game, the display result indicating the small hitting fourth symbol is also one type, but in the case of multiple small hitting games, the display result indicating the small hitting fourth symbol It is good to make it correspond to the kind of small hitting game, and to set it as two or more kinds.

In the effect symbol display area of the image display device 14, one of a display result indicating 23 or more types of lost effect symbols and a display result indicating 10 types of big hit effect symbols is derived and displayed.
Specifically, in the display result indicating the lost effect design, the combination (open eye) of the three generated design symbols that are not the same and has no regularity is stopped.
On the other hand, in the display result indicating the jackpot effect design, the combination of the three effect design patterns (the nine types 111 to 999) is in a stopped state.

  When the small hit game described above is executable, the display result indicating the small hit effect symbol on the image display device 14 is different from the display result indicating the lost effect symbol or the display result indicating the large hit effect symbol Although it is good also as a display result, it is good also as the same display result as a display result which shows a predetermined | prescribed jackpot effect design. In addition, in the case of one type of small hitting game, the display result showing the small hitting effect pattern is also one type, but when there are multiple types of small hitting game, the display result showing the small hitting effect pattern is also small It is good to make it correspond to the kind of game and to make it into multiple types.

In the special symbol display area of the image display device 14, one of the display result indicating one kind of lost special symbol and the display result indicating one kind of big hit special symbol is derived and displayed.
Specifically, in the display result indicating the lost special symbol, the "x" symbol is stopped as in the case of power-on (RAM clear).
On the other hand, in the display result which shows a big hit special symbol, it will be in the state where "o" symbol stopped.
When the small hit game described above is executable, the display result indicating the small hit special symbol in the special symbol display area of the image display device 14 indicates the display result indicating the lost special symbol or the big hit special symbol. It is preferable that the display result is different from the display result. In addition, when there is one kind of small hitting game, the display result which shows the small hitting special symbol becomes one kind, but when there are multiple kinds of small hitting games, the display result which shows the small hitting special symbol is also small It is good to make it correspond to the kind of game and to make it into multiple types.

  As described above, while there are multiple types of display results showing a big hit special symbol, only one type of display result showing a lost special symbol is displayed, so if only the display result showing the lost special symbol is remembered, It is possible to easily determine whether it is a loss or a loss. In addition, as long as the display result which shows a lose special symbol is smaller than the kind of display result which shows a big hit special symbol, the display result which shows a lose special symbol may be two or more kinds.

  Moreover, while only one LED lights up in the display result showing a special design for losing, two or more LEDs light up in a display result showing a special design for big hit, so it is easily judged whether it is a big hit or a loss It is possible to

  In addition, since there are multiple types of display results (lighting mode of LED) for each big hit special symbol, it is difficult to instantly judge which kind of big hit game is executed, and which kind of big hit game is executed It is possible to improve the player's expectation for the player.

  In addition, when the display result showing the special design for losing is derived and displayed, the LED different from the LED that lights up at the start of the fluctuation lights up, so the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed even if the fluctuation time is extremely short. It becomes possible to recognize what has been done.

  In addition, when the display result showing the jackpot special symbol is derived and displayed, at least one LED that is different from the LED that lights at the start of fluctuation lights up, so even if the fluctuation time is extremely short, the special symbol It becomes possible to recognize that the variable display has been performed.

  In addition, since there are fewer types of display results showing the big hit fourth symbol and display results showing the big hit special symbol than the type of the display result showing the big hit special symbol, the fourth symbol and the special symbol can be confirmed It becomes possible to judge instantly whether it is a big hit or a loss. The type of display result indicating the big hit special symbol may be smaller than the type of display result indicating the big hit fourth symbol or the display result indicating the big hit special symbol.

  In addition, since the type of display result showing the big hit effect design is less than the type of display result showing the big hit special symbol, the type of display result showing the big hit special symbol is less, so check the effect pattern It becomes easy to predict the type of jackpot game. In addition, the kind of display result which shows a big hit special symbol may be made smaller than the kind of display result which shows a big hit production design.

  In addition, since the size of the display result showing the special design for losing and the size of the display result showing the fourth graphic for missing are the same or similar (both are displayed by one LED), it becomes easy to grasp the correspondence between both. , It becomes easy to recognize that it is a loss.

  In addition, since the display result indicating the big hit special symbol includes an LED that lights up with the display result indicating the lost special symbol, it indicates the lose special result when the display result indicating the big hit special symbol is derived. It is possible to reduce the negative impression on the display result.

  In addition, even when any type of jackpot game is performed, the display result indicating the jackpot special symbol includes an LED that lights up with the display result indicating the lost special symbol, so the loser special result It is possible to further reduce the negative impression on the display result indicating.

  Also, during the variable display on the special symbol first display 60, 61, there is no state in which all the LEDs are off or a state in which a plurality of LEDs are on, and one LED is always on. Therefore, it becomes easy to grasp that the variable display is in progress.

  In addition, during the variable display with the special symbol first indicator 60, 61, except for the display result showing the lost special symbol, a plurality of types of special symbols (1 to 5 from the left side that will not be stopped and displayed finally) Since the aspect in which the 1st LED lights up appears (is displayed), it becomes easy to grasp that the variable display is in progress.

(Display Example of First Game Information Display Device, Second Game Information Display Device, and First Image Display Device)
FIGS. 74 to 79 show display examples of the first game information display device 59, the second game information display device 79, and the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14. Specifically, FIG. 74 is a view showing a display example during reach effect (SP reach effect) being performed in the non-time-short game state, and FIG. 75 is a reach effect being performed in the time-short game state ( 76 shows an example of display during SP reach effect), FIG. 76 shows an example of display during movement effect by a movable effect member during blackout effect, and FIGS. 77 to 78 show during a big hit game. FIG. 79 shows a display example, and FIG. 79 shows a display example when a power failure occurs.

First, FIG. 74 will be described.
FIGS. 74 (a), (b) and (c) are scenes of an example of effect by a specific music announcement pattern. FIG. 74 (a) shows a real indication effect (pre-reach effect). Here, in the first gaming information display device 59, the first special symbol first display 60 performs variable display of the first special symbol to light the LEDs in a predetermined order, and the first special symbol holding first display 63 Indicates that two first holds are stored by lighting two LEDs.
Also, the second special symbol first display 61 and the normal symbol first display 62 turn on the predetermined LED to indicate that the second special symbol and the normal symbol are stopped, and the second special symbol hold first The display 64 and the normal symbol holding first display 65 turn off any of the LEDs, indicating that no holding (second holding, general drawing holding) is stored.

In the second gaming information display device 79, the first special symbol second display 88 performs the variation display to blink the LED at a predetermined interval corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, and the first special symbol hold second A two indicator 83 lights two LEDs and indicates that two first reservations are stored.
Also, the second special symbol second display 89 and the normal symbol second display 82 turn off the LED, indicating that the second special symbol and the normal symbol are stopped, and the second special symbol hold second display 84 and the normal symbol hold second display 85 turn off any of the LEDs, indicating that no hold (second hold, normal drawing hold) is stored.

In the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14, the hold icon H11 of the normal display mode is displayed on the first display unit 70B1 of the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, and the special display mode 3 is displayed on the second display unit. The (Red) hold icon H12 is displayed, the change icon display area 70D is displayed, and the first hold number display area SH1 is displayed with "2" indicating the first hold number. . Further, in the first special symbol display area DZ1, the variation display of the first special symbol is performed corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol.
Further, since the second hold is not stored, the hold icons are not displayed in the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and “0” is displayed in the second hold number display area SH2. In addition, since the second special symbol does not change, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol display area DZ2.

  And FIG. 74 (b) is reach production (SP reach production) after development production is performed. Since the first special symbol continues to be changed and no new hold (first hold, second hold, general drawing hold) has occurred, the first game information display device 59 and the second game information display device In 79, the same display as in FIG. 74 (a) is continuously displayed.

On the other hand, in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14, the display of the first reserved icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4 and the second reserved icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4 and the display of the fluctuation icon TH of the fluctuation icon display area 70D. Is eliminated and the effect pattern 70a is displayed small at the upper left so as not to inhibit reach effect (SP reach effect).
In addition, the number of reservations (the number of first reservations, the number of second reservations) of the number of reservations display area (the first number of reservations display area SH1, the second number of reservations display area SH2) and the special symbol display area (the first special symbol display area DZ1 The special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) of the second special symbol display area DZ2) are continuously displayed in the same manner as shown in FIG. 74 (a).

And FIG. 74 (c) is an effect in which the reach effect (SP reach effect) is ended and the effect pattern is stopped and displayed. Here, in the first gaming information display device 59, the first special symbol first display 60 displays the LED in a lighting mode (for example, only the right end LED is on) indicating a loss, and the stop display of the first special symbol is displayed. Is going.
In addition, the first special symbol reservation first display 63, the second special symbol first display 61, the second special symbol reservation, since a new suspension (the first suspension, the second suspension, and the general drawing suspension) has not occurred. The first display 64, the normal symbol first display 62, and the normal symbol retention first display 65 continue to display the same display as in FIGS. 74 (a) and (b).

In the second gaming information display device 79, the first special symbol second indicator 88 turns off the LED corresponding to the stop display of the first special symbol, indicating that the variation of the first special symbol is lost There is.
In addition, the first special symbol hold second display 83, the second special symbol second display 89, the second special symbol hold because a new hold (the first hold, the second hold, and the general drawing hold) has not occurred. The second display 84, the normal symbol second display 90, and the normal symbol storage second display 85 continue to display the same display as shown in FIGS. 74 (a) and (b).

On the other hand, in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14, the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and the fluctuation not displayed during reach effect (SP reach effect) The display of the icon display area 70D is displayed again, the hold icon H11 is displayed on the first display 70B1 of the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, and the hold icon H12 is displayed on the second display. Further, the fluctuation icon displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 70D disappears because the fluctuation is ended. Further, "2" indicating the first number of reservations is displayed in the first number-of-holdings display area SH1. Moreover, the stop display is performed in the aspect which shows a loss corresponding to the stop display of a production symbol and 1st special symbol display area DZ1.
Since the second hold is not stored, the hold icons are not displayed in the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and "0" is displayed in the second hold number display area SH2. In addition, since the second special symbol does not change, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol display area DZ2.

As explained above, in the fluctuation effect (other than the reach effect (SP reach effect)) being performed in the non time saving game state, the fluctuation display of the special symbol is the special symbol first indicator 60 of the first game information display device 59. , 61, the special symbol second display 88, 89 of the second game information display device 79, the effect symbol of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 and the special symbol display region (first special symbol display region DZ1, Since the second special symbol display area DZ2) is displayed, it is easy to grasp the variation display of the special symbol.
In addition, the display of the number of reservations (the number of first reservations, the number of second reservations) is the special symbol holding first displays 63 and 64 of the first gaming information display device 59 and the special symbol holding of the second gaming information display device 79. 2 displays 88, 89, the hold icon display area of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 (first hold icon display area 70B1 to 70B4, second hold icon display area 70C1 to 70C4), and the number of hold display areas ( Since the first holding number display area SH1 and the second holding number display area SH2) are displayed, it is easy to grasp the number of holdings (first holding number, second holding number).

  On the other hand, during reach effect (SP reach effect), the hold icon display area (first hold icon display area 70B1 to 70B4 of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 in order to draw attention to the reach effect The display of the hold icon in the second hold icon display area 70C1 to 70C4) is deleted, but the display of the number of holds (the first hold number, the second hold number) is the special symbol hold of the first game information display device 59 The first display 63, 64, the special symbol holding second display 88, 89 of the second gaming information display 79, and the number of holdings display area of the first image display (main liquid crystal) 14 (first holding number display Since the area SH1 and the second holding number display area SH2) are displayed, the number of holdings (first holding number, second holding number) can be grasped.

  Further, during a specific reach effect (SP reach effect) executed during the normal gaming state, an effect pattern displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 so as not to impede the reach effect (SP reach effect). Is displayed in a reduced size, but the special symbol displayed on the special symbol first display 60, 61, the fourth symbol displayed on the special symbol second display 88, 89, and the special symbol display area DZ1, DZ2 The size of the special symbol to be displayed is maintained without being reduced, so it is possible to grasp whether or not the variable display is performed by checking each display even if the effect symbol is lost It becomes.

  In addition, in the first special symbol hold second display 88 and the second special symbol hold second display 89, since the hold change notice to change the display mode is not executed, the display showing the number of holds is always normal It will be displayed in the display mode. Therefore, it becomes easier to grasp the number of pendings itself than the pending icon where the pending change notice is executed.

  In addition, in the first special symbol hold first display 63 and the second special symbol hold first display 64, since the hold change notice to change the display mode is not executed, the display showing the number of holds is always normal It will be displayed in the display mode. Therefore, it becomes easier to grasp the number of pendings itself than the pending icon where the pending change notice is executed.

  Further, in the first hold count display area SH1 and the second hold count display area SH2, since the hold change notice for changing the display mode is not executed, the display indicating the hold count is always displayed in the normal display mode. It will be. Therefore, it becomes easier to grasp the number of pendings itself than the pending icon where the pending change notice is executed.

  Further, in the icon display area constituted by the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and the variable icon display area 70D, the first hold corresponding to the start of the variable display When the number or the second holding number decreases, the first holding icon or the second holding icon moves (shifts) to the variable icon display area 70D, and the holding reduction effect (the number of holding decreases) displayed as the variable icon Specific effect to indicate that the user has performed the display, but in the number-of-holds display area including the first number-of-holds display area SH1 and the second number-of-holds display area SH2, the first hold corresponding to the start of the variable display When the number or the second number of reservations decreases, the numbers are only subtracted without the above-mentioned hold reduction effect. Therefore, by checking the number-of-retentions display area, it becomes easy to grasp the pure number of reservations itself. Note that displaying as the icon may be included in the specific effect.

In addition, even during the reach effect (SP reach effect), the number of holdings (the first number of holdings display area SH1, the second number of holdings display area SH2) of the number of holdings display area of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 Although the display of 1 hold count and 2nd hold count was displayed without deleting, the hold count (1st hold) of the hold count display area (first hold count display area SH1, second hold count display area SH2) The display of the number and the second holding number may be erased. Also, the SP reach effect of FIG. 75 (b), the blackout effect of FIG. 76 (a), the move effect of FIG. 76 (b) and the SPSP reach effect of FIG. The display of the number of holdings (first number of holdings, second number of holdings) of the second number-of-holdings display area SH2) may be erased.
As described above, the hold icon display area (first hold icon display area 70B1 to 70B4 of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 during a specific effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, blackout effect, movement effect) , Display of the hold icon of the second hold icon display area 70C1 to 70C4) and the number of hold of the hold count display area (first hold count display area SH1, second hold count display area SH2) (first hold count, second hold) Even if the display of the number) is erased, the display of the number of reservations (the number of first reservations, the number of second reservations) is the number of reservations on the special symbol reservation second display 88, 89 of the second game information display 79. Since the first holding number and the second holding number are displayed, the holding number (first holding number, second holding number) can be grasped.

Next, FIG. 75 will be described.
FIG. 75 shows a display example of the first game information display device 59, the second game information display device 79, and the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 during reach effect (SP reach effect) being performed in the short time game state. is there.

FIG. 75 (a) shows a fluctuation effect before reaching a reach effect (SP reach effect) in the short time game state. Here, in the first gaming information display device 59, the second special symbol first display 61 performs the variable display of the second special symbol that blinks the LEDs in a predetermined order, and the second special symbol hold first display 64 Indicates that two LEDs are turned on, and two second holds are stored. Also, the normal symbol first display 62 performs the variation display of the normal symbol that blinks the LEDs in a predetermined order. In addition, since the right strike first display 67 is in the time saving game, the LED is turned on to perform the right strike display.
In addition, the first special symbol first display 60 turns on a predetermined LED to indicate that the first special symbol is stopped, and the first special symbol hold first indicator 63 and the normal symbol hold first indicator 65 Indicates that none of the LEDs are turned off, and that no hold (first hold, normal drawing hold) is stored.

In the second game information display device 79, the second special symbol second display 89 performs the variation display to blink the LED at predetermined intervals corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol, and the second special symbol hold second The indicator 84 lights two LEDs and indicates that two second holds are stored. Also, the normal symbol second display 90 performs the variable display of the normal symbol that blinks the LEDs in a predetermined order in response to the variable display of the normal symbol. Further, since the right-handed second display 87 is in the time-saving game, the LED is turned on to perform right-handed display.
In addition, the first special symbol second display 80 turns off the LED, indicating that the first special symbol is stopped, and the first special symbol hold second indicator 83 and the normal symbol hold second indicator 85 Each of the LEDs is turned off to indicate that no hold (second hold, general drawing hold) is not stored.

In the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14, the rendering symbol and the second special symbol of the second special symbol display area DZ2 are variably displayed corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol. Also, with the first display 70C1 and the second display 70C2 of the second reserved icon display area 70C1 to 70C4, the reserved icons H21 and H22 are displayed, and the variable icon is displayed in the variable icon display area 70D. In the 2 hold count display area SH2, “2” indicating the second hold count is displayed. Further, since a time saving game is in progress, an image G10 "right-handed->→" is displayed on the upper right of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14.
Since the first hold is not stored, the hold icons are not displayed in the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, and “0” is displayed in the first hold number display area SH1. In addition, since the first special symbol does not change, the first special symbol of the first special symbol display area DZ1 is stopped and displayed. Further, in the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, character information G11 ("MM RUSH") indicating that the second specific gaming state ("high probability gaming state" and "time saving gaming state") is displayed ing.

And FIG. 75 (b) is reach production (SP reach production). Here, in the first game information display device 59, the second special symbol first display 61 performs the variation display in the same manner as FIG. 75 (a) because the second special symbol continues to be changed. . Then, one second hold occurs anew, and the second hold number becomes three, so the second special symbol hold first display 64 blinks the LED on the left side and lights the LED on the right side, It indicates that three second holds are stored. In addition, since two common drawing reservations occur and the common drawing reservation number becomes two, the normal symbol holding first display 65 turns on two LEDs, and two common drawing reservations are stored. Show that.
In addition, since the 1st suspension has not newly occurred, the 1st special symbol suspension 1st display 63 remains off.

In the second game information display device 79, the second special symbol second display 89 performs variable display corresponding to the second special symbol as in FIG. 75 (a). Then, one second hold occurs anew, and the second hold number becomes three, so the second special symbol hold second display 84 blinks the LED on the left side and lights the LED on the right side, It indicates that three second holds are stored. In addition, since two common drawing reservations occur and two common drawing reservations become, the normal symbol holding second display 85 turns on two LEDs, and two common drawing reservations are stored. Show that.
In addition, since the 1st hold is not newly generated, the 1st special symbol hold 2nd indicator 83 remains off.

  On the other hand, in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14, reach effect (SP reach effect) using a character image is performed. Further, the display of the first reserved icon display area 70B1 to 70B4, the second reserved icon display area 70C1 to 70C4, and the display of the fluctuation icon TH in the fluctuation icon display area 70D are erased, and the effect pattern 70a is displayed small at the upper left To avoid disturbing the reach effect (SP reach effect). In addition, the number of reservations (first number of reservations, second number of reservations) of the number of holdings display area (the first number of holdings display area SH1, the second number of holdings display area SH2) and the special symbol display area (first special symbol display area DZ1 The same special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) in the second special symbol display area DZ2) are continuously displayed as shown in FIG. 75 (a). In addition, in the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, character information G12 ("SP reach") indicating that reach effect (SP reach effect) is being performed is displayed.

And FIG. 75 (c) is an effect in which the reach effect (SP reach effect) is ended and the effect pattern is stopped and displayed. Here, in the first game information display device 59, the second special symbol first display 61 displays an LED in a lighting mode (for example, only the right end LED lights) indicating a loss, and a stop display of the second special symbol Is going.
In addition, the first special symbol first display 60, the first special symbol holding first indicator 63, the second special symbol holding, since a new holding (the first holding, the second holding, the general drawing holding) has not occurred. The first display 64 and the normal symbol holding first display 65 perform the same display as that shown in FIG. 75 (b). The right-handed first display 67 also remains on.

In the second gaming information display device 79, the second special symbol second display 89 turns off the LED corresponding to the stop display of the second special symbol, indicating that the variation of the second special symbol is lost There is.
In addition, the first special symbol second display 88, the first special symbol hold second indicator 83, the second special symbol hold because a new hold (the first hold, the second hold, and the general drawing hold) has not occurred. The second display 84 and the normal symbol holding second display 85 perform the same display as that shown in FIG. 75 (b). The right-handed second display 87 also remains on.

On the other hand, in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14, the rendering symbol and the second special symbol of the second special symbol display area DZ2 are stopped and displayed in a manner showing a loss corresponding to the stop display of the second special symbol. There is. In addition, the display of the first pending icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, the second pending icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4 and the variation icon display area 70D that were not displayed during reach effect (SP reach effect) is displayed again, 2 Hold icon H21 is displayed on the first display 70C1 of the hold icon display area 70C1 to 70C4, hold icon H22 is displayed on the second display 70C2, and hold icon H23 is displayed on the third display 70C3. ing. Further, the fluctuation icon displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 70D disappears because the fluctuation is ended. Further, “3” indicating the second number of reservations is displayed in the second number-of-holdings display area SH2.
Since the first hold is not stored, the hold icons are not displayed in the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, and “0” is displayed in the first hold number display area SH1. In addition, since the first special symbol does not change, the first special symbol of the first special symbol display area DZ1 is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, character information ("sorry") indicating that it is a loss is displayed.

As described above, in the fluctuation effect (other than the reach effect (SP reach effect)) being performed in the short time game state, the fluctuation display of the special symbol is the special symbol first display 60 of the first game information display device 59, 61, special symbol second displays 88 and 89 of the second game information display device 79, and a representation symbol and a special symbol display region of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 (first special symbol display region DZ1, the first (2) Since the special symbol display area DZ2) is displayed, it is easy to grasp the variation display of the special symbol.
In addition, the display of the number of reservations (the number of first reservations, the number of second reservations) is the special symbol holding first displays 63 and 64 of the first gaming information display device 59 and the special symbol holding of the second gaming information display device 79. 2 displays 88, 89, the hold icon display area of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 (first hold icon display area 70B1 to 70B4, second hold icon display area 70C1 to 70C4), and the number of hold display areas ( Since the first holding number display area SH1 and the second holding number display area SH2) are displayed, it is easy to grasp the number of holdings (first holding number, second holding number).
The right-handed display is the first right-handed display 67 of the first gaming information display device 59, the second-handed right display 87 of the second gaming information display device 79, and the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 The right-handed display can be easily grasped since the image G10 of “right-handed right →→” is displayed.

  On the other hand, during reach effect (SP reach effect), the hold icon display area (the first hold icon display area 70B1 to 70B4, the second hold icon display area 70C1 to 70C4) of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 is held Although the display of the icon has been deleted, the display of the number of reservations (the number of first holdings, the number of second holdings) is the special symbol holding first display 63, 64 of the first gaming information display device 59, and the second gaming information The special symbol hold second display 88, 89 of the display 79 and the hold number display area (first hold number display area SH1, second hold number display area SH2) of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 Since the information is displayed, the number of reservations (first number of reservations, second number of reservations) can be grasped.

  In addition, during the specific reach effect (SP reach effect) executed during the short time game state, the effect pattern displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 so as not to inhibit the reach effect (SP reach effect) Is displayed in a reduced size, but the special symbol displayed on the special symbol first display 60, 61, the fourth symbol displayed on the special symbol second display 88, 89 and the special symbol display area DZ1, DZ2 are displayed The size of the special symbol to be displayed is maintained without being reduced. Therefore, even if the effect symbol is lost, it is possible to grasp whether or not the variable display is performed by checking each display. .

  The first reserved icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4 displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14, the reserved icons of the second reserved icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and the fluctuation icon TH of the fluctuation icon display area 70D. Although the SP reach effect has been described as an example as shown in FIGS. 74 and 75 as the effect of erasing the display, the present invention is not limited to the SP reach effect.

  For example, the display of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 suddenly turns dark during transitional effects as shown in FIG. Or during reach effect development (so-called blackout effect), the first hold icon display area 70B1 to 70B4 and the second hold icon display area 70C1 to 70C4 on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 The display of the hold icon and the change icon TH in the change icon display area 70D is erased, and the display of the hold number (first hold number, second hold number) is performed by the special symbol hold of the first game information display device 59. 1 display 63, 64, special symbol hold second display 88, 89 of the second game information display 79, and the number of hold display area of the first image display (main liquid crystal) 14 (first hold number display Frequency SH1, to be displayed out with the second number of holding display region SH2).

  By doing this, it is possible to make the player grasp the number of reservations (first number of reservations, second number of reservations) while preventing blackout effect from being inhibited.

  Further, when movement effect using the movable effect member 73 is performed during the fluctuation effect, as shown in FIG. 76 (b), when the movable effect member 73 is moved, the first hold by the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 is performed. The display of the icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, the second reserve icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4 and the display of the variation icon TH in the variation icon display area 70D is erased, and the number of reservations (first number of reservations, second number of reservations Is displayed on the first game information display device 59, the special symbol hold second display 88, 89 of the second game information display device 79, and the first image display device The main liquid crystal display 14 is made to display the number-of-holds display area (first number-of-hold display area SH1, second number-of-hold display area SH2).

  By doing this, it is possible to make the player grasp the number of reservations (first number of reservations, second number of reservations) while preventing the movement effect from being inhibited.

  Although not shown, the SPSP reach effect also uses the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 as in FIGS. 74 (b), 75 (c) and 76 (a) (b). (1) The number of reservations (first number of reservations, second number of reservations) is deleted by deleting the display of the pending icons in the first pending icon display area 70B1 to 70B4, the second pending icon display area 70C1 to 70C4, and the corresponding variation icon TH in the corresponding variation icon display area 70D. The display of the number of reservations) is the first symbol display first display 63, 64 of the first gaming information display 59, the second symbol 88, 89 of special symbol storage second of the second gaming information display 79, and the first image display It is made to display with the number of holdings display area (the first number of holdings display area SH 1, the second number of holdings display area SH 2) of the device (main liquid crystal) 14.

  By doing this, it is possible to make the player grasp the number of reservations (first number of reservations, second number of reservations) while preventing the SPSP reach effect from being inhibited.

Next, FIGS. 77 to 78 will be described.
FIGS. 77 to 78 show display examples of the first game information display device 59, the second game information display device 79, and the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 in the big hit game.

FIG. 77 (a) shows the first round game effect of the jackpot game. Here, in the first gaming information display device 59, the first special symbol first display 60 lights the LED in the stop mode indicating the probability variation jackpot, and performs the stop display of the first special symbol, and the round number indicator 66 Turn on the LED in the manner of showing the number of rounds (8 rounds) of the probability variation big hit 2 and show that the number of rounds of the current big hit game is 8 times, the first special symbol hold first indicator 63 has 2 LEDs It blinks to indicate that four first holds are stored. Further, since the right-handed first display 67 is in the jackpot game, the LED is turned on to perform right-handed display.
The second special symbol first display 61 and the normal symbol first display 62 turn on predetermined LEDs, and indicate that the second special symbol and the normal symbol are stopped. Further, the second special symbol holding first display 64 and the normal symbol holding first display 65 turn off any of the LEDs, indicating that no holding (second holding, general drawing holding) is stored.

In the second gaming information display device 79, the first special symbol second indicator 88 lights up an LED, and displays a stop indicating that it is a big hit, and the first special symbol hold second indicator 83 has 2 LEDs. Blink to indicate that four first holds are stored. Further, the right-handed second display 87 lights an LED to perform right-handed display.
The second special symbol second display 89 and the normal symbol second display 90 turn on predetermined LEDs to indicate that the second special symbol and the normal symbol are at rest. Further, the second special symbol holding second display 84 and the normal symbol holding second display 85 turn off any of the LEDs, indicating that holding (second holding, general drawing holding) is not stored.

In the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14, the first round game effect of the jackpot game is performed, and the first hold icon display area 70B1 to 70B4, which was displayed before the start of the jackpot game, the second hold The display of the pending icons in the icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4 and the display of the change icons in the change icon display area 70D are deleted. Further, "4" indicating the first number of reservations is displayed in the first number-of-holdings display area SH1. Further, in the first special symbol display area DZ1, the stop display indicating the jackpot of the first special symbol is performed corresponding to the stop display of the first special symbol. Further, since the jackpot game is being played, an image G10 "right-handed->→" is displayed on the upper right of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70.
In addition, since the second hold is not stored, “0” is displayed in the second hold number display area SH2, and the second special symbol display area DZ2 is stopped and displayed because the second special symbol does not change. ing. In the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, character information G13 ("round 1") indicating the number of round games currently being played is displayed.

And FIG. 77 (b) shows the promotion effect to be performed between the first opening of the big winning opening 8 of the fifth round game and the fourth closing. Here, in the first gaming information display device 59, since a normal drawing hold has newly occurred, the normal symbol holding first display 65 blinks four LEDs, and that four common drawing holdings are stored. In the normal symbol first display 62, the normal symbol variation display is performed to blink the LEDs in a predetermined order. The displays other than the normal symbol first display 62 and the normal symbol storage first display 65 continue to display the same display as shown in FIG. 77 (a).
Further, in the second game information display device 79, the normal symbol holding second display 85 blinks four LEDs, indicating that four common drawing holdings are stored, and the normal symbol second display 90 is a predetermined one. In the order of the LED blinks normally, the variation display of the symbol is done. The displays other than the normal symbol second display 90 and the normal symbol retention second display 85 continue to display the same display as shown in FIG. 77 (a).

On the other hand, in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14, an effect using a character image corresponding to the promotion effect is displayed. Here, the display of the image G10 “right-hand →→” which has been displayed until the promotion effect is performed is erased.
In addition, the number of reservations (the number of first reservations, the number of second reservations) of the number of reservations display area (the first number of reservations display area SH1, the second number of reservations display area SH2) and the special symbol display area (the first special symbol display area DZ1 The special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) of the second special symbol display area DZ2) are continuously displayed. In addition, in the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, character information indicating the number of round games is erased (not displayed).

  And FIG. 77 (c) shows the movement effect of the movable effect member 73 during the promotion effect. Here, in the first gaming information display device 59 and the second gaming information display device 79, the same display as shown in FIG. 77 (b) is continuously displayed.

  In the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14, the effect image G15 is displayed in accordance with the movable effect member 73 moving to the front of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14. Further, as in FIG. 77 (b), the display of image G10 “right-hand →→” remains erased, and the special symbol of the special symbol display area (first special symbol display area DZ1, second special symbol display area DZ2) The display similar to FIG. 72 (b) is continuously displayed on the (first special symbol, second special symbol). On the other hand, the display position of the number of holdings (first number of holdings, second number of holdings) of the number of holdings display area (the first number of holdings display area SH1 and the second number of holdings display area SH2) is changed as shown in FIG. As shown in), it is displayed below the special symbol display area (the first special symbol display area DZ1, the second special symbol display area DZ2).

  As described above, the number of reservations (first number of holdings) of the number of holdings display area (the first number of holdings display area SH1 and the second number of holdings display area SH2) by the effect performed by the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14. By changing the display position of the second hold number), the mutual display of the effect performed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 and the display of the hold number (first hold number, second hold number) ( To prevent the production).

  And FIG. 78 (a) is an effect performed from the fifth opening of the large winning opening 8 of the fifth round game after the promotion effect. Here, in the first gaming information display device 59 and the second gaming information display device 79, the same display as that shown in FIG. 77 (c) is performed.

In the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14, an effect of notifying (informing) that a big hit game is continuously performed after the fifth round game using a character image is displayed. In addition, the image G10 “right-handed → →” display that has not been displayed during the promotion effect is displayed again.
In addition, the number of reservations (the number of first reservations, the number of second reservations) of the number of reservations display area (the first number of reservations display area SH1, the second number of reservations display area SH2) and the special symbol display area (the first special symbol display area DZ1 The special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) of the second special symbol display area DZ2) are continuously displayed. In addition, in the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, character information G13 (round 5) indicating the number of round games erased (not displayed) is displayed.

  And FIG. 78 (b) shows the ending effect of the jackpot game. Here, in the first gaming information display device 59 and the second gaming information display device 79, the same display as that shown in FIG. 79 (a) is performed.

  In the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14, an effect using a character image corresponding to the ending effect is displayed. In addition, the number of reservations (first number of reservations, second number of reservations) for the number of reservations display area (the first number of reservations display area SH1 and the second number of reservations display area SH2), special symbol display area (first special symbol display area DZ1 , The special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) of the second special symbol display area DZ2) and the image G10 “right-hand →→” display are continuously displayed similar to FIG. 78 (a) There is. In addition, in the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, character information G13 ("BONUS END") indicating that the big hit game has ended is displayed.

  And FIG. 78 (c) is an effect which shows that the big hit game is over and it shifts to the time saving game. Here, the number-of-rounds display 66 of the first gaming information display device 59 ends (turns off) the display of the number of rounds when the big hit is finished. In the first game information display device 59, the same display as that shown in FIG. 78 (b) is performed except for the number-of-rounds display 66. Also, the second game information display device 79 has the same display as that shown in FIG. 78 (b).

On the other hand, in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14, the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and the variation icon display area 70D which were not displayed during the big hit game. The display is displayed again, and the hold icons H11 to H14 are displayed on the first display unit 70B1, the second display unit 70B2, the third display unit 70B3 and the fourth display unit 70B4 of the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4. There is. Further, "4" indicating the first number of reservations is displayed in the first number-of-holdings display area SH1.
Since the second hold is not stored, the hold icons are not displayed in the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and "0" is displayed in the second hold number display area SH2. In the special symbol display area (the first special symbol display area DZ1 and the second special symbol display area DZ2), the stop display is performed because the first special symbol and the second special symbol do not change. Further, in the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, character information G11 ("MM RUSH") indicating that the second specific gaming state ("high probability gaming state" and "time saving gaming state") is displayed Ru.

As described above, during the jackpot game, the suspension icons of the suspension icon display area (the first suspension icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4 and the second suspension icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4) to draw attention to the jackpot game effect, the variation Although the display of the variation icon TH in the icon display area 70D is erased, the display of the number of reservations (first number of holdings, second number of holdings) is the first symbol display 63 of the first symbol information display device 59. , 64, the special symbol holding second display 88, 89 of the second game information display device 79, and the number of holding number display area of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 (first number of holding display area SH1, second Since the number of holdings (display area SH2) is displayed, the number of holdings (first number of holdings, second number of holdings) can be grasped.
The right-handed display is the first right-handed display 67 of the first gaming information display device 59, the second-handed right display 87 of the second gaming information display device 79, and the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 Since the image G10 “right-hand →→” is displayed, the right-hand display can be easily grasped.

  In addition, even during the jackpot game during promotion promotion, the image G10 "right-handed-> →" display of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 is erased, but right-handed display is the first game information display Since the display is made by the right-handed first display 67 of the device 59 and the right-handed second display 87 of the second game information display 79, the right-handed display (right-handed) can be grasped.

  In addition, the right-handed display includes the lighting of the LED of the right-handed first display 67 with no mark, the lighting of the LED of the right-handed second display 87 with the “right-handed”, and the first The display of the image G10 "right-handed-> →" on the image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 is performed. That is, the display mode of the right-handed display is displayed in a display mode in which the second right-handed display 87 is more easily recognized by the player than the first right-handed display 67, and further, the second right-handed display 87 Also, the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 is displayed in a display mode that is easy for the player to recognize. In addition, the right-handed second display 87 is provided closer to the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 than the right-handed first display 67, and the right-handed display 87 is also easy to see for the player. The second hit display 87 is more easily recognized by the player than the first display 67.

Next, FIG. 79 will be described.
FIG. 79 shows a display example of the first game information display device 59, the second game information display device 79, and the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 when a power failure occurs.

FIG. 79 (a) shows a fluctuation effect before reaching the reach effect in the normal gaming state. Here, in the first gaming information display device 59, the first special symbol first display 60 performs the variable display of the first special symbol that blinks the LEDs in a predetermined order, and the first special symbol holding first display 63 "4" blinks four LEDs, indicating that four first holds are stored.
The second special symbol first display 61 and the normal symbol first display 62 turn on predetermined LEDs, and indicate that the second special symbol and the normal symbol are stopped. Further, the second special symbol holding first display 64 and the normal symbol holding first display 65 turn off any of the LEDs, indicating that no holding (second holding, general drawing holding) is stored.

In the second gaming information display device 79, the first special symbol second display 88 performs the variation display to blink the LED at a predetermined interval corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, and the first special symbol hold second The 2 indicator 83 blinks four LEDs, indicating that four first holds are stored.
The second special symbol second display 81 and the normal symbol second display 82 turn off the LED and indicate that the second special symbol and the normal symbol are stopped. Further, the second special symbol holding second display 84 and the normal symbol holding second display 85 turn off any of the LEDs, indicating that holding (second holding, general drawing holding) is not stored.

In the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14, the rendering symbol and the first special symbol of the first special symbol display area DZ1 are variably displayed corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol. In addition, with the first display unit 70B1, the second display unit 70B2, the third display unit 70B3 and the fourth display unit 70B4 of the first reserved icon display area 70B1 to 70B4, the reserved icons H11 to H14 are displayed, and the variation icon display is performed. The variation icon TH is displayed in the area 70D. Further, "4" indicating the first number of reservations is displayed in the first number-of-holdings display area SH1.
Since the second hold is not stored, the hold icons are not displayed in the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and "0" is displayed in the second hold number display area SH2. In addition, since the second special symbol does not change, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol display area DZ2.

  Then, a power failure occurs, and the supply of the power supply voltage is cut off. Therefore, nothing is done in any of the first game information display device 59, the second game information display device 79, and the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14. It is not displayed (FIG. 79 (b)).

  Thereafter, when the power is restored from the power failure, as shown in FIG. 79 (c), the first gaming information display device 59 and the second gaming information display device 79 are recovered at substantially the same timing. Specifically, the first gaming information display device 59 controlled by the main CPU 101a displays all of the displays based on the backup data (special symbol first display 60, 61, normal symbol first display 62, special symbol hold) Restore the first display 63, 64, normal symbol hold first display 65, round number display 66, right-handed first display 67, high probability gaming state indicator 68, and time saving gaming state indicator 69) However, the second game information display device 79 controlled by the sub CPU 102a is a special symbol hold second display 83 based on the special symbol hold storage specification command and the normal symbol storage specification command transmitted from the main CPU 101a at the time of recovery, 84 and the normal symbol hold second display 85 display is restored. On the other hand, the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 provides power recovery effect to notify that power recovery is in progress based on the image control board 105 receiving the power recovery specification command transmitted from the main CPU 101a at the time of recovery. Do.

  Then, after the predetermined time has elapsed, the image control board 105 displays the number-of-holds display area on the display portion of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 based on the special symbol hold storage designation command transmitted from the main CPU 101a at the time of recovery. The on-hold number display (first on-hold number display and second on-hold number display) of the on-hold number display area SH1 and the second on-hold number display area SH2 is resumed (restored) (FIG. 79 (d)).

  As explained above, when power failure occurs and is restored, the display of the number of reservations (the number of first holdings, the number of second holdings) is the special symbol first display 60, 61 of the first gaming information display device 59. And the special symbol second displays 88 and 89 of the second game information display device 79 are restored at substantially the same timing, and then the number-of-holds display area of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 (first hold The number-of-holds display (first number-of-holds display, second number-of-holds display) of the number display area SH1 and the second number-of-holds display area SH2 is restored and displayed. That is, when power supply recovery is performed, the number of reservations on the second game information display device 79 is more than the display of the number of reservations (first number of reservations, second number of reservations) on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 The display of (the first number of reservations, the second number of reservations) will be displayed (restored) earlier.

  In this manner, the display of the number of holdings (the number of first holdings, the number of second holdings) on the second game information display device 79 is restored prior to the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 14. Since the number of reservations (the first number of reservations, the second number of reservations) is displayed on the second game information display device 79 even during the power recovery effect by the image display device (main liquid crystal) 14, the number of reservations ( The player can grasp the first hold number, the second hold number).

Also, in the present embodiment, the display of the number of reserved special symbols is normally performed by the first special symbol storage first display 63, 64 of the first gaming information display device 59 and the special symbol storage second of the second gaming information display device 79. 2 displays 83 and 84, and a hold icon display area (first hold icon display area 70B1 to 70B4, second hold icon display area 70C1 to 70C4) of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 and a hold number display area Although it is displayed in four places with the first number-of-holds display area SH1 and the second number-of-holds display area SH2), during a specific effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, blackout effect, movement effect) and during a big hit effect If it is inside, the special symbol holding first displays 63, 64 of the first gaming information display device 59, the special symbol holding second indicators 83, 84 of the second gaming information display device 79, and the first image table Apparatus (main LCD) 14 number of holding the display area of the (first number of holding display region SH1, second number of holding display region SH2) is displayed in three places with. In addition, if it is after restoration after the power failure, the special symbol retention 1st indicator 63 and 64 of the 1st game information display 59 and the special symbol retention 2nd indicator 83 and 84 of the 2nd game information indicator 79 It will be displayed in two places.
That is, the display of the number of reserved special symbols may be displayed at two places, at three places, or at four places, depending on the progress of the game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the reserved icon display area 70B, 70C and the reserved icon displayed there are further displayed than the LEDs of the special symbol holding first display 63, 64 and the special symbol holding second display 83, 84. Is large and it is more easily visible to the player by being displayed at a position closer to the center of the gaming machine, but it is a special symbol than the reserved icon display area 70B, 70C and the reserved icon displayed there. Even if the LEDs on the first reserve display 63, 64 and the second special reserve display 83, 84 are enlarged or placed closer to the center of the gaming machine, it may be easy for the player to visually recognize. Good.

  In FIGS. 73 to 79, the hold number display areas SH1 and SH2 and the arithmetic numerals displayed there are larger than the hold icon display areas 70B and 70C and the hold icons displayed thereon. Although it is easy to view, the size of the hold icon display areas 70B and 70C and the hold icon displayed there is larger than the hold number display areas SH1 and SH2 and the arithmetic numerals displayed there. You may make it easy.

(Structure of First Game Information Display Device 59 and Second Game Information Display Device 79)
FIG. 80 is a front view of the first game information display device 59. As shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, the first game information display device 59 is disposed at the lower left of the game area 2A adjacent to the outer rail member 29C, but is not limited to this, and may be disposed at various positions. Can.

  The first game information display device 59 mainly displays information related to the special symbol determination and the normal symbol determination (in other words, information related to the profit given to the player in the game). More specifically, the first game information display device 59 includes first and second special symbol first displays 60 and 61, first and second special symbol hold first displays 63 and 64, and a number-of-rounds display 66, It can be configured as a right-handed first display 67, a high probability gaming state indicator 68, a short time gaming state indicator 69, a normal symbol first display 62, and a normal symbol holding first display 65.

  In addition, the second game information display device 79 is also for displaying information on the profit given to the player in the game, and similarly, the first and second special symbol second displays 88, 89, the second The first special symbol holding second display 83, 84, the second right hand display 87, the second normal symbol display 82, and the second normal symbol holding display 85 can be used.

(Details of the structure of the first game information display device 59)
As shown in FIG. 80, the first game information display device 59 has a plurality of LEDs 4045 arranged in two rows. These LEDs 4045 are the first and second special symbol first displays 60, 61, the first and second special symbol hold first displays 63, 64, the high probability gaming state indicator 68, and the short time gaming state indicator 69. , The right-handed first display 67, the number-of-rounds display 66, the normal symbol first display 62, and the normal symbol retention first display 65. The LEDs 4045 are arranged in parallel in two rows along the launch ball guiding path of the gaming ball formed by the inner rail member 29B and the outer rail member 29C (see FIG. 1). The arrangement of the LEDs 4045 is not limited to this, and the LEDs 4045 may be arranged in a line along the ball guide path of the game ball, or may be arranged in a line of three or more lines. , And may be arranged independently of the launch ball guiding path.

  As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the first game information display device 59 includes a first display substrate 4200 on which a plurality of LEDs 4045 are surface mounted, and a first cover that covers at least the front side of the first display substrate 4200. A member 4202 and a protection member 4204 that covers the rear side of the first display substrate 4200 are provided. That is, the first display substrate 4200 is accommodated by the first cover member 4202 and the protective member 4204. The first game information display device 59 is installed in an upright position so that the first display substrate 4200 disposed between the first cover member 4202 and the protection member 4204 is along the board of the game board 2. The first game information display device 59 is configured such that it is difficult or inaccessible to the first display substrate 4200 from the outside by the first cover member 4202 and the protection member 4204. The first game information display device 59 is fitted to a mounting opening (not shown) formed in a plate member constituting the game board 2 and attached to the plate member, and the front side faces the front side of the game board 2 The light of the LED 4045 is visible to the user. Further, the first game information display device 59 has its back face facing the back side of the game board 2 (plate member) and a connector 4100 (FIG. 81), which will be described later, provided to face the back side. It is accessible from the back side. The first cover member 4202 and the protective member 4204 may be combined to form a cover member.

  The first game information display device 59 fixes the first cover member 4202 or the protection member 4204 constituting the outer shell of the first game information display device 59 by screwing, bonding, or other methods to the game board 2. It is attached. Here, when the first game information display device 59 is difficult to remove, reassembling difficult, or removed from the game board 2 with respect to the game board 2 by adhesion or the like, the first game information display device 59 and the game board 2 are You may attach in the structure in which a trace remains in any. In other words, the attachment structure of the first game information display device 59 and the game board 2 is a configuration that is difficult to remove without destroying the game board 2 or the first game information display device 59, the game board 2 or the second (1) The game board 2 or the first game information display device 59 is destroyed or deformed, or the like because the game information display device 59 can not be assembled as originally by destruction or deformation, etc., the game board The second game information display device 59 may have at least one of the configurations in which a trace of removal remains.

  As shown in FIG. 85, the first display substrate 4200 is a printed circuit board on which a plurality of LEDs 4045 are provided on the front surface facing the player, and light can be emitted forward from each of the LEDs 4045. ing. The LEDs 4045 are surface-mounted on the first display substrate 4200, not through-hole mounting for fixing the leads of the LEDs 4045 in the holes of the printed circuit board. In the first display substrate 4200, the light emitting element of the LED 4045 and the solder for fixing the light emitting element to the first display substrate 4200 are on the same front surface of the first display substrate 4200. That is, in the first display substrate 4200, the lead for connecting the LED 4045 to the circuit does not protrude on the rear surface, and the solder for fixing the LED 4045 is not disposed on the rear surface. In the present embodiment, the plurality of LEDs 4045 are arranged in upper and lower regions of the first display substrate 4200 in two upper and lower rows. As the LED 4045, either full color or single color may be used, and a plurality of LEDs may be configured by combining full color and single color. Further, as the LED 4045, any of a chip type and a shell type can be used as long as it can be surface mounted, but a chip type is desirable from the advantage that space can be reduced. Under the control of the control means of the main control board 101, the first display substrate 4200 is controlled in the state of lighting, extinguishing, blinking, etc. of the plurality of LEDs 4045, and the states of lighting, extinguishing, blinking etc. Due to a change or the like, information on the profit given to the player is displayed.

  Thus, by mounting the surface of the LED 4045 on the first display substrate 4200, the arrangement space of the LEDs 4045 in the first display substrate 4200 can be reduced, and the first display substrate 4200 can be made more compact. it can. In addition, by mounting the surface of the LED 4045 on the first display substrate 4200, weight reduction can be achieved, and failure can be reduced. Further, by mounting the LED 4045 on the front surface of the first display substrate 4200, the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200 is not affected by the mounting of the LED 4045 like the through hole mounting. Therefore, in the first display substrate 4200, another electronic component can be disposed on the rear surface corresponding to the mounting area where the plurality of LEDs 4045 are mounted on the front surface, effectively making the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200 effective. The first display substrate 4200 can be made more compact.

  The LED 4045 is either a configuration in which the light emitting element is disposed so as to protrude from the surface of the first display substrate 4200 (see FIG. 82) or a configuration in which the light emitting element is embedded so as not to protrude from the surface of the first display substrate 4200 May be The first display substrate 4200 may be provided with a reflecting portion that easily reflects light such as white in the front surface area where the plurality of LEDs 4045 are mounted, or it is difficult to reflect light such as black in the front surface area You may provide an absorption part. When the light emitting element of the LED 4045 protrudes from the surface of the first display substrate 4200, by providing a reflection part around the light emitting element, the light emitted from the LED 4045 can be reflected by the reflection part and efficiently used. Further, when the light emitting element of the LED 4045 is embedded in the first display substrate 4200, the light irradiated from the LED 4045 by the absorbing portion is diffused at the front surface of the first display substrate 4200 by providing the absorbing portion around the light emitting element. Can be prevented.

  FIG. 85 is a front view of the first display substrate 4200 as viewed from the front side. The first special symbol first display 60 is configured by the upper row left six LEDs 4045, and the second special symbol first display 61 is configured by the six LEDs 4045 in the upper row. The first special symbol hold first display 63 is composed of two LEDs 4045 disposed between the first special symbol first display 60 and the second special symbol first display 61, and the second special symbol is displayed. The first reserve display 64 is constituted by the two right side LEDs 4045 of the second special symbol first display 61. On the right side of the second special symbol holding first display 64, one high-probability gaming state indicator 68, a time saving gaming state indicator 69, and a right-handed first indicator 67, in this order, one LED 4045 constituting them It is arranged side by side. In addition, round number indicator 66 is formed with the lower row left 8 LED 4045, normal symbol first indicator 62 is formed with 3 round LED 4045 of round number indicator 66, normal symbol retention 1 indicator Numeral 65 is composed of two LEDs 4045 from the lower right side. The number and arrangement of the plurality of LEDs 4045 in each display are not limited to the above.

  As shown in FIG. 86, the first display substrate 4200 is provided with a connector 4100 on the rear surface opposite to the surface on which the LED 4045 is mounted, and via a harness (not shown) connected to the connector 4100 The first game information display device 59 and the main control board 101 are electrically connected. The connector 4100 is a so-called jack to which a plug provided at the end of the harness can be attached and detached, and may be any of a male terminal shape and a female terminal shape. The connector 4100 may be through-hole mounting in which the lead of the connector 4100 is fixed to the hole of the printed circuit board, but in the present embodiment, the connector 4100 is surface mounted on the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200. Also, in the connector 4100, a connector opening into which a plug provided at the end of the harness is inserted is open rearward in FIG. Thus, the main body of the connector 4100 and the solder for fixing the connector 4100 to the first display substrate 4200 are on the same rear surface of the first display substrate 4200. That is, the lead for connecting the connector 4100 to the circuit does not protrude from the front surface of the first display substrate 4200, and the solder for fixing the connector 4100 is not disposed on the front surface. As described above, by mounting the connector 4100 on the surface of the first display substrate 4200, the arrangement space of the connector 4100 in the first display substrate 4200 can be reduced, and the first display substrate 4200 can be made more compact. be able to.

  The connector 4100 is disposed on the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200 at a position corresponding to the mounting area of the plurality of LEDs 4045 mounted on the surface of the first display substrate 4200. That is, the mounting area of the plurality of LEDs 4045 and the connector 4100 overlap with the first display substrate 4200 on the front and back. By mounting the connector 4100 on the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200 in this manner, the mounting of the connector 4100 does not affect the front surface of the first display substrate 4200 as in the case of through-hole mounting. Therefore, in the first display substrate 4200, the connector 4100 can be disposed on the rear surface corresponding to the mounting area where the plurality of LEDs 4045 are mounted on the front surface, effectively making the front and rear surfaces of the first display substrate 4200 By using this, the first display substrate 4200 can be made more compact.

  As shown in FIG. 86, a chip-type resistor 4500 as a current limiting means is mounted on the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200, and in the present embodiment, a plurality of resistors 4500 do not overlap the connector 4100. It is arranged side by side. The resistor 4500 may be through-hole mounted to fix the lead of the resistor 4500 in the hole of the printed circuit board, but in the present embodiment it is surface mounted on the first display substrate 4200. The first display substrate 4200 has a resistor 4500 and a solder for fixing the resistor 4500 to the first display substrate 4200 on the same rear surface of the first display substrate 4200. That is, the lead for connecting the resistor 4500 to the circuit does not protrude from the front surface of the first display substrate 4200, and the solder for fixing the resistor 4500 is not disposed on the front surface. In the present embodiment, the plurality of resistors 4500 are arranged in the upper region of the first display substrate 4200. As shown in FIG. 88, the resistor 4500 is disposed between the connector 4100 and the plurality of LEDs 4045 in the circuit of the first display substrate 4200, and limits the current flowing in the plurality of LEDs 4045 to a predetermined value or less. Thus, excessive current is prevented from flowing to each of the LEDs 4045.

  By mounting the resistor 4500 on the first display substrate 4200 in this way, even if the resistor 4500 breaks down, it can be coped with by replacing the first game information display device 59, and maintenance can be performed. It will be easier. Since the exchange of the first game information display device 59 can be easily performed, it is possible to shorten the pause period of the game and avoid losing the interest of the game. Further, by mounting the resistor 4500 on the surface of the first display substrate 4200, the arrangement space of the resistor 4500 in the first display substrate 4200 can be reduced, and the first display substrate 4200 can be made more compact it can.

  The resistor 4500 may be disposed at a position corresponding to the mounting area of the plurality of LEDs 4045 mounted on the front surface of the first display substrate 4200 on the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200. In this case, the mounting area of the plurality of LEDs 4045 and the mounting area of the plurality of resistors 4500 may either be entirely overlapped or partially overlapped with the first display substrate 4200 interposed therebetween. By mounting the resistor 4500 on the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200 in this manner, the mounting of the resistor 4500 does not affect the front surface of the first display substrate 4200 like the through hole mounting. Therefore, in the first display substrate 4200, the resistor 4500 can be disposed on the rear surface corresponding to the mounting area where the plurality of LEDs 4045 are mounted on the front surface, effectively making the front and rear surfaces of the first display substrate 4200 effective. By using this, the first display substrate 4200 can be made more compact. Note that the mounting areas of the plurality of LEDs 4045 and the mounting areas of the plurality of resistors 4500 may not overlap with the first display substrate 4200 on the front and back.

  As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the first cover member 4202 includes a front cover 4208 in which windows 4206 corresponding to the respective LEDs 4045 mounted on the surface of the first display substrate 4200 are formed, and a front cover A lateral cover portion 4210 is formed at the periphery of the 4208 so as to rise rearward. The first cover member 4202 is formed in a box shape opening rearward by the front cover portion 4208 and the horizontal cover portion 4210, and for the first display in an inner region surrounded by the front cover portion 4208 and the horizontal cover portion 4210. The substrate 4200 can be stored. When the first display substrate 4200 is stored in the inner region of the first cover member 4202, the first display substrate 4200 is closer to the front cover 4208 than the open end (rear end) of the horizontal cover 4210 ( The entire first display substrate 4200 is accommodated in the inner region of the first cover member 4202 while being positioned on the front side. In other words, the first cover member 4202 covers the front surface of the first display substrate 4200 on which the LED 4045 is mounted with the front cover 4208, and covers the peripheral surface of the first display substrate 4200 with the horizontal cover 4210. The front surface and peripheral surface of the first display substrate 4200 are difficult to access from the outside due to the presence of the first cover member 4202. When the first cover member 4202 of the present embodiment is formed such that the inner region is aligned with a part of the outer edge of the first display substrate 4200 and the first display substrate 4200 is stored in the inner region, the horizontal cover portion 4210 When the circumferential surface of the first display substrate 4200 is in contact with the inner surface, the first display substrate 4200 can be held so as not to be misaligned.

  As described above, since the first display substrate 4200 is disposed in a state of being stored in the first cover member 4202, it is difficult to access the first display substrate 4200 from the front side or the side, and for the first display Cheating on the substrate 4200 can be prevented. Further, even if it is attempted to remove the first display substrate 4200, as described above, it is difficult to access the first display substrate 4200, so the first display substrate 4200 should be removed from the first cover member 4202. Can be difficult.

  As shown in FIG. 82 and FIG. 87, the first cover member 4202 has a window 4206 formed in the front cover 4208 corresponding to the LED 4045 and penetrating the front cover 4208 back and forth. It is made up. The window 4206 may be provided corresponding to each of the plurality of LEDs 4045 (this embodiment), or may be provided corresponding to two or more predetermined numbers of the LEDs 4045 among the plurality of LEDs 4045. The window 4206 has a shape such as a polygon such as a quadrangle or a circle, and is formed larger than the outer shape of the corresponding LED 4045 so that the entire corresponding one or more LEDs 4045 are inside. In the first cover member 4202, the windows 4206 are formed in two rows, and when the first cover member 4202 is disposed in a state of covering the front side of the first display substrate 4200, each window 4206 corresponds to each LED 4045. Is arranged at a position corresponding to each of the windows 4206 so that the state of lighting of each LED 4045 facing each window 4206 can be viewed through the window 4206.

  As shown in FIGS. 82 and 87, the first cover member 4202 penetrates the front cover portion 4208 back and forth and defines a window 4206 formed correspondingly to the LED 4045, and the state of the LED 4045 corresponding to the window 4206 A window defining unit 4212 is configured to be distinguishable for each window 4206. The window defining portion 4212 has a thick cylindrical portion (in the present embodiment) which is formed in a cylindrical shape projecting backward from the front cover portion 4208 and a portion corresponding to the front side of the mounting area of the LED 4045 in the front cover portion 4208 It is provided by the configuration etc. In the case where the window defining portions 4212 are formed of a cylindrical body, the window defining portions 4212 may be separated from each other and independent, or a part of adjacent window defining portions 4212 may be integrated. . Between the front opening of the window 4206 facing the front and the rear opening of the window 4206 facing the corresponding LED 4045, the window defining portion 4212 is, for example, thicker than the thickness of the horizontal cover 4210 or the first display substrate 4200. A long distance is provided to a certain extent, and the window defining portion 4212 functions as a light guiding portion for guiding the light emitted from the LED 4045, thereby preventing the light from being diffused. In other words, even if there is a gap between the front cover 4208 and the front surface of the first display substrate 4200, or a portion of the front surface of the front cover 4208 corresponding to the LED 4045 is projected forward, The window defining portion 4212 that defines the window 4206 can guide the light of the LED 4045 to the front side without leakage.

  As shown in FIG. 87, the first cover member 4202 is combined with the first display substrate 4200 so that the window defining portion 4212 faces the front surface of the first display substrate 4200. The entire circumference of the LED 4045 mounted on the front is individually surrounded by the window defining portion 4212. In the present embodiment, the rear end of the cylindrical window defining portion 4212 is in contact with the front surface of the first display substrate 4200, and the adjacent LED 4045 is partitioned by the window defining portion 4212. The first cover member 4202 and the first display substrate 4200 are in contact with the rear surface of the front cover portion 4208 only by the contact between the window defining portion 4212 of the first cover member 4202 and the front surface of the first display substrate 4200. It is basically configured such that a gap is formed between it and the surface of the first display substrate 4200. As described above, since the LED 4045 corresponding to the window 4206 is surrounded by the window defining portion 4212 that defines the window 4206, the light emitted from the LED 4045 is not diffused and the state of the LED 4045 via the window 4206 Can be more easily identified. Further, since the rear end of the window defining portion 4212 is in contact with the front surface of the first display substrate 4200 and closes the gap between the front cover portion 4208 and the first display substrate 4200, light is transmitted from the gap. It is possible to prevent the window 4206 from leaking and the state of the LED 4045 can be clearly distinguished. In addition, even if the illegal tool is intruded from the window 4206, the illegal tool can be blocked only by the window 4206 by the window forming unit 4212, and the illegal act can be more appropriately prevented. Note that a slight gap may be made to face between the rear end (rear surface) of the window defining portion 4212 and the front surface of the first display substrate 4200.

  As shown in FIG. 87, the first cover member 4202 is provided with a projecting alignment portion 4600 projecting rearward from the rear surface of the front cover portion 4208. The alignment portion 4600 is integrally formed with the window defining portion 4212 so as to project rearward of the rear surface of the window defining portion 4212 facing the front surface of the first display substrate 4200. The alignment unit 4600 is configured to be able to align the first display substrate 4200 with respect to the first cover member 4202 by being fitted into a substrate hole 4400 (see FIG. 85) formed in the first display substrate 4200. ing. In the first cover member 4202, a plurality of alignment portions 4600 are arranged separately from each other on the rear surface of the front cover portion 4208. Among the plurality of alignment units 4600, there may be one formed apart from the window defining unit 4212. Each alignment portion 4600 is formed in a cylindrical shape. The alignment portion 4600 protrudes rearward with respect to the rear surface of the window defining portion 4212, but the rear end thereof is positioned forward of the rear end of the horizontal cover portion 4210 and is housed inside the first cover member 4202. .

  The first display substrate 4200 includes a substrate hole 4400 formed penetrating in the thickness direction, and the substrate hole 4400 is also formed in a circular shape in accordance with the columnar alignment portion 4600. Further, the substrate hole 4400 is set to have the same or slightly larger opening size as the outer shape of the alignment portion 4600. The alignment portion 4600 and the substrate hole 4400 are provided to correspond in number, position, etc., and the alignment portion 4600 is fitted to the substrate hole 4400 to form the first display substrate It defines the relative position of 4200. Therefore, the first cover member 4202 and the first display substrate 4200 are assembled in the state of being positioned in the vertical and horizontal directions by the engagement of the alignment portion 4600 and the substrate hole 4400.

  As described above, since the first cover member 4202 and the first display substrate 4200 are assembled in a mutually positioned state by the engagement of the alignment portion 4600 and the substrate hole 4400, the LED 4045 and the corresponding one are assembled. The window 4206 can be aligned without misalignment, and the state of the LED 4045 can be identified more preferably. In addition, since the alignment portion 4600 is integrally formed with the window defining portion 4212 and reinforced by the window defining portion 4212, the alignment portion 4600 is also configured to protrude rearward from the window defining portion 4212. Damage and deformation of the By integrally forming the alignment portion 4600 with the window defining portion 4212, the projecting dimension thereof can be shortened, and breakage, deformation or the like of the alignment portion 4600 can be more preferably avoided.

  As shown in FIG. 86, the first display substrate 4200 includes a plurality of substrate holes 4400 formed so as to sandwich the connector 4100. The first cover member 4202 is provided with a positioning portion 4600 corresponding to each of the plurality of substrate holes 4400 in an arrangement in which the connector 4100 mounted on the first display substrate 4200 is sandwiched. More specifically, the first display substrate 4200 has a pair of substrate holes 4400 arranged in a symmetrical positional relationship sandwiching the connector 4100 in the left and right (this embodiment), up and down or diagonal direction, The first cover member 4202 is provided with a pair of alignment portions 4600 corresponding to each of the pair of substrate holes 4400. As described above, in the first game information display device 59, the alignment structure by the alignment portion 4600 and the board hole 4400 into which it is fitted is not unevenly distributed only in the area on one side of the connector 4100, but sandwiches the connector 4100 It is distributed in the area on both sides.

  In the first game information display device 59, the alignment structure between the first cover member 4202 and the first display substrate 4200 by the alignment unit 4600 and the board hole 4400 into which it fits is in the area on both sides sandwiching the connector 4100. It is distributed and provided. The connector 4100 is a portion to which a force is applied when the plug of the harness is attached and detached. However, the alignment structure disposed with the connector 4100 interposed therebetween can prevent the first display substrate 4200 from being displaced.

  As shown in FIG. 84, the protection member 4204 has a plate shape, and a connector opening 4300 penetrating in the front and back direction is formed in accordance with the connector 4100 protruding from the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200. The connector opening 4300 is formed in accordance with the outer shape of the connector 4100 so that a large gap does not occur between the connector opening 4300 and the connector 4100 passing through the connector opening 4300. In a state where at least a part of the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200 housed in the first cover member 4202 is covered from outside with a rear surface of the first display substrate 4200 so that access to the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200 is difficult. It is attached to the cover member 4202 (this embodiment) or the first display substrate 4200. The protection member 4204 is disposed on the inner side of the first cover member 4202, and is disposed on the rear side of the first display substrate 4200 also housed inside the first cover member 4202. The protection member 4204 of the present embodiment is formed in an outer shape that matches the inner region of the first cover member 4202 defined by the horizontal cover portion 4210. When the protective member 4204 is stored in the inner region of the first cover member 4202, the circumferential surface of the protective member 4204 is in contact with the inner surface of the horizontal cover portion 4210, and the protective member 4204 is held so as not to be displaced vertically and horizontally. . Then, when the protection member 4204 is stored in the inner region of the first cover member 4202, the position where the rear surface of the protection member 4204 is aligned with the open end (rear end) of the horizontal cover portion 4210 or the front cover portion than the open end. It is disposed on the 4208 side (front side), and the entire protection member 4204 is accommodated in the inner region of the first cover member 4202.

  As described above, since the rear side of the first display substrate 4200 is covered by the protection member 4204, it is difficult to access the first display substrate 4200 from the rear side, and cheating on the first display substrate 4200 can be prevented. It can prevent. Further, the presence of the protection member 4204 can make it difficult to remove the first display substrate 4200 from the first cover member 4202. Here, since the protective member 4204 is accommodated in the inner region of the first cover member 4202, it is difficult for the first cover member 4202 to disturb and remove the protective member 4204 itself.

  As shown in FIG. 82, the first cover member 4202 and the protection member 4204 are assembled in a fitting structure with unevenness, and after assembling, it is difficult to remove, reassemble, or disassemble the first cover from each other. It is configured such that a mark of removal remains on any of the member 4202 and the protection member 4204. In the fitting structure, a claw-like engaging portion 4214 provided on one of the first cover member 4202 and the protection member 4204 (in the present embodiment, the protection member 4204) is used for the first cover member 4202 and the protection member 4204. The first cover member 4202 and the protection member 4204 are engaged by being engaged with the engagement receiving portion 4216 provided in the other (in the present embodiment, the first cover member 4202) and being engaged with the engagement portion 4214 and the engagement receiving portion 4216 Integrated. The fitting structure is provided at a plurality of locations corresponding to the first cover member 4202 and the protective member 4204, and distributed to the sides of the first cover member 4202 and the protective member 4204 opposite to each other across the first display substrate 4200. Provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the first cover member 4202 is provided with an engagement receiving portion 4216 in the horizontal cover portion 4210. The engagement receiving portion 4216 is provided on the open end side of the lateral cover portion 4210 so as to form a rear opening edge of an engagement opening formed through the lateral cover portion 4210. The lateral cover portion 4210 is formed in a concave shape in which the front side portion is opened outward from the engagement opening to form a thin plate thickness, and an engagement receiving portion 4216 is provided across the opening side of the concave portion. That is, in the present embodiment, the engagement receiving portion 4216 is provided with a thickness smaller than the thickness of the horizontal cover portion 4210 so that the inner side is recessed, and the engagement portion 4214 is easily fitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the protection member 4204 is provided with an engaging portion 4214 which protrudes from the outer edge along the plate surface of the protection member 4204. The width of the engagement portion 4214 and the width of the engagement receiving portion 4216 (engagement opening) are set to be substantially the same, and the thickness in the front-rear direction of the engagement portion 4214 and the dimension in the front-rear direction of the engagement opening When the engagement portion 4214 is fitted to the engagement receiving portion 4216, the engagement portion 4214 is positioned on the opening edge of the engagement opening. The engaging portion 4214 has an inclined surface such as an arc shape or a flat surface which is inclined rearward as the front surface faces the projecting end, and the rear surface is a flat surface along the rear surface of the protection member 4204. In other words, the engagement portion 4214 extends so that the front surface obliquely intersects the engagement receiving portion 4216, and the rear surface intersects the engagement receiving portion 4216 in an orthogonal or nearly orthogonal relationship. It is extended. Thus, when the engaging portion 4214 is fitted to the engagement receiving portion 4216, the first cover member 4202 is elastically deformed so as to expand the first cover member 4202 by the inclination of the front surface of the engaging portion 4214 that hits the engagement receiving portion 4216 The engaging portion 4214 can be easily fitted into the engaging opening by passing over the receiving portion 4216. Then, when the engagement portion 4214 is fitted into the engagement opening, the engagement receiving portion 4216 is caught and the backward movement of the engagement portion 4214 is blocked. Here, when the engaging portion 4214 and the engagement receiving portion 4216 are fitted, the rear surface of the engaging portion 4214 and the engagement receiving portion 4216 face each other in a parallel relationship, and are thus caught. The first cover member 4202 is not guided by the engagement portion 4214 so as to push and spread the same as when the first cover member 4202 is fitted to the engagement receiving portion 4216. Therefore, by fitting the engagement portion 4214 into the engagement receiving portion 4216, it is substantially impossible to remove the protection member 4204 from the first cover member 4202.

  As described above, according to the fitting structure of the engagement portion 4214 and the engagement receiving portion 4216, it becomes difficult to remove the protection member 4204 from the first cover member 4202, and the first display substrate 4200 is formed by the protection member 4204. By protecting the first display substrate 4200, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on the first display substrate 4200. In addition, when the engagement portion 4214 or the engagement receiving portion 4216 is broken and the protection member 4204 is forcibly removed from the first cover member 4202, the first cover member 4202 has a trace that the engagement receiving portion 4216 is broken. The rest will leave a trace of destruction of the engaging portion 4214 in the protective member 4204, making it easy to detect that there has been a fraud. Furthermore, when the protection member 4204 is forcibly removed from the first cover member 4202, at least one of the engaging portion 4214 or the engagement receiving portion 4216 is broken, so that the protection member 4204 is attached to the first cover member 4202 again. It is difficult to reassemble.

  The first game information display device 59 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the first cover member 4202 and the protection member 4204 are difficult to remove, difficult to reassemble, and leave traces of removal. As a result, the first display substrate 4200 disposed between the first cover member 4202 and the protective member 4204 is substantially difficult to remove from the first cover member 4202, relative to the first cover member 4202. Reassembly difficulties and removal marks on the first cover member 4202 are left. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an illegal act on the first display substrate 4200, and it is possible to easily find out even if there is an illegal act.

  As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, on the front side of the first cover member 4202, an identification means 4220 is arranged which can identify the light emission modes of the plurality of LEDs 4045 individually or as a combination of the light emission modes of two or more LEDs 4045. . The identification means 4220 is provided on the front side of the window 4206 and is provided with a transmitting portion 4222 as a first region which can transmit light or influences the light to be transmitted, and is provided around the transmitting portion 4222 And a shielding portion 4224 as a second region which hardly transmits light. In addition, the identification unit 4220 may be provided with a combination area 4226 (FIG. 80) which is displayed on the shielding unit 4224 and shows the light emission modes of two or more LEDs 4045 as a combination. The identification unit 4220 of the present embodiment is formed in a sheet shape, and is attached to the front surface of the first cover member 4202. The identification means 4220 may be formed in a shape according to the front surface area where the window 4206 in the first cover member 4202 opens, and in the present embodiment, the identification means 4220 is formed to cover the entire front surface of the first cover member 4202. It is done. In the present embodiment, the identification means 4220 and the first cover member 4202 are bonded, but the size of the identification means 4220 and the method of attaching it to the first cover member 4202 are not limited to this.

  The transmitting portion 4222 according to the present embodiment is located on the front side of the window 4206 of the first cover member 4202 so that the light emitted from the LED 4045 corresponding to the window 4206 can be transmitted and the transmitted light is affected. It has become. The transmission portion 4222 is provided to cover the entire front opening of the window 4206, and the transmission portion 4222 on the front side of the window 4206 prevents the LED 4045 disposed on the opening of the window 4206 and the inside of the window 4206 from direct view from the front side. It is. Here, “affecting the light” means, for example, an aspect in which the LED 4045 is difficult to visually recognize by making it translucent, or an aspect in which the light emitted from the LED 4045 is colored by making it colored, or In this embodiment, it refers to a mode in which the light emitted from the LED 4045 is greatly diffused and converged, and the light emitted from the LED 4045 is reduced in size, or a combination of these. Light is diffused by the transmitting portion 4222. The transmitting portion 4222 is configured as a part of a sheet attached to the front surface of the first cover member 4202, and the plurality of transmitting portions 4222 serve as identification means in an arrangement according to the plurality of windows 4206 provided in the first cover member 4202. It is provided in 4220. That is, in the identification means 4220, the transmitting portion 4222 is formed in a quadrangular shape matching the window 4206 to have the same size as the window 4206, and the transmitting portion 4222 closes the front opening of the window 4206.

  As described above, since the front side of the window 4206 is closed by the transmitting portion 4222, it is difficult to access the surface mounted LED 4045 from the front side of the first game information display device 59 to the first display substrate 4200. Can. That is, the transparent portion 4222 can prevent the first display substrate 4200 from being tampered with through the window 4206 which penetrates to the inside of the first cover member 4202. Moreover, since the light emitted from the LED 4045 can be adjusted by the transmitting portion 4222, the state of the LED 4045 can be more easily identified, and the state of the adjacent LED 4045 can be easily distinguished.

  A shielding portion 4224 is provided around the transmitting portion 4222 so that light is less likely to pass through than the transmitting portion 4222 covering the window 4206. In other words, at the front side of the first cover member 4202, the shielding part 4224 is disposed so as to surround the window 4206. The shielding portion 4224 is provided so as to surround the entire periphery of the transmitting portion 4222. In the present embodiment, a single sheet forming the identification unit 4220 constitutes a portion other than the transmitting portion 4222. The shielding portion 4224 is disposed on the front surface of the front cover portion 4208 of the first cover member 4202 so as to overlap an area other than the window 4206 so as not to cover the inside of the window 4206. The shielding portion 4224 is configured in a dark color that absorbs light with a wide wavelength such as black, a cold color such as amber, or the like with a low degree of brightness (which absorbs light well). It is different.

  As described above, since the shielding portion 4224 which is difficult to transmit light is provided around the transmitting portion 4222, the transmitting portion 4222 can be easily understood, and the situation of the LED 4045 recognized through the transmitting portion 4222 is more It becomes easy to distinguish. In addition, even if the window 4206 and the transmitting portion 4222 are misaligned, it is difficult to recognize that the window 4206 can not be directly viewed and thus misaligned. In addition, when the transmitting portion 4222 is covered by the window 4206, the transmitting portion 4222 surrounded by the shielding portion 4224 shines, so that the influence on the identification of the LED 4045 can be reduced.

  In addition, the shielding part 4224 is not limited to the structure set to the same sheet | seat of the permeation | transmission part 4222, sets the front surface itself of the front cover part 4208 of the 1st cover member 4202 as the shielding part 4224, Other configurations may be employed, such as a configuration in which the shielding portion 4224 appears on the front side by disposing the sheet not on the front side of the shielding portion 4224 or via the shielding portion 4224.

  As shown in FIG. 80, the combination area 4226 is divided by a division mark 4228 composed of a frame line (this embodiment) or the like displayed on the shielding portion 4224. The division marker 4228 is displayed so as to surround the plurality of transmission parts 4222, and the combination region 4226 surrounded by the division markers 4228 can be distinguished and recognized from other regions. For example, first and second special symbol first displays 60, 61, first and second special symbol hold first displays 63, 64, high probability gaming state indicator 68, short time gaming state indicator 69, right-handed Of the first display 67, the number of rounds display 66, the normal symbol first display 62, and the normal symbol storage first display 65, a plurality of LEDs 4045 (transmission part 4222) constitute the display As for objects, the group of transmission parts 4222 corresponding to the display is surrounded by the division markers 4228 to form a combined area 4226 corresponding to each display. In addition, the division | segmentation label | marker 4228 should just be a structure which can be distinguished from other area | regions, such as not only the aspect of a frame line but changing a color in a character and combining area 4226. .

  As shown in FIG. 80, specifically, the transmissive portion 4222 corresponding to the upper row left 6 LEDs 4045 is surrounded by the division markers 4228, and the combination area 4226 corresponding to the first special symbol first display 60 is displayed. Do. A transmission area 4222 corresponding to the six LEDs 4045 in the upper row is surrounded by the division markers 4228 to display a combination area 4226 corresponding to the second special symbol first display 61. The first special symbol hold 1st, surrounding the transparent portion 4222 corresponding to the two LEDs 4045 disposed between the first special symbol first indicator 60 and the second special symbol first indicator 61 with the division markers 4228 The combination area 4226 corresponding to the 1 display 63 is displayed. The transmitting portion 4222 corresponding to the two right side LEDs 4045 of the second special symbol first display 61 is surrounded by the division markers 4228, and the combination area 4226 corresponding to the second special symbol holding first display 64 is displayed. In addition, the transmission area 4222 corresponding to the lower row left eight LEDs 4045 is surrounded by the division indicator 4228, and the combination area 4226 corresponding to the round number display 66 is displayed. The transmission sections 4222 corresponding to the three LEDs 4045 on the right side of the round number display 66 are surrounded by the division markers 4228 to display the combination area 4226 corresponding to the normal symbol first display 62. The transmission area 4222 corresponding to the two LEDs 4045 from the lower right side is surrounded by the division indicator 4228 to display the combination area 4226 corresponding to the normal symbol retention first display 65.

  As described above, by displaying the combination area 4226, the state of the LED 4045 in the area is associated and recognized, and it is possible to make the player easily recognize information by the combination of the LED 4045.

  As shown in FIG. 83, the identification means 4220 is disposed so as to overlap the first layer 4230 on the front side of the first layer 4230 which easily transmits light, and the area of the first cover member 4202 other than the window 4206. It is in the form of a sheet having a second layer 4232 which is less likely to transmit light than 4230. In other words, the portion corresponding to the transmitting portion 4222 is constituted only by the first layer 4230 which transmits light, and the portion corresponding to the shielding portion 4224 which the light is difficult to transmit is the portion of the first layer 4230 and the second layer 4232 It is comprised by the lamination part. Since the stacked portion includes the second layer 4232, it is difficult to transmit light as a whole and blocks transmission of light from the shielding portion 4224. Here, in the stacked portion, the first layer 4230 is disposed on the first cover member 4202 side (rear side), and the second layer 4232 is disposed on the front side (front side). The identification means 4220 is obtained, for example, by laminating the second layer 4232 on the sheet made of the first layer 4230 by painting, printing or the like, and the difference in height between the transmitting portion 4222 and the shielding portion 4224 is visible. Absent.

  When the first game information display device 59 is attached to the board member of the game board 2, the connector 4100 on the rear surface is exposed to the rear side of the game board 2. The first gaming information display device 59 can be attached to and detached from the connector 4100 in a state of being attached to the plate member of the gaming board 2, which is convenient.

  As the first cover member 4202, a thermoplastic resin or the like in which each portion such as the front cover 4208, the horizontal cover 4210, the window defining portion 4212, the engagement receiving portion 4216 and the alignment portion 4600 is integrally formed. Molded articles made of synthetic resin are used. Further, as the protective member 4204, a molded article is used in which each portion such as the engagement portion 4214 is integrally formed with a synthetic resin such as a thermoplastic resin.

  Note that the first display substrate 4200 is attached to the first cover member 4202 by welding or adhering the first display substrate 4200 to the first cover member 4202 while the surface is covered by the first cover member 4202. On the other hand, it may be mounted with removal difficulty, reassembly difficulty or removal marks remaining.

(Modification of first game information display device 59)
Next, a modification of the first game information display device 59 will be described. Here, differences from the first game information display device 59 described above will be mainly described, and the description of the same configuration will be basically omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 89, the first game information display device 59 is disposed on the rear side of the covering member 4800 installed on the game board 2 and the front side is covered by the covering member 4800. The covering member 4800 is a member which functions to close or bury the front and rear regions on the front side of the game board 2, and is a rear portion including a plate portion constituting the front surface and a wall portion extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge It is in the form of a box that opens to the side (Figure 90). Here, the “front and back area” is an area that can be provided to provide the game area 2A through which the game ball passes on the front side of the plate member of the game board 2. When the covering member 4800 is disposed so that the front surface is substantially the same as the front end of the inner rail member 29B or the outer rail member 29C, and is disposed outside the outer rail member 29C (playing area 2A) Sometimes doubles as a board decoration. When the first game information display device 59 is disposed inside the game area 2A, one of the game components installed in the game area 2A, such as the first start opening 6, the second start opening 7, the big winning opening 8, etc. The portion may be constituted by a covering member 4800.

  In the covering member 4800, the portion covering the front side of the first game information display device 59 is transparent or semi-transparent, or there is an opening corresponding to the window 4206 of the first game information display device 59, etc. The state of the LED 4045 is configured to be visible through the window 4206. The covering member 4800 is exchangeably attached to the plate member of the game board 2 by screwing or the like. The first game information display device 59 is attached to the covering member 4800 so as to be housed inside the covering member 4800. At this time, the first game information display device 59 has its back face facing the back side of the game board 2 (plate member) and a connector 4100 (FIG. 93) provided so as to face the back side. It becomes accessible from the back of 2. As described above, the covering member 4800 can be attached to and detached from the board member with the first game information display device 59 attached, and the covering member 4800 can be used according to the replacement of the first game information display device 59 or the change of the model. The 4800 is easily replaceable.

  Since the first game information display device 59 is covered by the covering member 4800, access from the outside is more difficult. Even if a fraudulent activity is performed, it is possible to increase the time until the first display substrate 4200 is reached, and it is possible to make fraud even more difficult.

  The first game information display device 59 of the present embodiment is detachably attached to the covering member 4800 by screwing or the like. Therefore, by removing the covering member 4800 from the plate member, it can be easily replaced when the first gaming information display device 59 breaks down. It should be noted that the first game information display device 59 is difficult to remove, reassemble from the cover member 4800 by adhesion, etc., or any of the first game information display device 59 and the cover member 4800 when it is removed from the cover member 4800. It may be attached in a configuration in which a trace remains on the heel. In other words, the attachment structure between the first gaming information display device 59 and the covering member 4800 is a configuration that is difficult to remove without destroying the covering member 4800 or the first gaming information display device 59, the covering member 4800 or 1) A configuration in which the game information display device 59 can not be assembled as originally by destruction or deformation, and the cover member 4800 or the first game information display device 59 is destroyed or deformed by dismounting It may be at least one of the configurations in which a trace of removal remains on the 4800 or the first game information display device 59.

  The first game information display device 59 is attached to the covering member 4800, and the light of the LED 4045 is visible to the player through the covering member 4800. Further, the first game information display device 59 has a back surface facing the back side of the game board 2 (plate member) and a connector 4100 (FIG. 93) provided so as to face the back side from the back side of the game board 2 It is accessible.

  As shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, in the present modification, current limiting means 4500 and 4500 for controlling the current flowing through the plurality of LEDs 4045 are provided on the main control board 101 side. In addition, as long as the first game information display device 59 is configured to be electrically connected to the effect control board 102, the current control means 4500 and 4500 may be provided on the effect control board 102. As shown in FIG. 97, by mounting a resistor 4500 as a current limiting means on the main control substrate 101 and limiting the current flowing to the plurality of LEDs 4045 to a predetermined value or less, an excessive current flows to each LED 4045 To prevent. The resistor 4500 may be through-hole mounted to fix the lead of the resistor 4500 in the hole of the printed circuit board, but may be surface mounted to the main control substrate 101. As a result, the main control substrate 101 does not have a lead for connecting the resistor 4500 to the circuit on the opposite side to the mounting surface of the resistor 4500, and the main surface can be effectively used on the opposite surface.

  The resistor 4500 may be disposed on the other surface opposite to the one surface on which the electrical component of the main control substrate 101 is mounted, at a position corresponding to the mounting region of the electrical component. In this case, the mounting area of the plurality of resistors 4500 and the mounting area of the electronic component may be either entirely overlapped or partially overlapped with the main control substrate 101 interposed therebetween. By mounting the resistor 4500 on one surface of the main control substrate 101, the mounting of the resistor 4500 does not affect the front surface of the first display substrate 4200 as in the through-hole mounting. Thus, the main control board 101 can be made more compact by effectively using both sides of the main control board 101.

  As shown in FIG. 98, the current limiting means 4500 may be provided as a driver 5600 in the main control board 101. The current limiting means 4500 prevents an excessive current from flowing in each of the LEDs 4045 by limiting the current flowing through the plurality of LEDs 4045 to a predetermined value or less. As described above, by providing the current limiting means 4500 and 4500 on the main control substrate 101 side, the resistance of the first display substrate 4200 can be eliminated or reduced, so the first display substrate 4200 can be made more compact. The size of the first game information display device 59 can be reduced.

  As shown in FIGS. 94, 95 and 96, when the first display substrate 4200 is stored in the inner area of the first cover member 4202, the first display substrate 4200 is the open end of the horizontal cover portion 4210. The entire first display substrate 4200 is accommodated in the inner region of the first cover member 4202 at a position (this embodiment) aligned with the (rear end) or on the front cover 4208 side (front side) of the open end Ru. In other words, the first cover member 4202 covers the front surface of the first display substrate 4200 on which the LED 4045 is mounted with the front cover 4208, and covers the peripheral surface of the first display substrate 4200 with the horizontal cover 4210. The front surface and peripheral surface of the first display substrate 4200 are difficult to access from the outside due to the presence of the first cover member 4202. When the first cover member 4202 of the present embodiment is formed such that the inner region is aligned with a part of the outer edge of the first display substrate 4200 and the first display substrate 4200 is stored in the inner region, the horizontal cover portion 4210 When the circumferential surface of the first display substrate 4200 is in contact with the inner surface, the first display substrate 4200 can be held so as not to be misaligned.

  As described above, since the first display substrate 4200 is disposed in a state of being stored in the first cover member 4202, it is difficult to access the first display substrate 4200 from the front side or the side, and for the first display Cheating on the substrate 4200 can be prevented. Further, even if it is attempted to remove the first display substrate 4200, as described above, it is difficult to access the first display substrate 4200, so the first display substrate 4200 should be removed from the first cover member 4202. Can be difficult.

  As shown in FIG. 94, the first cover member 4202 and the first display substrate 4200 are assembled by an engagement structure which causes the alignment portion 4600 to be melted and engaged with the first display substrate 4200, and then assembled. Are configured such that it is difficult to remove them from one another, to reassemble from one another, or to leave either the first cover member 4202 or the first display substrate 4200 with a trace of removal when disassembled. Specifically, when the alignment portion 4600 and the substrate hole 4400 are fitted, the tip of the alignment portion 4600 protruding from the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200 is melted and becomes larger than the substrate hole 4400. The hooking portion 4600 a is formed at the tip of the alignment portion 4600 by crushing. The first display substrate 4200 is sandwiched between the rear end of the window defining portion 4212 and the hooking portion 4600 a of the alignment portion 4600 and fixed to the first cover member 4202.

  As described above, according to the above-described engagement structure, it becomes difficult to remove the first display substrate 4200 from the first cover member 4202, and the first display substrate 4200 is protected by the first cover member 4202, 1 It is possible to prevent an unfair action on the display substrate 4200. When the first display substrate 4200 is forcibly removed from the first cover member 4202 by breaking the hooking portion 4600a, a trace of the broken portion of the hooking portion 4600a remains on the first cover member 4202, which causes fraud. It will be easier to discover that there was. Furthermore, when the first display substrate 4200 is forcibly removed from the first cover member 4202, the hooking portion 4600a is broken, so that the first display substrate 4200 can not be attached to the first cover member 4202 again. It will be difficult to reassemble.

  As shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, on the front side of the first cover member 4202, an identification means 4220 is disposed which can identify the light emission modes of the plurality of LEDs 4045 individually or as a combination of light emission modes of two or more LEDs 4045. . The identification means 4220 may be disposed in association with the display by the LED 4045 or the LED 4045, such as providing the first cover member 4202, only the cover member 4800, or the first cover member 4202 and the cover member 4800 in a distributed manner. Further, the identification means 4220 may be any of a configuration of being attached to the front or back surface of the first cover member 4202 or the covering member 4800 or a configuration of being provided inside the first cover member 4202 or the covering member 4800. The identification unit 4220 of the present embodiment includes a first identification unit 5122 provided on the front surface of the first cover member 4202, and a second identification unit 5124 provided on the front surface of the covering member 4800. The first identification unit 5122 The second identification unit 5124 is disposed to overlap the front side of the second identification unit 5124. Further, as shown in FIG. 89, the identification means 4220 includes a third identification unit 4802 provided on the front surface of the covering member 4800 separately from the second identification unit 5124.

  As shown in FIG. 94, the first identification unit 5122 is provided on the front side of the window 4206, and has a transmitting portion 5126 as a first region capable of transmitting light or affecting the light to be transmitted, and a transmitting portion 5126 A shielding portion 5128 is provided around the second portion, which is provided around the second portion and is less likely to transmit light than the transmitting portion 5126. The first identification unit 5122 of the present embodiment is formed in a sheet shape, and is attached to the front surface of the first cover member 4202. The first identification portion 5122 may be formed in a shape according to the front surface area where the window 4206 in the first cover member 4202 opens, and in the present embodiment, the first identification is performed to cover the entire front surface of the first cover member 4202. A portion 5122 is formed. In the present embodiment, although the first identification unit 5122 and the first cover member 4202 are bonded by the adhesive layer provided in the first identification unit 5122, the size of the first identification unit 5122 and the first cover member The attachment method to the 4202 is not limited to this. Note that the first identification unit 5122 may include a combination area indicating the light emission modes of two or more LEDs 4045 in combination.

  The transmitting portion 5126 is located on the front side of the window 4206 of the first cover member 4202, and can transmit light emitted from the LED 4045 corresponding to the window 4206. The transmitting portion 5126 is provided to cover the entire front opening of the window 4206, and the front opening of the window 4206 is covered by the transmitting portion 5126 on the front side of the window 4206. The transmitting portion 5126 may be configured to be transparent, and may be configured to affect the transmitted light so that the LED 4045 disposed inside the window 4206 can not be viewed directly from the front side. Here, “affecting the light” means, for example, an aspect in which the LED 4045 is difficult to visually recognize by making it translucent, or an aspect in which the light emitted from the LED 4045 is colored by making it colored, or In this embodiment, it refers to a mode in which the light emitted from the LED 4045 is greatly diffused and converged, and the light emitted from the LED 4045 is reduced in size, or a combination of these. Light is diffused by the transmitting portion 5126. The transmitting portion 5126 is configured as a part of the sheet attached to the front surface of the first cover member 4202, and the plurality of transmitting portions 5126 are arranged in a first arrangement in accordance with the plurality of windows 4206 provided in the first cover member 4202. The identification unit 5122 is provided. That is, in the first identification unit 5122, the transmitting portion 5126 is formed in a rectangular shape matching the window 4206 and has the same size as the window 4206, and the front opening of the window 4206 is closed without a gap by the transmitting portion 5126. .

  Thus, since the front side of the window 4206 is covered by the transparent portion 5126, it is difficult to access the surface mounted LED 4045 from the front side of the first game information display device 59 to the first display substrate 4200. it can. That is, the transparent portion 5126 can prevent the first display substrate 4200 from being tampered with through the window 4206 penetrating to the inner side of the first cover member 4202. Moreover, since the light emitted from the LED 4045 can be adjusted by the transmitting portion 5126, the state of the LED 4045 can be more easily identified, and the state of the adjacent LED 4045 can be easily distinguished.

  A shielding portion 5128 is provided around the transmitting portion 5126 so that light is less likely to pass through than the transmitting portion 5126 covering the window 4206. In other words, at the front side of the first cover member 4202, the shielding portion 5128 is disposed to surround the window 4206. The shielding portion 5128 is provided so as to surround the entire periphery of the transmitting portion 5126, and in the present embodiment, a part other than the transmitting portion 5126 is configured in one sheet forming the first identification portion 5122. The shielding portion 5128 is disposed on the front surface of the front cover portion 4208 of the first cover member 4202 so as to overlap an area other than the window 4206 so as not to cover the inside of the window 4206. The shielding portion 5128 is configured in a dark color that absorbs light with a wide wavelength such as black, a cold color such as amber, or the like with a low degree of brightness (which absorbs light well). It is different.

  As described above, since the shielding portion 5128 which is difficult to transmit light is provided around the transmitting portion 5126, the transmitting portion 5126 can be easily understood, and the situation of the LED 4045 recognized through the transmitting portion 5126 is more It becomes easy to distinguish. In addition, even if the window 4206 and the transmissive portion 5126 are misaligned, it is difficult to recognize that the window 4206 can not be directly viewed and thus misaligned. In addition, when the transmitting portion 5126 is covered by the window 4206, the transmitting portion 5126 surrounded by the shielding portion 5128 is illuminated, so that the influence on the identification of the LED 4045 can be reduced.

  In addition, the shielding part 5128 is not limited to the structure set to the same sheet | seat of permeation | transmission part 5126, setting the front surface itself of the front cover part 4208 of the 1st cover member 4202 as the shielding part 5128 Other configurations may be employed, such as a configuration in which the shielding portion 5128 appears on the front side by disposing the sheet not on the front side of the shielding portion 5128 or via the shielding portion 5128.

  As shown in FIG. 95, the first identification unit 5122 is disposed on the first layer 5130 that easily transmits light, and on the front side of the first cover member 4202 in a region other than the window 4206. It is in the form of a sheet having a second layer 5131 which transmits less light than the first layer 5130. In other words, the portion corresponding to the transmitting portion 5126 is made up of only the first layer 5130 that transmits light, and the portion corresponding to the shielding portion 5128 that does not transmit light easily is the portion between the first layer 5130 and the second layer 5131. It is comprised by the lamination part. Since the stacked portion includes the second layer 5131, light is difficult to transmit in the stacking direction (thickness direction), and the light is blocked from being transmitted from the shielding portion 5128. Here, in the stacked portion, the first layer 5130 is disposed on the first cover member 4202 side (rear side), and the second layer 5131 is disposed on the front side (front side). The first identification unit 5122 is obtained, for example, by laminating the second layer 5131 on the sheet made of the first layer 5130 by painting, printing or the like, and can be seen between the transmitting unit 5126 and the shielding unit 5128 There is no step.

  By thus configuring the first identification unit 5122, light can be guided to the transmission unit 5126 by the first layer 5130 even if the window 4206 and the transmission unit 5126 are misaligned. Since the transmission portion 5126 surrounded by the light illuminates, the influence on the identification of the LED 4045 can be reduced. In addition, in the portion corresponding to the shielding portion 5128, the light incident on the first layer 5130 is blocked by the second layer 5131 on the front side and does not leak to the front side, so the transmitting portion 5126 can be clearly identified.

  As shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, the second identification portion 5124 is attached to the covering member 4800 at the front side of the window 4206. The second identification unit 5124 is provided on the front side of the window 4206, and is provided around a light passing portion 5132 as a first region that can transmit light or affects light to be transmitted, and around the light passing portion 5132, A light shielding portion 5134 is provided as a second region that is less likely to transmit light than the light transmitting portion 5132. In addition, the second identification unit 5124 may include a combination area 4804 which is displayed on the light shielding unit 5134 and which shows the light emission modes of two or more LEDs 4045 as a combination. The second identification unit 5124 of the present embodiment is formed in a sheet shape, and is attached to the front surface of the covering member 4800. The second identification portion 5124 is formed in accordance with the range of the plurality of windows 4206, and the front side of the plurality of windows 4206 is covered by one second identification portion 5124. In the present embodiment, although the second identification unit 5124 and the covering member 4800 are adhered by the adhesive layer of the second identification unit 5124, the size of the second identification unit 5124 and the attachment method to the covering member 4800, etc. It is not restricted to this.

  The light passing portion 5132 of the present modification is positioned on the front side of the window 4206 of the first cover member 4202 and can transmit or affect the light emitted from the LED 4045 corresponding to the window 4206. It is supposed to be. The light passing portion 5132 is provided to cover at least the entire front opening of the window 4206, and the light passing portion 5132 on the front side of the window 4206 allows the state of the LED 4045 to be visible through the window 4206. The light passing portion 5132 of the present embodiment is configured to be transparent and is formed in a range corresponding to the plurality of windows 4206. The light transmitting unit 5132 may be configured to affect the light to be transmitted similarly to the transmitting unit 5126 of the first identification unit 5122. And by adjusting the light irradiated from LED4045 by the light transmission part 5132, it becomes easier to identify the state of LED4045, and it becomes easy to distinguish the state of LED4045 which adjoins.

  Around the light passing portion 5132 is provided a light shielding portion 5134 which is configured to be less likely to pass light than the light passing portion 5132 covering the window 4206. In other words, on the front side of the first cover member 4202, the light shielding portion 5134 is disposed so as to surround the window 4206. The light shielding portion 5134 is provided so as to surround the entire periphery of the light passing portion 5132, and in the present embodiment, a part other than the light passing portion 5132 is configured in one sheet forming the second identification portion 5124. The light shielding portion 5134 is disposed on the front side of the first cover member 4202 so as to overlap with the area other than the window 4206 so as not to cover the inside of the window 4206. The light shielding portion 5134 is configured in a dark color that absorbs light with a wide wavelength such as black, a cold color such as amber, or the like with a low degree of brightness (which absorbs light well). It is different from

  As described above, since the light shielding portion 5134 which hardly transmits light is provided around the light transmitting portion 5132, the light transmitting portion 5132 can be easily understood, and the LED 4045 recognized through the light transmitting portion 5132 The situation is easier to determine. In addition, even if the window 4206 and the light passing portion 5132 are misaligned, it can be difficult to understand the misregistration.

  Note that the light shielding portion 5134 is not limited to the configuration in which the light transmitting portion 5132 is set to the same sheet, but in the covering member 4800, a partial front surface corresponding to the front side of the window 4206 is set as the light shielding portion 5134, and a transparent portion of the sheet Alternatively, the light shielding portion 5134 may appear on the front side by disposing the sheet on the front side of the light shielding portion 5134 or the like. The covering member 4800 may be provided with an opening corresponding to the window 4206, and the opening may be closed by the second identification unit 5124 (the light transmitting unit 5132 and / or the light shielding unit 5134).

  The combination area 4804 is divided by a division mark 4806 formed of a frame line (this embodiment) or the like displayed on the light shielding portion 5134. Section markers 4806 are displayed so as to surround a plurality of light passing portions 5132, and a combination area 4804 surrounded by section markers 4806 can be distinguished from other areas to be recognized. For example, first and second special symbol first displays 60, 61, first and second special symbol hold first displays 63, 64, high probability gaming state indicator 68, short time gaming state indicator 69, right-handed Of the first display 67, the number of rounds display 66, the normal symbol first display 62, and the normal symbol storage first display 65, a plurality of LEDs 4045 (transmission part 5126 or light transmission part 5132) among these With regard to what constitutes a display, a group of LEDs 4045 (transmission part 5126 or light transmission part 5132) corresponding to the display is surrounded by division markers 4806 to form a combined area 4804 corresponding to each display. In addition, the division | segmentation label | marker 4806 should just be the structure which can be distinguished from other area | regions, such as not only the aspect of a frame line but changing a color in a character and combining area | region 4804. .

  Specifically, the combination mark 4806 corresponding to the first special symbol first display 60 is displayed by being surrounded by the division markers 4806 so as to correspond to the upper row left six LEDs 4045. A combination area 4804 corresponding to the second special symbol first display 61 is displayed by being surrounded by section markers 4806 so as to correspond to the six LEDs 4845 in the upper row. The first special symbol hold 1st display, surrounding by division markers 4806 to correspond to the two LEDs 4045 arranged between the first special symbol first display 60 and the second special symbol first display 61 The combination area 4804 corresponding to the unit 63 is displayed. A combination area 4804 corresponding to the second special symbol retention first display 64 is displayed by being surrounded by section markers 4806 so as to correspond to the two right side LEDs 4045 of the second special symbol first display 61. In addition, the combination indicator 4806 corresponding to the round number display 66 is displayed by surrounding the division markers 4806 so as to correspond to the lower row left eight LEDs 4045. A combination area 4804 corresponding to the normal symbol first display 62 is displayed by being surrounded by the division markers 4806 so as to correspond to the three LEDs 4045 on the right side of the round number display. A combination area 4804 corresponding to the normal symbol retention first display 65 is displayed by being surrounded by section markers 4806 so as to correspond to two LEDs 4045 from the lower right side.

  As described above, by displaying the combination area 4804, the state of the LED 4045 in the area is associated and recognized, and it is possible to make it easy for the player to recognize the information by the combination of the LED 4045.

  As shown in FIG. 95, the second identification unit 5124 is disposed on the front side of the first layer 5136, except for the first layer 5136 which easily transmits light, and the region corresponding to the window 4206, And a second layer 5138 which is less likely to transmit light than 5136. In other words, the light transmitting portion 5132 corresponding to the window 4206 includes only the first layer 5136 that transmits light, and the portion corresponding to the light shielding portion 5134 that does not transmit light easily includes the first layer 5136 and the second layer 5138. And a laminated portion. Since the stacked portion includes the second layer 5138, it is difficult to transmit light as a whole, and the transmission of light from the light shielding portion 5134 is blocked. Here, in the stacked portion, the first layer 5136 is disposed on the rear side, and the second layer 5138 is disposed on the front side (front side). The second identification unit 5124 is obtained, for example, by laminating the second layer 5138 on the sheet made of the first layer 5136 by painting, printing or the like, and is visible between the light passing portion 5132 and the light blocking portion 5134 There is no difference in level.

  The third identification unit 4802 is an area in which various types of information are displayed, and is attached to the covering member 4800. The third identification unit 4802 is formed in a sheet shape, and is disposed at a position (upper side in the present embodiment) different from the second identification unit 5124 on the front surface of the covering member 4800. In the third identification unit 4802, the displayed information is visible to the player. In the present embodiment, the third identification unit 4802 and the covering member 4800 are bonded by the adhesive layer of the third identification unit 4802. However, the size of the third identification unit 4802 and the attachment method to the covering member 4800, etc. It is not restricted to this. Further, the information to be displayed by the third identification unit 4802 may be displayed on the second identification unit 5124 or the first identification unit 5122 or may be displayed separately from the identification unit 4220 and the third identification unit 4802 may be omitted. .

  As described above, by providing the third identification unit 4802, the information that can be displayed is increased, and the information displayed on the first game information display device 59 can be more easily understood. Further, by dividing the information into pieces and distributing them to the plurality of identification units 4802, 522, 5124 and displaying them, flexible response can be made when changing the model etc.

  The identification unit 4802, 522, 5124 (identification means 4220) may be configured to cover the circumferential surface thereof with a protection unit 4808 (FIG. 90). In the present embodiment, a protection portion 4808 is provided on the front surface of the covering member 4800, and a third identification portion attached to the circumferential surface of the second identification portion 5124 attached to the front surface of the covering member 4800 and the front surface of the covering member 4800. The circumferential surfaces of 4802 are covered with protective portions 4808, respectively. Specifically, the protection unit 4808 is a recess extending in the front-rear direction in a recess formed in accordance with the shape of the identification unit 4802, 5124 corresponding to the attachment position of the identification unit 4802, 5124. There is. In addition, the recess of the covering member 4800 has a depth about the thickness of the identification unit 4802, 5124, and the protective unit 4808 faces the peripheral surface of the identification unit 4802, 5124 which is fitted and attached to the recess and the identification unit A protection portion 4808 surrounds the entire circumference of 4802, 5124.

  By covering the circumferential surface of the identification unit 4802, 5124 with the protection unit 4808 in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to access the identification unit 4802, 5124 in the protection unit 4808, and hook the circumferential surface to the identification unit It is possible to prevent the 4802, 5124 from being removed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an illegal action such as changing the identification unit 4802 or 4124 or removing the identification unit 4802 or 5124 to access the first display substrate 4200. Further, by attaching the identification portions 4802 and 5124 to the covering member 4800 with the protective portion 4808 as a reference, the identification portions 4802 and 5124 can be aligned. In particular, since the second identification unit 5124 overlapping the front side of the window 4206 can be disposed without deviation, the state of the LED 4045 can be determined more appropriately.

  In this modification, the protection unit 4808 is provided corresponding to the entire circumference of the identification unit 4802, 5124. However, the protection unit 4808 is provided on part of the circumferential surface of the identification unit 4802, 522, 5124 (identification unit 4220). The configuration may be provided correspondingly.

  Information displayed on the identification means 4220 includes information related to a profit provided to the player in the game (sometimes referred to as game state information in the explanation) displayed by the first game information display device 59 Etc., unique display showing unique information such as model name, probability of the gaming machine 1 (eg, 1/299 etc.), probability ratio of the gaming machine 1 (eg, 60/100 etc.), big hit It is good to display the specification display etc. which show specification information, such as the number of rounds (for example, 15R, 4R etc.), alone or in combination. In addition, these displays are described by printing or other methods that the player can visually recognize.

  For example, as the gaming state display, as in the above-described embodiment, by forming the combination area 4804 surrounded by the division markers 4806, the states of the plurality of LEDs 4045 in the combination area 4804 are associated and recognized as a combination. The game state information displayed by the combination of the plurality of LEDs 4045 may be easily identified and assisted.

  FIG. 91 is an illustration showing an example of the game state display 4810 applied corresponding to the number-of-rounds indicator 66. For example, as shown in FIG. 91 (a), as the gaming state display 4810, a number corresponding to the number of rounds indicator 66, such as a position corresponding to the number of rounds indicator 66, is known to correspond to the number It may be configured to describe the display mode and the number of rounds of the LED 4045 for each round by a pattern schematically representing the display 66. The gaming state display 4810 of FIG. 91 (a) is for explaining the gaming state information (round number) displayed by the combination of the plurality of LEDs 4045 of the round number display 66. Therefore, by referring to the game state display 4810 of FIG. 91A, it is possible to easily identify the game state information (the number of rounds) indicated by the number-of-rounds display 66.

  Further, as the gaming state display 4810, a sign such as a numeral or a symbol is placed at a position corresponding to the side of the LED 4045 corresponding to the LED 4045 (FIG. 91 (b)) or at the front (FIG. 91 (c)). The configuration may be configured to assist the recognition of the state of the LED 4045 as a combination by means of the sign, and the state of the LED 4045 may be described. The signs may be different in color or shape.

  The identification means 4220 is divided into a first identification portion 5122 provided in the first cover member 4202 and a second identification portion 5124 provided in the covering member 4800 as a configuration corresponding to the front side of the window 4206. Since the functions required of the identification unit 4220 can be distributed to the two identification units 5122 and 5124 and set, the configuration of each of the identification units 5122 and 5124 can be simplified. Further, by assigning the functions required of the identification unit 4220 to the two identification units 5122 and 524 and setting them, the state of the LED 4045 can be more clearly distinguished, and the state of the LED 4045 can be more easily understood. Moreover, by arranging the first identification unit 5122 and the second identification unit 5124 in an overlapping manner, a synergistic effect that is difficult with one sheet can be obtained by overlapping of the two identification units 5122 and 5124.

  Since the covering member 4800 is attached to the game board 2 so as to be exchangeable, if the covering member 4800 is removed from the game board 2 and replaced at the time of model change etc., the identification portions 4802, 5124 provided on the covering member 4800 It can be easily replaced including. If unique display or specification display is performed by the covering member 4800, another model can be supported by replacing the covering member 4800. In addition, since the first identification unit 5122 is provided on the first cover member 4202, it is not affected by the replacement of the covering member 4800.

(Details of Structure of Second Game Information Display Device 79)
As shown in FIG. 99, the second game information display device 79 has a plurality of LEDs arranged in a triangle. These LEDs are the first and second special symbol second displays 88 and 89, the first and second special symbol holding second indicators 83 and 84, the normal symbol second display 82, and the normal symbol holding second display Device 85 and a right-handed second display 87 are configured.

  As shown in FIGS. 99 and 100, the second gaming information display device 79 covers at least the front side of the second display substrate 5800 on which the surface mounting of ten LEDs is mounted, and the second display substrate 5800. It comprises the second cover member 5710 and the like. Although not shown here, on the front side (top part) of the second cover member 5710, identification means capable of identifying the light emission modes of the plurality of LEDs individually or as a combination of the light emission modes of two or more LEDs .

  The second cover member 5710 includes a plate-like pedestal 5730 that forms the bottom of the second cover member 5710 and a triangular prism-like projection 5720 that protrudes from the pedestal 5730. The corner of the side surface of the projecting portion 5720 is chamfered, and the second game information display device 79 is disposed in a state where the top of the projecting portion 5720 faces the player.

  The second display substrate 5800 is a printed circuit board on which a plurality of LEDs are provided on the front surface, which is the side facing the player, and it is possible to emit light from the LEDs toward the front. The LEDs are surface-mounted on the second display substrate 5800, not through-hole mounting for fixing the leads of the LEDs in the holes of the printed circuit board. The second display substrate 5800 has the light emitting element of the LED and the solder for fixing the light emitting element to the second display substrate 5800 on the same front surface of the second display substrate 5800. That is, in the second display substrate 5800, the lead for connecting the LED to the circuit does not protrude on the rear surface, and the solder for fixing the LED is not disposed on the rear surface. Either full color or single color may be used as the LED, and a plurality of LEDs may be configured by combining full color and single color. Further, as the LED, any one of a chip type and a shell type can be used as long as it can be surface mounted, but a chip type is desirable from the advantage that space can be reduced. Under the control of the control means of the effect control board 102, the second display board 5800 is controlled in the state of lighting, extinguishing, blinking, etc. of the plurality of LEDs, and the state of lighting, extinguishing, blinking etc. Due to a change or the like, information on the profit given to the player is displayed.

  As described above, by mounting the surface of the LED on the second display substrate 5800, the space for arranging the LEDs in the second display substrate 5800 can be reduced, and the second display substrate 5800 can be made more compact. it can. In addition, by surface-mounting the LED on the second display substrate 5800, weight reduction can be achieved, and failure can be reduced. In addition, by mounting the surface of the LED on the front surface of the second display substrate 5800, the rear surface of the second display substrate 5800 is not affected by the mounting of the LED as in the through-hole mounting. Therefore, in the second display substrate 5800, another electronic component can be disposed on the rear surface corresponding to the mounting area where a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, effectively making the rear surface of the second display substrate 5800 effective. The second display substrate 5800 can be made more compact.

  The LED may have either a configuration in which the light emitting element is disposed so as to protrude from the surface of the second display substrate 5800 or a configuration in which the light emitting element is embedded so as not to protrude from the surface of the second display substrate 5800. The second display substrate 5800 may be provided with a reflective portion that easily reflects light such as white in the front surface area where the plurality of LEDs are mounted, or it is difficult to reflect light such as black in the front surface area You may provide an absorption part. In the case where the light emitting element of the LED protrudes from the surface of the second display substrate 5800, by providing the reflective portion around the light emitting element, the light emitted from the LED can be reflected by the reflective portion and efficiently used. In addition, when the light emitting element of the LED is embedded in the second display substrate 5800, by providing the absorbing portion around the light emitting element, the light emitted from the LED by the absorbing portion is diffused on the front surface of the second display substrate 5800. Can be prevented.

  The projecting portion 5720 is formed with ten light guiding hole portions 5740 as windows penetrating the projecting portion 5720 along the projecting direction. The pedestal 5730 of the second cover member 5710 is attached with the second display substrate 5800 in a state of covering the surface, and the light guiding holes 5740 are surface mounted on the surface of the second display substrate 5800. Are arranged at positions corresponding to the LEDs. As a result, it is possible to visually recognize the lighting state of each LED from the top side of the protrusion 5720 through the light guide hole 5740.

  On the other hand, on the back surface of the second display substrate 5800, a connector 5810 wired to the LED surface-mounted on the front surface is provided (see FIG. 100). And are connected.

  The second display substrate 5800 is screwed to the pedestal 5730 of the second cover member 5710, whereby the second display substrate 5800 can be removed from the second cover member 5710 and reassembled. When it is possible and disassembled, it is attached to the second cover member 5710 or the second display substrate 5800 without leaving a trace.

  Note that the method of attaching the second display substrate 5800 to the second cover member 5710 (the pedestal 5730) is not limited to this, and for example, by attaching using the engagement portion and the engagement receiving portion The second cover member 5710 may be releasable, reassembleable, and attached to the second cover member 5710 or the second display substrate 5800 without leaving a trace when disassembled.

  Further, the shape of the projecting portion 5720 is not limited to the triangular prism, but may be various shapes such as a cylinder or a square prism. Further, in the present embodiment, as an example, ten LEDs are mounted on the surface of the second display substrate 5800, and ten light guiding holes corresponding to the respective LEDs are provided in the second cover member 5710. Although 5740 is formed, it is possible not only this but to provide one or more LED and a light guide hole.

  Further, the second game information display device 79 may be divided into a plurality of display devices according to the function, and in this case, it is arranged adjacent to the inner rail member 29B at the lower left of the game area 2A. It may be arranged, or may be distributed to a plurality of places of the game area 2A.

  When the second game information display device 79 is divided into a plurality of display devices, for example, the first special symbol second display 88 and the first special symbol hold second display 89 serve as one display device; The special symbol second indicator 81 and the second special symbol hold second indicator 84 are one display device, and the normal symbol second indicator 82 and the normal symbol hold second indicator are one display device, and the right strike second The two displays may be one display device.

  In addition, the first special symbol second display 88, the second special symbol second display 89, and the normal symbol second display 82 constitute one display device, and the first special symbol hold second display 83, the second special The symbol holding second display 84 and the normal symbol holding second display 85 may be one display device, and the right hitting second display may be one display device.

  Also, the first special symbol second display 88, the second special symbol second display 89, and the normal symbol second display 82 are used as one display device, and the first special symbol hold second display 83 is displayed as one As a device, the second special symbol hold second display 84 may be one display device, and the normal symbol hold second display 85 and the right strike second display may be one display device.

(Demonstrate button, frequency of appearance of operation promotion effect of the production lever)
Next, the appearance frequency of the operation promotion effect of the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A will be described.
FIG. 101 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern to be selected and distribution in which effects of the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A are selected in the low probability gaming state and the high probability gaming state.

Specifically, FIG. 101 (A-1) is a diagram showing an example of the variation pattern determination table for low probability gaming state, and FIG. 101 (A-2) is an operation promotion effect determination table for low probability gaming state Is a diagram illustrating an example of Further, FIG. 101 (B-1) is a view showing an example of the high probability gaming state variation pattern determination table, and FIG. 101 (B-2) is an example of the high probability gaming state operation promotion effect determination table. FIG.
The low probability gaming state variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 101 (A-1) and the high probability gaming state variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 101 (B-1) are stored in the main ROM 101b. Further, the operation promotion effect determination table for low probability gaming state shown in FIG. 101 (A-2) and the operation promotion effect determination table for high probability gaming state shown in FIG. 101 (B-2) are stored in the sub ROM 102b. .

  As shown in FIG. 101 (A-1), in the case of a loss in the jackpot lottery in the low probability gaming state, the fluctuation pattern "01" or "02" is selected at a ratio of "80:20". On the other hand, in the case of hit, the variation pattern "03" or "04" is selected at the ratio of "60:40".

  Then, as shown in FIG. 101 (A-2), when the fluctuation pattern "01" (loss) is selected, an effect that urges the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A at a ratio of "100: 0", ie, Only the effect for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is selected. Further, when the fluctuation pattern “02” (loss) is selected, an effect that urges the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A is selected at a ratio of “80:20”.

  Furthermore, when the variation pattern "03" (per shot) is selected, the effect prompting the operation of the rendering button 18A or the production lever 19A is selected at a ratio of "80:20", and the variation pattern "04" (per shot) is selected. In the case where it is selected, the effect of prompting the user to operate the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A is selected at a rate of "70:30".

  Further, as shown in FIG. 101 (B-1), in the case of a loss in the jackpot lottery in the high probability gaming state, the fluctuation pattern "05" or "06" is selected at a rate of "70:30". On the other hand, in the case of hit, the fluctuation pattern "07" or "08" is selected at the ratio of "50:50".

  Then, as shown in FIG. 101 (B-2), when the fluctuation pattern "05" (loss) is selected, the effect of prompting the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A is selected at the ratio of "80:20". Be done. Further, when the fluctuation pattern “06” (loss) is selected, the effect of prompting the user to operate the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A is selected at a ratio of “60:40”.

  Furthermore, when the fluctuation pattern “07” (per) is selected, the effect prompting the operation of the rendering button 18A or the rendering lever 19A is selected at a ratio of “20:80”, and the fluctuation pattern “08” (per) is selected. In the case of “10:90”, the effect of prompting the user to operate the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A is selected.

  Thus, in the low probability gaming state (see FIG. 101 (A-2)), it is easier to select an effect prompting an operation of the effect button 18A than in the high probability gaming state (see FIG. 101 (B-2)) It has become. Further, in the low probability gaming state (see FIG. 101A), the effect of prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is more easily selected than the effect of prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A.

Further, in the high probability gaming state (see FIG. 101 (B-2)), the effect of prompting the user to operate the rendering lever 19A is more easily selected than in the low probability gaming state (see FIG. 101 (A-2)) There is.
Therefore, in the low probability gaming state, it is easy to generate an effect that urges the operation of the effect button 18A than in the high probability gaming state, and the interest using the effect button 18A can be enhanced. Further, in the low probability gaming state, rather than the effect for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A, an effect for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is more likely to occur, and the interest can be enhanced by the characteristic effect in the low probability gaming state. Furthermore, in the high probability gaming state, it is easy to generate an effect that urges the operation of the effect lever 19A than in the low probability gaming state, and the attraction using the effect lever 19A can be enhanced, and the effect lever 19A is used Since the performed effect is a characteristic effect in the high probability gaming state, it is possible to particularly enhance the interest.

  In the present embodiment, in the low probability gaming state, the effect of prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is more easily selected than in the high probability gaming state, but in the low probability gaming state, more than the high probability gaming state The effect of prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A may be easily selected. Further, in the low probability gaming state, although the effect of prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is made easier to select than the effect of prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A, the effect lever of 18A is more effective than the effect prompting the operation of the effect button 18A. An effect prompting the operation of 19A may be easily selected.

  Moreover, in the present embodiment, the effect of prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is more easily selected than in the low probability gaming state in the high probability gaming state, but in the high probability gaming state, rather than the low probability gaming state, An effect that urges the operation of the effect button 18A may be easily selected.

  Furthermore, in the low probability gaming state, only the effect for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A may be selected, and in the high probability gaming state, only the effect for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A may be selected. Furthermore, in the low probability gaming state, only the effect for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A may be selected, and in the high probability gaming state, only the effect for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A may be selected.

  Further, in the present embodiment, either the effect for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is selected, however, the effect for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A, Also, there may be a case where neither of the effects for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is selected.

(Effect change mode when effect button effect is selected)
Next, a change in the effect mode of the effect button 18A when the effect by the effect button 18A is selected will be described.

FIG. 102 is a diagram showing an example of the effect button effect change mode determination table. In addition, FIG. 102 (A) is a figure which shows an example of the production button effect change mode determination table for low probability gaming state, and FIG. 102 (B) is an example of the production button effect change mode determination table for high probability gaming state FIG.
The low probability game state effect button effect change mode determination table shown in FIG. 102 (A) and the high probability game state effect button effect change mode determination table shown in FIG. 102 (B) are stored in the sub ROM 102b. .

The variation pattern determination table and the operation promotion effect determination table are the same as the variation pattern determination table and the operation promotion effect determination table shown in FIG.
The low probability gaming state effect button effect change mode determination table is a table referred to when the effect relating to the effect button 18A is selected in the low probability gaming state operation promotion effect determination table. The high probability game state effect button effect change mode determination table is a table that is referred to when the effect relating to the effect button 18A is selected in the high probability game state operation promotion effect determination table.

  As shown in FIG. 102 (A), when the fluctuation pattern "01" (loss) is selected in the low probability gaming state and the effect by the effect button 18A is selected, "no protrusion" at a ratio of "100: 0". Or, "with protrusion" is selected, that is, only "without protrusion". In addition, when the fluctuation pattern “02” (loss) is selected and the effect by the effect button 18A is selected, the fluctuation pattern “without protrusion” or “with protrusion” is selected at a ratio of “90:10”.

On the other hand, when the variation pattern “03” (per) is selected and the effect by the effect button 18A is selected, “no protrusion” or “with protrusion” is selected at a ratio of “30:70”. Further, when the variation pattern “04” (per) is selected and the effect by the effect button 18A is selected, the variation pattern “without protrusion” or “with protrusion” is selected at a ratio of “20:80”.
Note that "without protrusion" is an effect in which the effect ends with the effect button 18A in the normal state (the state of FIG. 72 (a)), and "with protrusion" is a state with the effect button 18A protruded ( It is an effect that changes in the middle of the effect as shown in FIG. 72 (b).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 102 (B), when the variation pattern “05” (loss) is selected in the high probability gaming state and the effect by the effect button 18A is selected, “protrusion” is made at a ratio of “100: 0” None or "with protrusion" is selected, that is, only "without protrusion". Further, when the fluctuation pattern “06” (loss) is selected and the effect by the effect button 18A is selected, the fluctuation pattern “without protrusion” or “with protrusion” is selected at a ratio of “95: 5”.

  On the other hand, when the variation pattern “07” (per) is selected and the effect by the effect button 18A is selected, “without protrusion” or “with protrusion” is selected at a ratio of “20:80”. Further, when the variation pattern “08” (per) is selected and the effect by the effect button 18A is selected, the variation pattern “without protrusion” or “with protrusion” is selected at a ratio of “10:90”.

  As described above, at the time of winning, the projecting effect of the effect button 18A is easily performed (see FIG. 102). As described above, in the low probability gaming state (see FIG. 101 (A-2)), the effect associated with the effect button 18A is selected rather than the high probability gaming state (see FIG. 101 (B-2)) It is easier. Therefore, in the low probability gaming state, the effects relating to the rendering button 18A are more likely to occur than in the high probability gaming state, and when the winning is won, the salient effects of the rendering button 18A are easily executed Can.

(The effect change mode when the effect lever effect is selected)
Next, a change in the effect mode of the effect lever 19A when the effect by the effect lever 19A is selected will be described.

FIG. 103 is a diagram showing an example of the effect lever effect change mode determination table. In addition, FIG. 103 (A) is a figure which shows an example of the production lever production | presentation change mode determination table for low probability gaming state, FIG. 103 (B) is an example of the production lever production | presentation change mode determination table for high probability gaming state FIG.
In addition, the production lever effect change mode determination table for low probability gaming state shown in FIG. 103 (A) and the production lever effect change mode determination table for high probability gaming state shown in FIG. 103 (B) are stored in the sub ROM 102b. .

The variation pattern determination table and the operation promotion effect determination table are the same as the variation pattern determination table and the operation promotion effect determination table shown in FIG.
The low probability gaming state effect lever effect change mode determination table is a table that is referred to when the effect associated with the effect lever 19A is selected in the low probability gaming state operation promotion effect determination table. The high probability game state effect lever effect change mode determination table is a table that is referred to when the effect relating to the effect lever 19A is selected in the high probability game state operation promotion effect determination table.

  As shown in FIG. 103 (A), when the fluctuation pattern "01" (loss) is selected in the low probability gaming state and the effect by the effect lever 19A is selected, "no vibration" at a ratio of "100: 0". Or "with vibration" is selected, that is, only "without vibration". In addition, when the fluctuation pattern “02” (loss) is selected and the effect by the effect lever 19A is selected, the fluctuation pattern “without vibration” or “with vibration” is selected at a ratio of “90:10”.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern “03” (per) is selected and the effect by the effect lever 19A is selected, “no vibration” or “with vibration” is selected at a ratio of “30:70”. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern “04” (per) is selected and the effect by the effect lever 19A is selected, the fluctuation pattern “without vibration” or “with vibration” is selected at a ratio of “20:80”.
Note that "without vibration" is an effect in which the effect is ended with the effect lever 19A in a normal state (state without vibration), and "with vibration" is in the middle of the effect in a state where the effect lever 19A vibrates. It is an effect that changes.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 103 (B), when the fluctuation pattern "05" (loss) is selected in the high probability gaming state and the effect by the effect lever 19A is selected, "vibration" at a ratio of "100: 0". "None" or "with vibration" is selected, that is, only "without vibration". In addition, when the fluctuation pattern “06” (loss) is selected and the effect by the effect lever 19A is selected, the fluctuation pattern “without vibration” or “with vibration” is selected at a ratio of “95: 5”.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern “07” (per) is selected and the effect by the effect lever 19A is selected, “no vibration” or “with vibration” is selected at a ratio of “20:80”. Further, when the fluctuation pattern “08” (per) is selected and the effect by the effect lever 19A is selected, the fluctuation pattern “without vibration” or “with vibration” is selected at a ratio of “10:90”.

  As described above, at the time of winning, the vibration effect of the effect lever 19A is easily performed (see FIG. 103). As described above, in the high probability gaming state (see FIG. 101 (B-2)), the effect related to the rendering lever 19A is selected rather than the low probability gaming state (see FIG. 101 (A-2)) It is easier. Therefore, in the high probability gaming state, it is easier for the effect concerning the production lever 19A to occur than in the low probability gaming state, and at the time of winning the vibration presentation of the production lever 19A is easy to be performed. Can.

(The effect button in the high probability game state, the appearance frequency of the operation promoting effect of the effect lever (effect button <effect lever) and the effect change mode when the effect lever effect is selected)
Next, the effect when the appearance frequency of the effect promoting effect of the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A in the high probability gaming state is different from that of the above embodiment will be described.

FIG. 104 is a fluctuation pattern determination table etc. in the high probability gaming state. Specifically, FIG. 104 (A-1) is a diagram showing an example of a high probability gaming state variation pattern determination table, and FIG. 104 (A-2) is a high probability gaming state operation promotion effect determination table. FIG. 104 (B) is a view showing an example of a high probability game state rendering lever effect change mode determination table.
Note that the high probability gaming state variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 104 (A-1) is stored in the main ROM 101b. Also, the high probability gaming state operation promotion effect determination table shown in FIG. 104 (A-2) and the high probability gaming state effect lever effect change determination table shown in FIG. 104 (B) are stored in the sub ROM 102 b. .

  As shown in FIG. 104 (A-1), in the case of loss in the big hit lottery in the high probability gaming state, the variation pattern "05" or "06" is selected at the rate of "70:30". On the other hand, in the case of hit, the variation pattern "07" or "08" is selected at the ratio of "60:40".

  Then, as shown in FIG. 104 (A-2), when the fluctuation pattern "05" (loss) is selected, the effect of prompting the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A is selected at the ratio of "40:60". Be done. Further, when the fluctuation pattern “06” (loss) is selected, the effect of prompting the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A is selected at a ratio of “30:70”.

  Furthermore, when the fluctuation pattern “07” (per) is selected, the effect prompting the operation of the rendering button 18A or the rendering lever 19A is selected at a ratio of “20:80”, and the fluctuation pattern “08” (per) is selected. In the case of “10:90”, the effect of prompting the user to operate the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A is selected.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 104 (B), when the fluctuation pattern "05" (loss) is selected in the high probability gaming state and the effect by the effect lever 19A is selected, "vibration" at a ratio of "100: 0". "None" or "with vibration" is selected, that is, only "without vibration". In addition, when the fluctuation pattern “06” (loss) is selected and the effect by the effect lever 19A is selected, the fluctuation pattern “without vibration” or “with vibration” is selected at a ratio of “95: 5”.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern “07” (per) is selected and the effect by the effect lever 19A is selected, “no vibration” or “with vibration” is selected at a ratio of “20:80”. Further, when the fluctuation pattern “08” (per) is selected and the effect by the effect lever 19A is selected, the fluctuation pattern “without vibration” or “with vibration” is selected at a ratio of “10:90”.

  As described above, in the high probability gaming state, the effect of prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is more easily selected than the effect of prompting the operation of the effect button 18A (see FIG. 104 (A-2)). Since the vibration effect of the lever 19A is easily performed (see FIG. 104B), the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, in the high probability gaming state, the effect of prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is made easier to select than the effect of prompting the operation of the effect button 18A, but the operation of the effect lever 19A is urged It may be easier to select an effect that urges the operation of the effect button 18A than the effect. Furthermore, in the high probability gaming state, only the effect for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A may be selected. Further, in the high probability gaming state, only the effect for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A may be selected.

  Further, in the present embodiment, either the effect for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is selected, however, the effect for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A, Also, there may be a case where neither of the effects for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is selected.

(Effect that allows the operation of multiple operation units (effect button and effect lever))
Next, a case where the operation of the effect button 18A is effective as well as the effect lever 19A at the time of the lever promoting operation effect of the effect lever 19A will be described.

FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an example of a fluctuation presentation determination table or the like for validating the operation of the plurality of operation units (the presentation button 18A and the presentation lever 19A).
Specifically, FIG. 105 (A-1) is a diagram showing an example of the high probability gaming state variation pattern determination table, and FIG. 105 (A-2) is a high probability gaming state operation promotion effect determination table FIG. 105 (B) is a diagram showing an example of the operation valid period of the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A.

  FIG. 106 is a view showing an example of the effect image displayed on the image display device 14 when the variation effect pattern in which the operation of the plurality of operation units (the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A) is effective is selected.

  In the following, there will be described a case where the player wins in the jackpot lottery in the high probability gaming state, the variation pattern "07" is selected, and the effect for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 106 (A), when the sub CPU 102a selects a variation effect pattern in which the operation of the plurality of operation parts is effective, first, all of the three decorative symbols change with respect to the image display device 14 By displaying the effect image as shown, the variation effect is performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (B), the sub CPU 102a causes the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol to be temporarily stopped with symbols indicating the same numeral, and the reach where only the central decorative symbol is changed. The effect is displayed on the image display device 14.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (C), the sub CPU 102a causes the central decorative symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a number different from the numbers of the left and right decorative symbols. Then, the sub CPU 102a stands by until a time sufficient for the player to recognize in this state has elapsed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (D), the sub CPU 102a moves, for example, the first decorative member 17A as a gimmick and makes it appear on the front surface of the image display device 14. The sub CPU 102a changes the display of the decorative symbol from the approximate center to the upper right, reduces the display range, and displays it in a reach effect state.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (E), the sub CPU 102a retracts the first decorative member 17A from the front surface of the image display device 14 (for example, returns it to the initial position), and causes the image display device 14 to perform the effect lever 19A. A lever promoting operation effect for operation is performed over a predetermined effective period. Further, at this time, the sub CPU 102a lights to make it easy to recognize that the effect lever 19A and the effect button 18A can be operated. Further, the sub CPU 102a is in a projecting state to make it easy to operate the effect button 18A. Note that the operation of lighting up the rendering button 18A or bringing it into the projecting state may not be daunting.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 105 (B), the sub CPU 102a validates the operation of both the effect lever 19A and the effect button 18A with the start of the lever acceleration operation effect. The operations of the effect lever 19A and the effect button 18A are effective while the lever promoting operation effect is being performed. When the operation of the effect lever 19A or the effect button 18A is detected, the lever promoting operation effect is ended, and the operation effective period of the effect lever 19A and the effect button 18A is also ended. When neither the operation of the effect lever 19A nor the operation of the effect button 18A is detected within the operation effective period, the operations of the effect lever 19A and the effect button 18A are invalidated with the end of the operation effective period.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 106F, when the operation of the effect lever 19A or the effect button 18A is detected, the sub CPU 102a causes the image display device 14 to display an effect image indicating the lottery result.

  As described above, even if only the lever promoting operation effect for operating the effect lever 19A is performed on the image display device 14, the operations of both the effect lever 19A and the effect button 18A become effective, so the player can The player can play a game using the operation unit of the production lever 19A or the production button 18A which is easy to operate, and can improve the interest of the game.

  In the present embodiment, the two operation units of the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A are used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more operation units may be used.

(First specific example of state transition, and sixth specific example of fluctuation pattern and distribution of operation means according to fluctuation pattern)
Next, with reference to FIG. 107, a first specific example according to the state transition and a sixth specific example of the fluctuation pattern and the distribution of the operating means according to the fluctuation pattern will be described. In FIG. 107, description will be made on the assumption that the “variation pattern 04” shown in FIG. 107 (B-1) is determined.

  First, FIG. 107A is a diagram showing transition of effects (state transition) displayed on the image display device 14. Specifically, "the change start" when the production design starts to change, "before reach" before the reach is performed after the production design starts to change, and "after the reach" after the formation of the reach And “development reach” to be conducted after the “after reach”. In the reach performed in the "after reach" period, a reach with a relatively low degree of expectation to the jackpot is executed, and temporarily stops a symbol (for example, "767") indicating a loss. After that, transition to reach performed in the period of “development reach”. In addition, the reach (for example, "special reach") performed in the period of "development reach" has a relatively higher expectation for jackpot than the reach (for example, "super reach") performed in the period of "after reach" High reach is performed. In addition, depending on the determined special symbol variation pattern, it is also equipped with a pattern that stops losing in the reach performed in the "after reach" period and ends the variation without transitioning to "development reach", For example, when a symbol (for example, “767”) indicating a loss is temporarily stopped, then transition to “development reach” or transition from temporary stop to fixed stop and change without transition to “development reach” It is possible to make the player pay attention to the end of the event.

  Then, the image display device 14 displays an image imitating the effect button 18A and displays an image prompting the user to operate the effect button 18A (press the button!) In "before reach" after the "variation start". Do. The effect control board 102 sets the operation effective period of the effect button 18A via the lamp control board 104. When the “operation effective period” is set, when the player operates the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A, operation information is input to the effect control board 102 via the lamp control board 104. If the “operation effective period” is not set, the operation information is not input to the effect control board 102 even if the player operates the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A. In addition, it is assumed that the operation effective period is set to be the same as the display time of the image imitating the effect button 18A and the image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A, or set to be longer than that. Then, when the effect button 18A is operated in the operation valid period, for example, a notice image etc. for giving a notice that the reach is formed is displayed. Specifically, when the effect button 18A is operated, an effect of displaying the character image and notifying of the possibility that the reach is formed is performed depending on the type of the character, the character's speech or the like. Such an effect may not be displayed when the effect button 18A is not operated in the operation effective period, and when the effect button 18A is not operated in the operation effective period, It may be displayed automatically when the operation effective period has elapsed. In addition, before reaching, an image imitating the effect button 18A is displayed, and an image imitating the effect lever 19A is displayed besides the image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A (press the button!) An image prompting the user to operate the lever 19A (pull the lever!) May be displayed. Details of this will be described later with reference to FIG. 107 (B-2).

  Then, in the image display device 14, in the “before reach”, after the display of an image or the like prompting the operation of the effect button 18 </ b> A is performed, the reach is formed. Here, in the example of FIG. 107, in the display area 140 of the image display device 14, the "7" symbol is displayed in the effect symbol display area (left) and the "7" symbol is displayed in the effect symbol display area (right) , It has been shown that the effect symbol display area (middle) is variably displayed. And the "reach!" Image which shows that the reach was formed is displayed.

  Then, in "after reach" after the reach is formed in the image display device 14, for example, the effect corresponding to "super reach" is executed, and the expectation for jackpot is higher than "super reach". A presentation is held to ask whether or not to transition to "special reach". In addition, in "super reach", it is possible to temporarily stop the symbol of the loss temporarily, and then, it may be configured to transition to "special reach", or "special" without stopping the symbol of the loss temporarily. It may be configured to transition to "reach".

  Then, in the image display apparatus 14, in the “development reach” of “after reach”, for example, the effect corresponding to the “special reach” is executed, and if the jackpot is determined, the symbol indicating the jackpot is displayed. If it is determined that a loss has been determined, the symbol indicating the removal is derived. It should be noted that when deriving a symbol of either a big hit or a loss, an image imitating the effect lever 19A is displayed, and an image prompting the user to operate the effect lever 19A (retract the lever!) Is displayed. The effect control board 102 sets the operation effective period of the effect lever 19A via the lamp control board 104. It is assumed that the operation effective period is set to be the same as the display time of the image imitating the effect lever 19A and the image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A, or set to be longer than that. That is, when deriving one of the symbols, an image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A (pull the lever!) Is displayed, and the player operates the effect lever 19A so that the player acts on the effect lever 19A. By performing the operation, an effect such that a symbol of either a jackpot or a loser is derived is performed. In addition, it is assumed that derivation | leading-out of the symbol of either a big hit or a loss will be automatically displayed with progress of the operation effective period, when the production lever 19A is not operated in the operation effective period. In the development reach, an image imitating the effect lever 19A is displayed, and an image imitating the effect button 18A is displayed in addition to an image prompting the user to operate the effect lever 19A (a lever is released!). An image (press the button!) Prompting the user to operate the button 18A may be displayed. Details of this will be described later with reference to FIG. 107 (B-2). In the example of FIG. 107, a symbol "777" indicating a big hit is derived, and an image (big hit !!) indicating that the big hit has been made is displayed.

  Next, FIG. 107 (B-1) is a diagram showing the relationship between the fluctuation pattern (special symbol fluctuation pattern) in the low probability gaming state, the content (representation content) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, and the distribution of the fluctuation pattern. is there. Note that FIG. 107 (B-1) excerpts a part of the fluctuation pattern for convenience of explanation, and also has a plurality of fluctuation patterns. And "fluctuation pattern 01 (loss)" is a fluctuation pattern selected when the result of the big hit judgment is a loss, and the contents of the effect that transition from "normal reach" to "super reach" is defined as the contents It is done. In addition, "variation pattern 02 (loss)" is a fluctuation pattern selected when the result of the big hit judgment is a loss, and the content of the effect of transitioning from "normal reach" to "special reach" is determined as the content It is done. In addition, when the result of the big hit judgment is a loss, the distribution for which the "variation pattern 01 (loss)" is selected is "80/100", and the distribution for which the "variation pattern 02 (loss)" is selected is It is "20/100", and the rate at which "variation pattern 01 (loss)" is selected is high. Note that the distribution value can be set to any value. And "fluctuation pattern 03 (per)" is a fluctuation pattern selected when the result of the big hit judgment is a hit, and the contents of the effect of transitioning from "normal reach" to "super reach" are determined. It is done. In addition, “variation pattern 04 (per)” is a fluctuation pattern selected when the result of the jackpot determination is a win, and as the content, it transits from “normal reach” to “super reach”, and further “ The content of the transition from "Super reach" to "Special reach" is defined. If the result of the jackpot determination is a hit, the distribution for which “variation pattern 03 (per)” is selected is “50/100”, and the distribution for which “variation pattern 04 (per)” is selected is It is "50/100", and the selection rate is even. Note that the distribution value can be set to any value.

  Next, FIG. 107 (B-2) shows the ratio of executing the operation effect of the effect button 18A in "before reach" and the operation of the effect lever 19A corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (special symbol fluctuation pattern) in the low probability gaming state The relationship with the ratio of performing the effect, and the relationship between the ratio of performing the operation effect of the effect button 18A after reaching and the ratio of performing the operation effect of the operation lever 19A are shown. That is, in the image display device 14, the relationship between the ratio at which the image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A in “before reach” is displayed and the ratio at which the image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is displayed. In the above, it can be said that the relationship between the rate at which the image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is displayed after reaching and the rate at which the image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is displayed.

  For "Before reach" in "Variation pattern 01 (loss)", the distribution for which the presentation button 18A is selected is "100/100", and the distribution for which the presentation lever 19A is selected is "0/100" The effect lever 19A is not selected. In addition, for "before reach" in "variation pattern 02 (loss)", the distribution for which the presentation button 18A is selected is "90/100", and the distribution for which the presentation lever 19A is selected is "10 / It is 100 ". In addition, for “before reach” of “variation pattern 03 (per)”, the distribution for which the presentation button 18A is selected is “100/100”, and the distribution for which the presentation lever 19A is selected is “0/0. 100 ", and the effect lever 19A is not selected. In addition, for “before reach” of “variation pattern 04 (per)”, the distribution for which the presentation button 18A is selected is “90/100”, and the distribution for which the presentation lever 19A is selected is “10 / It is 100 ". That is, in "before reach", it can be said that the ratio in which the effect button 18A is selected is higher than when the effect lever 19A is selected as the whole fluctuation pattern. Note that the distribution value can be set to any value.

  On the other hand, in the “after reach” of “variation pattern 01 (loss)”, the distribution for which the presentation button 18A is selected is “90/100”, and the distribution for which the presentation lever 19A is selected is “10 / It is 100 ". Further, in “after reach” of “variation pattern 02 (loss)”, the distribution for which the presentation button 18A is selected is “0/100”, and the distribution for which the presentation lever 19A is selected is “100 / The effect button 18A is not selected. Further, in "after reach" of "variation pattern 03 (per)", the distribution for which the presentation button 18A is selected is "50/100", and the distribution for which the presentation lever 19A is selected is "50 / It is 100 ". Further, in the “after reach” of “variation pattern 04 (per)”, the distribution for which the presentation button 18A is selected is “0/100”, and the distribution for which the presentation lever 19A is selected is “100 / It is 100 ". That is, in the “after reach”, it can be said that the ratio in which the effect lever 19A is selected is higher than the effect button 18A being selected as the entire fluctuation pattern. Note that the distribution value can be set to any value.

  Thus, in "before reach", the ratio at which the effect button 18A is selected is increased rather than when the effect lever 19A is selected, and after "reach", the effect is produced rather than when the effect button 18A is selected. By increasing the rate at which the lever 19A is selected, it is possible to make it easy for the player to grasp which operation means is in the operation phase when a plurality of operation means are provided. In addition, while performing the effect which urges the operation of the effect button 18A, the operation effective period of the effect button 18A can be set, and the operation effective period of the effect lever 19A can also be set. However, in this case, the effect for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is not performed. That is, although the effect for prompting the operation only executes the effect for prompting the operation of any one operation means, any operation means is configured to be operable. Of course, the same thing may be performed while performing an effect that urges the operation of the effect lever 19A. By configuring in this manner, when a plurality of operation means are provided, the player can operate the operation means that the player desires to perform an operation, so that it is possible to further improve the fun of the game.

  The following can be modified in the first specific example of state transition. That is, in FIG. 107, an image prompting the user to operate the “before reach” effect button 18A after the “variation start” is displayed, and the “operation effective period” is set. An image prompting for the operation of 18A may be displayed, and the “operation effective period” may be set. In addition, in “Development reach”, an image prompting the operation of the production lever 19A is displayed, and the player operates the production lever 19A, as if the player operated the production lever 19A, or it is a big hit or a loss Although it was decided to perform the effect that one of the symbols is derived, the timing to perform the effect may be any timing after “reach” to the timing of deriving the symbol. Further, as the image for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A and the image for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A, only the image of the operation means may be displayed, and the message image may not be displayed. Alternatively, only the meter image may be displayed to display an image in which the gauge image is changed corresponding to the operation effective period. In this case, it can be said to display an image indicating that the operation means is operable.

(The second specific example according to the state transition, and the seventh specific example of the fluctuation pattern and the distribution of the operating means according to the fluctuation pattern)
Next, with reference to FIG. 108, a second specific example according to the state transition, and a variation pattern and a seventh specific example of distribution of the operation means according to the variation pattern will be described. In FIG. 108, description will be made on the assumption that the “variation pattern 04” shown in FIG. 108 (B-1) is determined.

  First, FIG. 108A is a diagram showing transition of effects (state transition) displayed on the image display device 14. Specifically, "the change start" in which the production design starts to change, the "after reach (first reach)" after the reach is formed, and the "development reach" (after the "reach") 2) reach) and. In the reach performed in the "after reach" period, a reach with a relatively low degree of expectation to the jackpot is executed, and temporarily stops a symbol (for example, "767") indicating a loss. After that, transition to reach performed in the period of “development reach”. In addition, the reach (for example, "special reach") performed in the period of "development reach" has a relatively higher expectation for jackpot than the reach (for example, "super reach") performed in the period of "after reach" High reach is performed. In addition, depending on the determined special symbol variation pattern, it is also equipped with a pattern that stops losing in the reach performed in the "after reach" period and ends the variation without transitioning to "development reach", For example, when a symbol (for example, “767”) indicating a loss is temporarily stopped, then transition to “development reach” or transition from temporary stop to fixed stop and change without transition to “development reach” It is possible to make the player pay attention to the end of the event.

  Then, the image display device 14 displays an image imitating the effect button 18A and displays an image prompting the user to operate the effect button 18A ("Press the button!") After "reach" after reach formation. The effect control board 102 sets the operation effective period of the effect button 18A via the lamp control board 104. The operation effective period is the same as the contents described in FIG. 107, and may be set to the same time as the display time of the image imitating the effect button 18A and the image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A, or longer than that. It is assumed to be set. Then, when the effect button 18A is operated in the operation valid period, for example, a notice image or the like for giving notice of the possibility of transition to the development reach is displayed. Specifically, when the effect button 18A is operated, an effect of displaying the character image and notifying of the possibility of transition to the development reach is performed depending on the character type, the character's speech, and the like. Such an effect may not be displayed when the effect button 18A is not operated in the operation effective period, and when the effect button 18A is not operated in the operation effective period, It may be displayed automatically when the operation effective period has elapsed. In addition, after reaching, an image imitating the effect button 18A is displayed, and an image imitating the effect lever 19A is displayed besides the image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A (press the button!) An image prompting the user to operate the lever 19A (pull the lever!) May be displayed. Details of this will be described later with reference to FIG. 108 (B-2).

  Note that, in “after reach”, an image prompting to operate the effect button 18A may be displayed after temporarily stopping the lost design. For example, when it is decided to transition to the development reach, after “temporarily stop” the lost pattern in “after reach”, an image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is displayed, and the effect button 18A is When operated, the first decorative member 17A may be operated to transition to the development reach.

  And in the image display apparatus 14, in "development reach", for example, the effect corresponding to "special reach" is executed, and when the jackpot is determined, the symbol indicating the jackpot is derived and the loser is determined If it is, it derives the symbol that shows the detachment. In addition, in deriving one of the symbols, an image imitating the effect lever 19A is displayed, and an image (pull the lever!) For prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is displayed. The effect control board 102 sets the operation effective period of the effect lever 19A via the lamp control board 104. It is assumed that the operation effective period is set to be the same as the display time of the image imitating the effect lever 19A and the image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A, or set to be longer than that. That is, when deriving a symbol of either a jackpot or a loss, an image (with the lever pulled down!) Prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is displayed to make the player operate the effect lever 19A, as if the player were By operating the effect lever 19A, such an effect that a symbol of either a jackpot or a loss is derived is performed. In addition, it is assumed that derivation | leading-out of the symbol of either a big hit or a loss will be automatically displayed with progress of the operation effective period, when the production lever 19A is not operated in the operation effective period. In the development reach, an image imitating the effect lever 19A is displayed, and an image imitating the effect button 18A is displayed in addition to an image prompting the user to operate the effect lever 19A (a lever is released!). An image (press the button!) Prompting the user to operate the button 18A may be displayed. Details of this will be described later with reference to FIG. 108 (B-2). In the example of FIG. 108, a symbol "777" indicating a big hit is derived, and an image (big hit !!) indicating that the big hit has been made is displayed.

  Next, FIG. 108 (B-1) is the same as the contents described in the description of FIG. 107 (B-1), and thus the description is omitted. Next, FIG. 108 (B-2) shows the ratio of performing the operation effect of the effect button 18A in the "first reach" and the effect lever 19A corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (special symbol fluctuation pattern) in the low probability gaming state The relationship between the ratio of executing the operation effect and the ratio of executing the operation effect of the effect button 18A in the "second reach" and the ratio of executing the operation effect of the operation lever 19A are shown. That is, in the image display device 14, the relationship between the rate at which the image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A in the "first reach" is displayed and the rate at which the image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is displayed In 14, it can be said that the relationship between the ratio at which the image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A in the "second reach" is displayed and the ratio at which the image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is displayed.

  In the "first reach" of the "variation pattern 01 (loss)", the distribution for which the effect button 18A is selected is "100/100", and the distribution for which the effect lever 19A is selected is "0/100" Therefore, the effect lever 19A is not selected. Further, in the "first reach" of the "variation pattern 02 (loss)", the distribution with which the effect button 18A is selected is "90/100", and the distribution with which the effect lever 19A is selected is "10. / 100 ”. Further, in the "first reach" of the "variation pattern 03 (per)", the distribution for which the effect button 18A is selected is "100/100", and the distribution for which the effect lever 19A is selected is "0. / 100 ", and the effect lever 19A is not selected. Further, in the "first reach" of the "variation pattern 04 (per)", the distribution for which the effect button 18A is selected is "90/100", and the distribution for which the effect lever 19A is selected is "10 / 100 ”. That is, in the “first reach”, it can be said that the ratio in which the effect button 18A is selected is higher than when the effect lever 19A is selected as the entire fluctuation pattern. Note that the distribution value can be set to any value.

  On the other hand, in the "second reach" of the "variation pattern 01 (loss)", the distribution for which the effect button 18A is selected is "80/100", and the distribution for which the effect lever 19A is selected is "20". / 100 ”. Further, in the "second reach" of the "variation pattern 02 (loss)", the distribution for which the effect button 18A is selected is "10/100", and the distribution for which the effect lever 19A is selected is "90". / 100 ", and the effect button 18A is not selected. Further, in the "second reach" of the "variation pattern 03 (per)", the distribution for which the effect button 18A is selected is "50/100", and the distribution for which the effect lever 19A is selected is "50". / 100 ”. Further, in the "second reach" of the "variation pattern 04 (per)", the distribution for which the effect button 18A is selected is "0/100", and the distribution for which the effect lever 19A is selected is "100". / 100 ”. That is, in the “second reach”, it can be said that the ratio of selection of the effect lever 19A is higher than that of the effect button 18A as the whole fluctuation pattern. Note that the distribution value can be set to any value.

  As described above, in the "first reach", the ratio at which the effect button 18A is selected is made higher than in the case where the effect lever 19A is selected, and in the "second reach", rather than the effect button 18A is selected. By increasing the ratio at which the effect lever 19A is selected, it is possible to make it easy for the player to grasp which operation means is in a phase of operating when a plurality of operation means are provided. In addition, while performing the effect which urges the operation of the effect button 18A, the operation effective period of the effect button 18A can be set, and the operation effective period of the effect lever 19A can also be set. However, in this case, the effect for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is not performed. That is, although the effect for prompting the operation only executes the effect for prompting the operation of any one operation means, any operation means is configured to be operable. Of course, the same thing may be performed while performing an effect that urges the operation of the effect lever 19A. By configuring in this manner, when a plurality of operation means are provided, the player can operate the operation means that the player desires to perform an operation, so that it is possible to further improve the fun of the game.

  In the second specific example of state transition, the following changes can be made. That is, in FIG. 108, in the “first reach”, an image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is displayed, and the “operation effective period” is set, but if “first reach” is performed. The image for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A may be displayed, and the timing for setting the “operation valid period” may be any timing. Also, in the “second reach”, an image prompting the operation of the production lever 19A is displayed, and the player operates the production lever 19A, as if the player operated the production lever 19A. Although it was decided to perform such an effect that one of the symbols was derived, the timing to perform the effect may be any timing as long as the “second reach” is being performed. . Further, as the image for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A and the image for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A, only the image of the operation means may be displayed, and the message image may not be displayed. Alternatively, only the meter image may be displayed to display an image in which the gauge image is changed corresponding to the operation effective period. In this case, it can be said to display an image indicating that the operation means is operable.

(Third Specific Example of State Transition, and Eighth Specific Example of Fluctuation Pattern and Distribution of Operating Means of Fluctuating Pattern)
Next, with reference to FIG. 109, a third example of the state transition and a variation pattern and an eighth example of the allotment of the operation means according to the variation pattern will be described. In FIG. 109, description will be made on the assumption that “variation pattern 02” and “variation pattern 04” shown in FIG. 109 (B-1) are determined.

  First, FIG. 109A is a diagram showing transition of effects (state transition) displayed on the image display device 14. Specifically, it is configured by "variation start" in which the effect pattern starts to fluctuate, "reach" in which reach is formed, and "development reach" transitioning from "reach". In the reach performed in the "reach" period, a reach with a relatively low degree of expectation to the jackpot is executed, and temporarily stops a symbol (for example, "767") indicating a loss. After that, transition to reach performed in the period of “development reach”. In addition, the reach (for example, "special reach") performed in the period of "development reach" has a relatively higher expectation for jackpot than the reach (for example, "super reach") performed in the period of "reach" Reach is performed. In addition, depending on the determined special symbol fluctuation pattern, the loss is stopped by the reach performed in the period of "reach", and the pattern is also included to end the fluctuation without transitioning to the "development reach". When the symbol (for example, "767") indicating a loss is temporarily stopped, then it transitions to "Development reach" or becomes a final stop from the temporary stop, and does not transition to "Development reach" It is possible to make the player pay attention to the end.

  And in the image display apparatus 14, in the "development reach" after "reach", for example, the effect corresponding to the "special reach" is executed, and if the big hit is determined, the symbol indicating the big hit is displayed If it is determined that a loss has been determined, the symbol indicating the removal is derived. In the case of deriving one of the symbols, an image imitating the effect button 18A is displayed according to the fluctuation pattern, and an image (pressing the button!) Prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is displayed, There are cases where an image imitating the effect lever 19A is displayed, and an image for urging the operation of the effect lever 19A (a lever is released!) Is displayed. Note that the effect control board 102 sets the operation valid period of the operating means to be operated via the lamp control board 104. The operation valid period is the same as the contents described in FIG. 107, and may be set to the same time as the display time of the image imitating the operation means to be operated and the image prompting the operation, or set longer than that. It is assumed. That is, when deriving a symbol of either a jackpot or a loss, an image prompting any operation is displayed, and the player operates the operation means corresponding to the player, so that the player operates the operation means. In such a case, such an effect that a symbol of either a big hit or a loss is derived is performed (hereinafter referred to as "decision effect"). In addition, it is assumed that derivation | leading-out of one of symbols will be automatically displayed with progress of the operation effective period, when the operation means is not operated in the operation effective period. In the example of FIG. 109, an image imitating the effect button 18A is displayed, and after an image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is displayed, an image (sorry!) Indicating that the user has lost is displayed ( "Variation pattern 02") After displaying the image imitating the production lever 19A and displaying the image prompting the operation of the production lever 19A, display the image showing the big hit (big hit !!), 1 shows that the decoration member 17A is operated ("variation pattern 04").

  Next, FIG. 109 (B-1) is basically the same as (B-1) in FIG. 107 and FIG. 108, and the distribution is only partially different, so the description will be omitted. Next, FIG. 109 (B-2) corresponds to the fluctuation pattern (special symbol fluctuation pattern) in the low probability gaming state, the ratio of executing the operation effect of the effect button 18A in the determined effect, and the operation effect of the effect lever 19A. The relationship with the ratio to perform, and the working and non-working relationship of the movable body corresponding to the fluctuation pattern are shown. That is, it can be said that in the image display device 14, the relationship between the rate at which the image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is displayed and the rate at which the image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is displayed. The movable body refers to the first decorative member 17A.

  In "variation pattern 01 (loss)", the distribution for which the presentation button 18A is selected is "100/100", and the distribution for which the presentation lever 19A is selected is "0/100", The effect lever 19A is not selected. In addition, because of the fluctuation pattern of loss, the movable body remains inoperative. In addition, in the "variation pattern 02 (loss)", the distribution for which the effect button 18A is selected is "70/100", and the distribution for which the effect lever 19A is selected is "30/100". There is. In addition, because of the fluctuation pattern of loss, the movable body remains inoperative. In addition, “variation pattern 03 (per)” is “70/100” when the effect button 18A is selected, and “30/100” when the effect lever 19A is selected. There is. In addition, since it is a fluctuation pattern of the hit, the movable body operates on the front side of the image display device 14 as shown by the jackpot time of FIG. In addition, “variation pattern 04 (per)” is “0/100” when the effect button 18A is selected, and “100/100” when the effect lever 19A is selected. The effect button 18A is not selected. In addition, since it is a fluctuation pattern of the hit, the movable body operates on the front side of the image display device 14 as shown by the jackpot time of FIG. That is, in the decided effect, an image for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is displayed, and an image for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is displayed as compared to the case where the effect button 18A is operated, and the effect lever 19A is operated. The rate at which the movable body operates is higher. Note that the distribution value can be set to any value.

  As described above, in the determined effect, an image for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is displayed, and an image for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is displayed to operate the effect lever 19A as compared with the case where the effect button 18A is operated. By increasing the rate at which the movable body operates in the case, it is possible to focus attention on which of the operation means is displayed for prompting the operation in the determined effect. In addition, in the determined effect, when the effect urging the operation of the effect button 18A is performed, the operation effective period of the effect button 18A can be set, and the operation effective period of the effect lever 19A can also be set. However, in this case, the effect for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is not performed. That is, although the effect for prompting the operation only executes the effect for prompting the operation of any one operation means, any operation means is configured to be operable. Of course, the same thing may be performed while performing an effect that urges the operation of the effect lever 19A. By configuring in this manner, when a plurality of operation means are provided, the player can operate the operation means that the player desires to perform an operation, so that it is possible to further improve the fun of the game.

  In the third example of the state transition, the following changes can be made. That is, in FIG. 109, an image for prompting the operation is displayed between “change start” to “reach” and “reach” to “development reach”, and the production button 18A or the production lever 19A is operated. Good. Further, in this case, in the case of an image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A being displayed, compared to the case where an image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is displayed, the "decision effect" The rate at which the image prompting the operation is displayed may be increased. Further, as the image for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A and the image for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A, only the image of the operation means may be displayed, and the message image may not be displayed. Alternatively, only the meter image may be displayed to display an image in which the gauge image is changed corresponding to the operation effective period. In this case, it can be said to display an image indicating that the operation means is operable.

(The fourth example of the state transition, and the ninth example of the fluctuation pattern and the distribution of the operating means according to the fluctuation pattern)
Next, with reference to FIG. 110, a fourth example of the state transition, and a variation pattern and a ninth example of the allotment of the operation means according to the variation pattern will be described. In FIG. 110, description will be made on the assumption that “variation pattern 01” and “variation pattern 03” shown in FIG. 110 (B-1) are determined.

  First, FIG. 110A is a diagram showing transition of effects (state transition) displayed on the image display device 14. Specifically, the "decision effect" performed in the "variation start" in which the production design starts to fluctuate, the "reach" in which the reach is formed, the "super reach" transitioning from the "reach", and the "super reach" And is composed of In addition, since "determination effect" is the same as that of FIG. 109, description is abbreviate | omitted. In FIG. 110A, the movable body (first decorative member 17A) is actuated at the timing of transition from "reach" to "super reach", and the movable body (first decorative member 17A) is actuated. It is composed of cases where you do not let it happen. Therefore, the operation and non-operation of the movable body shown in FIG. 110 (B-2) described later, unlike FIG. 109, represent the operation and non-operation at the timing of transition from the above-mentioned “reach” to “super reach”. ing. In other words, in FIG. 110, as shown in FIG. 109, the operation of the movable body does not report a big hit, but reports the transition from “reach” to “super reach”, so Even if it is, the movable body may operate, and even if it has a fluctuation pattern of the hit, the movable body may be deactivated. In addition, basically, the degree of expectation for the jackpot is set higher when the movable body is actuated.

  Then, in the image display device 14, at the timing of transition from “reach” to “super reach”, an image (progress!) Indicating transition to “super reach” is displayed (in combination, the movable body operates) If there is a case where the movable body does not work) or "super reach" and the jackpot is determined, the symbol indicating the jackpot is derived, and the loss is determined To derive the symbol that shows the detachment. In addition, when deriving a symbol of either a big hit or a loss, an image imitating the effect button 18A is displayed according to the fluctuation pattern, and an image (press the button!) Prompting operation of the effect button 18A is displayed. There are two cases: one is to display an image imitating the effect lever 19A, and the other is to display an image prompting the user to operate the effect lever 19A (retract the lever!). Note that the effect control board 102 sets the operation valid period of the operating means to be operated via the lamp control board 104. The operation valid period is the same as the contents described in FIG. 107, and may be set to the same time as the display time of the image imitating the operation means to be operated and the image prompting the operation, or set longer than that. It is assumed. That is, when deriving one of the symbols, an image prompting any one of the operations is displayed, and the player operates the operation means corresponding to the player, as if the player operated the operation means. An effect as if any symbol of loss is derived is performed (as in FIG. 109, referred to as “decision effect”). In addition, it is assumed that derivation | leading-out of one of symbols will be automatically displayed with progress of the operation effective period, when the operation means is not operated in the operation effective period. In the example of FIG. 110, after displaying an image imitating the effect button 18A and displaying an image prompting the user to operate the effect button 18A, an image (sorry!) Indicating that the user has lost is displayed ( After displaying an image imitating the production lever 19A and displaying an image prompting the operation of the production lever 19A, an image showing a big hit (big hit !!) is displayed. 1 shows a state where the decorative member 17A is operated ("variation pattern 03").

  Next, FIG. 110 (B-1) is basically the same as (B-1) in FIGS. 107 to 109, and the description is omitted because the distribution is only partially different. Next, FIG. 110 (B-2) corresponds to the fluctuation pattern (special symbol fluctuation pattern) in the low probability gaming state, the ratio of executing the operation effect of the effect button 18A in the "decided effect" and the operation of the effect lever 19A It shows the relationship between the rate at which rendering is performed, and the operation / non-operation relationship of the movable body at the timing of transition from “reach” to “super reach”, corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. That is, it can be said that in the image display device 14, the relationship between the ratio at which the image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is displayed and the ratio at which the image prompting the operation of the operation lever 19A is displayed . The movable body refers to the first decorative member 17A.

  In "variation pattern 01 (loss)", the distribution for which the presentation button 18A is selected is "100/100", and the distribution for which the presentation lever 19A is selected is "0/100", The effect lever 19A is not selected. Moreover, the movable body at the time of reach transition is inoperative. Further, in the "variation pattern 02 (loss)", the distribution for which the effect button 18A is selected is "0/100", and the distribution for which the effect lever 19A is selected is "100/100". The effect button 18A is not selected. In addition, at the time of reach transition, the movable body is in operation. In addition, “variation pattern 03 (per)” is “100/100” for which the effect button 18A is selected, and “0/100” for which the effect lever 19A is selected. The production lever 19A is not selected. Moreover, the movable body at the time of reach transition is inoperative. In addition, “variation pattern 04 (per)” is “0/100” when the effect button 18A is selected, and “100/100” when the effect lever 19A is selected. The effect button 18A is not selected. In addition, at the time of reach transition, the movable body is in operation. That is, in the case of displaying the image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A in the “decided effect” and operating the effect lever 19A, displaying the image urging the operation of the effect button 18A and operating the effect button 18A It can be said that the rate at which the movable body operates at the time of reach transition is higher than in the case of. Note that the distribution value can be set to any value.

  As described above, in the “decided effect”, an image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is displayed, and when operating the effect lever 19A, an image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is displayed, and the effect button 18A is operated. By increasing the rate at which the movable body operates at reach transition time as compared to the case where the movable body is moved at the time of reach transition, it is predicted that the effect lever 19A can be operated in the subsequent "decided effect" at the time of reach transition It can be done. In addition, in the "decision effect", while performing an effect that urges the operation of the effect button 18A, the operation effective period of the effect button 18A can be set, and the operation effective period of the effect lever 19A can also be set. However, in this case, the effect for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is not performed. That is, although the effect for prompting the operation only executes the effect for prompting the operation of any one operation means, any operation means is configured to be operable. Of course, the same thing may be performed while performing an effect that urges the operation of the effect lever 19A. By configuring in this manner, when a plurality of operation means are provided, the player can operate the operation means that the player desires to perform an operation, so that it is possible to further improve the fun of the game.

  In the fourth example of the state transition, the following changes can be made. That is, in FIG. 110, an image for prompting the operation is displayed between “change start” to “reach” and “reach” to “development reach”, and the production button 18A or the production lever 19A is operated. Good. Further, when transitioning from "reach" to "super reach", the movable body may be operated by operating the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A. Further, the first decorative member 17A may be configured to be able to operate in a plurality of stages, and for example, it is possible to operate from the "1" stage to the "3" stage according to the operation stage. It may be suggested that the operation means operable at “1” be the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A. For example, when it is decided to operate the production button 18A in the “decided effect”, it is easy to select the operation up to the “1” stage, and in the “decided effect”, to operate the effect lever 19A. If determined, the operation up to the "3" stage may be made easy to select. In such a case, at the time of reach transition, it can be predicted that the production lever 19A can be operated in the subsequent "decided effect" depending on which stage the first decorative member 17A is operated. In addition, a movable body different from the first decorative member 17A is provided, and the "decision effect" is determined depending on whether the first decorative member 17A is operated only or the other movable body is operated only. It may be suggested that the operation means that can be operated is the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A. Even with such a configuration, similar effects can be obtained.

  Further, as the image for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A and the image for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A, only the image of the operation means may be displayed, and the message image may not be displayed. Alternatively, only the meter image may be displayed to display an image in which the gauge image is changed corresponding to the operation effective period. In this case, it can be said to display an image indicating that the operation means is operable.

(Fifth Specific Example of State Transition)
Next, a fifth example of the state transition will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 111, description will be made on the assumption that the “variation pattern 03” shown in FIG. 109 (B-1) is determined. In addition, FIG. 111 (A) and FIG. 111 (B) have shown the state transition in "the fluctuation pattern 03." The contents shown in FIG. 111 can be applied not only to the “variation pattern 03” but also to other variation patterns (for example, a variation pattern for operating the effect button 18A in the “operation effective period”). Moreover, the content shown to the following FIGS. 111-113 is applicable to FIGS. 107-110.

  First, in Case 1 of FIG. 111 (A), when “3S” of the operation effective period set in the “decided effect” in the “super reach” elapses, for example, the player operates the effect lever 19A. It represents. That is, in the "variation start", the effect pattern starts to be varied, and "reaching" is formed through "during variation". Then, transitioning from "reach" to "super reach", during "super reach", an image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is displayed on the image display device 14, and the image is displayed together with the image lever 19A. "Operation valid period" (for example, "5S") is set. That is, during the “super reach”, the effect control board 102 displays an image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A on the image display device 14 via the image control board 105, and the effect control board 102 During the reach, the effect lever 19A is activated via the lamp control board 104. Note that "activation" means that when the player operates the effect lever 19A, operation information is input to the effect control board 102 via the lamp control board 104. Then, when "3S" elapses during "5S" of the "operation effective period", the player operates the effect lever 19A, and the first decorative member 17A is activated on the front side of the image display device 14, The image display device 14 displays an image (big hit !!) indicating that the big hit has been made. That is, when the effect control board 102 validates the effect lever 19A, based on the fact that the operation information is input via the lamp control board 104, the first decorative member via the lamp control board 104. 17A is controlled, and the effect control board 102 controls the image control board 105 based on input of operation information via the lamp control board 104 when the effect lever 19A is activated. Control to display an image indicating that the jackpot has been achieved. In addition, the effect control board 102 displays, for example, an image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A in "decided effect", and when the effect lever 19A is activated, the effect button 18A is activated along with the activation of the effect lever 19A May be Further, for example, in the “decision effect”, when the image urging the operation of the effect button 18A is displayed and the effect button 18A is activated, the effect lever 19A may be activated along with the activation of the effect button 18A.

  Then, after the "operation effective period" has elapsed, the transition to the "standby period" is made. The “standby period” is, for example, the first decorative member 17A in the case where the operation is performed in “1S” of the “operation effective period” and in the case where the operation is performed in “3S” of the “operation effective period”. Since the operation timing of and the display timing of the image showing that the jackpot has become different are different, it is a period in which the book ends of the time until the “finalized display” described later is performed are made. For example, the length of the "waiting period" is different between the case where the operation is performed at "1S" of the "operation effective period" and the case where the operation is performed at "3S" of the "operation effective period". The "standby period" when the operation is performed at "1S" of the "valid period" is longer. In addition, as shown in FIG. 111 (B) described later, when the operation is not performed in the “operation effective period”, the operation of the first decorative member 17A and the jackpot occur with the elapse of the “operation effective period”. Since the display of the image indicating the operation is performed, the "standby period" after the "operation effective period" has the shortest length compared with the case where the operation is performed in the "operation effective period". In the "standby period", the image display device 14 displays the fluctuation of the effect pattern (for example, "777") and displays an image or the like indicating that it has become a big hit. Therefore, when the operation is performed in the “operation effective period” and when the operation is not performed in the “operation effective period”, the swing of the effect pattern (for example, “777”) displayed on the image display device 14 The period in which the variable display is performed is different from the period in which an image or the like indicating that the jackpot has been made is displayed. In addition, when an operation is performed in the “operation effective period”, a predetermined effect is performed in the “standby period”, and when an operation is not performed in the “operation effective period”, a predetermined effect is performed in the “standby period”. You may not do this. In addition, after the "waiting period", a "re-shifting period" of the rendering symbol is provided, and as a predetermined effect in the "waiting period", an effect of notifying the promotion expectation of the rendering symbol in the "re-changing period" is performed. It is also good. Here, "re-variation period", for example, when the probability variation jackpot is determined, in the production design, the "444" symbol or the like not corresponding to the probability variation jackpot is displayed once, and from the "444" symbol, the probability variation It is a time to perform the effect of whether or not to promote to the "777" symbol corresponding to the jackpot. As described above, the “operation is performed by providing the“ re-variation period ”after the“ waiting period ”and notifying the promotion expectation degree of the rendering pattern in the“ re-variation period ”as the predetermined effect in the“ waiting period ”. In the “effective period”, the player can motivate the player to operate the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A. In addition, when the "standby period" has passed, the "definite display" is displayed, and the effect pattern "777" changes from the fluctuation display to the stop display completely stopped.

  Next, in case 2 of FIG. 111 (B), the notification mode of the point where the player did not operate the effect lever 19A differs between case 1 of FIG. 111 (A) and the “operation effective period”. , Other points are common. That is, in FIG. 111 (B), as in FIG. 111 (A), the image display device 14 displays an image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A, and along with the display of the image, the “operation effective period” of the effect lever 19A. Indicates that the player did not operate the effect lever 19A despite setting D. In this case, when the "operation effective period" has elapsed, the operation of the first decorative member 17A and the display of an image indicating that the jackpot has been achieved are performed, and the operation is performed in the "operation effective period". Although the operation timing of the first decorative member 17A and the display timing of the image showing that it has become a big hit are different compared to the above, the notification mode of the big hit is the same as the case where the operation is performed in the “operation effective period”. . However, if the player does not operate the effect lever 19A in the "operation effective period", as described above, the "standby period" becomes short, so the predetermined effect in the "standby period" described above is not executed. It is supposed to be. Therefore, since both case 1 of FIG. 111A and case 2 of FIG. 111B are effect contents based on the “variation pattern 03”, basically, effects etc. performed on the image display device 14 etc. Is common, but the effect in the “standby period” after the “operation effective period” has elapsed is one when the operation is performed in the “operation effective period” and when the operation is not performed in the “operation effective period” It is supposed to be different.

(Sixth Specific Example of State Transition)
Next, a sixth specific example of state transition will be described using FIG. In FIG. 112, description will be made on the assumption that the “variation pattern 01” shown in FIG. 108 (B-1) is determined. FIGS. 112 (C) and 112 (D) both show state transitions in the “variation pattern 01”. The contents shown in FIG. 112 can be applied not only to the “variation pattern 01” but also to other variation patterns (for example, a variation pattern for operating the effect button 18A in the “operation valid period”). Further, FIG. 112 is different from FIG. 111 in whether it is a big hit or a loss, and the other points are common, so detailed description will be omitted.

  That is, in FIG. 112 (C), although "3S" in the "operation effective period" has elapsed, although the effect lever 19A is operated, the display of the image showing that the first decorative member 17A has become active and the big hit is performed. There is no display of an image (sorry!) Indicating that it has been lost. Further, in FIG. 112 (D), since the operation was not performed in the “operation effective period”, the display of an image (sorry!) Indicating that the user has lost since the “operation effective period” has elapsed is performed. There is. Then, after the subsequent "waiting period", the "finalized display" of the effect pattern "767" is performed. In the case of FIG. 112, as a predetermined effect in the "standby period", an effect of notifying the possibility of becoming a reverse jackpot may be performed. Here, when the jackpot is determined in advance, the "reverse jackpot" is changed from the display mode showing a loss to the display mode showing a big hit before becoming a "fixed display" after the "standby period". It is. With this configuration, as in FIG. 111, in the “operation effective period”, it is possible to motivate the player to operate the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A.

(Seventh Specific Example of State Transition)
Next, a seventh specific example of state transition will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 113 is a diagram showing a specific example of the predetermined effect performed in the “standby period” in FIG. 111 (A), so only points different from FIG. 111 (A) will be described.

  That is, in FIG. 113E, when “3S” in the “operation effective period” has elapsed, the effect lever 19A is operated to operate the first decorative member 17A and display an image indicating that the jackpot has become a predetermined one. Is displayed (a character image displayed only when a jackpot has been determined). The predetermined premier character image can be displayed only for the “operation valid period” or can be continuously displayed from the “operation valid period” to the “standby period”, or it can be “standby period”. You can also start the display after a while. As described above, by displaying a predetermined premiere character image only when the operation is performed in the "operation effective period", the player is willing to operate the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A in the "operation effective period". Can be Note that such a predetermined premier character image may be displayed, for example, with a probability of "1/2" when an operation is performed in the "operation effective period", or in the "operation effective period". When the operation is performed, it may be displayed without fail. In addition, when the operation is not performed in the “operation valid period”, the display may not be performed. Further, along with the display of a predetermined premier character image, the voice output device 15 may output a premier sound (a sound output only when a jackpot is determined). With this configuration, it is possible to further motivate the player to operate the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A in the “operation effective period”.

(The eighth example of state transition)
Next, an eighth example according to state transition will be described using FIG. Note that FIG. 114 (A) shows an effect mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern performed in the low probability gaming state, and FIG. 114 (B) shows an effect mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern played in the high probability gaming state There is. Further, FIG. 114 (A) shows one mode of effects performed in the low probability gaming state described in FIGS. 107 to 110 etc., and FIG. 114 (B) is not mentioned in FIGS. 107 to 110 etc. An aspect of an effect performed in the high probability gaming state is shown.

  That is, in FIG. 114 (A), as the effect mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern in the low probability gaming state, after the rendering symbol "starts fluctuation", reach is formed after "during fluctuation", and then "super reach" It shows that it developed into In this "super reach", it is temporarily shown that the symbol indicating a loss has been temporarily stopped ("767"), and then the first decorative member 17A is operated to develop into "special reach". Then, in the "special reach", it is shown that the effect that the characters face each other is performed, and after the production button 18A or the production lever 19A is operated, the jackpot symbol is derived.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 114 (B), as a production mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern in the high probability gaming state, after performing the reach formation, it is transitioned to the “special reach” without performing “super reach” in the low probability gaming state Is configured. That is, in FIG. 114 (A) and FIG. 114 (B), the contents of the other effects are the same except that a part is different in whether or not the intermediate “super reach” (including the development effect) is performed. In the high probability gaming state, it is desired to perform so-called right-handed gaming and shorten the time from the start of the symbol variation to deriving the result of whether or not the big hit is compared to the low probability gaming state. Therefore, in the example of FIG. 114 (B), the middle "super reach" is omitted, and after reaching formation, the game is escalated directly into the "special reach", thereby shortening the game digestion in the high probability gaming state. be able to.

(Other change example)
In the examples shown in FIGS. 101 to 114, the operation means is described in relation to the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A, but may be changed as follows.

  For example, although the effect button 18A is always at the operable position, the effect lever 19A may be configured to be operable when the effect lever 19A is moved to the operable position. Specifically, at the initial position, the effect lever 19A is accommodated in the gaming machine frame, and for example, when the jackpot is determined, the probability is high (when the loss is determined, for example) The player can operate the effect lever 19A by moving the effect lever 19A from the initial position to the operable position in a determined effect such as a special reach) with low probability. It should be noted that when the jackpot is determined, the effect lever 19A may be moved from the initial position to the operable position, and when the operation by the player is detected, the effect lever 19A may be vibrated. Further, instead of the vibration of the effect lever 19A, or along with the vibration of the effect lever 19A, a sound notifying a big hit may be output. That is, when the jackpot is determined, the effect lever 19A is more easily moved to the operable position (more likely to change from the first aspect to the second aspect) than when the loss is determined. When the jackpot is determined, and the effect lever 19A at the operable position is operated by the player, the effect lever 19A is likely to vibrate etc. (It is easy to change from the second mode to the third mode) It can be said. The third mode may be, for example, a mode in which a light emitting unit provided on the effect lever 19A emits light, or a mode in which a decorative section is driven to change. The lamp CPU 104a is assumed to be responsible for these controls. The effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A may be provided on the same member, or may be provided on separate and independent members.

  Further, only one of the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A may be provided. For example, when only the effect button 18A is provided, the effect button 18A can be switched to the first aspect and the second aspect, and for example, when the jackpot is determined, a high probability (one loss is determined Operation when the effect button 18A is in the first mode by switching the effect button 18A from the first mode to the second mode in a determined effect such as a special reach in a low probability). It can be operated by the operation in the second embodiment. In addition, when the jackpot is determined, the effect button 18A may be vibrated. Further, instead of the vibration of the effect button 18A, or along with the vibration of the effect button 18A, a sound notifying a big hit may be output. That is, when the jackpot is determined, the effect button 18A is more easily changed to the second mode than when the loss is determined, and when the jackpot is determined, the second mode is used. When a certain effect button 18A is operated by the player, it can be said that the effect button 18A is easily vibrated (it is easy to change from the second mode to the third mode). Note that, for example, it may be changed to the third aspect different from the operation aspect or the light emission aspect or the visual identification aspect performed in the second aspect. Specifically, the vibration mode of the effect button 18A changes stepwise according to the gaming state, such as from the first mode to the second mode, the third mode, the fourth mode, etc. It may be one, or the variable means such as the shape, the light emission, the rotation, the drive method may be changed stepwise according to the game state. By thus changing the effect stepwise according to the gaming state, the player's interest can be improved. The lamp CPU 104a is assumed to be responsible for these controls.

  ◆ As described above, the gaming machine Y can be operated by the player, and the second state is different from the first state (non-protruding (or non-vibrating, blue, etc.)) and the first state. Operating means (effect button (or operating lever or the like)) which can be changed to (protrusion (or vibration, red etc.)) and operating means for operating the operating means are operated during an effective state of the operating means And the effect control means (sub CPU) for executing a predetermined effect based on the operation control state is an operation effective state for performing an operation promotion notification prompting the player to operate the operation means In the first operation valid state, the operation means is set to the first state or the second state, and in the second operation valid state where the operation prompting is not performed, the operation means is set to the first state. I am trying not to be in the second state

  As described above, the gaming machine Y is set to the state of the operation means in the first operation valid state in which the operation promotion notice for prompting the player to operate the operation means and in the second operation valid state in which the operation promotion notice is not performed. It offers a variety of different effects.

  In addition, as described above, the gaming machine Y is capable of being operated by the player, the first operation means, the second operation means different from the first operation means, and the first operation means or the second operation means A game machine comprising a presentation control means (sub-CPU) for executing a predetermined effect based on the operation of the first operation means or the second operation means during an operation effective state in which an operation is made effective. The control means performs an operation promotion notification for prompting the player to perform the operation to the first operation means or the second operation means. In the first operation effective state in which the control means is in the operation effective state, the first operation means or the second operation means Based on the operation being performed, the predetermined operation according to the operation is performed, and the operation is performed on the first operation means in the second operation valid state where the operation prompting is not performed. Based on the operation according to Run the effect, be operated for the second operating means is not to perform a predetermined effect corresponding to the operation.

  As described above, the gaming machine Y executes predetermined effects in the first operation valid state in which the operation promotion notification for prompting the player to operate the operation means and the second operation valid state in which the operation promotion notification is not performed. It provides a variety of effects that use different operation means to do this.

  ◆ Also, as described above, the gaming machine Y can be operated by the player, and is in the second state (protrusion different from the first state (non-protrusion (or non-vibration, blue, etc.)) and the first state. (Or vibration, red, etc.)) and effect control means for executing a predetermined effect based on the operation means being operated during the operation valid state in which the operation means for changing the operation means is enabled (A sub-CPU), wherein the effect control means is an operation effective state for performing an operation promotion notification for prompting the player to operate the operation means while the game effect relating to the game is being executed. In the operation enable state, the operation means is set to the first state or the second state, and in the second operation enable state which is the operation enable state in the standby state where the game effect is not performed, the operation means is set to the first state , Restrict to the second state.

  In this manner, the gaming machine Y performs a first operation valid state in which an operation promotion notification for prompting the player to operate the operation means during execution of a game effect related to the game and a standby state in which the game effect is not executed. A variety of effects are provided in which the state of the operation means is different in the second operation effective state in the middle.

  In addition, as described above, the gaming machine Y is capable of being operated by the player, the first operation means, the second operation means different from the first operation means, and the first operation means or the second operation means A game machine comprising an effect control means (sub-CPU) for executing a predetermined effect based on the operation of the first operation means or the second operation means during an operation effective state in which the operation is effective. In the first operation effective state, the effect control means performs an operation promotion notification for prompting the player to operate the first operation means or the second operation means during execution of the game effect relating to the game. (1) A predetermined effect corresponding to the operation is performed based on the operation performed on the first operation unit or the second operation unit, and the second operation operation is in the standby state where the game effect is not performed. In the operation valid state, the first operating means Based on that the operation against executes a predetermined effect corresponding to the operation, be operated for the second operating means, limits to perform a predetermined effect corresponding to the operation.

  In this manner, the gaming machine Y performs a first operation valid state in which an operation promotion notification for prompting the player to operate the operation means during execution of a game effect related to the game and a standby state in which the game effect is not executed. A variety of effects are provided in which the operation means used to execute the predetermined effect is different in the second operation effective state in the middle.

  ◆ In addition, as described above, the gaming machine Y determines whether or not to execute the special game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the start condition, and the special game is performed by the determination means (main CPU) Is determined to be executed, the special game control means (main CPU) for executing the special game, and the player can operate, and in the first state (non-protrusion (or non-vibration (blue, etc.)); Based on the determination result of the operation means (effect button (or operation lever or the like)) which can be changed to the second state (protrusion (or vibration, red etc.)) different from the first state, and the judgment result by the judgment means The gaming machine includes a production control means (sub-CPU) for performing a fluctuation production using a production pattern for notifying, wherein the production control means is predetermined based on operation of the operation means in the fluctuation production. Can perform the production of There is a predetermined effect, the first effect performed by the operation on the operation means of the first state, the second effect performed by the operation on the operation means of the second state, and the operation of the first state or the second state The third effect in the fluctuation effect to be executed based on the fact that the third effect to be executed by the operation to the means is included and the determination means performs the special game is determined to be the first state in the third effect The second state is set to be higher than the second state.

  Thus, the gaming machine Y can increase the interest of the player in the game by changing the state of the operation means used when executing the third effect at a rate according to the determination result by the determination means. .

  Further, as described above, the gaming machine Y determines the special game by the determination means (main CPU) which determines whether or not to execute the special game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the start condition. By being determined to be executed, special game control means (main CPU) for executing a special game, first operation means operable by the player, and second operation means different from the first operation means The gaming machine includes a presentation control means (sub-CPU) for performing variation presentation using a presentation pattern for notifying a determination result based on the determination result by the determination means, wherein the presentation control means is for variation presentation A predetermined effect can be executed based on the operation of the first operation means or the second operation means, and the first effect executed based on the operation on the first operation means can be performed on the predetermined effect. 2 operators And the third effect performed by the operation to the first operation means or the second operation means are included based on that it is determined that the special game is to be executed by the determination means In the third effect in the fluctuation effect to be executed, the second operation means is selected at a higher rate than the first operation means.

  As described above, the gaming machine Y may increase the interest of the player in the game by making the selection ratio of the operation means used when executing the third effect different according to the determination result by the determination means. it can.

  ◆ In addition, as described above, the gaming machine Y determines whether or not to execute the special game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the start condition, and the special game is performed by the determination means (main CPU) Is determined to execute a special game control means (main CPU) that executes a special game, a first operation means that can be operated by the player, and a second operation means different from the first operation means And a presentation control means (sub-CPU) that performs variation presentation using a presentation pattern for notifying a determination result based on the determination result by the determination means, wherein the presentation control means is a variation presentation Perform a predetermined effect based on the operation of the first operation means or the second operation means in the operation promotion effect that urges the operation of the first operation means or the second operation means in The operation of the first operation type or the operation of the second operation type different from the first operation type is urged as the operation on the means, and the operation of the third operation type or the third operation as the operation on the second operation means The ratio of prompting the operation of the fourth operation type different from the operation of the type and prompting the operation of the first operation type and the ratio of prompting the operation of the second operation type are different, and the ratio of prompting the operation of the third operation type , And the rate of prompting the operation of the fourth operation type is different.

  As described above, when the game machine Y executes a predetermined effect based on the operation of the first operation means or the second operation means in the operation promotion effect, the operation to the first operation means in the operation promotion effect As the operation of the first operation type and the operation of the second operation type are urged at different rates, and the operation of the third operation type and the operation of the fourth operation type are urged at different rates as the operation to the second operation means Provide various operation promotion effects.

  Then, in the operation promotion effect, there is an operation promotion effect which urges only the operation of the first operation type as an operation on the first operation means, and urges only the operation of the fourth operation type as an operation on the second operation means.

  ◆ Also, as described above, the gaming machine Y determines the special game by the determination means (main CPU) that determines whether or not to execute the special game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the start condition. A special game control means (main CPU) that executes a special game by being determined to execute, and a specific game for setting a specific game state advantageous to the player after the end of the special game, as compared to the normal game state Based on the determination result by the state setting means (main CPU), the operation means (for example, effect button) that can be operated by the player, and the variation effect using the effect pattern for notifying the determination result A game machine comprising an effect control means (sub-CPU), wherein the effect control means operates the operation means in an operation effective state in which the operation on the operation means in the fluctuation effect is effective. Based on the predetermined effect is performed, at a rate higher than the first period in the specific gaming state after the end of the special game, in the second period after the first period in the specific gaming state, during the variable effect Set the operation enable status to.

  As described above, the gaming machine Y can provide a highly entertaining effect that the effect using the operation means increases as the specific gaming state after the end of the special game continues.

  This operation means can be changed to the first state (non-protrusion (or non-vibration, blue etc.)) and the second state (protrusion (or vibration, red etc.)) different from the first state. The means sets an operation effective state in which the operation means is brought into the second state in the second period at a rate higher than the first period.

  As described above, the gaming machine Y can provide a highly entertaining effect that the effect using the operation means, which becomes the second state, increases as the specific gaming state after the end of the special game continues.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the presence determination of the specific effect is determined using the specific effect determination tables of FIGS. 52 to 53. In this determination, it is more easily determined that the jackpot is executed than in the case of the loss, and it is more easily determined that the specified effect is executed as the reach jackpot degree of expectation is higher. Then, in the case of executing the specific effect, it is determined the vibration speed of the effect button 18A, the presence or absence of pseudo sound output of the vibration sound of the effect button 18A, and the presence or absence of output of the image of the effect button 18A.

  The vibration speed of the effect button 18A in the specific effect determines whether the effect button 18A is vibrated at high speed or low speed using the specific effect vibration speed determination table of FIGS. 54 to 55. It is more easily determined that the effect button 18A vibrates at a higher speed in the case of a big hit than in the case of a loss, and it is more easily determined that the effect button 18A vibrates at a higher speed as the reach effect is higher. Further, the presence / absence of pseudo sound output of vibration sound of the effect button 18A in the specific effect is determined using the specific effect sound output determination table of FIGS. It is easy to determine that the case of the big hit is more likely to output the pseudo sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 18A than in the case of a loss, and also the pseudo sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 18A as the reach effect is higher It is easy to decide to output. Furthermore, the presence or absence of the output of the image of the effect button 18A in the specific effect is determined using the specific effect image output determination table of FIGS. It is more easily determined that the image of the effect button 18A is output in the case of the big hit than in the case of a loss, and it is easy to be determined that the image of the effect button 18A is output as the reach effect is high.

  As described above, in the case of performing the specific effect, either the vibration speed of the effect button 18A, the presence or absence of pseudo sound output of the effect button 18A vibrating, the presence or absence of the display of the image of the effect button 18A, and FIG. As shown, the jackpot expectation is different depending on the combination. As a result, the player can be notified of the jackpot expectation in multiple stages, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, in the specific effect, the jackpot expectation is determined using the vibration speed of the effect button 18A, the presence or absence of pseudo sound output of the effect button 18A vibrating, and the presence or absence of the display of the image of the effect button 18A. Although it is suggested, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the size of the image of the effect button 18A to be displayed, the difference between 2D and 3D, the difference in color, the difference in the size of the sound to be output, etc. may be used. Further, the sound output in the specific effect may not be a pseudo sound of the vibrating effect button 18A, but may be a sound effect specific to the specific effect, a specific speech, or the like. Further, in the case of performing a specific effect, plural types of voices may be output, and the jackpot expectation may be suggested according to the type of the voice to be output.

  Further, instead of the vibration of the effect button 18A, a specific effect may be performed by the vibration of the effect lever 19A, or the effect button 18A does not vibrate, but the effect button 18A is lighted or blinked by the LED incorporated in the effect button 18A. It may be an effect that makes 18A appear to be operating. In addition, a specific effect may be performed by moving an object provided inside the effect button 18A, and the jackpot expectation may be suggested by the presence or absence of the operation of the object or the speed of the operation. Further, a specific effect may be performed by rotating the effect button 18A, and the jackpot expectation may be suggested by the presence or absence of the rotation, the rotational speed, and the rotational direction. Further, the specific effect may be performed by the effect button 18A protruding.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the case of the low probability gaming state and the non-time-short gaming state (when in the effect mode A) which is the normal gaming state, as shown in FIG. 44 to FIG. The rate at which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the button 18A is higher than the rate at which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A, which is the second operation means, is performed. On the other hand, in the case of the high probability gaming state and the short time gaming state (when in the effect mode B to D) which is the specific gaming state, as shown in FIGS. 46 to 51, the operation of the effect lever 19A which is the second operation means. The rate at which the operation prompting prompting is performed is higher than the rate at which the operation prompting prompting is performed to prompt the operation of the effect button 18A which is the first operation means. Therefore, in the low probability gaming state and the non time saving gaming state, the player frequently uses the effect button 18A, and in the high probability gaming state and the short time gaming state, the player frequently uses the rendering lever 19A. . As a result, it is possible to give the player the pleasure selected by the operation means according to the gaming state, and to improve the interest of the game.

  In the present embodiment, according to the game state, the ratio of performing operation prompting for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is different from the ratio of performing operation prompting for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A. For example, in the low probability gaming state and the non time saving gaming state, only the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the effect button 18A is performed without performing the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the effect lever 19A, or the high probability game In the state and the time saving game state, only the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the effect lever 19A may be performed without performing the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the effect button 18A. Further, for example, in the low probability gaming state and the non-short play state, the operation promoting notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A and the operation promoting notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A are performed, but in the high probability gaming state and the short time gaming state Alternatively, without performing the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A, only the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the effect lever 19A may be performed.

  In the present embodiment, the effect button 18A is used as the first operation means, and the effect lever 19A is used as the second operation means. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect lever 19A is used as the first operation means. The effect button 18A may be used as the operation means. Further, a button for effect different from the effect button 18A, a touch panel, a touch sensor, an infrared sensor, a proximity sensor, a motion sensor or the like may be used as the first operation means or the second operation means.

  In the present embodiment, the player frequently uses the effect button 18A during the low probability gaming state and the non-time-short playing state, and the player uses the effect lever 19A in the high probability gaming state and the time-saving game state. The frequency of doing this is increasing. However, the frequency of appearance of effects using the effect button 18A is different from the appearance frequency of effects using the effect lever 19A between the first half period and the second half period of high probability gaming state and time saving gaming state, for example. You may make it In the present embodiment, for example, when in the effect mode B, the ratio at which the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the effect button 18A, which is the first operation means, is performed to urge the operation of the effect lever 19A, which is the second operation means. The ratio for performing the operation promotion notification for promoting the operation of the production lever 19A is higher than the ratio for performing the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the presentation button 18A, which is higher than the ratio for performing the operation promotion notification and in the production mode C. Do. Furthermore, when in the effect mode D, the ratio of performing the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the effect lever 19A is made higher than in the effect mode C. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game when in the high probability gaming state and the time saving gaming state.

  In addition, it is possible to execute reach effect using only the effect button 18A and reach effect using only the effect lever 19A, and in the low probability gaming state and the non time saving gaming state, the execution frequency of reach effect using only the effect button 18A is In the high, high probability gaming state and the short time gaming state, the execution frequency of reach effect using only the effect lever 19A may be increased. In addition, there are effects dedicated to the production button 18A and effects dedicated to the production lever 19A in the production, and during the low probability gaming state and the non-time-short gaming state, the appearance frequency of the effects dedicated to the production button 18A is high, and the high probability gaming state and In the short time game state, the appearance frequency of the effect dedicated to the effect lever 19A may be increased.

  In addition, in the operation promotion notification that urges the operation of the production button 18A, it is also possible to execute “promptly hit a button continuously” and the like, and production that urges multiple operations of the production button 18A, but in this case, the operation promotion notification Count as 1 time. For example, the player uses the effect button 18A if the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the effect lever 19A is performed twice even if the operation promotion notification for urging the effect button 18A to be operated five times is performed once. It can be said that the frequency with which the effect lever 19A is used is higher than the frequency with which it is performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, although there are two operation means of the effect button 18A as the first operation means and the effect lever 19A as the second operation means, the present invention is not limited to this. It may have various types of operating means. When three or more types of operation means are provided, the frequency of use of each operation means (the appearance ratio of the operation promotion notification prompting the operation of each operation means) may be made different depending on the gaming state.

  In this embodiment, the low probability gaming state and the non time saving gaming state as the normal gaming state, and the high probability gaming state and the time saving gaming state as the specific gaming state can be set, but not limited thereto. A gaming state such as a probability gaming state and a short time gaming state or a high probability gaming state and a non-time short gaming state may correspond to the specific gaming state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is a low probability gaming state and a non normal gaming state and a non gaming state than in the high probability gaming state and the time saving gaming state which is a specific gaming state. In the case of the time saving game state, the rate of execution is higher. That is, in the case of the high probability gaming state and the short time gaming state, the ratio of performing the operation promotion notification prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is lower than in the low probability gaming state and the non time short gaming state which is the normal gaming state. . This makes it possible to improve the effect of the effect using the effect button 18A.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is a high probability gaming state which is a specific gaming state and a specific gaming state as compared with the low probability gaming state and a non time saving gaming state which is a normal gaming state. In the case of the time saving game state, the rate of execution is higher. That is, in the case of the high probability gaming state and the short time gaming state, the ratio of performing the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the production lever 19A is higher than in the low probability gaming state and the non time short gaming state which is the normal gaming state. . This makes it possible to improve the rendering effect of the rendering using the rendering lever 19A.

  In the gaming machine Y, when the main CPU 101a executes a big hit game, after the big hit game is over, a specific game advantageous to the player in comparison with the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state and non-short time playing state). It sets the state (high probability gaming state and time saving gaming state), and in the specific gaming state, the so-called specific gaming state is terminated when the number of judgments of big hit determination (number of executable times of special symbol display) reaches 84 times. It explained as "ST machine". However, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the “ST machine”, and the high probability state continues (or, for example, the 10000 high probability gaming state continues) until the next jackpot is won. It may be a gaming machine having a "big hit" and a "normal hit" in which the gaming state after the big hit game is a low probability gaming state.

  When the gaming machine Y is such a gaming machine, a period in which the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol after the big hit game is 1 to 99 is set as the above-mentioned "first period", and the big hit game A period in which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol later is 100 or more may be set as the above-mentioned "second period". In this case, the sub CPU 102a sets the operation effective period during the fluctuation effect in the “second period” at a rate higher than the “first period”.

  In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and can also be used for a baseball ball gaming machine and an arrange ball gaming machine.

<Other Inventions Etc. Described in the Above Embodiments>
Hereinafter, other inventions etc. which were described in the said embodiment are described.
The other inventions described below include those which can be established independently as inventions, and also those which can be realized in combination with other inventions and the like.

  (A) An operation means which can be operated by the player and which can be changed to a first state and a second state different from the first state, and an operation effective to make the operation to the operation means effective It is a gaming machine provided with an effect control means for performing a predetermined effect based on the operation means being operated during a state, wherein the effect control means is an operation for prompting the player to operate the operation means. In the first operation valid state, which is the operation valid state in which the promotion notification is performed, the operation means is set to the first state or the second state, and the second operation is the operation valid state in which the operation promotion notification is not performed. A gaming machine characterized in that, in the valid state, the operating means is set to the first state but not set to the second state.

  (B) A first operation means operable by the player, a second operation means different from the first operation means, and an operation for validating the operation on the first operation means or the second operation means A game machine comprising effect control means for executing a predetermined effect based on the operation of the first operation means or the second operation means during an effective state, wherein the effect control means is for the player. In the first operation valid state, which is the operation valid state in which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation to the first operation means or the second operation means is performed, the operation is performed on the first operation means or the second operation means Operation is performed on the first operation means in the second operation valid state, which is the operation valid state in which the predetermined effect corresponding to the operation is performed and the operation prompting notification is not performed based on To the operation based on Run the predetermined effect Flip was the be the operation on the second operation means, gaming machine characterized in that it does not perform a predetermined effect corresponding to the operation.

  (C) When the start condition is satisfied, it is determined that the special game determination means performs determination of whether to control the special game advantageous to the player or not and the special game determination means performs the special game determination means. And the second game control means for executing the control of the special game, the first operation means operable by the player, and the second operation means operable by the player and different from the first operation means. The operation effect control means for controlling the operation effect for urging the operation of the first operation means and the second operation means, the normal gaming state, or the specific gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state State control means for controlling the operation of the first operation means, wherein the operation effect control means urges the operation of the first operation means when the game state control means controls the game in the normal game state The proportion of directing is Note: If the game state control means is controlling the game in the specific gaming state, the operation effect for promoting the operation of the second operation means is higher than the ratio for performing the operation effect for prompting the operation of the second operation means. A game machine characterized in that the rate of performing the step is higher than the rate of performing an operation effect for prompting the user to operate the first operation means.

  (D) When the start condition is satisfied, it is determined that the special game determination means performs determination of whether to perform control of the special game advantageous to the player, and the special game determination means performs the special game determination means. And the second game control means for executing the control of the special game, the first operation means operable by the player, and the second operation means operable by the player and different from the first operation means. The operation effect control means for controlling the operation effect for urging the operation of the first operation means and the second operation means, the normal gaming state, or the specific gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state State control means for controlling the game state control means, and when the game state control means controls the game in the specific game state, the operation effect control means controls the game state control means in the normal game state Control the game with And than is, in the ratio to perform an operation effect to promote the operation of the first operating means is low, the gaming machine, characterized in that.

  (E) When the start condition is satisfied, it is determined that the special game determination means performs determination of whether to control the special game advantageous to the player or not and the special game determination means performs the special game determination means. And the second game control means for executing the control of the special game, the first operation means operable by the player, and the second operation means operable by the player and different from the first operation means. The operation effect control means for controlling the operation effect for urging the operation of the first operation means and the second operation means, the normal gaming state, or the specific gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state State control means for controlling the game state, and the effect control means is in the normal game state when the game state control means controls the game in the specific game state. Control the game Than when you are, game machines proportion to operate effect urging operation of the second operating means is high, characterized in that.

<The technical idea that can be grasped from the above embodiment is as follows. >

  ◆ (A) The first operation means operable by the player, the second operation means operable by the player and different from the first operation means, the normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state are different. It is possible to execute game state control means for controlling a game state having a specific game state, an operation effect for urging the operation of the first operation means, and an operation effect for urging the operation of the second operation means. The first variation effect can be executed when the normal gaming state is controlled, and the second variation effect different from the first variation effect can be executed when the specific gaming state is controlled A control unit is provided, and when the first variation effect is executed in the normal gaming state, the effect control means is more than when the second variation effect is executed in the specific gaming state, Prompting operation of the first operation means Easy to create production is performed, characterized in that. As described above, in the normal gaming state (for example, the low probability gaming state), the effect for promoting the operation of the first operation means (for example, the effect button 18A) is selected rather than the specific gaming state (for example, the high probability gaming state) Because it is easy to do, it is possible to improve the interest.

  ◆ (b) The first operation means operable by the player, the second operation means operable by the player and different from the first operation means, the normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state are different. It is possible to execute game state control means for controlling a game state having a specific game state, an operation effect for urging the operation of the first operation means, and an operation effect for urging the operation of the second operation means. The first variation effect can be executed when the normal gaming state is controlled, and the second variation effect different from the first variation effect can be executed when the specific gaming state is controlled A control means is provided, and the effect control means, when executing the second variation effect in the specific gaming state, is more than when performing the first variation effect in the normal gaming state, Prompting operation of the first operation means It may be a high frequency of execution of work performance, characterized in that. As described above, in the specific gaming state (for example, high probability gaming state), an effect that urges the operation of the first operation means (for example, effect lever 19A) is more than the normal gaming state and (for example, low probability gaming state) Since it is easy to select, it is possible to improve the interest, and, since the effect using the first operation means is the characteristic effect in the specific gaming state, it is possible to particularly enhance the interest.

  ◆ (C) When the start condition is satisfied, the special game determination means for determining whether or not to play a special game advantageous to the player, the first operation means operable by the player, and the player can operate Game state control means for controlling a game state having a second operation means different from the first operation means, a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state different from the normal gaming state; The first control means is provided with effect control means capable of executing an operation effect for urging the operation of the operation means and an operation effect for urging the operation of the second operation means. In the second aspect different from the aspect of the present invention, the effect control means is not controlled to the specific game state when the normal game state is controlled, rather than being controlled to the specific game state. 1) The frequency of execution of operation effects that urge the operation of the operation means is high It may, when executing the special game may be the first operating means from the first embodiment tends to change to the second aspect, characterized in that. As described above, in the normal gaming state (for example, the low probability gaming state), effects related to the first operation means (effect button 18A) are more likely to occur than the specific gaming state (for example, the high probability gaming state). Because it is easy to change the first operation means from the first mode (for example, the normal state) to the second mode (for example, the protruding state) when it is determined that the game control is to be performed (when winning), The interest of the game can be improved.

  ◆ (d) Special game judgment means for judging whether or not to play a special game advantageous to the player when the start condition is satisfied, the first operation means operable by the player, and the player can operate Game state control means for controlling a game state having a second operation means different from the first operation means, a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state different from the normal gaming state; The game control apparatus further comprises effect control means capable of executing an operation effect for urging the operation of the operation means and an operation effect for urging the operation of the second operation means, and the second operation means includes the first aspect from the first aspect. In the second aspect different from the aspect of the aspect, the effect control means, when being controlled to the specific gaming state, rather than when being controlled in the normal gaming state, An operation effect to urge the operation of the second operation means is executed or Ku, wherein when it is determined to perform the special game is the second operating means easily varied in the second embodiment from the first embodiment, wherein the. As described above, in the specific gaming state (for example, the high probability gaming state), effects relating to the second operation means (for example, the effect lever 19A) are more likely to occur than the normal gaming state (for example, the low probability gaming state) When it is determined that the special game control is to be performed (for example, when winning), the second operation means is changed from the first aspect (for example, normal state) to the second aspect (for example, vibration state) Because it is easy to do, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  ◆ (e) When the start condition is satisfied, the special game determination means for determining whether or not to play the special game advantageous to the player, the first operation means operable by the player, and the player can operate Game state control means for controlling a game state having a second operation means different from the first operation means, a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state different from the normal gaming state; The game control apparatus further comprises effect control means capable of executing an operation effect for urging the operation of the operation means and an operation effect for urging the operation of the second operation means, and the second operation means includes the first aspect from the first aspect. In the second aspect different from the aspect of the aspect, the effect control means is more than the operation effect for prompting the operation of the first operation means when the special game state is controlled. It is easy to execute an operation effect that urges the operation of the second operation means , If the it is determined to perform the special game, the second operation means from the first embodiment tends to change to the second aspect, characterized in that. Thus, in the specific gaming state (for example, high probability gaming state), the operation of the second operating means (for example, the effect lever 19A) rather than the effect for prompting the operation of the first operating means (for example, the effect button 18A) If it is determined that the special game control is to be performed (for example, when the winning is won), the second operation means is from the first aspect (for example, the normal state) to the second aspect (for example, the normal state) For example, since it is easy to change to the vibration state, the interest of the game can be improved.

  (F) The first operating means operable by the player, the second operating means operable by the player and different from the first operating means, the normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state are different. It is possible to execute game state control means for controlling a game state having a specific game state, an operation effect for urging the operation of the first operation means, and an operation effect for urging the operation of the second operation means. The first variation effect can be executed when the normal gaming state is controlled, and the second variation effect different from the first variation effect can be executed when the specific gaming state is controlled A control means is provided, and the effect control means, when executing the second variation effect in the specific gaming state, is more than when performing the first variation effect in the normal gaming state, Prompting operation of the second operation means The execution frequency of the performance effect may be high, and when the operation effect for urging the operation of the second operation means is performed, any operation of the first operation means and the second operation means is enabled. It is characterized by Thus, in addition to the second operation means, the operation of the first operation means (for example, the effect button 18A) is performed even if only the operation effect for prompting the operation of the second operation means (for example, the effect lever 19A) is performed. Since it becomes effective, the player can play a game using the operation means which is easy to operate among the plurality of operation means, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  ◆ (G) special game determination means (for example, the main CPU 101a) that determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player when the start condition is satisfied, and a first operation means (the main CPU 101a operable by the player) For example, an effect button 18A), a second operation means (for example, effect lever 19A) different from the first operation means, which is operable by the player, and an operation effect for prompting the operation of the first operation means, Operation effect control means (for example, sub CPU 102a) for controlling an operation effect for prompting operation of the second operation means, and fluctuation display means (for example, image display device 14) for fluctuation display based on the result of the determination; And a reach effect control unit (for example, a sub CPU 102a) for controlling reach effect based on the result of the determination, and the operation effect control unit is configured to execute the variable display after the variable display is performed. Before running the Chi effect, compared after execution of the reach demonstration, the first operating means is constructed easy to perform an operation effect to promote operation, characterized in that. Thus, before the execution of the reach effect, the ratio at which the effect button 18A is selected is made higher than when the effect lever 19A is selected, and after the effect of the reach effect, the effect button 18A is not selected. By increasing the ratio at which the effect lever 19A is selected, it is possible to make it easy for the player to grasp which operation means is in a phase of operating when a plurality of operation means are provided.

  ◆ (h) Special game determination means (for example, the main CPU 101a) that determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player when the start condition is satisfied, and a first operation means (for the player) For example, an effect button 18A), a second operation means (for example, effect lever 19A) different from the first operation means, which is operable by the player, and an operation effect for prompting the operation of the first operation means, The effect control means (for example, sub CPU102a) which controls the operation effect which urges the operation of the second operation means and (for example, sub CPU102a), the effect control means can execute the specific effect based on the result of the determination, the specific After the execution of the effect, it may be easier to execute the operation effect for prompting the user to operate the second operation means than before the execution of the specific effect. As described above, before the execution of the specific effect, the ratio at which the effect button 18A is selected is increased rather than the effect lever 19A being selected, and after the execution of the specific effect, the effect button 18A is not selected. By increasing the ratio at which the effect lever 19A is selected, it is possible to make it easy for the player to grasp which operation means is in a phase of operating when a plurality of operation means are provided.

  ◆ (R) Special game determination means (for example, the main CPU 101a) that determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player when the start condition is satisfied, and first operation means (for the player) For example, an effect button 18A), a second operation means (for example, effect lever 19A) different from the first operation means, which is operable by the player, and an operation effect for prompting the operation of the first operation means, An effect control unit (for example, a sub CPU 102a) for controlling an operation effect for prompting an operation of the second operation unit; and the effect control unit can execute a specific effect based on a result of the determination, and the specification If the first specified effect and the second specified effect performed after the execution of the first specified effect can be executed as the effects, and the first specified effect is executed, the second specified effect is executed. The When compared with, it may easily perform an operation effect to promote the operation of the first operating means, characterized in that. As described above, in the first specific effect, the ratio in which the effect button 18A is selected is made higher than in the case where the effect lever 19A is selected, and in the second specific effect, the effect is produced rather than the effect button 18A being selected. By increasing the rate at which the lever 19A is selected, it is possible to make it easy for the player to grasp which operation means is in the operation phase when a plurality of operation means are provided.

  ◆ (u) special game determination means (for example, the main CPU 101a) that determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player when the start condition is satisfied, and a first operation means (for the player) For example, an effect button 18A), a second operation means (for example, effect lever 19A) different from the first operation means, which is operable by the player, and an operation effect for prompting the operation of the first operation means, An effect control unit (for example, a sub CPU 102a) for controlling an operation effect for prompting an operation of the second operation unit; and the effect control unit can execute a specific effect based on a result of the determination, and the specification As the effect, it is possible to execute the first specific effect and the second specific effect performed after the execution of the first specific effect, and when the second specific effect is being executed, the first specific effect is executed. The As compared to the case, there may easily perform the operation effect urging operation of the second operating means, characterized in that. As described above, in the first specific effect, the ratio in which the effect button 18A is selected is made higher than in the case where the effect lever 19A is selected, and in the second specific effect, the effect is produced rather than the effect button 18A being selected. By increasing the rate at which the lever 19A is selected, it is possible to make it easy for the player to grasp which operation means is in the operation phase when a plurality of operation means are provided.

  ◆ (l) First operation means (for example, effect button 18A) operable by the player, and first operation detection means (for example, operation detection switch 18a) for detecting that the first operation means is operated A second operation means (for example, an effect lever 19A) different from the first operation means, which is operable by the player, and a second operation detection means (for example, the second operation means for detecting that the second operation means is operated) An effect detection unit (for example, a sub CPU 102a) for controlling an operation detection switch 19a), an operation effect prompting the operation of the first operation unit, and an operation effect prompting the operation of the second operation unit; The movable means is movable based on the detection by the movable means (for example, the first decorative member 17A) movable from the position to the second position and the first operation detection means or the second operation detection means. First A movable control unit (for example, a lamp CPU 104a) capable of movement control from a position to a second position; and the movable control unit controls an operation effect for prompting an operation of the second operation unit to perform the detection In this case, the movable means is controlled so as to be easily moved from the first position to the second position as compared to the case where the operation effect for prompting the operation of the first operation means is controlled and the detection is performed. It is characterized by As described above, in the determined effect in which the determination result of the jackpot is derived by operating the operation means, an image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is displayed to compare the operation of the effect button 18A with the operation of the effect lever 19A. If an image prompting the operation is displayed and the effect lever 19A is operated, by increasing the rate at which the movable body operates, in the determined effect, an image which prompts the operation in which operation means is displayed Can be noticed.

  ◆ (ヲ) A first operation means (eg, effect button 18A) operable by the player and a second operation means (eg, effect lever 19A) operable by the player and different from the first operation means And effect control means (for example, sub CPU 102a) for controlling an operation effect for urging the operation of the first operation means and an operation effect for urging the operation of the second operation means, and a second position from the first position Movable means (for example, the first decorative member 17A) movable to the second position, and movable control means (for example, the lamp CPU 104a) capable of moving the movable means from the first position to the second position; The movable control means performs the effect compared to the case where the operation effect for urging the operation of the first operation means is controlled when the operation effect for urging the operation of the second operation means is controlled by the effect control means. To control means Before control is carried out that, the controlled movable device tends to move to the second position from said first position, characterized in that. In this way, in the decided effect in which the determination result of the jackpot is derived by operating the operation means, when displaying the image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A and operating the effect lever 19A, the operation of the effect button 18A As compared with the case where the effect button 18A is operated by displaying an image prompting the user, the rate at which the movable body operates before the control by the effect control means is made high, so that the control by the effect control means is performed. When the movable body is actuated, it can be predicted that the effect lever 19A can be operated in the subsequent "decided effect".

  Also, the “first operation means” may be any operation means that can be operated by the player. For example, a button, a lever, a touch panel, a handle, or the like can be applied.

  The “second operation means” may be any operation means that can be operated by the player. For example, a button, a lever, a touch panel, a handle, or the like can be applied.

  In the present embodiment, the gaming machine used for the pachinko gaming machine has been described. However, the gaming machine may be used for a roll-type gaming machine (slot machine), a sparrow ball gaming machine, and an arrange ball gaming machine.

Y game machine 6 1st starting opening 6a 1st starting opening detection sensor 7 2nd starting opening 7a 2nd starting opening detection sensor 8 large winning opening 9 first winning gate 10 second winning gate 14 image display device 17A first decoration member (Movable member)
17B Second decoration member (movable member)
17C 3rd decoration member (movable member)
18A Effect button (1st operation means)
19A production lever (second operation means)
70 second start opening control device 80 large winning opening control device 101 main control board 101a main CPU
101b Main ROM
101c Main RAM
102 effect control board 102a sub CPU
102b sub ROM
102c Sub RAM

Claims (1)

First operation means operable by the player;
A second operating means operable by the player and different from the first operating means;
Special game determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player when the start condition is satisfied;
Gaming state control means for controlling a gaming state having a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which it is determined that the special game is more likely to be executed than the normal gaming state;
When it is possible to execute an operation effect for prompting the operation of the first operation means and an operation effect for prompting the operation of the second operation means, and when being controlled to the normal gaming state, the first change effect is Determine the fluctuation effect from the regular effect determination table including normal, and when it is controlled to the specific gaming state, determine the fluctuation effect from the specification effect determination table including the second fluctuation effect different from the first fluctuation effect Effect control means,
Movable means movable from a first position to a second position;
The movable means is movable from the first position to the second position, and the second operating means is changed from the first mode to the second mode different from the first mode. Control means,
Equipped with
The effect control means is
When the second variation effect selected by the specific effect determination table in the specific game state is being executed, the first change effect selected by the normal effect determination table in the normal game state is executed It is determined that the special game is not performed when the execution frequency of the operation effect for prompting the operation of the second operation means is higher than in the case where it is determined that the special game is to be performed. The probability that the movable means is moved from the first position to the second position is higher than in the case where the movable control means performs an operation effect that urges the operation of the second operation means . 2) the probability of changing the operating means to the second mode is high;
A game machine characterized by